Accton Technology Switch ES3526XA User Manual

Powered by Accton  
24/48 10/100 Ports + 2GE  
Intelligent Layer 2  
Management Guide  
Fast Ethernet Switch  
www.edge-core.com  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Management Guide  
Fast Ethernet Switch  
Layer 2 Standalone Switch  
with 24/48 10/100BASE-TX (RJ-45) Ports,  
and 2 Combination Gigabit Ports (RJ-45/SFP)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ES3526XA  
ES3552XA  
F2.2.6.3 E122006-CS-R02  
149100005500H  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
viii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
xi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
xii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
xiv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tables  
xv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tables  
xvi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tables  
xviii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figures  
xix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figures  
xx  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figures  
xxi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figures  
xxii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1: Introduction  
This switch provides a broad range of features for Layer 2 switching. It includes a  
management agent that allows you to configure the features listed in this manual.  
The default configuration can be used for most of the features provided by this  
switch. However, there are many options that you should configure to maximize the  
switch’s performance for your particular network environment.  
Key Features  
Table 1-1 Key Features  
Feature  
Description  
Configuration Backup  
and Restore  
Backup to TFTP server  
Authentication  
Console, Telnet, web – User name / password, RADIUS, TACACS+  
Web – HTTPS; Telnet – SSH  
SNMP – Community strings  
Port – IEEE 802.1X, MAC address filtering  
Access Control Lists  
DHCP Client  
Supports up to 88 IP or MAC ACLs  
Supported  
Port Configuration  
Rate Limiting  
Speed, duplex mode and flow control  
Input and output rate limiting per port  
One port mirrored to a single analysis port  
Supports up to 4 trunks using either static or dynamic trunking (LACP)  
Supported  
Port Mirroring  
Port Trunking  
Broadcast Storm  
Control  
Static Address  
Up to 8K MAC addresses in the forwarding table  
IEEE 802.1D Bridge  
Supports dynamic data switching and addresses learning  
Supported to ensure wire-speed switching while eliminating bad frames  
Store-and-Forward  
Switching  
Spanning Tree Protocol Supports standard STP and Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)  
Virtual LANs  
Up to 255 using IEEE 802.1Q, port-based, or private VLANs  
Traffic Prioritization  
Default port priority, traffic class map, queue scheduling, IP Precedence or  
Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP), and TCP/UDP Port  
Multicast Filtering  
Supports IGMP snooping and query  
1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Introduction  
1
Description of Software Features  
The switch provides a wide range of advanced performance enhancing features.  
Flow control eliminates the loss of packets due to bottlenecks caused by port  
saturation. Broadcast storm suppression prevents broadcast traffic storms from  
engulfing the network. Port-based and protocol-based VLANs, plus support for  
automatic GVRP VLAN registration provide traffic security and efficient use of  
network bandwidth. CoS priority queueing ensures the minimum delay for moving  
real-time multimedia data across the network. While multicast filtering provides  
support for real-time network applications. Some of the management features are  
briefly described below.  
Configuration Backup and Restore – You can save the current configuration  
settings to a file on a TFTP server, and later download this file to restore the switch  
configuration settings.  
Authentication – This switch authenticates management access via the console  
port, Telnet or web browser. User names and passwords can be configured locally or  
can be verified via a remote authentication server (i.e., RADIUS or TACACS+).  
Port-based authentication is also supported via the IEEE 802.1X protocol. This  
protocol uses the Extensible Authentication Protocol over LANs (EAPOL) to request  
user credentials from the 802.1X client, and then verifies the client’s right to access  
the network via an authentication server.  
Other authentication options include HTTPS for secure management access via the  
web, SSH for secure management access over a Telnet-equivalent connection, IP  
address filtering for SNMP/web/Telnet management access, and MAC address  
filtering for port access.  
Access Control Lists – ACLs provide packet filtering for IP frames (based on  
address, protocol, TCP/UDP port number or TCP control code) or any frames  
(based on MAC address or Ethernet type). ACLs can be used to improve  
performance by blocking unnecessary network traffic or to implement security  
controls by restricting access to specific network resources or protocols.  
Port Configuration – You can manually configure the speed, duplex mode, and  
flow control used on specific ports, or use auto-negotiation to detect the connection  
settings used by the attached device. Use the full-duplex mode on ports whenever  
possible to double the throughput of switch connections. Flow control should also be  
enabled to control network traffic during periods of congestion and prevent the loss  
of packets when port buffer thresholds are exceeded. The switch supports flow  
control based on the IEEE 802.3x standard.  
Rate Limiting – This feature controls the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or  
received on an interface. Rate limiting is configured on interfaces at the edge of a  
network to limit traffic into or out of the network. Traffic that falls within the rate limit is  
transmitted, while packets that exceed the acceptable amount of traffic are dropped.  
1-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Description of Software Features  
1
Port Mirroring – The switch can unobtrusively mirror traffic from any port to a  
monitor port. You can then attach a protocol analyzer or RMON probe to this port to  
perform traffic analysis and verify connection integrity.  
Port Trunking – Ports can be combined into an aggregate connection. Trunks can  
be manually set up or dynamically configured using IEEE 802.3ad Link Aggregation  
Control Protocol (LACP). The additional ports dramatically increase the throughput  
across any connection, and provide redundancy by taking over the load if a port in  
the trunk should fail. The switch supports up to four trunks.  
Broadcast Storm Control – Broadcast suppression prevents broadcast traffic from  
overwhelming the network. When enabled on a port, the level of broadcast traffic  
passing through the port is restricted. If broadcast traffic rises above a pre-defined  
threshold, it will be throttled until the level falls back beneath the threshold.  
Static Addresses – A static address can be assigned to a specific interface on this  
switch. Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved.  
When a static address is seen on another interface, the address will be ignored and  
will not be written to the address table. Static addresses can be used to provide  
network security by restricting access for a known host to a specific port.  
IEEE 802.1D Bridge – The switch supports IEEE 802.1D transparent bridging. The  
address table facilitates data switching by learning addresses, and then filtering or  
forwarding traffic based on this information. The address table supports up to 8K  
addresses.  
Store-and-Forward Switching – The switch copies each frame into its memory  
before forwarding them to another port. This ensures that all frames are a standard  
Ethernet size and have been verified for accuracy with the cyclic redundancy check  
(CRC). This prevents bad frames from entering the network and wasting bandwidth.  
To avoid dropping frames on congested ports, the switch provides 8 MB for frame  
buffering. This buffer can queue packets awaiting transmission on congested  
networks.  
Spanning Tree Algorithm – The switch supports these spanning tree protocols:  
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP, IEEE 802.1D) – This protocol provides loop detection  
and recovery by allowing two or more redundant connections to be created between  
a pair of LAN segments. When there are multiple physical paths between segments,  
this protocol will choose a single path and disable all others to ensure that only one  
route exists between any two stations on the network. This prevents the creation of  
network loops. However, if the chosen path should fail for any reason, an alternate  
path will be activated to maintain the connection.  
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP, IEEE 802.1w) – This protocol reduces the  
convergence time for network topology changes to 3 to 5 seconds, compared to 30  
seconds or more for the older IEEE 802.1D STP standard. It is intended as a  
complete replacement for STP, but can still interoperate with switches running the  
older standard by automatically reconfiguring ports to STP-compliant mode if they  
detect STP protocol messages from attached devices.  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
1
Virtual LANs – The switch supports up to 255 VLANs. A Virtual LAN is a collection  
of network nodes that share the same collision domain regardless of their physical  
location or connection point in the network. The switch supports tagged VLANs  
based on the IEEE 802.1Q standard. Members of VLAN groups can be dynamically  
learned via GVRP, or ports can be manually assigned to a specific set of VLANs.  
This allows the switch to restrict traffic to the VLAN groups to which a user has been  
assigned. By segmenting your network into VLANs, you can:  
• Eliminate broadcast storms which severely degrade performance in a flat network.  
• Simplify network management for node changes/moves by remotely configuring  
VLAN membership for any port, rather than having to manually change the network  
connection.  
• Provide data security by restricting all traffic to the originating VLAN.  
• Use private VLANs to restrict traffic to pass only between data ports and the uplink  
ports, thereby isolating adjacent ports within the same VLAN, and allowing you to  
limit the total number of VLANs that need to be configured.  
Traffic Prioritization – This switch prioritizes each packet based on the required  
level of service, using four priority queues with strict or Weighted Round Robin  
Queuing. It uses IEEE 802.1p and 802.1Q tags to prioritize incoming traffic based on  
input from the end-station application. These functions can be used to provide  
independent priorities for delay-sensitive data and best-effort data.  
This switch also supports several common methods of prioritizing layer 3/4 traffic to  
meet application requirements. Traffic can be prioritized based on the priority bits in  
the IP frame’s Type of Service (ToS) octet or the number of the TCP/UDP port.  
When these services are enabled, the priorities are mapped to a Class of Service  
value by the switch, and the traffic then sent to the corresponding output queue.  
Multicast Filtering – Specific multicast traffic can be assigned to its own VLAN to  
ensure that it does not interfere with normal network traffic and to guarantee  
real-time delivery by setting the required priority level for the designated VLAN. The  
switch uses IGMP Snooping and Query to manage multicast group registration.  
1-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Defaults  
1
System Defaults  
The switch’s system defaults are provided in the configuration file  
“Factory_Default_Config.cfg.” To reset the switch defaults, this file should be set as  
the startup configuration file (page 3-24).  
The following table lists some of the basic system defaults.  
Table 1-2 System Defaults  
Function  
Parameter  
Default  
Console Port  
Connection  
Baud Rate  
9600  
Data bits  
8
Stop bits  
1
Parity  
none  
Local Console Timeout  
Privileged Exec Level  
0 (disabled)  
Authentication  
Username “admin”  
Password “admin”  
Normal Exec Level  
Username “guest”  
Password “guest”  
Enable Privileged Exec from Normal Password “super”  
Exec Level  
RADIUS Authentication  
TACACS Authentication  
802.1X Port Authentication  
HTTPS  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Enabled  
80  
SSH  
Port Security  
IP Filtering  
Web Management  
HTTP Server  
HTTP Port Number  
HTTP Secure Server  
HTTP Secure Port Number  
Community Strings  
Enabled  
443  
SNMP  
“public” (read only)  
“private” (read/write)  
Traps  
Authentication traps: enabled  
Link-up-down events: enabled  
1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Introduction  
1
Table 1-2 System Defaults (Continued)  
Function  
Parameter  
Default  
Port Configuration  
Admin Status  
Auto-negotiation  
Flow Control  
Enabled  
Enabled  
Disabled  
Rate Limiting  
Port Trunking  
Input and output limits  
Static Trunks  
LACP (all ports)  
Status  
Disabled  
None  
Disabled  
Broadcast Storm  
Protection  
Disabled (all ports)  
32,000 octets per second  
Broadcast Limit Rate  
Status  
Spanning Tree  
Protocol  
Enabled  
(Defaults: All values based on IEEE 802.1w)  
Fast Forwarding (Edge Port)  
Aging Time  
Disabled  
Address Table  
Virtual LANs  
300 seconds  
Default VLAN  
1
PVID  
1
Acceptable Frame Type  
Ingress Filtering  
All  
Disabled  
Switchport Mode (Egress Mode)  
GVRP (global)  
Hybrid: tagged/untagged frames  
Disabled  
Disabled  
0
GVRP (port interface)  
Ingress Port Priority  
Weighted Round Robin  
Traffic Prioritization  
Queue: 0 1 2 3  
Weight: 1 2 4 6  
IP Precedence Priority  
IP DSCP Priority  
IP Port Priority  
IP Address  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
0.0.0.0  
IP Settings  
Subnet Mask  
Default Gateway  
DHCP  
255.0.0.0  
0.0.0.0  
Client: Enabled  
Disabled  
BOOTP  
Multicast Filtering  
IGMP Snooping  
Snooping: Enabled  
Querier: Enabled  
1-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Defaults  
1
Table 1-2 System Defaults (Continued)  
Function  
Parameter  
Default  
System Log  
Status  
Enabled  
Messages Logged  
Messages Logged to Flash  
Event Handler  
Levels 0-7 (all)  
Levels 0-6  
SMTP Email Alerts  
SNTP  
Enabled (but no server defined)  
Disabled  
Clock Synchronization  
1-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
1
1-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2: Initial Configuration  
Connecting to the Switch  
Configuration Options  
The switch includes a built-in network management agent. The agent offers a variety  
of management options, including SNMP, RMON and a Web-based interface. A PC  
may also be connected directly to the switch for configuration and monitoring via a  
command line interface (CLI).  
Note: The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default. To change this  
The switch’s HTTP Web agent allows you to configure switch parameters, monitor  
port connections, and display statistics using a standard Web browser such as  
Netscape Navigator version 6.2 and higher or Microsoft IE version 5.0 and higher.  
The switch’s Web management interface can be accessed from any computer  
attached to the network.  
The CLI program can be accessed by a direct connection to the RS-232 serial  
console port on the switch, or remotely by a Telnet connection over the network.  
The switch’s management agent also supports SNMP (Simple Network  
Management Protocol). This SNMP agent permits the switch to be managed from  
any system in the network using network management software such as  
HP OpenView.  
The switch’s Web interface, CLI configuration program, and SNMP agent allow you  
to perform the following management functions:  
• Set user names and passwords for up to 16 users  
• Set an IP interface for a management VLAN  
• Configure SNMP parameters  
• Enable/disable any port  
• Set the speed/duplex mode for any port  
• Configure the bandwidth of any port by limiting input or output rates  
• Control port access through IEEE 802.1X security or static address filtering  
• Filter packets using Access Control Lists (ACLs)  
• Configure up to 255 IEEE 802.1Q VLANs  
• Enable GVRP automatic VLAN registration  
• Configure IGMP multicast filtering  
• Upload and download system firmware via TFTP  
• Upload and download switch configuration files via TFTP  
• Configure Spanning Tree parameters  
• Configure Class of Service (CoS) priority queuing  
2-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Initial Configuration  
2
• Configure up to 4 static or LACP trunks  
• Enable port mirroring  
• Set broadcast storm control on any port  
• Display system information and statistics  
Required Connections  
The switch provides an RS-232 serial port that enables a connection to a PC or  
terminal for monitoring and configuring the switch. A null-modem console cable is  
provided with the switch.  
Attach a VT100-compatible terminal, or a PC running a terminal emulation program  
to the switch. You can use the console cable provided with this package, or use a  
null-modem cable that complies with the wiring assignments shown in the  
Installation Guide.  
To connect a terminal to the console port, complete the following steps:  
1. Connect the console cable to the serial port on a terminal, or a PC running  
terminal emulation software, and tighten the captive retaining screws on the  
DB-9 connector.  
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the RS-232 serial port on the switch.  
3. Make sure the terminal emulation software is set as follows:  
• Select the appropriate serial port (COM port 1 or COM port 2).  
• Set the baud rate to 9600 bps.  
• Set the data format to 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and no parity.  
• Set flow control to none.  
• Set the emulation mode to VT100.  
• When using HyperTerminal, select Terminal keys, not Windows keys.  
®
®
Notes: 1. When using HyperTerminal with Microsoft Windows 2000, make sure that  
you have Windows 2000 Service Pack 2 or later installed. Windows 2000  
Service Pack 2 fixes the problem of arrow keys not functioning in  
HyperTerminal’s VT100 emulation. See www.microsoft.com for information  
on Windows 2000 service packs.  
2. Refer to “Line Commands” on page 4-11 for a complete description of  
console configuration options.  
3. Once you have set up the terminal correctly, the console login screen will be  
displayed.  
For a description of how to use the CLI, see “Using the Command Line Interface” on  
page 4-1. For a list of all the CLI commands and detailed information on using the  
2-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Basic Configuration  
2
Remote Connections  
Prior to accessing the switch’s onboard agent via a network connection, you must  
first configure it with a valid IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway using a  
console connection, DHCP or BOOTP protocol.  
The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default. To manually  
configure this address or enable dynamic address assignment via DHCP or BOOTP,  
Note: This switch supports four concurrent Telnet/SSH sessions.  
After configuring the switch’s IP parameters, you can access the onboard  
configuration program from anywhere within the attached network. The onboard  
configuration program can be accessed using Telnet from any computer attached to  
the network. The switch can also be managed by any computer using a web  
browser (Internet Explorer 5.0 or above, or Netscape Navigator 6.2 or above), or  
from a network computer using SNMP network management software.  
Note: The onboard program only provides access to basic configuration functions. To  
access the full range of SNMP management functions, you must use  
SNMP-based network management software.  
Basic Configuration  
Console Connection  
The CLI program provides two different command levels — normal access level  
(Normal Exec) and privileged access level (Privileged Exec). The commands  
available at the Normal Exec level are a limited subset of those available at the  
Privileged Exec level and allow you to only display information and use basic  
utilities. To fully configure the switch parameters, you must access the CLI at the  
Privileged Exec level.  
Access to both CLI levels are controlled by user names and passwords. The switch  
has a default user name and password for each level. To log into the CLI at the  
Privileged Exec level using the default user name and password, perform these  
steps:  
1. To initiate your console connection, press <Enter>. The “User Access  
Verification” procedure starts.  
2. At the Username prompt, enter “admin.”  
3. At the Password prompt, also enter “admin.” (The password characters are not  
displayed on the console screen.)  
4. The session is opened and the CLI displays the “Console#” prompt indicating  
you have access at the Privileged Exec level.  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Initial Configuration  
2
Setting Passwords  
Note: If this is your first time to log into the CLI program, you should define new  
passwords for both default user names using the “username” command, record  
them and put them in a safe place.  
Passwords can consist of up to 8 alphanumeric characters and are case sensitive.  
To prevent unauthorized access to the switch, set the passwords as follows:  
1. Open the console interface with the default user name and password “admin” to  
access the Privileged Exec level.  
2. Type “configure” and press <Enter>.  
3. Type “username guest password 0 password,” for the Normal Exec level, where  
password is your new password. Press <Enter>.  
4. Type “username admin password 0 password,” for the Privileged Exec level,  
where password is your new password. Press <Enter>.  
Note: ‘0’ specifies the password in plain text, ‘7’ specifies the password in encrypted  
form.  
Username: admin  
Password:  
CLI session with the Standalone Intelligent Switch is opened.  
To end the CLI session, enter [Exit].  
Console#configure  
Console(config)#username guest password 0 [password]  
Console(config)#username admin password 0 [password]  
Console(config)#  
Setting an IP Address  
You must establish IP address information for the switch to obtain management  
access through the network. This can be done in either of the following ways:  
Manual You have to input the information, including IP address and subnet mask.  
If your management station is not in the same IP subnet as the switch, you will also  
need to specify the default gateway router.  
Dynamic — The switch sends IP configuration requests to BOOTP or DHCP  
address allocation servers on the network.  
Manual Configuration  
You can manually assign an IP address to the switch. You may also need to specify  
a default gateway that resides between this device and management stations that  
exist on another network segment. Valid IP addresses consist of four decimal  
numbers, 0 to 255, separated by periods. Anything outside this format will not be  
accepted by the CLI program.  
Note: The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default.  
2-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Basic Configuration  
2
Before you can assign an IP address to the switch, you must obtain the following  
information from your network administrator:  
• IP address for the switch  
• Default gateway for the network  
• Network mask for this network  
To assign an IP address to the switch, complete the following steps:  
1. From the Privileged Exec level global configuration mode prompt, type  
“interface vlan 1” to access the interface-configuration mode. Press <Enter>.  
2. Type “ip address ip-address netmask,” where “ip-address” is the switch IP  
address and “netmask” is the network mask for the network. Press <Enter>.  
3. Type “exit” to return to the global configuration mode prompt. Press <Enter>.  
4. To set the IP address of the default gateway for the network to which the switch  
belongs, type “ip default-gateway gateway,” where “gateway” is the IP address  
of the default gateway. Press <Enter>.  
Console(config)#interface vlan 1  
Console(config-if)#ip address 192.168.1.5 255.255.255.0  
Console(config-if)#exit  
Console(config)#ip default-gateway 192.168.1.254  
Console(config)#  
Dynamic Configuration  
If you select the “bootp” or “dhcp” option, IP will be enabled but will not function until  
a BOOTP or DHCP reply has been received. You therefore need to use the “ip dhcp  
restart” command to start broadcasting service requests. Requests will be sent  
periodically in an effort to obtain IP configuration information. (BOOTP and DHCP  
values can include the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.)  
If the “bootp” or “dhcp” option is saved to the startup-config file (step 6), then the  
switch will start broadcasting service requests as soon as it is powered on.  
To automatically configure the switch by communicating with BOOTP or DHCP  
address allocation servers on the network, complete the following steps:  
1. From the Global Configuration mode prompt, type “interface vlan 1” to access  
the interface-configuration mode. Press <Enter>.  
2. At the interface-configuration mode prompt, use one of the following commands:  
• To obtain IP settings via DHCP, type “ip address dhcp” and press <Enter>.  
• To obtain IP settings via BOOTP, type “ip address bootp” and press <Enter>.  
3. Type “end” to return to the Privileged Exec mode. Press <Enter>.  
4. Type “ip dhcp restart” to begin broadcasting service requests. Press <Enter>.  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Initial Configuration  
2
5. Wait a few minutes, and then check the IP configuration settings by typing the  
“show ip interface” command. Press <Enter>.  
6. Then save your configuration changes by typing “copy running-config  
startup-config.” Enter the startup file name and press <Enter>.  
Console(config)#interface vlan 1  
Console(config-if)#ip address dhcp  
Console(config-if)#end  
Console#ip dhcp restart  
Console#show ip interface  
IP address and netmask: 192.168.1.54 255.255.255.0 on VLAN 1,  
and address mode: User specified.  
Console#copy running-config startup-config  
Startup configuration file name []: startup  
\Write to FLASH Programming.  
\Write to FLASH finish.  
Success.  
Enabling SNMP Management Access  
The switch can be configured to accept management commands from Simple  
Network Management Protocol (SNMP) applications such as HP OpenView. You  
can configure the switch to (1) respond to SNMP requests or (2) generate SNMP  
traps.  
When SNMP management stations send requests to the switch (either to return  
information or to set a parameter), the switch provides the requested data or sets the  
specified parameter. The switch can also be configured to send information to  
SNMP managers (without being requested by the managers) through trap  
messages, which inform the manager that certain events have occurred.  
The switch includes an SNMP agent that supports SNMP version 1, 2c, and 3  
clients. To provide management access for version 1 or 2c clients, you must specify  
a community string. The switch provides a default MIB View (i.e., an SNMPv3  
construct) for the default “public” community string that provides read access to the  
entire MIB tree, and a default view for the “private” community string that provides  
read/write access to the entire MIB tree. However, you may assign new views to  
version 1 or 2c community strings that suit your specific security requirements (see  
Community Strings (for SNMP version 1 and 2c clients)  
Community strings are used to control management access to SNMP version 1 and  
2c stations, as well as to authorize SNMP stations to receive trap messages from  
the switch. You therefore need to assign community strings to specified users, and  
set the access level.  
2-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Basic Configuration  
2
The default strings are:  
public - with read-only access. Authorized management stations are only able to  
retrieve MIB objects.  
private - with read-write access. Authorized management stations are able to both  
retrieve and modify MIB objects.  
To prevent unauthorized access to the switch from SNMP version 1 or 2c clients, it is  
recommended that you change the default community strings.  
To configure a community string, complete the following steps:  
1. From the Privileged Exec level global configuration mode prompt, type  
“snmp-server community string mode,” where “string” is the community access  
string and “mode” is rw (read/write) or ro (read only). Press <Enter>. (Note that  
the default mode is read only.)  
2. To remove an existing string, simply type “no snmp-server community string,”  
where “string” is the community access string to remove. Press <Enter>.  
Console(config)#snmp-server community admin rw  
Console(config)#snmp-server community private  
Console(config)#  
Note: If you do not intend to support access to SNMP version 1 and 2c clients, we  
recommend that you delete both of the default community strings. If there are no  
community strings, then SNMP management access from SNMP v1 and v2c  
clients is disabled.  
Trap Receivers  
You can also specify SNMP stations that are to receive traps from the switch. To  
configure a trap receiver, use the “snmp-server host” command. From the Privileged  
Exec level global configuration mode prompt, type:  
“snmp-server host host-address community-string  
[version {1 | 2c | 3 {auth | noauth | priv}}]”  
where “host-address” is the IP address for the trap receiver, “community-string”  
specifies access rights for a version 1/2c host, or is the user name of a version 3  
host, “version” indicates the SNMP client version, and “auth | noauth | priv” means  
that authentication, no authentication, or authentication and privacy is used for v3  
clients. Then press <Enter>. For a more detailed description of these parameters,  
see “snmp-server host” on page 4-120. The following example creates a trap host  
for each type of SNMP client.  
Console(config)#snmp-server host 10.1.19.23 batman  
Console(config)#snmp-server host 10.1.19.98 robin version 2c  
Console(config)#snmp-server host 10.1.19.34 barbie version 3 auth  
Console(config)#  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Initial Configuration  
2
Configuring Access for SNMP Version 3 Clients  
To configure management access for SNMPv3 clients, you need to first create a  
view that defines the portions of MIB that the client can read or write, assign the view  
to a group, and then assign the user to a group. The following example creates one  
view called “mib-2” that includes the entire MIB-2 tree branch, and then another view  
that includes the IEEE 802.1d bridge MIB. It assigns these respective read and read/  
write views to a group call “r&d” and specifies group authentication via MD5 or SHA.  
In the last step, it assigns a v3 user to this group, indicating that MD5 will be used for  
authentication, provides the password “greenpeace” for authentication, and the  
password “einstien” for encryption.  
Console(config)#snmp-server view mib-2 1.3.6.1.2.1 included  
Console(config)#snmp-server view 802.1d 1.3.6.1.2.1.17 included  
Console(config)#snmp-server group r&d v3 auth mib-2 802.1d  
Console(config)#snmp-server user steve group r&d v3 auth md5  
greenpeace priv des56 einstien  
Console(config)#  
For a more detailed explanation on how to configure the switch for access from  
refer to the specific CLI commands for SNMP starting on page 4-116.  
Saving Configuration Settings  
Configuration commands only modify the running configuration file and are not  
saved when the switch is rebooted. To save all your configuration changes in  
nonvolatile storage, you must copy the running configuration file to the start-up  
configuration file using the “copy” command.  
To save the current configuration settings, enter the following command:  
1. From the Privileged Exec mode prompt, type “copy running-config  
startup-config” and press <Enter>.  
2. Enter the name of the start-up file. Press <Enter>.  
Console#copy running-config startup-config  
Startup configuration file name []: startup  
\Write to FLASH Programming.  
\Write to FLASH finish.  
Success.  
Console#  
2-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Managing System Files  
2
Managing System Files  
The switch’s flash memory supports three types of system files that can be managed  
by the CLI program, Web interface, or SNMP. The switch’s file system allows files to  
be uploaded and downloaded, copied, deleted, and set as a start-up file.  
The three types of files are:  
Configuration — This file stores system configuration information and is created  
when configuration settings are saved. Saved configuration files can be selected  
as a system start-up file or can be uploaded via TFTP to a server for backup. A file  
named “Factory_Default_Config.cfg” contains all the system default settings and  
cannot be deleted from the system. See “Saving or Restoring Configuration  
Settings” on page 3-22 for more information.  
Operation Code — System software that is executed after boot-up, also known as  
run-time code. This code runs the switch operations and provides the CLI and Web  
management interfaces. See “Managing Firmware” on page 3-19 for more  
information.  
Diagnostic Code — Software that is run during system boot-up, also known as  
POST (Power On Self-Test).  
Due to the size limit of the flash memory, the switch supports only two operation  
code files. However, you can have as many diagnostic code files and configuration  
files as available flash memory space allows.  
In the system flash memory, one file of each type must be set as the start-up file.  
During a system boot, the diagnostic and operation code files set as the start-up file  
are run, and then the start-up configuration file is loaded.  
Note that configuration files should be downloaded using a file name that reflects the  
contents or usage of the file settings. If you download directly to the running-config,  
the system will reboot, and the settings will have to be copied from the  
running-config to a permanent file.  
2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Initial Configuration  
2
2-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3: Configuring the Switch  
Using the Web Interface  
This switch provides an embedded HTTP Web agent. Using a Web browser you can  
configure the switch and view statistics to monitor network activity. The Web agent  
can be accessed by any computer on the network using a standard Web browser  
(Internet Explorer 5.0 or above, or Netscape Navigator 6.2 or above).  
Note: You can also use the Command Line Interface (CLI) to manage the switch over a  
serial connection to the console port or via Telnet. For more information on using  
Prior to accessing the switch from a Web browser, be sure you have first performed  
the following tasks:  
1. Configure the switch with a valid IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway  
using an out-of-band serial connection, BOOTP or DHCP protocol. (See  
2. Set user names and passwords using an out-of-band serial connection. Access  
to the Web agent is controlled by the same user names and passwords as the  
onboard configuration program. (See “Setting Passwords” on page 2-4.)  
3. After you enter a user name and password, you will have access to the system  
configuration program.  
Notes: 1. You are allowed three attempts to enter the correct password; on the third  
failed attempt the current connection is terminated.  
2. If you log into the Web interface as guest (Normal Exec level), you can view  
the configuration settings or change the guest password. If you log in as  
“admin” (Privileged Exec level), you can change the settings on any page.  
3. If the path between your management station and this switch does not pass  
through any device that uses the Spanning Tree Algorithm, then you can set  
the switch port attached to your management station to fast forwarding (i.e.,  
enable Admin Edge Port) to improve the switch’s response time to  
management commands issued through the web interface. See “Configuring  
3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the Switch  
3
Navigating the Web Browser Interface  
To access the web-browser interface you must first enter a user name and  
password. The administrator has Read/Write access to all configuration parameters  
and statistics. The default user name and password for the administrator is “admin.”  
Home Page  
When your web browser connects with the switch’s web agent, the home page is  
displayed as shown below. The home page displays the Main Menu on the left side  
of the screen and System Information on the right side. The Main Menu links are  
used to navigate to other menus, and display configuration parameters and  
statistics.  
Figure 3-1 Home Page  
Note: Most of the examples in this chapter are based on the ES3526XA. Other than the  
number of fixed ports, there are no major differences between the ES3526XA and  
ES3552XA.  
3-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Panel Display  
3
Configuration Options  
Configurable parameters have a dialog box or a drop-down list. Once a configuration  
change has been made on a page, be sure to click on the Apply button to confirm  
the new setting. The following table summarizes the web page configuration  
buttons.  
Table 3-1 Configuration Options  
Button  
Revert  
Apply  
Help  
Action.  
Cancels specified values and restores current values prior to pressing Apply.  
Sets specified values to the system.  
Links directly to webhelp.  
Notes: 1. To ensure proper screen refresh, be sure that Internet Explorer 5.x is  
configured as follows: Under the menu “Tools / Internet Options / General /  
Temporary Internet Files / Settings,” the setting for item “Check for newer  
versions of stored pages” should be “Every visit to the page.”  
2. When using Internet Explorer 5.0, you may have to manually refresh the  
screen after making configuration changes by pressing the browser’s refresh  
button.  
Panel Display  
The web agent displays an image of the switch’s ports. The Mode can be set to  
display different information for the ports, including Active (i.e., up or down), Duplex  
(i.e., half or full duplex, or Flow Control (i.e., with or without flow control). Clicking on  
the image of a port opens the Port Configuration page as described on page 3-91.  
Figure 3-2 Panel Display  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Configuring the Switch  
3
Main Menu  
Using the onboard web agent, you can define system parameters, manage and  
control the switch, and all its ports, or monitor network conditions. The following  
table briefly describes the selections available from this program.  
Table 3-2 Main Menu  
Menu  
Description  
Page  
System  
System Information  
Provides basic system description, including contact information  
Switch Information  
Shows the number of ports, hardware/firmware version  
numbers, and power status  
Bridge Extension  
IP Configuration  
File  
Shows the bridge extension parameters  
Sets the IP address for management access  
Copy  
Allows the transfer and copying files  
Allows deletion of files from the flash memory  
Sets the startup file  
Delete  
Set Startup  
Line  
Console  
Telnet  
Sets console port connection parameters  
Sets Telnet connection parameters.  
Log  
Logs  
Stores and displays error messages  
System Logs  
Remote Logs  
SMTP Logs  
Reset  
Sends error messages to a logging process  
Configures the logging of messages to a remote logging process  
Sends an SMTP client message to a participating server  
Restarts the switch  
SNTP  
Configuration  
Configures SNTP client settings, including broadcast mode or a  
specified list of servers  
Clock Time Zone  
Sets the local time zone for the system clock  
SNMP  
Configuration  
Security  
Configures community strings and related trap functions  
User Accounts  
Assigns a new password for the current user  
Configures authentication sequence, RADIUS and TACACS  
Configures secure HTTP settings  
Authentication Settings  
HTTPS Settings  
3-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Main Menu  
3
Table 3-2 Main Menu (Continued)  
Menu  
SSH  
Host-Key Settings  
Description  
Page  
Generates the host key pair (public and private)  
Configures Secure Shell server settings  
Settings  
Port Security  
Configures per port security, including status, response for  
security breach, and maximum allowed MAC addresses  
802.1X  
Port authentication  
Information  
Displays global configuration settings  
Configures the global configuration setting  
Sets parameters for individual ports  
Displays protocol statistics for the selected port  
MAC address authentication  
Configuration  
Port Configuration  
Statistics  
Network Access  
Configuration  
Port Configuration  
Sets the reauthentication time  
Configures MAC authentication and dynamic VLAN assignment  
on port interfaces  
MAC Address Information Displays information in the secure MAC address table  
MAC Filter Configuration  
ACL  
Configures MAC address filters  
Configuration  
Port Binding  
Configures packet filtering based on IP or MAC addresses  
Binds a port to the specified ACL  
IP Filter  
Sets IP addresses of clients allowed management access via  
the Web, SNMP, and Telnet  
Port  
Port Information  
Trunk Information  
Port Configuration  
Trunk Configuration  
Trunk Membership  
LACP  
Displays port connection status  
Displays trunk connection status  
Configures port connection settings  
Configures trunk connection settings  
Specifies ports to group into static trunks  
Configuration  
Allows ports to dynamically join trunks  
Aggregation Port  
Port Counters  
Configures parameters for link aggregation group members  
Displays statistics for LACP protocol messages  
Displays settings and operational state for the local side  
Port Internal Information  
Port Neighbors Information Displays settings and operational state for the remote side  
Port Broadcast Control Sets the broadcast storm threshold for each port  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the Switch  
3
Table 3-2 Main Menu (Continued)  
Description  
Menu  
Page  
Trunk Broadcast Control  
Mirror Port Configuration  
Rate Limit  
Sets the broadcast storm threshold for each trunk  
Sets the source and target ports for mirroring  
Granularity  
Enables or disables the rate limit feature  
Sets the input rate limit for each port  
Input Port Configuration  
Input Trunk Configuration Sets the input rate limit for each trunk  
Output Port Configuration Sets the output rate limit for each port  
Output Trunk Configuration Sets the output rate limit for each trunk  
Port Statistics  
Lists Ethernet and RMON port statistics  
Address Table  
Static Addresses  
Dynamic Addresses  
Address Aging  
Spanning Tree  
STA  
Displays entries for interface, address or VLAN  
Displays or edits static entries in the Address Table  
Sets timeout for dynamically learned entries  
Information  
Displays STA values used for the bridge  
Configures global bridge settings for STA and RSTP  
Displays individual port settings for STA  
Displays individual trunk settings for STA  
Configures individual port settings for STA  
Configures individual trunk settings for STA  
Configuration  
Port Information  
Trunk Information  
Port Configuration  
Trunk Configuration  
VLAN  
802.1Q VLAN  
GVRP Status  
Basic Information  
Current Table  
Enables GVRP VLAN registration protocol  
Displays information on the VLAN type supported by this switch 3-142  
Shows the current port members of each VLAN and whether or  
not the port is tagged or untagged  
Static List  
Used to create or remove VLAN groups  
Modifies the settings for an existing VLAN  
Static Table  
Static Membership by Port Configures membership type for interfaces, including tagged,  
untagged or forbidden  
Port Configuration  
Trunk Configuration  
Specifies default PVID and VLAN attributes  
Specifies default trunk VID and VLAN attributes  
3-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Main Menu  
3
Table 3-2 Main Menu (Continued)  
Menu  
Private VLAN  
Description  
Page  
Information  
Displays Private VLAN feature information  
Configuration  
This page is used to create/remove primary or community  
VLANs  
Association  
Each community VLAN must be associated with a primary VLAN 3-154  
Port Information  
Shows VLAN port type, and associated primary or secondary  
VLANs  
Port Configuration  
Trunk Information  
Trunk Configuration  
Sets the private VLAN interface type, and associates the  
interfaces with a private VLAN  
Shows VLAN port type, and associated primary or secondary  
VLANs  
Sets the private VLAN interface type, and associates the  
interfaces with a private VLAN  
Priority  
NA  
Default Port Priority  
Default Trunk Priority  
Traffic Classes  
Sets the default priority for each port  
Sets the default priority for each trunk  
Maps IEEE 802.1p priority tags to output queues  
Enables/disables traffic class priorities (not implemented)  
Sets queue mode to strict priority or Weighted Round-Robin  
Configures Weighted Round Robin queueing  
Traffic Classes Status  
Queue Mode  
Queue Scheduling  
IP Precedence/  
DSCP Priority Status  
Globally selects IP Precedence or DSCP Priority, or disables  
both.  
IP Precedence Priority  
Sets IP Type of Service priority, mapping the precedence tag to  
a class-of-service value  
IP DSCP Priority  
Sets IP Differentiated Services Code Point priority, mapping a  
DSCP tag to a class-of-service value  
IP Port Priority Status  
IP Port Priority  
Globally enables or disables IP Port Priority  
Sets TCP/UDP port priority, defining the socket number and  
associated class-of-service value  
ACL CoS Priority  
Sets the CoS value and corresponding output queue for packets 3-169  
matching an ACL rule  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the Switch  
3
Table 3-2 Main Menu (Continued)  
Menu  
Description  
Page  
IGMP Snooping  
IGMP Configuration  
Enables multicast filtering; configures parameters for multicast  
query  
IGMP Filter Configuration  
Enables IGMP filtering and throttling for the switch, creates filter  
profile numbers  
IGMP Immediate Leave  
Enables the immediate leave function  
Multicast Router  
Port Information  
Displays the ports that are attached to a neighboring multicast  
router for each VLAN ID  
Static Multicast Router Port  
Configuration  
Assigns ports that are attached to a neighboring multicast router 3-175  
IP Multicast Registration  
Table  
Displays all multicast groups active on this switch, including  
multicast IP addresses and VLAN ID  
IGMP Member Port Table  
Indicates multicast addresses associated with the selected  
VLAN  
IGMP Filter Profile  
Configuration  
Configures IGMP filter profile controlled groups and access  
mode  
IGMP Filter/Throttling Port  
Configuration  
Assigns IGMP filter profiles to port interfaces and sets throttling  
settings  
IGMP Filter/Throttling Trunk Assigns IGMP filter profiles to trunk interfaces and sets throttling 3-181  
Configuration  
settings  
MVR  
Configuration  
Globally enables MVR, sets the MVR VLAN, adds multicast  
stream addresses  
Port Information  
Trunk Information  
Displays MVR interface type, MVR operational and activity  
status, and immediate leave status  
Displays MVR interface type, MVR operational and activity  
status, and immediate leave status  
Group IP Information  
Port Configuration  
Trunk Configuration  
Displays the ports attached to an MVR multicast stream  
Configures MVR interface type and immediate leave status  
Configures MVR interface type and immediate leave status  
Group Member Configuration Statically assigns MVR multicast streams to an interface  
DNS  
General Configuration  
Enables DNS; configures domain name and domain list; and  
specifies IP address of name servers for dynamic lookup  
Static Host Table  
Cache  
Configures static entries for domain name to address mapping  
Displays cache entries discovered by designated name servers 3-193  
Cluster  
Configuration  
Globally enables clustering for the switch  
3-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Main Menu  
3
Table 3-2 Main Menu (Continued)  
Description  
Menu  
Member Configuration  
Page  
Adds switch Members to the cluster  
Displays cluster Member switch information  
Displays network Candidate switch information  
Member Information  
Candidate Information  
3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the Switch  
3
Basic Configuration  
Displaying System Information  
You can easily identify the system by displaying the device name, location and  
contact information.  
Field Attributes  
System Name – Name assigned to the switch system.  
Object ID – MIB II object ID for switch’s network management subsystem.  
Location – Specifies the system location.  
Contact – Administrator responsible for the system.  
System Up Time – Length of time the management agent has been up.  
These additional parameters are displayed for the CLI.  
MAC Address – The physical layer address for this switch.  
Web server – Shows if management access via HTTP is enabled.  
Web server port – Shows the TCP port number used by the web interface.  
Web secure server – Shows if management access via HTTPS is enabled.  
Web secure server port – Shows the TCP port used by the HTTPS interface.  
Telnet server – Shows if management access via Telnet is enabled.  
Telnet port – Shows the TCP port used by the Telnet interface.  
Jumbo Frame – Shows if jumbo frames are enabled.  
POST result – Shows results of the power-on self-test.  
Web – Click System, System Information. Specify the system name, location, and  
contact information for the system administrator, then click Apply. (This page also  
includes a Telnet button that allows access to the Command Line Interface via Telnet.)  
Figure 3-3 System Information  
3-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Basic Configuration  
3
CLI – Specify the hostname, location and contact information.  
Console(config)#hostname R&D 5  
Console(config)#snmp-server location WC 9  
Console(config)#snmp-server contact Ted  
Console(config)#exit  
Console#show system  
System description: Layer2+ Fast Ethernet Standalone Switch ES3526XA  
System OID string: 1.3.6.1.4.1.259.6.10.74  
System information  
System Up time:  
System Name:  
0 days, 2 hours, 4 minutes, and 7.13 seconds  
R&D 5  
System Location:  
System Contact  
MAC address  
WC 9  
Ted  
00-30-F1-12-34-56  
Web server:  
Web server port:  
Web secure server:  
enabled  
80  
enabled  
Web secure server port: 443  
Telnet server:  
Telnet port:  
Jumbo Frame:  
POST result  
enabled  
23  
Disabled  
DUMMY Test 1.................PASS  
UART LOOP BACK Test..........PASS  
DRAM Test....................PASS  
Timer Test...................PASS  
RTC Initialization...........PASS  
Switch Int Loopback test.....PASS  
Done All Pass.  
Console#  
Displaying Switch Hardware/Software Versions  
Use the Switch Information page to display hardware/firmware version numbers for  
the main board and management software, as well as the power status of the system.  
Field Attributes  
Main Board  
Serial Number – The serial number of the switch.  
Number of Ports – Number of built-in ports.  
Hardware Version – Hardware version of the main board.  
Internal Power Status – Displays the status of the internal power supply.  
Management Software  
Loader Version – Version number of loader code.  
Boot-ROM Version – Version of Power-On Self-Test (POST) and boot code.  
Operation Code Version – Version number of runtime code.  
Role – Shows that this switch is operating as Master or Slave.  
Expansion Slot  
Expansion Slot 1/2 – Combination RJ-45/SFP ports.  
3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the Switch  
3
These additional parameters are displayed for the CLI.  
Unit - This is unit 1.  
Redundant Power Status – Displays the status of the redundant power supply.  
Web – Click System, Switch Information.  
Figure 3-4 Displaying Switch Information  
CLI – Use the following command to display version information.  
Console#show version  
Unit 1  
Serial number:  
Service tag:  
S542021059  
Hardware version:  
Module A type:  
Module B type:  
Number of ports:  
Main power status:  
Redundant power status  
R01A  
1000BaseT  
1000BaseT  
26  
up  
:not present  
Agent (master)  
Unit ID:  
1
Loader version:  
Boot ROM version:  
2.2.1.4  
2.3.0.0  
Operation code version: 2.3.1.16  
Console#  
3-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
3
Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities  
The Bridge MIB includes extensions for managed devices that support Multicast  
Filtering, Traffic Classes, and Virtual LANs. You can access these extensions to  
display default settings for the key variables.  
Field Attributes  
Extended Multicast Filtering Services – This switch does not support the filtering  
of individual multicast addresses based on GMRP (GARP Multicast Registration  
Protocol).  
Traffic Classes – This switch provides mapping of user priorities to multiple traffic  
Static Entry Individual Port – This switch allows static filtering for unicast and  
multicast addresses. (Refer to “Setting Static Addresses” on page 3-114.)  
VLAN Learning – This switch uses Independent VLAN Learning (IVL), where each  
port maintains its own filtering database.  
Configurable PVID Tagging – This switch allows you to override the default Port  
VLAN ID (PVID used in frame tags) and egress status (VLAN-Tagged or  
Untagged) on each port. (Refer to “VLAN Configuration” on page 3-139.)  
Local VLAN Capable – This switch does not support multiple local bridges outside  
of the scope of 802.1Q defined VLANs.  
GMRP – GARP Multicast Registration Protocol (GMRP) allows network devices to  
register endstations with multicast groups. This switch does not support GMRP; it  
uses the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) to provide automatic  
multicast filtering.  
Web – Click System, Bridge Extension Configuration.  
Figure 3-5 Bridge Extension Configuration  
3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the Switch  
3
CLI – Enter the following command.  
Console#show bridge-ext  
Max support VLAN numbers:  
Max support VLAN ID:  
255  
4094  
Extended multicast filtering services: No  
Static entry individual port:  
VLAN learning:  
Yes  
IVL  
Configurable PVID tagging:  
Local VLAN capable:  
Traffic classes:  
Global GVRP status:  
GMRP:  
Yes  
No  
Enabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Console#  
Setting the Switch’s IP Address  
This section describes how to configure an IP interface for management access  
over the network. The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default. To  
manually configure an address, you need to change the switch’s default settings  
(IP address 0.0.0.0 and netmask 255.0.0.0) to values that are compatible with your  
network. You may also need to a establish a default gateway between the switch  
and management stations that exist on another network segment.  
You can manually configure a specific IP address, or direct the device to obtain an  
address from a BOOTP or DHCP server. Valid IP addresses consist of four decimal  
numbers, 0 to 255, separated by periods. Anything outside this format will not be  
accepted by the CLI program.  
Command Attributes  
• Management VLAN – ID of the configured VLAN (1-4094, no leading zeroes). By  
default, all ports on the switch are members of VLAN 1. However, the management  
station can be attached to a port belonging to any VLAN, as long as that VLAN has  
been assigned an IP address.  
IP Address Mode – Specifies whether IP functionality is enabled via manual  
configuration (Static), Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP), or Boot  
Protocol (BOOTP). If DHCP/BOOTP is enabled, IP will not function until a reply has  
been received from the server. Requests will be broadcast periodically by the  
switch for an IP address. (DHCP/BOOTP values can include the IP address,  
subnet mask, and default gateway.)  
IP Address – Address of the VLAN interface that is allowed management access.  
Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers, 0 to 255, separated by periods.  
(Default: 0.0.0.0)  
Subnet Mask – This mask identifies the host address bits used for routing to  
specific subnets. (Default: 255.0.0.0)  
Gateway IP address – IP address of the gateway router between this device and  
management stations that exist on other network segments. (Default: 0.0.0.0)  
MAC Address – The physical layer address for this switch.  
Restart DHCP – Requests a new IP address from the DHCP server.  
3-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Basic Configuration  
3
Manual Configuration  
Web – Click System, IP Configuration. Select the VLAN through which the  
management station is attached, set the IP Address Mode to “Static,” enter the IP  
address, subnet mask and gateway, then click Apply.  
Figure 3-6 Manual IP Configuration  
CLI – Specify the management interface, IP address and default gateway.  
Console#config  
Console(config)#interface vlan 1  
Console(config-if)#ip address 10.1.0.254 255.255.255.0  
Console(config-if)#exit  
Console(config)#ip default-gateway 192.168.1.254  
Console(config)#  
3-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
Using DHCP/BOOTP  
If your network provides DHCP/BOOTP services, you can configure the switch to be  
dynamically configured by these services.  
Web – Click System, IP Configuration. Specify the VLAN to which the management  
station is attached, set the IP Address Mode to DHCP or BOOTP. Click Apply to  
save your changes. Then click Restart DHCP to immediately request a new  
address. Note that the switch will also broadcast a request for IP configuration  
settings on each power reset.  
Figure 3-7 IP Configuration using DHCP  
Note: If you lose your management connection, use a console connection and enter  
“show ip interface” to determine the new switch address.  
CLI – Specify the management interface, and set the IP address mode to DHCP or  
BOOTP, and then enter the “ip dhcp restart” command.  
Console#config  
Console(config)#interface vlan 1  
Console(config-if)#ip address dhcp  
Console(config-if)#end  
Console#ip dhcp restart  
Console#show ip interface  
IP address and netmask: 192.168.1.54 255.255.255.0 on VLAN 1,  
and address mode: dhcp  
Console#  
Renewing DCHP – DHCP may lease addresses to clients indefinitely or for a  
specific period of time. If the address expires or the switch is moved to another  
network segment, you will lose management access to the switch. In this case, you  
can reboot the switch or submit a client request to restart DHCP service via the CLI.  
3-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Basic Configuration  
3
Web – If the address assigned by DHCP is no longer functioning, you will not be  
able to renew the IP settings via the web interface. You can only restart DHCP  
service via the web interface if the current address is still available.  
CLI – Enter the following command to restart DHCP service.  
Console#ip dhcp restart  
Console#  
DHCP Relay and Option 82 Information  
The switch supports DHCP relay service for attached host devices. If a subnet does  
not include a DHCP server, you can relay DHCP client requests to a DHCP server  
on another subnet.  
When DHCP relay is enabled and the switch sees a DHCP request broadcast, it  
inserts its own IP address into the request (so that the DHCP server knows the  
subnet of the client), then forwards the packet to the DHCP server. When the server  
receives the DHCP request, it allocates a free IP address for the DHCP client from  
its defined scope for the DHCP client’s subnet, and sends a DHCP response back to  
the switch. The switch then broadcasts the DHCP response to the client.  
DHCP also provides a mechanism for sending information about the switch and its  
DHCP clients to the DHCP server. Known as DHCP Option 82, it allows compatible  
DHCP servers to use the information when assigning IP addresses, or to set other  
services or policies for clients.  
Using DHCP Relay Option 82, clients can be identified by the VLAN and switch port  
to which they are connected rather than just their MAC address. DHCP client-server  
exchange messages are then forwarded directly between the server and client  
without having to flood them to the entire VLAN.  
In some cases, the switch may receive DHCP packets from a client that already  
includes DHCP Option 82 information. The switch can be configured to set the  
action policy for these packets. Either the switch can discard the Option 82  
information, keep the existing information, or replace it with the switch’s relay  
information.  
Command Usage  
You must specify the IP address of at least one DHCP server. Otherwise, the  
switch’s DHCP relay agent will not operate and all DHCP request and reply packets  
will be flooded to the entire VLAN.  
Command Attributes  
DHCP Relay Option 82 – Enables the DHCP relay agant with Option 82 support.  
DHCP Relay Option 82 Policy – Sets the DHCP relay policy for DHCP client  
packets that include Option 82 information. (Default: Drop)  
Replace – Overwrites the DHCP client packet information with the switch’s relay  
information.  
Keep – Retains the client’s DHCP information.  
3-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
Drop – Discards the Option 82 information in a packet and then floods it to the  
entire VLAN.  
DHCP Relay Server – IP addresses of DHCP servers to be used by the switch’s  
DHCP relay agent in order of preference. Up to five servers can be specified.  
Web – Click System, IP Configuration. Enable the DHCP Relay Option 82 function,  
set the Option 82 policy, and specify at least one DHCP server IP address. Click  
Apply.  
Figure 3-8 DHCP Relay Option 82 Configuration  
CLI – This example enables DHCP relay with Option 82, and sets the policy as  
replace.  
Console(config)#ip dhcp relay server 192.168.1.9 192.168.1.54  
Console(config)#ip dhcp relay information option  
Console(config)#ip dhcp relay information policy replace  
Console(config)#exit  
Console#show ip dhcp-relay  
Status of DHCP relay option82:  
Insertion of option82 is Enabled.  
DHCP option policy :replace.  
DHCP relay-server address 192.168.1.9 192.168.1.54 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0  
0.0.0.0  
Console#  
3-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
3
Managing Firmware  
You can upload/download firmware to or from a TFTP server. By saving runtime  
code to a file on a TFTP server, that file can later be downloaded to the switch to  
restore operation. You can also set the switch to use new firmware without  
overwriting the previous version. You must specify the method of file transfer, along  
with the file type and file names as required.  
Command Attributes  
File Transfer Method – The firmware copy operation includes these options:  
- file to file – Copies a file within the switch directory, assigning it a new name.  
- file to tftp – Copies a file from the switch to a TFTP server.  
- tftp to file – Copies a file from a TFTP server to the switch.  
1
- file to unit – Copies a file from this switch to another unit in the stack.  
1
- unit to file – Copies a file from another unit in the stack to this switch.  
TFTP Server IP Address – The IP address of a TFTP server.  
File Type – Specify opcode (operational code) to copy firmware.  
File Name The file name should not contain slashes (\ or /), the leading letter of  
the file name should not be a period (.), and the maximum length for file names on  
the TFTP server is 127 characters or 31 characters for files on the switch.  
(Valid characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, “.”, “-”, “_”)  
Note: Up to two copies of the system software (i.e., the runtime firmware) can be stored  
in the file directory on the switch. The currently designated startup version of this  
file cannot be deleted.  
1. These operations are not supported for this switch.  
3-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
Downloading System Software from a Server  
When downloading runtime code, you can specify the destination file name to  
replace the current image, or first download the file using a different name from the  
current runtime code file, and then set the new file as the startup file.  
Web –Click System, File Management, Copy Operation. Select “tftp to file” as the file  
transfer method, enter the IP address of the TFTP server, set the file type to  
“opcode,” enter the file name of the software to download, select a file on the switch  
to overwrite or specify a new file name, then click Apply. If you replaced the current  
firmware used for startup and want to start using the new operation code, reboot the  
system via the System/Reset menu.  
Figure 3-9 Operation Code Image File Transfer  
If you download to a new destination file, go to the System/File/Set Start-Up menu,  
mark the operation code file used at startup, and click Apply. To start the new  
firmware, reboot the system via the System/Reset menu.  
Figure 3-10 Select Start-Up Operation File  
3-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Basic Configuration  
3
To delete a file select System, File, Delete. Select the file name from the given list by  
checking the tick box and click Apply. Note that the file currently designated as the  
startup code cannot be deleted.  
Figure 3-11 Deleting Files  
CLI To download new firmware form a TFTP server, enter the IP address of the  
TFTP server, select “opcode” as the file type, then enter the source and destination  
file names. When the file has finished downloading, set the new file to start up the  
system, and then restart the switch.  
To start the new firmware, enter the “reload” command or reboot the system.  
Console#copy tftp file  
TFTP server ip address: 192.168.1.23  
Choose file type:  
1. config: 2. opcode: <1-2>: 2  
Source file name: V2262.bix  
Destination file name: ES3552XA_Opcpde_V2262.bix  
\Write to FLASH Programming.  
-Write to FLASH finish.  
Success.  
Console#config  
Console(config)#boot system opcode:ES3552XA_Opcpde_V2262.bix  
Console(config)#exit  
Console#reload  
3-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings  
You can upload/download configuration settings to/from a TFTP server. The  
configuration files can be later downloaded to restore the switch’s settings.  
Command Attributes  
File Transfer Method – The configuration copy operation includes these options:  
- file to file – Copies a file within the switch directory, assigning it a new name.  
- file to running-config – Copies a file in the switch to the running configuration.  
- file to startup-config – Copies a file in the switch to the startup configuration.  
- file to tftp – Copies a file from the switch to a TFTP server.  
- running-config to file – Copies the running configuration to a file.  
- running-config to startup-config – Copies the running config to the startup config.  
- running-config to tftp – Copies the running configuration to a TFTP server.  
- startup-config to file – Copies the startup configuration to a file on the switch.  
- startup-config to running-config – Copies the startup config to the running config.  
- startup-config to tftp – Copies the startup configuration to a TFTP server.  
- tftp to file – Copies a file from a TFTP server to the switch.  
- tftp to running-config – Copies a file from a TFTP server to the running config.  
- tftp to startup-config – Copies a file from a TFTP server to the startup config.  
2
- file to unit – Copies a file from this switch to another unit in the stack.  
2
- unit to file – Copies a file from another unit in the stack to this switch.  
TFTP Server IP Address – The IP address of a TFTP server.  
File Type – Specify config (configuration) to copy configuration settings.  
File Name — The file name should not contain slashes (\ or /), the leading letter of  
the file name should not be a period (.), and the maximum length for file names on  
the TFTP server is 127 characters or 31 characters for files on the switch. (Valid  
characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, “.”, “-”, “_”)  
Note: The maximum number of user-defined configuration files is limited only by  
available flash memory space.  
2. These operations are not supported for this switch.  
3-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Basic Configuration  
3
Downloading Configuration Settings from a Server  
You can download the configuration file under a new file name and then set it as the  
startup file, or you can specify the current startup configuration file as the destination  
file to directly replace it. Note that the file “Factory_Default_Config.cfg” can be  
copied to the TFTP server, but cannot be used as the destination on the switch.  
Web – Click System, File, Copy. Select “tftp to startup-config” or “tftp to file” and  
enter the IP address of the TFTP server. Specify the name of the file to download  
and select a file on the switch to overwrite or specify a new file name, then click  
Apply.  
Figure 3-12 Copy Configuration Settings  
If you download to a new file name using “tftp to startup-config” or “tftp to file,” the file  
is automatically set as the start-up configuration file. To use the new settings, reboot  
the system via the System/Reset menu.  
Note that you can also select any configuration file as the start-up configuration by  
using the System/File/Set Start-Up page.  
Figure 3-13 Setting the Startup Configuration Settings  
3-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configuring the Switch  
3
CLI – Enter the IP address of the TFTP server, specify the source file on the server,  
set the startup file name on the switch, and then restart the switch.  
Console#copy tftp startup-config  
TFTP server ip address: 192.168.1.19  
Source configuration file name: config-1  
Startup configuration file name [] : startup  
\Write to FLASH Programming.  
-Write to FLASH finish.  
Success.  
Console#reload  
To select another configuration file as the start-up configuration, use the boot  
system command and then restart the switch.  
Console#config  
Console(config)#boot system config: startup-new  
Console(config)#exit  
Console#reload  
Console Port Settings  
You can access the onboard configuration program by attaching a VT100  
compatible device to the switch’s serial console port. Management access through  
the console port is controlled by various parameters, including a password, timeouts,  
and basic communication settings. These parameters can be configured via the  
Web or CLI interface.  
Command Attributes  
Login Timeout – Sets the interval that the system waits for a user to log into the  
CLI. If a login attempt is not detected within the timeout interval, the connection is  
terminated for the session. (Range: 0-300 seconds; Default: 0)  
Exec Timeout – Sets the interval that the system waits until user input is detected.  
If user input is not detected within the timeout interval, the current session is  
terminated. (Range: 0-65535 seconds; Default: 0 seconds)  
Password Threshold – Sets the password intrusion threshold, which limits the  
number of failed logon attempts. When the logon attempt threshold is reached, the  
system interface becomes silent for a specified amount of time (set by the Silent  
Time parameter) before allowing the next logon attempt.  
(Range: 0-120; Default: 3 attempts)  
Silent Time – Sets the amount of time the management console is inaccessible  
after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts has been exceeded.  
(Range: 0-65535; Default: 0)  
Data Bits – Sets the number of data bits per character that are interpreted and  
generated by the console port. If parity is being generated, specify 7 data bits per  
character. If no parity is required, specify 8 data bits per character. (Default: 8 bits)  
Parity – Defines the generation of a parity bit. Communication protocols provided  
by some terminals can require a specific parity bit setting. Specify Even, Odd, or  
None. (Default: None)  
3-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Basic Configuration  
3
Speed – Sets the terminal line’s baud rate for transmit (to terminal) and receive  
(from terminal). Set the speed to match the baud rate of the device connected to  
the serial port. (Range: 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or 115200 baud, Auto;  
Default: 9600 bps)  
Stop Bits – Sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per byte.  
(Range: 1-2; Default: 1 stop bit)  
3
Password – Specifies a password for the line connection. When a connection is  
started on a line with password protection, the system prompts for the password.  
If you enter the correct password, the system shows a prompt.  
(Default: No password)  
3
Login – Enables password checking at login. You can select authentication by a  
single global password as configured for the Password parameter, or by  
passwords set up for specific user-name accounts. (Default: Local)  
Web – Click System, Line, Console. Specify the console port connection parameters  
as required, then click Apply.  
Figure 3-14 Console Port Settings  
3. CLI only.  
3-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
CLI – Enter Line Configuration mode for the console, then specify the connection  
parameters as required. To display the current console port settings, use the show  
line command from the Normal Exec level.  
Console(config)#line console  
Console(config-line)#login local  
Console(config-line)#password 0 secret  
Console(config-line)#timeout login response 0  
Console(config-line)#exec-timeout 0  
Console(config-line)#password-thresh 3  
Console(config-line)#silent-time 60  
Console(config-line)#databits 8  
Console(config-line)#parity none  
Console(config-line)#speed 115200  
Console(config-line)#stopbits 1  
Console(config-line)#end  
Console#show line  
Console configuration:  
Password threshold: 3 times  
Interactive timeout: Disabled  
Login timeout:  
Silent time:  
Baudrate:  
Disabled  
60  
115200  
Databits:  
8
Parity:  
Stopbits:  
none  
1
VTY configuration:  
Password threshold: 3 times  
Interactive timeout: 600 sec  
Login timeout:  
Console#  
300 sec  
Telnet Settings  
You can access the onboard configuration program over the network using Telnet  
(i.e., a virtual terminal). Management access via Telnet can be enabled/disabled and  
other various parameters set, including the TCP port number, timeouts, and a  
password. These parameters can be configured via the Web or CLI interface.  
Command Attributes  
• Telnet Status – Enables or disables Telnet access to the switch.  
(Default: Enabled)  
• Telnet Port Number – Sets the TCP port number for Telnet on the switch.  
(Default: 23)  
Login Timeout – Sets the interval that the system waits for a user to log into the  
CLI. If a login attempt is not detected within the timeout interval, the connection is  
terminated for the session. (Range: 0-300 seconds; Default: 300 seconds)  
Exec Timeout – Sets the interval that the system waits until user input is detected.  
If user input is not detected within the timeout interval, the current session is  
terminated. (Range: 0-65535 seconds; Default: 600 seconds)  
3-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
3
Password Threshold – Sets the password intrusion threshold, which limits the  
number of failed logon attempts. When the logon attempt threshold is reached, the  
system interface becomes silent for a specified amount of time (set by the Silent  
Time parameter) before allowing the next logon attempt.  
(Range: 0-120; Default: 3 attempts)  
4
Password – Specifies a password for the line connection. When a connection is  
started on a line with password protection, the system prompts for the password.  
If you enter the correct password, the system shows a prompt. (Default: No  
password)  
4
Login – Enables password checking at login. You can select authentication by a  
single global password as configured for the Password parameter, or by  
passwords set up for specific user-name accounts. (Default: Local)  
Web – Click System, Line, Telnet. Specify the connection parameters for Telnet  
access, then click Apply.  
Figure 3-15 Enabling Telnet  
4. CLI only.  
3-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
CLI – Enter Line Configuration mode for a virtual terminal, then specify the  
connection parameters as required. To display the current virtual terminal settings,  
use the show line command from the Normal Exec level.  
Console(config)#line vty  
Console(config-line)#login local  
Console(config-line)#password 0 secret  
Console(config-line)#timeout login response 300  
Console(config-line)#exec-timeout 600  
Console(config-line)#password-thresh 3  
Console(config-line)#end  
Console#show line  
Console configuration:  
Password threshold: 3 times  
Interactive timeout: Disabled  
Login timeout:  
Silent time:  
Baudrate:  
Disabled  
Disabled  
9600  
8
Databits:  
Parity:  
Stopbits:  
none  
1
VTY configuration:  
Password threshold: 3 times  
Interactive timeout: 600 sec  
Login timeout: 300 sec  
Console#  
Configuring Event Logging  
The switch allows you to control the logging of error messages, including the type of  
events that are recorded in switch memory, logging to a remote System Log (syslog)  
server, and displays a list of recent event messages.  
System Log Configuration  
The system allows you to enable or disable event logging, and specify which levels  
are logged to RAM or flash memory.  
Severe error messages that are logged to flash memory are permanently stored in  
the switch to assist in troubleshooting network problems. Up to 4096 log entries can  
be stored in the flash memory, with the oldest entries being overwritten first when the  
available log memory (256 kilobytes) has been exceeded.  
The System Logs page allows you to configure and limit system messages that are  
logged to flash or RAM memory. The default is for event levels 0 to 3 to be logged to  
flash and levels 0 to 6 to be logged to RAM.  
Command Attributes  
System Log Status – Enables/disables the logging of debug or error messages to  
the logging process. (Default: Enabled)  
Flash Level – Limits log messages saved to the switch’s permanent flash memory  
for all levels up to the specified level. For example, if level 3 is specified, all  
messages from level 0 to level 3 will be logged to flash. (Range: 0-7, Default: 3)  
3-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Basic Configuration  
3
Table 3-3 Logging Levels  
Description  
Level  
Severity Name  
Debug  
7
6
5
4
3
2
Debugging messages  
Informational messages only  
Informational  
Notice  
Normal but significant condition, such as cold start  
Warning conditions (e.g., return false, unexpected return)  
Error conditions (e.g., invalid input, default used)  
Warning  
Error  
Critical  
Critical conditions (e.g., memory allocation, or free memory  
error - resource exhausted)  
1
0
Alert  
Immediate action needed  
System unusable  
Emergency  
* There are only Level 2, 5 and 6 error messages for the current firmware release.  
RAM Level – Limits log messages saved to the switch’s temporary RAM memory  
for all levels up to the specified level. For example, if level 7 is specified, all  
messages from level 0 to level 7 will be logged to RAM. (Range: 0-7, Default: 6)  
Note: The Flash Level must be equal to or less than the RAM Level.  
Web – Click System, Log, System Logs. Specify System Log Status, then change  
the level of messages to be logged to RAM and flash memory, then click Apply.  
Figure 3-16 System Logs  
CLI – Enable system logging and then specify the level of messages to be logged to  
RAM and flash memory. Use the show logging command to display the current  
settings.  
Console(config)#logging on  
Console(config)#logging history ram 0  
Console(config)#end  
Console#show logging flash  
Syslog logging: Enabled  
History logging in FLASH: level emergencies  
Console#  
3-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
Remote Log Configuration  
The Remote Logs page allows you to configure the logging of messages that are  
sent to syslog servers or other management stations. You can also limit the error  
messages sent to only those messages below a specified level.  
Command Attributes  
Remote Log Status – Enables/disables the logging of debug or error messages  
to the remote logging process. (Default: Enabled)  
Logging Facility – Sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages.  
There are eight facility types specified by values of 16 to 23. The facility type is  
used by the syslog server to dispatch log messages to an appropriate service.  
The attribute specifies the facility type tag sent in syslog messages. (See RFC  
3164.) This type has no effect on the kind of messages reported by the switch.  
However, it may be used by the syslog server to process messages, such as  
sorting or storing messages in the corresponding database. (Range: 16-23,  
Default: 23)  
Logging Trap – Limits log messages that are sent to the remote syslog server for  
all levels up to the specified level. For example, if level 3 is specified, all messages  
from level 0 to level 3 will be sent to the remote server. (Range: 0-7, Default: 6)  
Host IP List – Displays the list of remote server IP addresses that receive the  
syslog messages. The maximum number of host IP addresses allowed is five.  
Host IP Address – Specifies a new server IP address to add to the Host IP List.  
Web – Click System, Log, Remote Logs. To add an IP address to the Host IP List,  
type the new IP address in the Host IP Address box, and then click Add. To delete  
an IP address, click the entry in the Host IP List, and then click Remove.  
Figure 3-17 Remote Logs  
3-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Basic Configuration  
3
CLI – Enter the syslog server host IP address, choose the facility type and set the  
logging trap.  
Console(config)#logging host 192.168.1.15  
Console(config)#logging facility 23  
Console(config)#logging trap 4  
Console(config)#end  
Console#show logging trap  
Syslog logging:  
Enabled  
REMOTELOG status:  
Enabled  
REMOTELOG facility type:  
REMOTELOG level type:  
local use 7  
Warning conditions  
REMOTELOG server ip address: 192.168.1.15  
REMOTELOG server ip address: 0.0.0.0  
REMOTELOG server ip address: 0.0.0.0  
REMOTELOG server ip address: 0.0.0.0  
REMOTELOG server ip address: 0.0.0.0  
Console#  
Displaying Log Messages  
The Logs page allows you to scroll through the logged system and event messages.  
The switch can store up to 2048 log entries in temporary random access memory  
(RAM; i.e., memory flushed on power reset) and up to 4096 entries in permanent  
flash memory.  
Web – Click System, Log, Logs.  
Figure 3-18 Displaying Logs  
CLI – This example shows the event message stored in RAM.  
Console#show log ram  
[1] 00:01:37 2001-01-01  
"DHCP request failed - will retry later."  
level: 4, module: 9, function: 0, and event no.: 10  
[0] 00:00:35 2001-01-01  
"System coldStart notification."  
level: 6, module: 6, function: 1, and event no.: 1  
Console#  
3-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
Sending Simple Mail Transfer Protocol Alerts  
To alert system administrators of problems, the switch can use SMTP (Simple Mail  
Transfer Protocol) to send email messages when triggered by logging events of a  
specified level. The messages are sent to specified SMTP servers on the network  
and can be retrieved using POP or IMAP clients.  
Command Attributes  
Admin Status – Enables/disables the SMTP function. (Default: Enabled)  
Email Source Address – Sets the email address used for the “From” field in alert  
messages. You may use a symbolic email address that identifies the switch, or the  
address of an administrator responsible for the switch.  
Severity – Sets the syslog severity threshold level (see table on page 3-29) used  
to trigger alert messages. All events at this level or higher will be sent to the  
configured email recipients. For example, using Level 7 will report all events from  
level 7 to level 0. (Default: Level 7)  
SMTP Server List – Specifies a list of up to three recipient SMTP servers. The  
switch attempts to connect to the other listed servers if the first fails. Use the New  
SMTP Server text field and the Add/Remove buttons to configure the list.  
Email Destination Address List – Specifies the email recipients of alert  
messages. You can specify up to five recipients. Use the New Email Destination  
Address text field and the Add/Remove buttons to configure the list.  
3-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
3
Web – Click System, Log, SMTP. Enable SMTP, specify a source email address,  
and select the minimum severity level. To add an IP address to the SMTP Server  
List, type the new IP address in the SMTP Server field and click Add. To delete an IP  
address, click the entry in the SMTP Server List and click Remove. Specify up to five  
email addresses to receive the alert messages, and click Apply.  
Figure 3-19 Enabling and Configuring SMTP Alerts  
3-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
CLI – Enter the IP address of at least one SMTP server, set the syslog severity level  
to trigger an email message, and specify the switch (source) and up to five recipient  
(destination) email addresses. Enable SMTP with the logging sendmail command  
to complete the configuration. Use the show logging sendmail command to display  
the current SMTP configuration.  
Console(config)#logging sendmail host 192.168.1.200  
Console(config)#logging sendmail level 4  
Console(config)#logging sendmail source-email john@acme.com  
Console(config)##logging sendmail destination-email geoff@acme.com  
Console(config)#logging sendmail  
Console(config)#exit  
Console#show logging sendmail  
SMTP servers  
-----------------------------------------------  
1. 192.168.1.200  
SMTP minimum severity level: 4  
SMTP destination email addresses  
-----------------------------------------------  
1. geoff@acme.com  
SMTP source email address:  
john@acme.com  
Enabled  
SMTP status:  
Console#  
Resetting the System  
Web – Click System, Reset to reboot the switch. When prompted, confirm that you  
want reset the switch.  
Figure 3-20 Resetting the System  
CLI – Use the reload command to restart the switch. When prompted, confirm that  
you want to reset the switch.  
Console#reload  
System will be restarted, continue <y/n>? y  
Note: When restarting the system, it will always run the Power-On Self-Test.  
3-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Basic Configuration  
3
Setting the System Clock  
Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) allows the switch to set its internal clock  
based on periodic updates from a Network Time Protocol (NTP) server. Maintaining  
an accurate time on the switch enables the system log to record meaningful dates  
and times for event entries. You can also manually set the clock using the CLI. (See  
“calendar set” on page 4-62.) If the clock is not set, the switch will only record the  
time from the factory default set at the last bootup.  
When the SNTP client is enabled, the switch periodically sends a request for a time  
update to a configured time server. You can configure up to three time server IP  
addresses. The switch will attempt to poll each server in the configured sequence.  
For more robust, secure time updates from trusted servers, the NTP client can be  
enabled instead of the SNTP client. Using the NTP client provides more reliable time  
updates, since the updates are collected from many NTP servers, then filtered and  
selected using an algorithm that determines the most accurate time. The NTP client  
also uses authentication and encryption to ensure that updates are received from  
authorized servers only.  
Note: The SNTP and NTP client cannot be enabled at the same time.  
Configuring SNTP  
You can configure the switch to send time synchronization requests to time servers.  
Command Attributes  
SNTP Client – Configures the switch to operate as an SNTP client. This requires  
at least one time server to be specified in the SNTP Server field. (Default: Disabled)  
SNTP Poll Interval – Sets the interval between sending requests for a time update  
from a time server. (Range: 16-16384 seconds; Default: 16 seconds)  
SNTP Server – Sets the IP address for up to three time servers. The switch  
attempts to update the time from the first server, if this fails it attempts an update  
from the next server in the sequence.  
Web – Select NTP/SNTP, Configuration. Modify any of the required parameters, and  
click Apply.  
Figure 3-21 SNTP Configuration  
3-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configuring the Switch  
3
CLI – This example configures the switch to operate as an SNTP unicast client and  
then displays the current time and settings.  
Console(config)#sntp server 10.1.0.19 137.82.140.80 128.250.36.2  
Console(config)#sntp poll 60  
Console(config)#sntp client  
Console(config)#exit  
Console#show sntp  
Current time: Jan 6 14:56:05 2004  
Poll interval: 60  
Current mode: unicast  
SNTP status : Enabled  
SNTP server 10.1.0.19 137.82.140.80 128.250.36.2  
Current server: 128.250.36.2  
Console#  
Configuring NTP  
The NTP client allows you to configure up to 50 NTP servers to poll for time updates.  
You can also enable authentication to ensure that reliable updates are received from  
only authorized NTP servers. The authentication keys and their associated key  
number must be centrally managed and manually distributed to NTP servers and  
clients. The key numbers and key values must match on both the server and client.  
Command Attributes  
NTP Client – Configures the switch to operate as an NTP client. This requires at  
least one time server to be specified in the NTP Server list. (Default: Disabled)  
NTP Polling Interval – Sets the interval between sending requests for a time  
update from NTP servers. (Range: 16-16384 seconds; Default: 16 seconds)  
NTP Authenticate – Enables authentication for time requests and updates  
between the switch and NTP servers. (Default: Disabled)  
NTP Server – Sets the IP address for an NTP server to be polled. The switch  
requests an update from all configured servers, then determines the most accurate  
time update from the responses received.  
Version – Specifies the NTP version supported by the server. (Range: 1-3;  
Default: 3)  
Authenticate Key – Specifies the number of the key in the NTP Authentication Key  
List to use for authentication with the configured server. The authentication key  
must match the key configured on the NTP server.  
Key Number – A number that specifies a key value in the NTP Authentication Key  
List. Up to 255 keys can be configured in the NTP Authentication Key List. Note  
that key numbers and values must match on both the server and client. (Range:  
1-65535)  
Key Context – Specifies an MD5 authentication key string. The key string can be  
up to 32 case-sensitive printable ASCII characters (no spaces).  
Web – Select NTP/SNTP, Configuration. Modify any of the required parameters, and  
click Apply.  
3-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration  
3
Figure 3-22 NTP Client Configuration  
CLI – This example configures the switch to operate as an NTP client and then  
displays the current settings.  
Console(config)#ntp authentication-key 19 md5 thisiskey19  
Console(config)#ntp authentication-key 30 md5 ntpkey30  
Console(config)#ntp server 192.168.3.20  
Console(config)#ntp server 192.168.3.21  
Console(config)#ntp server 192.168.4.22 version 2  
Console(config)#ntp server 192.168.5.23 version 3 key 19  
Console(config)#ntp poll 60  
Console(config)#ntp client  
Console(config)#ntp authenticate  
Console(config)#exit  
Console#show ntp  
Current time: Jan 1 02:58:58 2001  
Poll interval: 60  
Current mode: unicast  
NTP status : Enabled  
Last Update NTP Server: 0.0.0.0  
NTP Authenticate status : Enabled  
Port: 0  
Last Update time: Dec 31 00:00:00 2000 UTC  
NTP Server 192.168.3.20 version 3  
NTP Server 192.168.3.21 version 3  
NTP Server 192.168.4.22 version 2  
NTP Server 192.168.5.23 version 3 key 19  
NTP Authentication-Key 19 md5 Q33O16Q6338241J022S29Q731K7 7  
NTP Authentication-Key 30 md5 D2V8777I51K1132K3552L26R6141O4 7  
Console#  
3-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Setting the Time Zone  
SNTP uses Coordinated Universal Time (or UTC, formerly Greenwich Mean Time,  
or GMT) based on the time at the Earth’s prime meridian, zero degrees longitude. To  
display a time corresponding to your local time, you must indicate the number of  
hours and minutes your time zone is east (before) or west (after) of UTC.  
Command Attributes  
• Current Time – Displays the current time.  
Name – Assigns a name to the time zone. (Range: 1-29 characters)  
Hours (0-12) – The number of hours before/after UTC.  
Minutes (0-59) – The number of minutes before/after UTC.  
Direction – Configures the time zone to be before (east) or after (west) UTC.  
Web – Select SNTP, Clock Time Zone. Set the offset for your time zone relative to  
the UTC, and click Apply.  
Figure 3-23 Setting the System Clock  
CLI - This example shows how to set the time zone for the system clock.  
Console(config)#clock timezone Taiwan hours 6 minute 0 after-UTC  
Console(config)#  
Simple Network Management Protocol  
SNMP is a communication protocol designed specifically for managing devices on a  
network. Equipment commonly managed with SNMP includes switches, routers and  
host computers. SNMP is typically used to configure these devices for proper  
operation in a network environment, as well as to monitor them to evaluate  
performance or detect potential problems.  
Managed devices supporting SNMP contain software, which runs locally on the  
device and is referred to as an agent. A defined set of variables, known as managed  
objects, is maintained by the SNMP agent and used to manage the device. These  
objects are defined in a Management Information Base (MIB) that provides a  
standard presentation of the information controlled by the agent. SNMP defines both  
3-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Simple Network Management Protocol  
3
the format of the MIB specifications and the protocol used to access this information  
over the network.  
The switch includes an onboard agent that supports SNMP versions 1, 2c, and 3.  
This agent continuously monitors the status of the switch hardware, as well as the  
traffic passing through its ports. A network management station can access this  
information using software such as HP OpenView. Access to the onboard agent  
from clients using SNMP v1 and v2c is controlled by community strings. To  
communicate with the switch, the management station must first submit a valid  
community string for authentication.  
Access to the switch using from clients using SNMPv3 provides additional security  
features that cover message integrity, authentication, and encryption; as well as  
controlling user access to specific areas of the MIB tree.  
The SNMPv3 security structure consists of security models, with each model having  
it’s own security levels. There are three security models defined, SNMPv1,  
SNMPv2c, and SNMPv3. Users are assigned to “groups” that are defined by a  
security model and specified security levels. Each group also has a defined security  
access to set of MIB objects for reading and writing, which are known as “views.”  
The switch has a default view (all MIB objects) and default groups defined for  
security models v1 and v2c. The following table shows the security models and  
levels available and the system default settings.  
Table 3-4 SNMPv3 Security Models and Levels  
Model Level  
Group  
Read View Write View Notify View Security  
v1  
noAuthNoPriv public  
defaultview none  
none  
Community string only  
(read only)  
noAuthNoPriv private  
v1  
defaultview defaultview none  
Community string only  
(read/write)  
v1  
noAuthNoPriv user defined user defined user defined user defined Community string only  
v2c  
noAuthNoPriv public  
(read only)  
defaultview none  
none  
Community string only  
Community string only  
v2c  
noAuthNoPriv private  
(read/write)  
defaultview defaultview none  
v2c  
v3  
noAuthNoPriv user defined user defined user defined user defined Community string only  
noAuthNoPriv user defined user defined user defined user defined A user name match only  
v3  
AuthNoPriv  
user defined user defined user defined user defined Provides user  
authentication via MD5 or  
SHA algorithms  
v3  
AuthPriv  
user defined user defined user defined user defined Provides user  
authentication via MD5 or  
SHA algorithms and data  
privacy using DES 56-bit  
encryption  
Note: The predefined default groups and view can be deleted from the system. You can  
then define customized groups and views for the SNMP clients that require access.  
3-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the Switch  
3
Enabling the SNMP Agent  
Enables SNMPv3 service for all management clients (i.e., versions 1, 2c, 3).  
Command Attributes  
SNMP Agent Status – Enables SNMP on the switch.  
Web – Click SNMP, Agent Status. Enable the SNMP Agent by marking the Enabled  
checkbox, and click Apply.  
Figure 3-24 Enabling the SNMP Agent  
CLI – The following example enables SNMP on the switch.  
Console(config)#snmp-server  
Console(config)#  
Setting Community Access Strings  
You may configure up to five community strings authorized for management access  
by clients using SNMP v1 and v2c. All community strings used for IP Trap Managers  
should be listed in this table. For security reasons, you should consider removing the  
default strings.  
Command Attributes  
SNMP Community Capability – The switch supports up to five community strings.  
Current – Displays a list of the community strings currently configured.  
Community String – A community string that acts like a password and permits  
access to the SNMP protocol.  
Default strings: “public” (read-only access), “private” (read/write access)  
Range: 1-32 characters, case sensitive  
Access Mode – Specifies the access rights for the community string:  
- Read-Only – Authorized management stations are only able to retrieve MIB  
objects.  
- Read/Write – Authorized management stations are able to both retrieve and  
modify MIB objects.  
3-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Specifying Trap Managers and Trap Types  
3
Web – Click SNMP, Configuration. Add new community strings as required, select  
the access rights from the Access Mode drop-down list, then click Add.  
Figure 3-25 Configuring SNMP Community Strings  
CLI – The following example adds the string “spiderman” with read/write access.  
Console(config)#snmp-server community spiderman rw  
Console(config)#  
Specifying Trap Managers and Trap Types  
Traps indicating status changes are issued by the switch to specified trap managers.  
You must specify trap managers so that key events are reported by this switch to  
your management station (using network management platforms such as HP  
OpenView). You can specify up to five management stations that will receive  
authentication failure messages and other trap messages from the switch.  
Command Usage  
• If you specify an SNMP Version 3 host, then the “Trap Manager Community String”  
is interpreted as an SNMP user name. If you use V3 authentication or encryption  
options (authNoPriv or authPriv), the user name must first be defined in the  
SNMPv3 Users page (page 3-45). Otherwise, the authentication password and/or  
privacy password will not exist, and the switch will not authorize SNMP access for  
the host. However, if you specify a V3 host with the no authentication (noAuth)  
option, an SNMP user account will be automatically generated, and the switch will  
authorize SNMP access for the host.  
• Notifications are issued by the switch as trap messages by default. The recipient  
of a trap message does not send a response to the switch. Traps are therefore not  
as reliable as inform messages, which include a request for acknowledgement of  
receipt. Informs can be used to ensure that critical information is received by the  
host. However, note that informs consume more system resources because they  
must be kept in memory until a response is received. Informs also add to network  
traffic. You should consider these effects when deciding whether to issue  
notifications as traps or informs.  
3-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the Switch  
3
To send an inform to a SNMPv2c host, complete these steps:  
1.Enable the SNMP agent (page 3-54).  
2.Enable trap informs as described in the following pages.  
3.Create a view with the required notification messages (page 3-53).  
4.Create a group that includes the required notify view (page 3-49).  
To send an inform to a SNMPv3 host, complete these steps:  
1.Enable the SNMP agent (page 3-54).  
2.Enable trap informs as described in the following pages.  
3.Create a view with the required notification messages (page 3-53).  
4.Create a group that includes the required notify view (page 3-49).  
5.Specify a remote engine ID where the user resides (page 3-44).  
6.Then configure a remote user (page 3-47).  
Command Attributes  
Trap Manager Capability – This switch supports up to five trap managers.  
Current – Displays a list of the trap managers currently configured.  
Trap Manager IP Address – IP address of a new management station to receive  
notification messages.  
Trap Manager Community String – Specifies a valid community string for the  
new trap manager entry. Though you can set this string in the Trap Managers table,  
we recommend that you define this string in the SNMP Configuration page (for  
Version 1 or 2c clients), or define a corresponding “User Name” in the SNMPv3  
Users page (for Version 3 clients). (Range: 1-32 characters, case sensitive)  
Trap UDP Port – Specifies the UDP port number used by the trap manager.  
Trap Version – Indicates if the user is running SNMP v1, v2c, or v3. (Default: v1)  
Trap Security Level – When trap version 3 is selected, you must specify one of  
the following security levels. (Default: noAuthNoPriv)  
- noAuthNoPriv – There is no authentication or encryption used in SNMP  
communications.  
- AuthNoPriv – SNMP communications use authentication, but the data is not  
encrypted (only available for the SNMPv3 security model).  
- AuthPriv – SNMP communications use both authentication and encryption (only  
available for the SNMPv3 security model).  
Trap Inform – Notifications are sent as inform messages. Note that this option is  
only available for version 2c and 3 hosts. (Default: traps are used)  
- Timeout – The number of seconds to wait for an acknowledgment before  
resending an inform message. (Range: 0-2147483647 centiseconds;  
Default: 1500 centiseconds)  
- Retry times – The maximum number of times to resend an inform message if  
the recipient does not acknowledge receipt. (Range: 0-255; Default: 3)  
3-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring SNMPv3 Management Access  
3
5
Enable Authentication Traps – Issues a notification message to specified IP  
trap managers whenever authentication of an SNMP request fails.  
(Default: Enabled)  
Enable Link-up and Link-down Traps – Issues a notification message whenever  
a port link is established or broken. (Default: Enabled)  
Web – Click SNMP, Configuration. Enter the IP address and community string for  
each management station that will receive trap messages, specify the UDP port,  
SNMP trap version, trap security level (for v3 clients), trap inform settings (for v2c/v3  
clients), and then click Add. Select the trap types required using the check boxes for  
Authentication and Link-up/down traps, and then click Apply.  
Figure 3-26 Configuring SNMP Trap Managers  
CLI – This example adds a trap manager and enables authentication traps.  
Console(config)#snmp-server host 10.1.19.23 private version 2c  
udp-port 162  
Console(config)#snmp-server enable traps authentication  
Configuring SNMPv3 Management Access  
To configure SNMPv3 management access to the switch, follow these steps:  
1. If you want to change the default engine ID, do so before configuring other  
SNMP parameters.  
2. Specify read and write access views for the switch MIB tree.  
3. Configure SNMP user groups with the required security model (i.e., SNMP v1,  
5. These are legacy notifications and therefore when used for SNMP Version 3 hosts, they must  
be enabled in conjunction with the corresponding entries in the Notification View (page 3-49).  
3-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
v2c or v3) and security level (i.e., authentication and privacy).  
4. Assign SNMP users to groups, along with their specific authentication and  
privacy passwords.  
Setting a Local Engine ID  
An SNMPv3 engine is an independent SNMP agent that resides on the switch. This  
engine protects against message replay, delay, and redirection. The engine ID is  
also used in combination with user passwords to generate the security keys for  
authenticating and encrypting SNMPv3 packets.  
A local engine ID is automatically generated that is unique to the switch. This is  
referred to as the default engine ID. If the local engineID is deleted or changed, all  
SNMP users will be cleared. You will need to reconfigure all existing users.  
A new engine ID can be specified by entering 1 to 26 hexadecimal characters. If less  
than 26 characters are specified, trailing zeroes are added to the value. For  
example, the value “1234” is equivalent to “1234” followed by 22 zeroes.  
Web – Click SNMP, SNMPv3, Engine ID. Enter an ID of up to 26 hexadecimal  
characters and then click Save.  
Figure 3-27 Setting the SNMPv3 Engine ID  
CLI – This example sets an SNMPv3 engine ID.  
Console(config)#snmp-server engine-id local 12345abcdef  
Console(config)#exit  
Console#show snmp engine-id  
Local SNMP engineID: 8000002a8000000000e8666672  
Local SNMP engineBoots: 1  
Console#  
Specifying a Remote Engine ID  
To send inform messages to an SNMPv3 user on a remote device, you must first  
specify the engine identifier for the SNMP agent on the remote device where the  
user resides. The remote engine ID is used to compute the security digest for  
authenticating and encrypting packets sent to a user on the remote host.  
SNMP passwords are localized using the engine ID of the authoritative agent. For  
informs, the authoritative SNMP agent is the remote agent. You therefore need to  
3-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring SNMPv3 Management Access  
3
configure the remote agent’s SNMP engine ID before you can send proxy requests  
The engine ID can be specified by entering 1 to 26 hexadecimal characters. If less  
than 26 characters are specified, trailing zeroes are added to the value. For  
example, the value “1234” is equivalent to “1234” followed by 22 zeroes.  
Web – Click SNMP, SNMPv3, Remote Engine ID. Enter an ID of up to 26  
hexadecimal characters and then click Save.  
Figure 3-28 Setting an Engine ID  
CLI – This example specifies a remote SNMPv3 engine ID.  
Console(config)#snmp-server engineID remote 54321 192.168.1.19  
Console(config)#exit  
Console#show snmp engine-id  
Local SNMP engineID: 8000002a8000000000e8666672  
Local SNMP engineBoots: 1  
Remote SNMP engineID  
80000000030004e2b316c54321  
Console#  
IP address  
192.168.1.19  
Configuring SNMPv3 Users  
Each SNMPv3 user is defined by a unique name. Users must be configured with a  
specific security level and assigned to a group. The SNMPv3 group restricts users to  
a specific read, write, or notify view.  
Command Attributes  
User Name – The name of user connecting to the SNMP agent. (Range: 1-32  
characters)  
Group Name – The name of the SNMP group to which the user is assigned.  
(Range: 1-32 characters)  
Security Model – The user security model; SNMP v1, v2c or v3.  
Security Level – The security level used for the user:  
- noAuthNoPriv – There is no authentication or encryption used in SNMP  
communications. (This is the default for SNMPv3.)  
- AuthNoPriv – SNMP communications use authentication, but the data is not  
encrypted (only available for the SNMPv3 security model).  
- AuthPriv – SNMP communications use both authentication and encryption (only  
3-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
available for the SNMPv3 security model).  
Authentication Protocol – The method used for user authentication. (Options:  
MD5, SHA; Default: MD5)  
Authentication Password – A minimum of eight plain text characters is required.  
Privacy Protocol – The encryption algorithm use for data privacy; only 56-bit DES  
is currently available.  
Privacy Password – A minimum of eight plain text characters is required.  
Actions – Enables the user to be assigned to another SNMPv3 group.  
Web – Click SNMP, SNMPv3, Users. Click New to configure a user name. In the  
New User page, define a name and assign it to a group, then click Add to save the  
configuration and return to the User Name list. To delete a user, check the box next  
to the user name, then click Delete. To change the assigned group of a user, click  
Change Group in the Actions column of the users table and select the new group.  
Figure 3-29 Configuring SNMPv3 Users  
3-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring SNMPv3 Management Access  
3
CLI – Use the snmp-server user command to configure a new user name and  
assign it to a group.  
Console(config)#snmp-server user chris group r&d v3 auth md5  
greenpeace priv des56 einstien  
Console(config)#exit  
Console#show snmp user  
EngineId: 80000034030001f488f5200000  
User Name: chris  
Authentication Protocol: md5  
Privacy Protocol: des56  
Storage Type: nonvolatile  
Row Status: active  
Console#  
Configuring Remote SNMPv3 Users  
Each SNMPv3 user is defined by a unique name. Users must be configured with a  
specific security level and assigned to a group. The SNMPv3 group restricts users to  
a specific read and a write view.  
To send inform messages to an SNMPv3 user on a remote device, you must first  
specify the engine identifier for the SNMP agent on the remote device where the  
user resides. The remote engine ID is used to compute the security digest for  
authenticating and encrypting packets sent to a user on the remote host. (See  
Command Attributes  
User Name – The name of user connecting to the SNMP agent. (Range: 1-32  
characters)  
Group Name – The name of the SNMP group to which the user is assigned.  
(Range: 1-32 characters)  
Engine ID – The engine identifier for the SNMP agent on the remote device where  
the remote user resides. Note that the remote engine identifier must be specified  
before you configure a remote user. (See “Specifying a Remote Engine ID” on  
Remote IP – The Internet address of the remote device where the user resides.  
Security Model – The user security model; SNMP v1, v2c or v3. (Default: v1)  
Security Level – The security level used for the user:  
- noAuthNoPriv – There is no authentication or encryption used in SNMP  
communications. (This is the default for SNMPv3.)  
- AuthNoPriv – SNMP communications use authentication, but the data is not  
encrypted (only available for the SNMPv3 security model).  
- AuthPriv – SNMP communications use both authentication and encryption (only  
available for the SNMPv3 security model).  
Authentication Protocol – The method used for user authentication. (Options:  
MD5, SHA; Default: MD5)  
Authentication Password – A minimum of eight plain text characters is required.  
3-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Privacy Protocol – The encryption algorithm use for data privacy; only 56-bit DES  
is currently available.  
Privacy Password – A minimum of eight plain text characters is required.  
Web – Click SNMP, SNMPv3, Remote Users. Click New to configure a user name.  
In the New User page, define a name and assign it to a group, then click Add to save  
the configuration and return to the User Name list. To delete a user, check the box  
next to the user name, then click Delete.  
Figure 3-30 Configuring Remote SNMPv3 Users  
3-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring SNMPv3 Management Access  
3
CLI – Use the snmp-server user command to configure a new user name and  
assign it to a group.  
Console(config)#snmp-server user mark group r&d remote 192.168.1.19 v3  
auth md5 greenpeace priv des56 einstien  
Console(config)#exit  
Console#show snmp user  
No user exist.  
SNMP remote user  
EngineId: 80000000030004e2b316c54321  
User Name: mark  
Authentication Protocol: none  
Privacy Protocol: none  
Storage Type: nonvolatile  
Row Status: active  
Console#  
Configuring SNMPv3 Groups  
An SNMPv3 group sets the access policy for its assigned users, restricting them to  
specific read, write, and notify views. You can use the pre-defined default groups or  
create new groups to map a set of SNMP users to SNMP views.  
Command Attributes  
Group Name – The name of the SNMP group. (Range: 1-32 characters)  
Model – The group security model; SNMP v1, v2c or v3.  
Level – The security level used for the group:  
- noAuthNoPriv – There is no authentication or encryption used in SNMP  
communications.  
- AuthNoPriv – SNMP communications use authentication, but the data is not  
encrypted (only available for the SNMPv3 security model).  
- AuthPriv – SNMP communications use both authentication and encryption (only  
available for the SNMPv3 security model).  
Read View – The configured view for read access. (Range: 1-64 characters)  
Write View – The configured view for write access. (Range: 1-64 characters)  
Notify View – The configured view for notifications. (Range: 1-64 characters)  
3-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Table 3-5 Supported Notification Messages  
Object Label  
Object ID  
Description  
RFC 1493 Traps  
newRoot  
1.3.6.1.2.1.17.0.1  
The newRoot trap indicates that the sending  
agent has become the new root of the Spanning  
Tree; the trap is sent by a bridge soon after its  
election as the new root, e.g., upon expiration of  
the Topology Change Timer immediately  
subsequent to its election.  
topologyChange  
1.3.6.1.2.1.17.0.2  
A topologyChange trap is sent by a bridge when  
any of its configured ports transitions from the  
Learning state to the Forwarding state, or from  
the Forwarding state to the Discarding state. The  
trap is not sent if a newRoot trap is sent for the  
same transition.  
SNMPv2 Traps  
coldStart  
1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.1  
1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.2  
1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.3  
A coldStart trap signifies that the SNMPv2 entity,  
acting in an agent role, is reinitializing itself and  
that its configuration may have been altered.  
warmStart  
A warmStart trap signifies that the SNMPv2  
entity, acting in an agent role, is reinitializing  
itself such that its configuration is unaltered.  
a
A linkDown trap signifies that the SNMP entity,  
acting in an agent role, has detected that the  
ifOperStatus object for one of its communication  
links is about to enter the down state from some  
other state (but not from the notPresent state).  
This other state is indicated by the included  
value of ifOperStatus.  
linkDown  
a
1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.4  
1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.5  
A linkUp trap signifies that the SNMP entity,  
acting in an agent role, has detected that the  
ifOperStatus object for one of its communication  
links left the down state and transitioned into  
some other state (but not into the notPresent  
state). This other state is indicated by the  
included value of ifOperStatus.  
linkUp  
a
An authenticationFailure trap signifies that the  
SNMPv2 entity, acting in an agent role, has  
received a protocol message that is not properly  
authenticated. While all implementations of the  
SNMPv2 must be capable of generating this  
trap, the snmpEnableAuthenTraps object  
indicates whether this trap will be generated.  
authenticationFailure  
RMON Events (V2)  
risingAlarm  
1.3.6.1.2.1.16.0.1  
1.3.6.1.2.1.16.0.2  
The SNMP trap that is generated when an alarm  
entry crosses its rising threshold and generates  
an event that is configured for sending SNMP  
traps.  
fallingAlarm  
The SNMP trap that is generated when an alarm  
entry crosses its falling threshold and generates  
an event that is configured for sending SNMP  
traps.  
3-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring SNMPv3 Management Access  
3
Table 3-5 Supported Notification Messages (Continued)  
Object ID Description  
Object Label  
Private Traps -  
swPowerStatus  
ChangeTrap  
1.3.6.1.4.1.259.6.10.95.2.1.0.1 This trap is sent when the power state changes.  
1.3.6.1.4.1.259.6.10.95.2.1.0.17 This trap is sent when the fan fails.  
swFanFailureTrap  
swFanRecoverTrap  
1.3.6.1.4.1.259.6.10.95.2.1.0.18 This trap is sent when the fan failure has  
recovered.  
swPortSecurityTrap  
swIpFilterRejectTrap  
1.3.6.1.4.1.259.6.10.95.2.1.0.36 This trap is sent when a port is intruded.  
1.3.6.1.4.1.259.6.10.95.2.1.0.40 This trap is sent when an incorrect IP address is  
rejected by the IP Filter.  
swSmtpConnFailure  
Trap  
1.3.6.1.4.1.259.6.10.95.2.1.0.41 This trap is triggered if the SMTP system cannot  
open a connection to the mail server  
successfully.  
swMainBoardVer  
MismatchNotificaiton  
1.3.6.1.4.1.259.6.10.95.2.1.0.56 This trap is sent when the slave board version is  
mismatched with the master board version. This  
trap binds two objects, the first object indicates  
the master version, whereas the second  
represents the slave version.  
swModuleVer  
MismatchNotificaiton  
1.3.6.1.4.1.259.6.10.95.2.1.0.57 This trap is sent when the slide-in module  
version is mismatched with the main board  
version.  
swThermalRising  
Notification  
1.3.6.1.4.1.259.6.10.95.2.1.0.58 This trap is sent when the temperature exceeds  
the switchThermalActionRisingThreshold.  
swThermalFalling  
Notification  
1.3.6.1.4.1.259.6.10.95.2.1.0.59 This trap is sent when the temperature falls below  
the switchThermalActionFallingThreshold.  
swModuleInsertion  
Notificaiton  
1.3.6.1.4.1.259.6.10.95.2.1.0.60 This trap is sent when a module is inserted.  
swModuleRemoval  
Notificaiton  
1.3.6.1.4.1.259.6.10.95.2.1.0.61 This trap is sent when a module is removed.  
a. These are legacy notifications and therefore must be enabled in conjunction with the corresponding traps on the  
SNMP Configuration menu (page 3-43).  
3-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the Switch  
3
Web – Click SNMP, SNMPv3, Groups. Click New to configure a new group. In the  
New Group page, define a name, assign a security model and level, and then select  
read, write, and notify views. Click Add to save the new group and return to the  
Groups list. To delete a group, check the box next to the group name, then click  
Delete.  
Figure 3-31 Configuring SNMPv3 Groups  
CLI – Use the snmp-server group command to configure a new group, specifying  
the security model and level, and restricting MIB access to defined read and write  
views.  
Console(config)#snmp-server group secure-users v3 priv read defaultview  
write defaultview notify defaultview  
Console(config)#exit  
Console#show snmp group  
.
.
.
Group Name: secure-users  
Security Model: v3  
Read View: defaultview  
Write View: defaultview  
Notify View: defaultview  
Storage Type: nonvolatile  
Row Status: active  
Console#  
3-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring SNMPv3 Management Access  
3
Setting SNMPv3 Views  
SNMPv3 views are used to restrict user access to specified portions of the MIB tree.  
The predefined view “defaultview” includes access to the entire MIB tree.  
Command Attributes  
View Name – The name of the SNMP view. (Range: 1-64 characters)  
View OID Subtrees – Shows the currently configured object identifiers of branches  
within the MIB tree that define the SNMP view.  
Edit OID Subtrees – Allows you to configure the object identifiers of branches  
within the MIB tree. Wild cards can be used to mask a specific portion of the OID  
string.  
Type – Indicates if the object identifier of a branch within the MIB tree is included  
or excluded from the SNMP view.  
Web – Click SNMP, SNMPv3, Views. Click New to configure a new view. In the New  
View page, define a name and specify OID subtrees in the switch MIB to be included  
or excluded in the view. Click Back to save the new view and return to the SNMPv3  
Views list. For a specific view, click on View OID Subtrees to display the current  
configuration, or click on Edit OID Subtrees to make changes to the view settings. To  
delete a view, check the box next to the view name, then click Delete.  
Figure 3-32 Configuring SNMPv3 Views  
3-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the Switch  
3
CLI – Use the snmp-server view command to configure a new view. This example  
view includes the MIB-2 interfaces table, and the wildcard mask selects all index  
entries.  
Console(config)#snmp-server view ifEntry.a 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.*  
included  
Console(config)#exit  
Console#show snmp view  
View Name: ifEntry.a  
Subtree OID: 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.*  
View Type: included  
Storage Type: nonvolatile  
Row Status: active  
View Name: readaccess  
Subtree OID: 1.3.6.1.2  
View Type: included  
Storage Type: nonvolatile  
Row Status: active  
View Name: defaultview  
Subtree OID: 1  
View Type: included  
Storage Type: nonvolatile  
Row Status: active  
Console#  
User Authentication  
You can restrict management access to this switch using the following options:  
• User Accounts – Manually configure access rights on the switch for specified users.  
• Authentication Settings – Use remote authentication to configure access rights.  
• HTTPS Settings – Provide a secure web connection.  
• SSH Settings – Provide a secure shell (for secure Telnet access).  
• Port Security – Configure secure addresses for individual ports.  
• 802.1X – Use IEEE 802.1X port authentication to control access to specific ports.  
• IP Filter – Filters management access to the web, SNMP or Telnet interface.  
Configuring User Accounts  
The guest only has read access for most configuration parameters. However, the  
administrator has write access for all parameters governing the onboard agent. You  
should therefore assign a new administrator password as soon as possible, and  
store it in a safe place.  
The default guest name is “guest” with the password “guest.” The default  
administrator name is “admin” with the password “admin.”  
Command Attributes  
Account List – Displays the current list of user accounts and associated access  
levels. (Defaults: admin, and guest)  
3-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
User Authentication  
3
New Account – Displays configuration settings for a new account.  
- User Name – The name of the user.  
(Maximum length: 8 characters)  
- Access Level – Specifies the user level.  
(Options: Normal and Privileged)  
- Password – Specifies the user password.  
(Range: 0-8 characters plain text, case sensitive)  
Change Password – Sets a new password for the specified user name.  
• Add/Remove – Adds or removes an account from the list.  
Web – Click Security, User Accounts. To configure a new user account, specify a  
user name, select the user’s access level, then enter a password and confirm it.  
Click Add to save the new user account and add it to the Account List. To change the  
password for a specific user, enter the user name and new password, confirm the  
password by entering it again, then click Apply.  
Figure 3-33 Access Levels  
CLI – Assign a user name to access-level 15 (i.e., administrator), then specify the  
password.  
Console(config)#username bob access-level 15  
Console(config)#username bob password 0 smith  
Console(config)#  
3-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Configuring Local/Remote Logon Authentication  
Use the Authentication Settings menu to restrict management access based on  
specified user names and passwords. You can manually configure access rights on  
the switch, or you can use a remote access authentication server based on RADIUS  
or TACACS+ protocols.  
Remote Authentication Dial-in  
User Service (RADIUS) and  
Terminal Access Controller  
Access Control System Plus  
Web  
Telnet  
console  
(TACACS+) are logon  
authentication protocols that  
use software running on a  
central server to control  
access to RADIUS-aware or  
TACACS-aware devices on the  
network. An authentication  
server contains a database of  
1. Client attempts management access.  
2. Switch contacts authentication server.  
3. Authentication server challenges client.  
4. Client responds with proper password or key.  
5. Authentication server approves access.  
6. Switch grants management access.  
RADIUS/  
TACACS+  
server  
multiple user name/password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user  
that requires management access to the switch.  
RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS+ uses TCP. UDP only offers best effort delivery,  
while TCP offers a connection-oriented transport. Also, note that RADIUS encrypts  
only the password in the access-request packet from the client to the server, while  
TACACS+ encrypts the entire body of the packet.  
Command Usage  
• By default, management access is always checked against the authentication  
database stored on the local switch. If a remote authentication server is used, you  
must specify the authentication sequence and the corresponding parameters for  
the remote authentication protocol. Local and remote logon authentication control  
management access via the console port, web browser, or Telnet.  
• RADIUS and TACACS+ logon authentication assign a specific privilege level for  
each user name/password pair. The user name, password, and privilege level  
must be configured on the authentication server.  
• You can specify up to three authentication methods for any user to indicate the  
authentication sequence. For example, if you select (1) RADIUS, (2) TACACS and  
(3) Local, the user name and password on the RADIUS server is verified first. If the  
RADIUS server is not available, then authentication is attempted using the  
TACACS+ server, and finally the local user name and password is checked.  
3-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
User Authentication  
3
Command Attributes  
Authentication – Select the authentication, or authentication sequence required:  
- Local – User authentication is performed only locally by the switch.  
- Radius – User authentication is performed using a RADIUS server only.  
- TACACS – User authentication is performed using a TACACS+ server only.  
- [authentication sequence] – User authentication is performed by up to three  
authentication methods in the indicated sequence.  
• RADIUS Settings  
- Global – Provides globally applicable RADIUS settings.  
- ServerIndex – Specifies one of five RADIUS servers that may be configured.  
The switch attempts authentication using the listed sequence of servers. The  
process ends when a server either approves or denies access to a user.  
- Server IP Address – Address of authentication server. (Default: 10.1.0.1)  
- Server Port Number – Network (UDP) port of authentication server used for  
authentication messages. (Range: 1-65535; Default: 1812)  
- Secret Text String – Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for  
client. Do not use blank spaces in the string. (Maximum length: 20 characters)  
- Number of Server Transmits – Number of times the switch tries to authenticate  
logon access via the authentication server. (Range: 1-30; Default: 2)  
- Timeout for a reply – The number of seconds the switch waits for a reply from  
the RADIUS server before it resends the request. (Range: 1-65535; Default: 5)  
• TACACS Settings  
- Server IP Address – Address of the TACACS+ server. (Default: 10.11.12.13)  
- Server Port Number – Network (TCP) port of TACACS+ server used for  
authentication messages. (Range: 1-65535; Default: 49)  
- Secret Text String – Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for  
client. Do not use blank spaces in the string. (Maximum length: 20 characters)  
Note: The local switch user database has to be set up by manually entering user names  
and passwords using the CLI. (See “username” on page 4-27.)  
3-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Web – Click Security, Authentication Settings. To configure local or remote  
authentication preferences, specify the authentication sequence (i.e., one to three  
methods), fill in the parameters for RADIUS or TACACS+ authentication if selected,  
and click Apply.  
Figure 3-34 Authentication Settings  
CLI – Specify all the required parameters to enable logon authentication.  
Console(config)#authentication login radius  
Console(config)#radius-server port 181  
Console(config)#radius-server key green  
Console(config)#radius-server retransmit 5  
Console(config)#radius-server timeout 10  
Console(config)#radius-server 1 host 192.168.1.25  
Console(config)#end  
Console#show radius-server  
Remote RADIUS server configuration:  
Global settings:  
Communication key with RADIUS server: *****  
Server port number:  
Retransmit times:  
Request timeout:  
181  
5
10  
Server 1:  
Server IP address: 192.168.1.25  
Communication key with RADIUS server: *****  
Server port number: 1812  
Retransmit times: 2  
Request timeout: 5  
3-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User Authentication  
3
Console#configure  
Console(config)#authentication login tacacs  
Console(config)#tacacs-server host 10.20.30.40  
Console(config)#tacacs-server port 200  
Console(config)#tacacs-server key green  
Console#show tacacs-server  
Server IP address: 10.20.30.40  
Communication key with tacacs server: *****  
Server port number: 200  
Console(config)#  
Configuring HTTPS  
You can configure the switch to enable the Secure Hypertext Transfer Protocol  
(HTTPS) over the Secure Socket Layer (SSL), providing secure access (i.e., an  
encrypted connection) to the switch’s web interface.  
Command Usage  
• Both the HTTP and HTTPS service can be enabled independently on the switch.  
However, you cannot configure both services to use the same UDP port.  
• If you enable HTTPS, you must indicate this in the URL that you specify in your  
browser: https://device[:port_number]  
• When you start HTTPS, the connection is established in this way:  
- The client authenticates the server using the server’s digital certificate.  
- The client and server negotiate a set of security protocols to use for the  
connection.  
- The client and server generate session keys for encrypting and decrypting data.  
• The client and server establish a secure encrypted connection.  
A padlock icon should appear in the status bar for Internet Explorer 5.x or above  
and Netscape Navigator 6.2 or above.  
• The following web browsers and operating systems currently support HTTPS:  
Table 3-6 HTTPS System Support  
Web Browser  
Operating System  
Internet Explorer 5.0 or later  
Windows 98,Windows NT (with service pack 6a),  
Windows 2000, Windows XP  
Netscape Navigator 6.2 or later  
Windows 98,Windows NT (with service pack 6a),  
Windows 2000, Windows XP, Solaris 2.6  
• To specify a secure-site certificate, see “Replacing the Default Secure-site  
Command Attributes  
HTTPS Status – Allows you to enable/disable the HTTPS server feature on the  
switch.  
(Default: Enabled)  
Change HTTPS Port Number – Specifies the UDP port number used for HTTPS/  
SSL connection to the switch’s web interface. (Default: Port 443)  
3-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the Switch  
3
Web – Click Security, HTTPS Settings. Enable HTTPS and specify the port number,  
then click Apply.  
Figure 3-35 HTTPS Settings  
CLI – This example enables the HTTP secure server and modifies the port number.  
Console(config)#ip http secure-server  
Console(config)#ip http secure-port 443  
Console(config)#  
Replacing the Default Secure-site Certificate  
When you log onto the web interface using HTTPS (for secure access), a Secure  
Sockets Layer (SSL) certificate appears for the switch. By default, the certificate that  
Netscape and Internet Explorer display will be associated with a warning that the  
site is not recognized as a secure site. This is because the certificate has not been  
signed by an approved certification authority. If you want this warning to be replaced  
by a message confirming that the connection to the switch is secure, you must  
obtain a unique certificate and a private key and password from a recognized  
certification authority.  
Caution: For maximum security, we recommend you obtain a unique Secure Sockets  
Layer certificate at the earliest opportunity. This is because the default  
certificate for the switch is not unique to the hardware you have purchased.  
When you have obtained these, place them on your TFTP server, and use the  
following command at the switch's command-line interface to replace the default  
(unrecognized) certificate with an authorized one:  
Console#copy tftp https-certificate  
TFTP server ip address: <server ip-address>  
Source certificate file name: <certificate file name>  
Source private file name: <private key file name>  
Private password: <password for private key>  
Note: The switch must be reset for the new certificate to be activated. To reset the  
switch, type: Console#reload  
3-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
User Authentication  
3
Configuring the Secure Shell  
The Berkley-standard includes remote access tools originally designed for Unix  
systems. Some of these tools have also been implemented for Microsoft Windows  
and other environments. These tools, including commands such as rlogin (remote  
login), rsh (remote shell), and rcp (remote copy), are not secure from hostile attacks.  
The Secure Shell (SSH) includes server/client applications intended as a secure  
replacement for the older Berkley remote access tools. SSH can also provide  
remote management access to this switch as a secure replacement for Telnet.  
When the client contacts the switch via the SSH protocol, the switch generates a  
public-key that the client uses along with a local user name and password for access  
authentication. SSH also encrypts all data transfers passing between the switch and  
SSH-enabled management station clients, and ensures that data traveling over the  
network arrives unaltered.  
Note that you need to install an SSH client on the management station to access the  
switch for management via the SSH protocol.  
Note: The switch supports both SSH Version 1.5 and 2.0.  
Command Usage  
The SSH server on this switch supports both password and public key  
authentication. If password authentication is specified by the SSH client, then the  
password can be authenticated either locally or via a RADIUS or TACACS+ remote  
authentication server, as specified on the Authentication Settings page  
(page 3-56). If public key authentication is specified by the client, then you must  
configure authentication keys on both the client and the switch as described in the  
following section. Note that regardless of whether you use public key or password  
authentication, you still have to generate authentication keys on the switch (SSH  
Host Key Settings) and enable the SSH server (Authentication Settings).  
To use the SSH server, complete these steps:  
1. Generate a Host Key Pair – On the SSH Host Key Settings page, create a host  
public/private key pair.  
2. Provide Host Public Key to Clients – Many SSH client programs automatically  
import the host public key during the initial connection setup with the switch.  
Otherwise, you need to manually create a known hosts file on the management  
station and place the host public key in it. An entry for a public key in the known  
hosts file would appear similar to the following example:  
10.1.0.54 1024 35 15684995401867669259333946775054617325313674890836547254  
15020245593199868544358361651999923329781766065830956 10825913212890233  
76546801726272571413428762941301196195566782 59566410486957427888146206  
51941746772984865468615717739390164779355942303577413098022737087794545  
24083971752646358058176716709574804776117  
3-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the Switch  
3
3. Import Client’s Public Key to the Switch – Use the copy tftp public-key  
command (page 4-70) to copy a file containing the public key for all the SSH  
client’s granted management access to the switch. (Note that these clients  
must be configured locally on the switch via the User Accounts page as  
described on page 3-54.) The clients are subsequently authenticated using  
these keys. The current firmware only accepts public key files based on  
standard UNIX format as shown in the following example for an RSA Version 1  
key:  
1024 35 1341081685609893921040944920155425347631641921872958921143173880  
05553616163105177594083868631109291232226828519254374603100937187721199  
69631781366277414168985132049117204830339254324101637997592371449011938  
00609025394840848271781943722884025331159521348610229029789827213532671  
31629432532818915045306393916643 steve@192.168.1.19  
4. Set the Optional Parameters – On the SSH Settings page, configure the  
optional parameters, including the authentication timeout, the number of retries,  
and the server key size.  
5. Enable SSH Service – On the SSH Settings page, enable the SSH server on  
the switch.  
6. Challenge-Response Authentication – When an SSH client attempts to contact  
the switch, the SSH server uses the host key pair to negotiate a session key  
and encryption method. Only clients that have a private key corresponding to  
the public keys stored on the switch can access. The following exchanges take  
place during this process:  
a. The client sends its public key to the switch.  
b. The switch compares the client's public key to those stored in memory.  
c. If a match is found, the switch uses the public key to encrypt a random  
sequence of bytes, and sends this string to the client.  
d. The client uses its private key to decrypt the bytes, and sends the  
decrypted bytes back to the switch.  
e. The switch compares the decrypted bytes to the original bytes it sent. If the  
two sets match, this means that the client's private key corresponds to an  
authorized public key, and the client is authenticated.  
Notes: 1. To use SSH with only password authentication, the host public key must still  
be given to the client, either during initial connection or manually entered into  
the known host file. However, you do not need to configure the client’s keys.  
2. The SSH server supports up to four client sessions. The maximum number  
of client sessions includes both current Telnet sessions and SSH sessions.  
3-62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User Authentication  
3
Generating the Host Key Pair  
A host public/private key pair is used to provide secure communications between an  
SSH client and the switch. After generating this key pair, you must provide the host  
public key to SSH clients and import the client’s public key to the switch as  
described in the proceeding section (Command Usage).  
Field Attributes  
Public-Key of Host-Key – The public key for the host.  
- RSA (Version 1): The first field indicates the size of the host key (e.g., 1024), the  
second field is the encoded public exponent (e.g., 65537), and the last string is  
the encoded modulus.  
- DSA (Version 2): The first field indicates that the encryption method used by  
SSH is based on the Digital Signature Standard (DSS). The last string is the  
encoded modulus.  
Host-Key Type – The key type used to generate the host key pair (i.e., public and  
private keys). (Range: RSA (Version 1), DSA (Version 2), Both: Default: RSA)  
The SSH server uses RSA or DSA for key exchange when the client first  
establishes a connection with the switch, and then negotiates with the client to  
select either DES (56-bit) or 3DES (168-bit) for data encryption.  
Save Host-Key from Memory to Flash – Saves the host key from RAM (i.e.,  
volatile memory to flash memory. Otherwise, the host key pair is stored to RAM by  
default. Note that you must select this item prior to generating the host-key pair.  
Generate – This button is used to generate the host key pair. Note that you must  
first generate the host key pair before you can enable the SSH server on the SSH  
Server Settings page.  
Clear – This button clears the host key from both volatile memory (RAM) and  
non-volatile memory (Flash).  
3-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Web – Click Security, SSH, Host-Key Settings. Select the host-key type from the  
drop-down box, select the option to save the host key from memory to flash (if  
required) prior to generating the key, and then click Generate.  
Figure 3-36 SSH Host-Key Settings  
CLI – This example generates a host-key pair using both the RSA and DSA  
algorithms, stores the keys to flash memory, and then displays the host’s public keys.  
Console#ip ssh crypto host-key generate  
Console#ip ssh save host-key  
Console#show public-key host  
Host:  
RSA:  
1024 65537 127250922544926402131336514546131189679055192360076028653006761  
82409690947448320102524878965977592168322225584652387791546479807396314033  
86925793105105765212243052807865885485789272602937866089236841423275912127  
60325919683697053439336438445223335188287173896894511729290510813919642025  
190932104328579045764891  
DSA:  
ssh-dssAAAAB3NzaC1kc3MAAACBAN6zwIqCqDb3869jYVXlME1sHL0EcE/Re6hlasfEthIwmj  
hLY4O0jqJZpcEQUgCfYlum0Y2uoLka+Py9ieGWQ8f2gobUZKIICuKg6vjO9XTs7XKc05xfzkBi  
KviDa+2OrIz6UK+6vFOgvUDFedlnixYTVo+h5v8r0ea2rpnO6DkZAAAAFQCNZn/x17dwpW8RrV  
DQnSWw4Qk+6QAAAIEAptkGeB6B5hwagH4gUOCY6i1TmrmSiJgfwO9OqRPUMbCAkCC+uzxatOo7  
drnIZypMx+Sx5RUdMGgKS+9ywsa1cWqHeFY5ilc3lDCNBueeLykZzVS+RS+azTKIk/zrJh8GLG  
Nq375R55yRxFvmcGIn/Q7IphPqyJ3o9MK8LFDfmJEAAACAL8A6tESiswP2OFqX7VGoEbzVDSOI  
RTMFy3iUXtvGyQAOVSy67Mfc3lMtgqPRUOYXDiwIBp5NXgilCg5z7VqbmRm28mWc5a//f8TUAg  
PNWKV6W0hqmshQdotVzDR1e+XKNTZj0uTwWfjO5Kytdn4MdoTHgrbl/DMdAfjnte8MZZs=  
Console#  
3-64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User Authentication  
3
Configuring the SSH Server  
The SSH server includes basic settings for authentication.  
Field Attributes  
SSH Server Status – Allows you to enable/disable the SSH server on the switch.  
(Default: Disabled)  
Version – The Secure Shell version number. Version 2.0 is displayed, but the  
switch supports management access via either SSH Version 1.5 or 2.0 clients.  
SSH Authentication Timeout – Specifies the time interval in seconds that the  
SSH server waits for a response from a client during an authentication attempt.  
(Range: 1-120 seconds; Default: 120 seconds)  
SSH Authentication Retries – Specifies the number of authentication attempts  
that a client is allowed before authentication fails and the client has to restart the  
authentication process. (Range: 1-5 times; Default: 3)  
SSH Server-Key Size – Specifies the SSH server key size.  
(Range: 512-896 bits; Default:768)  
- The server key is a private key that is never shared outside the switch.  
- The host key is shared with the SSH client, and is fixed at 1024 bits.  
Web – Click Security, SSH, Settings. Enable SSH and adjust the authentication  
parameters as required, then click Apply. Note that you must first generate the host  
key pair on the SSH Host-Key Settings page before you can enable the SSH server.  
Figure 3-37 SSH Server Settings  
3-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
CLI – This example enables SSH, sets the authentication parameters, and displays  
the current configuration. It shows that the administrator has made a connection via  
SHH, and then disables this connection.  
Console(config)#ip ssh server  
Console(config)#ip ssh timeout 100  
Console(config)#ip ssh authentication-retries 5  
Console(config)#ip ssh server-key size 512  
Console(config)#end  
Console#show ip ssh  
SSH Enabled - version 2.0  
Negotiation timeout: 120 secs; Authentication retries: 5  
Server key size: 512 bits  
Console#show ssh  
Connection Version State  
2.0 Session-Started  
Username Encryption  
0
admin  
ctos aes128-cbc-hmac-md5  
stoc aes128-cbc-hmac-md5  
Console#disconnect 0  
Console#  
Configuring Port Security  
Port security is a feature that allows you to configure a switch port with one or more  
device MAC addresses that are authorized to access the network through that port.  
When port security is enabled on a port, the switch stops learning new MAC  
addresses on the specified port when it has reached a configured maximum  
number. Only incoming traffic with source addresses already stored in the dynamic  
or static address table will be accepted as authorized to access the network through  
that port. If a device with an unauthorized MAC address attempts to use the switch  
port, the intrusion will be detected and the switch can automatically take action by  
disabling the port and sending a trap message.  
To use port security, specify a maximum number of addresses to allow on the port  
and then let the switch dynamically learn the <source MAC address, VLAN> pair for  
frames received on the port. Note that you can also manually add secure addresses  
to the port using the Static Address Table (page 3-114). When the port has reached  
the maximum number of MAC addresses the selected port will stop learning. The  
MAC addresses already in the address table will be retained and will not age out.  
Any other device that attempts to use the port will be prevented from accessing the  
switch.  
Command Usage  
• A secure port has the following restrictions:  
- Cannot use port monitoring.  
- Cannot be a multi-VLAN port.  
- It cannot be used as a member of a static or dynamic trunk.  
- It should not be connected to a network interconnection device.  
• The default maximum number of MAC addresses allowed on a secure port is zero.  
You must configure a maximum address count from 1 - 1024 for the port to allow  
access.  
3-66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
User Authentication  
3
• If a port is disabled (shut down) due to a security violation, it must be manually  
re-enabled from the Port/Port Configuration page (page 3-91).  
Command Attributes  
• Port – Port number.  
Name – Descriptive text (page 4-132).  
Action – Indicates the action to be taken when a port security violation is detected:  
- None: No action should be taken. (This is the default.)  
- Trap: Send an SNMP trap message.  
- Shutdown: Disable the port.  
- Trap and Shutdown: Send an SNMP trap message and disable the port.  
Security Status – Enables or disables port security on the port. (Default: Disabled)  
Max MAC Count – The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned  
on a port. (Range: 0 - 1024, where 0 means disabled)  
Trunk – Trunk number if port is a member (page 3-94 and 3-95).  
Web – Click Security, Port Security. Mark the checkbox in the Status column to  
enable security for a port, set the maximum number of MAC addresses allowed on a  
port, and click Apply.  
Figure 3-38 Configuring Port Security  
CLI – This example selects the target port, sets the port security action to send a  
trap and disable the port and sets the maximum MAC addresses allowed on the  
port, and then enables port security for the port.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5  
Console(config-if)#port security action trap-and-shutdown  
Console(config-if)#port security max-mac-count 20  
Console(config-if)#port security  
Console(config-if)#  
3-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Configuring 802.1X Port Authentication  
Network switches can provide open and easy access to network resources by  
simply attaching a client PC. Although this automatic configuration and access is a  
desirable feature, it also allows unauthorized personnel to easily intrude and  
possibly gain access to sensitive network data.  
The IEEE 802.1X (dot1X) standard defines a port-based access control procedure  
that prevents unauthorized access to a network by requiring users to first submit  
credentials for authentication. Access to all switch ports in a network can be  
centrally controlled from a server, which means that authorized users can use the  
same credentials for authentication from any point within the network.  
This switch uses the  
Extensible Authentication  
Protocol over LANs (EAPOL)  
to exchange authentication  
802.1x  
client  
protocol messages with the  
client, and a remote RADIUS  
authentication server to verify  
user identity and access  
rights. When a client  
(i.e., Supplicant) connects to  
a switch port, the switch  
1. Client attempts to access a switch port.  
2. Switch sends client an identity request.  
3. Client sends back identity information.  
RADIUS  
4. Switch forwards this to authentication server.  
5. Authentication server challenges client.  
server  
6. Client responds with proper credentials.  
7. Authentication server approves access.  
8. Switch grants client access to this port.  
(i.e., Authenticator) responds with an EAPOL identity request. The client provides its  
identity (such as a user name) in an EAPOL response to the switch, which it  
forwards to the RADIUS server. The RADIUS server verifies the client identity and  
sends an access challenge back to the client. The EAP packet from the RADIUS  
server contains not only the challenge, but the authentication method to be used.  
The client can reject the authentication method and request another, depending on  
the configuration of the client software and the RADIUS server. The encryption  
method used to pass authentication messages can be MD5 (Message-Digest 5),  
TLS (Transport Layer Security), TTLS (Tunneled Transport Layer Security), or  
PEAP (Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol). The client responds to the  
appropriate method with its credentials, such as a password or certificate. The  
RADIUS server verifies the client credentials and responds with an accept or reject  
packet. If authentication is successful, the switch allows the client to access the  
network. Otherwise, network access is denied and the port remains blocked.  
The operation of 802.1X on the switch requires the following:  
• The switch must have an IP address assigned.  
• RADIUS authentication must be enabled on the switch and the IP address of the  
RADIUS server specified.  
• 802.1X must be enabled globally for the switch.  
• Each switch port that will be used must be set to dot1X “Auto” mode.  
• Each client that needs to be authenticated must have dot1X client software  
installed and properly configured.  
3-68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
User Authentication  
3
• The RADIUS server and 802.1X client support EAP. (The switch only supports  
EAPOL in order to pass the EAP packets from the server to the client.)  
• The RADIUS server and client also have to support the same EAP encryption  
method for passing authentication messages – MD5, TLS, TTLS, PEAP. Native  
support for these encryption methods is provided in Windows XP, and in Windows  
2000 with Service Pack 4. To support these encryption methods in Windows 95  
and 98, you can use the AEGIS dot1x client or other comparable client software.  
Displaying 802.1X Global Settings  
The 802.1X protocol provides client authentication.  
Command Attributes  
802.1X System Authentication Control – The global setting for 802.1X.  
Web – Click Security, 802.1X, Information.  
Figure 3-39 802.1X Global Information  
CLI – This example shows the default global setting for 802.1X.  
Console#show dot1x  
Global 802.1X Parameters  
system-auth-control: enable  
802.1X Port Summary  
Port Name Status  
Operation Mode  
Single-Host  
Single-Host  
Mode  
ForceAuthorized  
ForceAuthorized  
Authorized  
n/a  
n/a  
1/1  
disabled  
disabled  
1/2  
.
.
.
802.1X Port Details  
802.1X is disabled on port 1/1  
.
.
.
802.1X is disabled on port 1/52  
.
Console#  
3-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
Configuring 802.1X Global Settings  
The 802.1X protocol includes port authentication. The 802.1X protocol must be  
enabled globally for the switch system before port settings are active.  
Command Attributes  
802.1X System Authentication Control – Sets the global setting for 802.1X.  
(Default: Disabled)  
Web – Select Security, 802.1X, Configuration. Enable 802.1X globally for the switch,  
and click Apply.  
Figure 3-40 802.1X Configuration  
CLI – This example enables 802.1X globally for the switch.  
Console(config)#dot1x system-auth-control  
Console(config)#  
Configuring Port Settings for 802.1X  
When 802.1X is enabled, you need to configure the parameters for the  
authentication process that runs between the client and the switch (i.e.,  
authenticator), as well as the client identity lookup process that runs between the  
switch and authentication server. These parameters are described in this section.  
Command Attributes  
Port – Port number.  
Status – Indicates if authentication is enabled or disabled on the port.  
(Default: Disabled)  
• Operation Mode – Allows single or multiple hosts (clients) to connect to an  
802.1X-authorized port. (Options: Single-Host, Multi-Host; Default: Single-Host)  
• Max Count – The maximum number of hosts that can connect to a port when the  
Multi-Host operation mode is selected. (Range: 1-1024; Default: 5)  
Mode – Sets the authentication mode to one of the following options:  
- Auto – Requires a dot1x-aware client to be authorized by the authentication  
server. Clients that are not dot1x-aware will be denied access.  
- Force-Authorized – Forces the port to grant access to all clients, either  
dot1x-aware or otherwise. (This is the default setting.)  
- Force-Unauthorized – Forces the port to deny access to all clients, either  
dot1x-aware or otherwise.  
3-70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
User Authentication  
3
Re-authen – Sets the client to be re-authenticated after the interval specified by  
the Re-authentication Period. Re-authentication can be used to detect if a new  
device is plugged into a switch port. (Default: Disabled)  
Max-Req – Sets the maximum number of times the switch port will retransmit an  
EAP request packet to the client before it times out the authentication session.  
(Range: 1-10; Default 2)  
Quiet Period – Sets the time that a switch port waits after the Max Request Count  
has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client.  
(Range: 1-65535 seconds; Default: 60 seconds)  
• Re-authen Period – Sets the time period after which a connected client must be  
re-authenticated. (Range: 1-65535 seconds; Default: 3600 seconds)  
TX Period – Sets the time period during an authentication session that the switch  
waits before re-transmitting an EAP packet. (Range: 1-65535; Default: 30 seconds)  
Authorized –  
- Yes – Connected client is authorized.  
- No – Connected client is not authorized.  
- Blank – Displays nothing when dot1x is disabled on a port.  
Supplicant – Indicates the MAC address of a connected client.  
Trunk – Indicates if the port is configured as a trunk port.  
Web – Click Security, 802.1X, Port Configuration. Modify the parameters required,  
and click Apply.  
Figure 3-41 802.1X Port Configuration  
3-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
CLI – This example sets the 802.1X parameters on port 2. For a description of the  
additional fields displayed in this example, see “show dot1x” on page 4-90.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2  
Console(config-if)#dot1x port-control auto  
Console(config-if)#dot1x re-authentication  
Console(config-if)#dot1x max-req 5  
Console(config-if)#dot1x timeout quiet-period 30  
Console(config-if)#dot1x timeout re-authperiod 1800  
Console(config-if)#dot1x timeout tx-period 40  
Console(config-if)#exit  
Console(config)#exit  
Console#show dot1x  
Global 802.1X Parameters  
system-auth-control: enable  
802.1X Port Summary  
Port Name Status  
Operation Mode  
Single-Host  
Single-Host  
Mode  
ForceAuthorized  
auto  
Authorized  
n/a  
yes  
1/1  
disabled  
1/2  
.
enabled  
.
.
1/52  
disabled  
Single-Host  
ForceAuthorized  
n/a  
802.1X Port Details  
802.1X is disabled on port 1/1  
802.1X is enabled on port 1/2  
reauth-enabled: Enable  
reauth-period: 1800  
quiet-period:  
tx-period:  
30  
40  
supplicant-timeout:  
server-timeout: 10  
30  
reauth-max:  
max-req:  
2
5
Status  
Authorized  
Operation mode  
Max count  
Single-Host  
5
Port-control  
Supplicant  
Auto  
00-00-e8-49-5e-dc  
Current Identifier 3  
Authenticator State Machine  
State  
Authenticated  
Reauth Count  
0
Backend State Machine  
State  
Idle  
Request Count  
0
Identifier(Server) 2  
Reauthentication State Machine  
State  
Initialize  
.
.
.
802.1X is disabled on port 1/52  
Console#  
3-72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User Authentication  
3
Displaying 802.1X Statistics  
This switch can display statistics for dot1x protocol exchanges for any port.  
Table 3-7 802.1X Statistics  
Parameter  
Description  
Rx EAPOL Start  
The number of EAPOL Start frames that have been received by this  
Authenticator.  
Rx EAPOL Logoff  
Rx EAPOL Invalid  
Rx EAPOL Total  
Rx EAP Resp/Id  
Rx EAP Resp/Oth  
Rx EAP LenError  
Rx Last EAPOLVer  
Rx Last EAPOLSrc  
Tx EAPOL Total  
Tx EAP Req/Id  
The number of EAPOL Logoff frames that have been received by this  
Authenticator.  
The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this  
Authenticator in which the frame type is not recognized.  
The number of valid EAPOL frames of any type that have been received  
by this Authenticator.  
The number of EAP Resp/Id frames that have been received by this  
Authenticator.  
The number of valid EAP Response frames (other than Resp/Id frames)  
that have been received by this Authenticator.  
The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this  
Authenticator in which the Packet Body Length field is invalid.  
The protocol version number carried in the most recently received EAPOL  
frame.  
The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL  
frame.  
The number of EAPOL frames of any type that have been transmitted by  
this Authenticator.  
The number of EAP Req/Id frames that have been transmitted by this  
Authenticator.  
Tx EAP Req/Oth  
The number of EAP Request frames (other than Rq/Id frames) that have  
been transmitted by this Authenticator.  
3-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
Web – Select Security, 802.1X, Statistics. Select the required port and then click  
Query. Click Refresh to update the statistics.  
Figure 3-42 Displaying 802.1X Port Statistics  
CLI – This example displays the 802.1X statistics for port 4.  
Console#show dot1x statistics interface ethernet 1/4  
Eth 1/4  
Rx: EAPOL  
EAPOL  
Logoff  
0
EAPOL  
Invalid  
0
EAPOL  
Total  
1007  
EAP  
Resp/Id Resp/Oth LenError  
672  
EAP  
EAP  
Start  
2
0
0
Last  
EAPOLVer  
1
Last  
EAPOLSrc  
00-00-E8-98-73-21  
Tx: EAPOL  
Total  
EAP  
Req/Id  
1005  
EAP  
Req/Oth  
0
2017  
Console#  
MAC Address Authentication  
Some devices connected to switch ports may not be able to support 802.1X  
authentication due to hardware or software limitations. This is often true for devices  
such as network printers, IP phones, and some wireless access points. The switch  
enables network access from these devices to be controlled by authenticating  
device MAC addresses with a central RADIUS server.  
Note: MAC authentication, 802.1X, and port security cannot be configured together on  
the same port. Only one security mechanism can be applied.  
The Network Access feature controls host access to the network by authenticating  
its MAC address on the connected switch port. Traffic received from a specific MAC  
3-74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
User Authentication  
3
address is forwarded by the switch only if the source MAC address is successfully  
authenticated by a central RADIUS server. While authentication for a MAC address  
is in progress, all traffic is blocked until authentication is completed. On successful  
authentication, the RADIUS server may optionally assign VLAN settings for the  
switch port  
When enabled on a port interface, the authentication process sends a Password  
Authentication Protocol (PAP) request to a configured RADIUS server. The  
username and password are both equal to the MAC address being authenticated.  
On the RADIUS server, PAP username and passwords must be configured in the  
MAC address format XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX (all in upper case).  
Authenticated MAC addresses are stored as dynamic entries in the switch secure  
MAC address table and are removed when the aging time expires. The maximum  
number of secure MAC addresses supported for the switch system is 1024.  
Note: MAC authentication cannot be configured on trunk ports.  
The RADIUS server may optionally return a VLAN identifier list to be applied to the  
switch port. The following attributes need to be configured on the RADIUS server.  
Tunnel-Type = VLAN  
Tunnel-Medium-Type = 802  
Tunnel-Private-Group-ID = 1u,2t [VLAN ID list]  
The VLAN identifier list is carried in the RADIUS “Tunnel-Private-Group-ID” attribute.  
The VLAN list can contain multiple VLAN identifiers in the format “1u,2t,3u” where  
“u” indicates an untagged VLAN and “t” a tagged VLAN.  
Configuring the MAC Authentication Reauthentication Time  
MAC address authentication is configured on a per-port basis, however there are  
two configurable parameters that apply globally to all ports on the switch.  
Command Attributes  
Authenticated Age – The secure MAC address table aging time. This parameter  
setting is the same as switch MAC address table aging time and is only  
configurable from the Address Table, Aging Time web page (see page 3-117).  
(Default: 300 seconds)  
MAC Authentication Reauthentication Time – Sets the time period after which  
a connected MAC address must be re-authenticated. When the reauthentication  
time expires for a secure MAC address, it is reauthenticated with the RADIUS  
server. During the reauthentication process traffic through the port remains  
unaffected. (Default: 1800 seconds; Range: 120-1000000 seconds)  
3-75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Web – Click Security, Network Access, Configuration.  
Figure 3-43 Network Access Configuration  
CLI – This example sets and displays the reauthentication time.  
Console(config)#mac-authentication reauth-time 3000  
Console(config)#exit  
Console#show network-access interface ethernet 1/1  
Port:1/1  
--------------------------------------------------  
--------------------------------------------------  
MAC Authentication  
Maximum MAC Count  
:Disabled  
:1024  
Dynamic VLAN Assignment :Disabled  
Reauthentication Time  
Authenticated Age  
MAC Filter ID  
:3000  
:300  
:None  
Console#  
Configuring MAC Authentication for Ports  
Configures MAC authentication on switch ports, including setting the maximum MAC  
count, applying a MAC address filter, and enabling dynamic VLAN assignment.  
Command Attributes  
Mode – Enables MAC authentication on a port. (Default: None)  
Maximum MAC Count – Sets the maximum number of MAC addresses that can  
be authenticated on a port. The maximum number of MAC addresses per port is  
1024, and the maximum number of secure MAC addresses supported for the  
switch system is 1024. When the limit is reached, all new MAC addresses are  
treated as authentication failed. (Default: 1024; Range: 1 to 1024)  
MAC Filter ID – Applies a MAC address filter to a port interface. MAC address  
filters must first be created from the MAC Filter Configuration page. Only one filter  
can be applied to a port. (Default: No filters are applied)  
Dynamic VLAN – Enables dynamic VLAN assignment for an authenticated port.  
When enabled, any VLAN identifiers returned by the RADIUS server are applied to  
the port, providing the VLANs have already been created on the switch. (GVRP is  
not used to create the VLANs.) The VLAN settings specified by the first  
authenticated MAC address are implemented for a port. Other authenticated MAC  
address on the port must have same VLAN configuration, or they are treated as  
authentication failure. (Default: Disabled)  
3-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
User Authentication  
3
Note: MAC authentication cannot be configured on trunk ports. Ports configured as trunk  
members are indicated on the Network Access Port Configuration page in the  
“Trunk” column.  
Web – Click Security, Network Access, Port Configuration.  
Figure 3-44 Network Access Port Configuration  
CLI – This example configures MAC authentication for port 1.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1  
Console(config-if)#network-access mode mac-authentication  
Console(config-if)#network-access max-mac-count 10  
Console(config-if)#network-access port-mac-filter 5  
Console(config-if)#network-access dynamic-vlan  
Console(config-if)#end  
Console#show network-access interface ethernet 1/1  
Port:1/1  
--------------------------------------------------  
--------------------------------------------------  
MAC Authentication  
Maximum MAC Count  
:Enabled  
:10  
Dynamic VLAN Assignment :Enabled  
Reauthentication Time  
Authenticated Age  
MAC Filter ID  
:1800  
:300  
:5  
Console#  
Displaying Secure MAC Address Information  
Authenticated MAC addresses are stored in the secure MAC address table.  
Information on the secure MAC entries can be displayed and selected entries can be  
removed from the table.  
Command Attributes  
Network Access MAC Address Count – The number of MAC addresses  
currently in the secure MAC address table.  
3-77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
Query By – Specifies parameters to use in the MAC address query.  
Port – Specifies a port interface.  
MAC Address – Specifies a single MAC address information.  
Attribute – Displays static or dynamic addresses.  
Address Table Sort Key – Sorts the information displayed based on MAC  
address or port interface.  
Unit/Port – The port interface associated with a secure MAC address.  
MAC Address – The authenticated MAC address.  
RADIUS Server – The IP address of the RADIUS server that authenticated the  
MAC address.  
Time – The time when the MAC address was last authenticated.  
Attribute – Indicates a static or dynamic address.  
Remove – Click the Remove button to remove selected MAC addresses from the  
secure MAC address table.  
Web – Click Security, Network Access, MAC Address Information. Restrict the  
displayed addresses by port, MAC Address, or attribute, then select the method of  
sorting the displayed addresses. Click Query.  
Figure 3-45 Network Access MAC Address Information  
3-78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
User Authentication  
3
CLI – This example displays all entries currently in the secure MAC address table.  
Console#show network-access mac-address-table  
---- ----------------- --------------- --------- -------------------------  
Port MAC-Address RADIUS-Server Attribute Time  
---- ----------------- --------------- --------- -------------------------  
1/1 00-00-01-02-03-04 172.155.120.17 Static  
1/1 00-00-01-02-03-05 172.155.120.17 Dynamic  
1/1 00-00-01-02-03-06 172.155.120.17 Static  
1/3 00-00-01-02-03-07 172.155.120.17 Dynamic  
00d06h32m50s  
00d06h33m20s  
00d06h35m10s  
00d06h34m20s  
Console#  
Configuring MAC Address Filters  
MAC address filters are used to specify MAC addresses to be excluded from  
network access authentication. MAC addresses in a filter are not authenticated by a  
RADIUS server when seen on a port, the addresses are immediately added to the  
secure MAC address table.  
MAC address filters must first be created and assigned a filter ID, then the filter can  
be applied to a port interface. Multiple MAC addresses can be included in a filter, but  
only one filter can be applied to a port.  
Command Attributes  
Query – Display all current MAC address filters or a specific filter configuration.  
Add/Remove – Specify a filter ID and MAC address to create a filter. Specify the  
same filter ID with other MAC addresses to add them to the filter. Select an entry  
in the displayed list and click Remove to delete a MAC address from a filter.  
Filter ID – Specifies a filter to configure. (Range: 1 -64)  
MAC Address – Specifies a single MAC address to add to a filter.  
Web – Click Security, Network Access, MAC Filter Configuration.  
Figure 3-46 Network Access MAC Filter Configuration  
3-79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
CLI – This example configures filter ID 1 with three MAC addresses, then applies  
the filter to port 1.  
Console(config)#network-access mac-filter 1 00-12-34-56-78-9A  
Console(config)#network-access mac-filter 1 00-12-34-56-78-9B  
Console(config)#network-access mac-filter 1 00-12-34-56-78-9C  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1  
Console(config-if)#network-access port-mac-filter 1  
Console(config-if)#end  
Console#show network-access mac-filter 1  
--------- -----------------  
Filter-id MAC-Address  
--------- -----------------  
1
1
1
00-12-34-56-78-9A  
00-12-34-56-78-9B  
00-12-34-56-78-9C  
Console#  
Filtering Addresses for Management Access  
You create a list of up to 16 IP addresses or IP address groups that are allowed  
access to the switch through the web interface, SNMP, or Telnet.  
Command Usage  
• The management interfaces are open to all IP addresses by default. Once you add  
an entry to a filter list, access to that interface is restricted to the specified  
addresses.  
• If anyone tries to access a management interface on the switch from an invalid  
address, the switch will reject the connection, enter an event message in the  
system log, and send a trap message to the trap manager.  
• IP address can be configured for SNMP, web and Telnet access respectively. Each  
of these groups can include up to five different sets of addresses, either individual  
addresses or address ranges.  
• When entering addresses for the same group (i.e., SNMP, web or Telnet), the  
switch will not accept overlapping address ranges. When entering addresses for  
different groups, the switch will accept overlapping address ranges.  
• You cannot delete an individual address from a specified range. You must delete  
the entire range, and reenter the addresses.  
• You can delete an address range just by specifying the start address, or by  
specifying both the start address and end address.  
Command Attributes  
Web IP Filter – Configures IP address(es) for the web group.  
SNMP IP Filter – Configures IP address(es) for the SNMP group.  
Telnet IP Filter – Configures IP address(es) for the Telnet group.  
IP Filter List – IP address which are allowed management access to this interface.  
Start IP Address – A single IP address, or the starting address of a range.  
End IP Address – The end address of a range.  
Add/Remove Filtering Entry – Adds/removes an IP address from the list.  
3-80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
User Authentication  
3
Web – Click Security, IP Filter. Enter the IP addresses or range of addresses that  
are allowed management access to an interface, and click Add IP Filtering Entry to  
update the filter list.  
Figure 3-47 Creating a Web IP Filter List  
CLI – This example allows SNMP access for a specific client.  
Console(config)#management snmp-client 10.1.2.3  
Console(config)#end  
Console#show management all-client  
Management IP Filter  
HTTP-Client:  
Start IP address End IP address  
-----------------------------------------------  
1. 10.1.2.1  
10.1.2.254  
SNMP-Client:  
Start IP address End IP address  
-----------------------------------------------  
1. 10.1.2.3  
10.1.2.3  
TELNET-Client:  
Start IP address End IP address  
-----------------------------------------------  
Console#  
3-81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Access Control Lists  
Access Control Lists (ACL) provide packet filtering for IP frames (based on address,  
protocol, Layer 4 protocol port number or TCP control code) or any frames (based  
on MAC address or Ethernet type). To filter incoming packets, first create an access  
list, add the required rules and then bind the list to a specific port.  
Configuring Access Control Lists  
An ACL is a sequential list of permit or deny conditions that apply to IP addresses,  
MAC addresses, or other more specific criteria. This switch tests ingress or egress  
packets against the conditions in an ACL one by one. A packet will be accepted as  
soon as it matches a permit rule, or dropped as soon as it matches a deny rule. If no  
rules match for a list of all permit rules, the packet is dropped; and if no rules match  
for a list of all deny rules, the packet is accepted.  
Command Usage  
The following restrictions apply to ACLs:  
• Each ACL can have up to 32 rules.  
• The maximum number of ACLs is 88.  
• However, due to resource restrictions, the average number of rules bound to the  
ports should not exceed 20.  
• This switch supports ACLs for ingress filtering only. However, you can only bind  
one IP ACL to any port and one MAC ACL globally for ingress filtering. In other  
words, only two ACLs can be bound to an interface - Ingress IP ACL and Ingress  
MAC ACL.  
3-82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Access Control Lists  
3
The order in which active ACLs are checked is as follows:  
1. User-defined rules in the Ingress MAC ACL for ingress ports.  
2. User-defined rules in the Ingress IP ACL for ingress ports.  
3. Explicit default rule (permit any any) in the ingress IP ACL for ingress ports.  
4. Explicit default rule (permit any any) in the ingress MAC ACL for ingress ports.  
5. If no explicit rule is matched, the implicit default is permit all.  
Setting the ACL Name and Type  
Use the ACL Configuration page to designate the name and type of an ACL.  
Command Attributes  
Name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)  
Type – There are three filtering modes:  
- Standard: IP ACL mode that filters packets based on the source IP address.  
- Extended: IP ACL mode that filters packets based on source or destination IP  
address, as well as protocol type and protocol port number. If the “TCP” protocol  
is specified, then you can also filter packets based on the TCP control code.  
- MAC: MAC ACL mode that filters packets based on the source or destination  
MAC address and the Ethernet frame type (RFC 1060).  
Web – Click Security, ACL, Configuration. Enter an ACL name in the Name field,  
select the list type (IP Standard, IP Extended, or MAC), and click Add to open the  
configuration page for the new list.  
Figure 3-48 Selecting ACL Type  
CLI – This example creates a standard IP ACL named david.  
Console(config)#access-list ip standard david  
Console(config-std-acl)#  
3-83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Configuring the Switch  
3
Configuring a Standard IP ACL  
Command Attributes  
Action – An ACL can contain any combination of permit or deny rules.  
Address Type – Specifies the source IP address. Use “Any” to include all possible  
addresses, “Host” to specify a specific host address in the Address field, or “IP” to  
specify a range of addresses with the Address and SubMask fields.  
(Options: Any, Host, IP; Default: Any)  
IP Address – Source IP address.  
Subnet Mask – A subnet mask containing four integers from 0 to 255, each  
separated by a period. The mask uses 1 bits to indicate “match” and 0 bits to  
indicate “ignore.” The mask is bitwise ANDed with the specified source IP address,  
and compared with the address for each IP packet entering the port(s) to which this  
ACL has been assigned.  
Web – Specify the action (i.e., Permit or Deny). Select the address type (Any, Host,  
or IP). If you select “Host,” enter a specific address. If you select “IP,” enter a subnet  
address and the mask for an address range. Then click Add.  
Figure 3-49 ACL Configuration - Standard IP  
CLI – This example configures one permit rule for the specific address 10.1.1.21  
and another rule for the address range 168.92.16.x – 168.92.31.x using a bitmask.  
Console(config-std-acl)#permit host 10.1.1.21  
Console(config-std-acl)#permit 168.92.16.0 255.255.240.0  
Console(config-std-acl)#  
3-84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Access Control Lists  
3
Configuring an Extended IP ACL  
Command Attributes  
Action – An ACL can contain any combination of permit or deny rules.  
Source/Destination Address Type – Specifies the source or destination IP  
address. Use “Any” to include all possible addresses, “Host” to specify a specific  
host address in the Address field, or “IP” to specify a range of addresses with the  
Address and SubMask fields. (Options: Any, Host, IP; Default: Any)  
Source/Destination Address – Source or destination IP address.  
Source/Destination Subnet Mask – Subnet mask for source or destination  
address. (See the description for Subnet Mask on page 3-84.)  
Service Type – Packet priority settings based on the following criteria:  
- Precedence – IP precedence level. (Range: 0-7)  
- TOS – Type of Service level. (Range: 0-15)  
- DSCP – DSCP priority level. (Range: 0-63)  
Protocol – Specifies the protocol type to match as TCP, UDP or Others, where  
others indicates a specific protocol number (0-255). (Options: TCP, UDP, Others;  
Default: TCP)  
Source/Destination Port – Source/destination port number for the specified  
protocol type. (Range: 0-65535)  
Control Code – Decimal number (representing a bit string) that specifies flag bits  
in byte 14 of the TCP header. (Range: 0-63)  
Control Code Bitmask – Decimal number representing the code bits to match.  
The control bitmask is a decimal number (for an equivalent binary bit mask) that is  
applied to the control code. Enter a decimal number, where the equivalent binary  
bit “1” means to match a bit and “0” means to ignore a bit. The following bits may  
be specified:  
- 1 (fin) – Finish  
- 2 (syn) – Synchronize  
- 4 (rst) – Reset  
- 8 (psh) – Push  
- 16 (ack) – Acknowledgement  
- 32 (urg) – Urgent pointer  
For example, use the code value and mask below to catch packets with the  
following flags set:  
- SYN flag valid, use control-code 2, control bitmask 2  
- Both SYN and ACK valid, use control-code 18, control bitmask 18  
- SYN valid and ACK invalid, use control-code 2, control bitmask 18  
3-85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Web – Specify the action (i.e., Permit or Deny). Specify the source and/or  
destination addresses. Select the address type (Any, Host, or IP). If you select  
“Host,” enter a specific address. If you select “IP,” enter a subnet address and the  
mask for an address range. Set any other required criteria, such as service type,  
protocol type, or TCP control code. Then click Add.  
Figure 3-50 ACL Configuration - Extended IP  
CLI – This example adds two rules:  
(1) Accept any incoming packets if the source address is in subnet 10.7.1.x. For  
example, if the rule is matched; i.e., the rule (10.7.1.0 & 255.255.255.0) equals  
the masked address (10.7.1.2 & 255.255.255.0), the packet passes through.  
(2) Allow TCP packets from class C addresses 192.168.1.0 to any destination  
address when set for destination TCP port 80 (i.e., HTTP).  
(3) Permit all TCP packets from class C addresses 192.168.1.0 with the TCP control  
code set to “SYN.”  
Console(config-ext-acl)#permit 10.7.1.1 255.255.255.0 any  
Console(config-ext-acl)#permit tcp 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 any  
destination-port 80  
Console(config-ext-acl)#permit tcp 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 any  
control-flag 2 2  
Console(config-std-acl)#  
3-86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Access Control Lists  
3
Configuring a MAC ACL  
Command Attributes  
Action – An ACL can contain any combination of permit or deny rules.  
Source/Destination Address Type – Use “Any” to include all possible addresses,  
“Host” to indicate a specific MAC address, or “MAC” to specify an address range  
with the Address and Bitmask fields. (Options: Any, Host, MAC; Default: Any)  
Source/Destination MAC Address – Source or destination MAC address.  
Source/Destination Bitmask – Hexidecimal mask for source or destination MAC  
address.  
VID – VLAN ID. (Range: 1-4094)  
Ethernet Type – This option can only be used to filter Ethernet II formatted  
packets. (Range: 0-65535)  
A detailed listing of Ethernet protocol types can be found in RFC 1060. A few of the  
more common types include 0800 (IP), 0806 (ARP), 8137 (IPX).  
Web – Specify the action (i.e., Permit or Deny). Specify the source and/or  
destination addresses. Select the address type (Any, Host, or MAC). If you select  
“Host,” enter a specific address (e.g., 11-22-33-44-55-66). If you select “MAC,” enter  
a base address and a hexidecimal bitmask for an address range. Set any other  
required criteria, such as VID or Ethernet type. Then click Add.  
Figure 3-51 ACL Configuration - MAC  
CLI – This rule permits packets from any source MAC address to the destination  
address 00-e0-29-94-34-de where the Ethernet type is 0800.  
Console(config-mac-acl)#permit any host 00-e0-29-94-34-de  
ethertype 0800  
Console(config-mac-acl)#  
3-87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
Binding a Port to an Access Control List  
After configuring Access Control Lists (ACL), you should bind them to the ports that  
need to filter traffic. You can assign one IP access list to any port, but you can only  
assign one MAC access list to all the ports on the switch.  
Command Usage  
• You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port.  
• This switch only supports ACLs for ingress filtering. You can only bind one IP ACL  
to any port, and one MAC ACL globally, for ingress filtering.  
Command Attributes  
Port – Fixed port or SFP module. (Range: 1-26/52)  
IP – Specifies the IP Access List to enable for a port.  
MAC – Specifies the MAC Access List to enable globally.  
IN – ACL for ingress packets.  
ACL Name – Name of the ACL.  
Web – Click Security, ACL, Port Binding. Mark the Enabled field for the port you  
want to bind to an ACL, select the required ACL from the drop-down list, then click  
Apply.  
Figure 3-52 Binding a Port to an ACL  
3-88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Port Configuration  
3
CLI – This example assigns an IP and MAC access list to port 1, and an IP access  
list to port 3.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1  
Console(config-if)#ip access-group david in  
Console(config-if)#mac access-group jerry in  
Console(config-if)#exit  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3  
Console(config-if)#ip access-group david in  
Console(config-if)#  
Port Configuration  
Displaying Connection Status  
You can use the Port Information or Trunk Information pages to display the current  
connection status, including link state, speed/duplex mode, flow control, and  
auto-negotiation.  
Field Attributes (Web)  
Name – Interface label.  
Type – Indicates the port type. (100BASE-TX, 1000BASE-T, or SFP)  
Admin Status – Shows if the interface is enabled or disabled.  
Oper Status – Indicates if the link is Up or Down.  
Speed Duplex Status – Shows the current speed and duplex mode.  
(Auto, or fixed choice)  
Flow Control Status – Indicates the type of flow control currently in use.  
(IEEE 802.3x, Back-Pressure or None)  
Autonegotiation – Shows if auto-negotiation is enabled or disabled.  
6
Trunk Member – Shows if port is a trunk member.  
7
Creation – Shows if a trunk is manually configured or dynamically set via LACP.  
6. Port Information only.  
7. Trunk information only.  
3-89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configuring the Switch  
3
Web – Click Port, Port Information or Trunk Information.  
Figure 3-53 Displaying Port/Trunk Information  
Field Attributes (CLI)  
Basic Information:  
Port type – Indicates the port type. (100BASE-TX, 1000BASE-T, or SFP)  
MAC address – The physical layer address for this port. (To access this item on  
Configuration:  
Name – Interface label.  
Port admin – Shows if the interface is enabled or disabled (i.e., up or down).  
Speed-duplex – Shows the current speed and duplex mode. (Auto, or fixed choice)  
Capabilities – Specifies the capabilities to be advertised for a port during  
auto-negotiation. (To access this item on the web, see “Configuring Interface  
Connections” on page 3-48.) The following capabilities are supported.  
- 10half - Supports 10 Mbps half-duplex operation  
- 10full - Supports 10 Mbps full-duplex operation  
- 100half - Supports 100 Mbps half-duplex operation  
- 100full - Supports 100 Mbps full-duplex operation  
- 1000full - Supports 1000 Mbps full-duplex operation  
- Sym - Transmits and receives pause frames for flow control  
- FC - Supports flow control  
Broadcast storm – Shows if broadcast storm control is enabled or disabled.  
Broadcast storm limit – Shows the broadcast storm threshold.  
(64-95232000 octets per second)  
Flow control – Shows if flow control is enabled or disabled.  
LACP – Shows if LACP is enabled or disabled.  
Port Security – Shows if port security is enabled or disabled.  
3-90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Port Configuration  
3
Max MAC count – Shows the maximum number of MAC address that can be  
learned by a port. (0 - 1024 addresses)  
Port security action – Shows the response to take when a security violation is  
detected. (shutdown, trap, trap-and-shutdown, or none)  
Current Status:  
Link Status – Indicates if the link is up or down.  
Port Operation Status – Provides detailed information on port state.  
(Displayed only when the link is up.)  
Operation speed-duplex – Shows the current speed and duplex mode.  
Flow control type – Indicates the type of flow control currently in use.  
(IEEE 802.3x, Back-Pressure or none)  
CLI – This example shows the connection status for Port 5.  
Console#show interfaces status ethernet 1/5  
Information of Eth 1/5  
Basic information:  
Port type:  
Mac address:  
Configuration:  
Name:  
100TX  
00-30-f1-47-58-46  
Port admin:  
Speed-duplex:  
Capabilities:  
Broadcast storm:  
Up  
Auto  
10half, 10full, 100half, 100full  
Enabled  
Broadcast storm limit: 32000 octets/second  
Flow control:  
Lacp:  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
0
Port security:  
Max MAC count:  
Port security action:  
Current status:  
Link status:  
None  
Down  
Operation speed-duplex: 100full  
Flow control type: None  
Console#  
Configuring Interface Connections  
You can use the Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration page to enable/disable an  
interface, set auto-negotiation and the interface capabilities to advertise, or manually  
fix the speed, duplex mode, and flow control.  
Command Attributes  
Name – Allows you to label an interface. (Range: 1-64 characters)  
Admin – Allows you to manually disable an interface. You can disable an interface  
due to abnormal behavior (e.g., excessive collisions), and then reenable it after the  
problem has been resolved. You may also disable an interface for security  
reasons.  
Speed/Duplex – Allows you to manually set the port speed and duplex mode.  
(i.e., with auto-negotiation disabled)  
3-91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
Flow Control – Allows automatic or manual selection of flow control.  
Autonegotiation (Port Capabilities) – Allows auto-negotiation to be enabled/  
disabled. When auto-negotiation is enabled, you need to specify the capabilities to  
be advertised. When auto-negotiation is disabled, you can force the settings for  
speed, mode, and flow control.The following capabilities are supported.  
- 10half - Supports 10 Mbps half-duplex operation  
- 10full - Supports 10 Mbps full-duplex operation  
- 100half - Supports 100 Mbps half-duplex operation  
- 100full - Supports 100 Mbps full-duplex operation  
- 1000full - Supports 1000 Mbps full-duplex operation  
- Sym (Gigabit only) - Check this item to transmit and receive pause frames, or  
clear it to auto-negotiate the sender and receiver for asymmetric pause frames.  
(The current switch chip only supports symmetric pause frames.)  
- FC - Supports flow control  
Flow control can eliminate frame loss by “blocking” traffic from end stations or  
segments connected directly to the switch when its buffers fill. When enabled,  
back pressure is used for half-duplex operation and IEEE 802.3x for full-duplex  
operation. (Avoid using flow control on a port connected to a hub unless it is  
actually required to solve a problem. Otherwise back pressure jamming signals  
may degrade overall performance for the segment attached to the hub.)  
(Default: Autonegotiation enabled; Advertised capabilities for 100BASE-TX –  
10half, 10full, 100half, 100full; 1000BASE-T – 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full,  
1000full; 1000BASE-SX/LX/LH – 1000full)  
Trunk – Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk. To create trunks and select port  
Note: Auto-negotiation must be disabled before you can configure or force the interface  
to use the Speed/Duplex Mode or Flow Control options.  
Web – Click Port, Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration. Modify the required  
interface settings, and click Apply.  
Figure 3-54 Port/Trunk Configuration  
3-92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Port Configuration  
3
CLI – Select the interface, and then enter the required settings.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/13  
Console(config-if)#description RD SW#13  
Console(config-if)#shutdown  
.
Console(config-if)#no shutdown  
Console(config-if)#no negotiation  
Console(config-if)#speed-duplex 100half  
Console(config-if)#flowcontrol  
.
Console(config-if)#negotiation  
Console(config-if)#capabilities 100half  
Console(config-if)#capabilities 100full  
Console(config-if)#capabilities flowcontrol  
Creating Trunk Groups  
You can create multiple links between devices that work as one virtual, aggregate  
link. A port trunk offers a dramatic increase in bandwidth for network segments  
where bottlenecks exist, as well as providing a fault-tolerant link between two  
devices. You can create up to four trunks at a time.  
The switch supports both static trunking and dynamic Link Aggregation Control  
Protocol (LACP). Static trunks have to be manually configured at both ends of the  
link, and the switches must comply with the Cisco EtherChannel standard. On the  
other hand, LACP configured ports can automatically negotiate a trunked link with  
LACP-configured ports on another device. You can configure any number of ports  
on the switch as LACP, as long as they are not already configured as part of a static  
trunk. If ports on another device are also configured as LACP, the switch and the  
other device will negotiate a trunk link between them. If an LACP trunk consists of  
more than eight ports, all other ports will be placed in a standby mode. Should one  
link in the trunk fail, one of the standby ports will automatically be activated to  
replace it.  
Command Usage  
Besides balancing the load across each port in the trunk, the other ports provide  
redundancy by taking over the load if a port in the trunk fails. However, before  
making any physical connections between devices, use the web interface or CLI to  
specify the trunk on the devices at both ends. When using a port trunk, take note of  
the following points:  
• Finish configuring port trunks before you connect the corresponding network  
cables between switches to avoid creating a loop.  
• You can create up to four trunks on the switch, with up to eight ports per trunk.  
• The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as trunk ports.  
3-93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
• When configuring static trunks on switches of different types, they must be  
compatible with the Cisco EtherChannel standard.  
• The ports at both ends of a trunk must be configured in an identical manner,  
including communication mode (i.e., speed, duplex mode and flow control), VLAN  
assignments, and CoS settings.  
• All the ports in a trunk have to be treated as a whole when moved from/to, added  
or deleted from a VLAN.  
• STP, VLAN, and IGMP settings can only be made for the entire trunk.  
Statically Configuring a Trunk  
Command Usage  
• When configuring static trunks, you may not be  
able to link switches of different types,  
depending on the manufacturer’s  
statically  
configured  
implementation. However, note that the static  
trunks on this switch are Cisco EtherChannel  
compatible.  
active  
links  
• To avoid creating a loop in the network, be sure  
you add a static trunk via the configuration  
interface before connecting the ports, and also  
disconnect the ports before removing a static  
trunk via the configuration interface.  
Command Attributes  
Member List (Current) – Shows configured trunks (Trunk ID, Unit, Port).  
New – Includes entry fields for creating new trunks.  
- Trunk – Trunk identifier. (Range: 1-4)  
- Port – Port identifier. (Range: 1-26/52)  
Web – Click Port, Trunk Membership. Enter a trunk ID of 1-4 in the Trunk field,  
select any of the switch ports from the scroll-down port list, and click Add. After you  
have completed adding ports to the member list, click Apply.  
Figure 3-55 Configuring Port Trunks  
3-94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Port Configuration  
3
CLI – This example creates trunk 2 with ports 1 and 2. Just connect these ports to  
two static trunk ports on another switch to form a trunk.  
Console(config)#interface port-channel 2  
Console(config-if)#exit  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1  
Console(config-if)#channel-group 2  
Console(config-if)#exit  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2  
Console(config-if)#channel-group 2  
Console(config-if)#end  
Console#show interfaces status port-channel 2  
Information of Trunk 2  
Basic information:  
Port type:  
100TX  
Mac address:  
Configuration:  
Name:  
00-00-E8-AA-AA-01  
Port admin:  
Up  
Speed-duplex:  
Capabilities:  
Flow control:  
Port security:  
Max MAC count:  
Current status:  
Created by:  
Auto  
10half, 10full, 100half, 100full  
Disabled  
Disabled  
0
User  
Up  
Link status:  
Port operation status: Up  
Operation speed-duplex: 100full  
Flow control type:  
Member Ports: Eth1/1, Eth1/2,  
Console#  
None  
Enabling LACP on Selected Ports  
Command Usage  
• To avoid creating a loop in the network, be sure  
you enable LACP before connecting the ports,  
and also disconnect the ports before disabling  
LACP.  
dynamically  
enabled  
active  
links  
backup  
link  
• If the target switch has also enabled LACP on the  
connected ports, the trunk will be activated  
automatically.  
• A trunk formed with another switch using LACP  
will automatically be assigned the next available  
trunk ID.  
configured  
members  
• If more than eight ports attached to the same  
target switch have LACP enabled, the additional ports will be placed in standby  
mode, and will only be enabled if one of the active links fails.  
• All ports on both ends of an LACP trunk must be configured for full duplex, either  
by forced mode or auto-negotiation.  
• Trunks dynamically established through LACP will also be shown in the Member  
List on the Trunk Membership menu (see page 3-94).  
3-95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
Command Attributes  
Member List (Current) – Shows configured trunks (Unit, Port).  
New – Includes entry fields for creating new trunks.  
- Port – Port identifier. (Range: 1-26/52)  
Web – Click Port, LACP, Configuration. Select any of the switch ports from the  
scroll-down port list and click Add. After you have completed adding ports to the  
member list, click Apply.  
Figure 3-56 LACP Configuration  
CLI – The following example enables LACP for ports 3 to 6. Just connect these ports  
to LACP-enabled trunk ports on another switch to form a trunk.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3  
Console(config-if)#lacp  
Console(config-if)#exit  
.
.
.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/6  
Console(config-if)#lacp  
Console(config-if)#end  
Console#show interfaces status port-channel 1  
Information of Trunk 1  
Basic information:  
Port type:  
100TX  
Mac address:  
Configuration:  
Name:  
22-22-22-22-22-2d  
Port admin:  
Up  
Speed-duplex:  
Capabilities:  
Flow control status:  
Port security:  
Max MAC count:  
Current status:  
Created by:  
Auto  
10half, 10full, 100half, 100full  
Disabled  
Disabled  
0
Lacp  
Up  
Link status:  
Port operation status: Up  
Operation speed-duplex: 100full  
Flow control type:  
Member Ports: Eth1/3, Eth1/4, Eth1/5, Eth1/6,  
Console#  
None  
3-96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Port Configuration  
3
Configuring LACP Parameters  
Dynamically Creating a Port Channel –  
Ports assigned to a common port channel must meet the following criteria:  
• Ports must have the same LACP System Priority.  
• Ports must have the same LACP port Admin Key.  
• However, if the “port channel” Admin Key is set (page 4-142), then the port Admin  
Key must be set to the same value for a port to be allowed to join a channel group.  
Note – If the port channel admin key (lacp admin key, page 4-151) is not set (through  
the CLI) when a channel group is formed (i.e., it has a null value of 0), this key is set to  
the same value as the port admin key used by the interfaces that joined the group (lacp  
admin key, as described in this section and on page 4-150).  
Command Attributes  
Set Port Actor – This menu sets the local side of an aggregate link; i.e., the ports on  
this switch.  
Port – Port number. (Range: 1-26/52)  
System Priority – LACP system priority is used to determine link aggregation  
group (LAG) membership, and to identify this device to other switches during LAG  
negotiations. (Range: 0-65535; Default: 32768)  
- Ports must be configured with the same system priority to join the same LAG.  
- System priority is combined with the switch’s MAC address to form the LAG  
identifier. This identifier is used to indicate a specific LAG during LACP  
negotiations with other systems.  
Admin Key – The LACP administration key must be set to the same value for ports  
that belong to the same LAG. (Range: 0-65535; Default: 1)  
Port Priority – If a link goes down, LACP port priority is used to select a backup  
link. (Range: 0-65535; Default: 32768)  
Set Port Partner – This menu sets the remote side of an aggregate link; i.e., the  
ports on the attached device. The command attributes have the same meaning as  
those used for the port actor. However, configuring LACP settings for the partner  
only applies to its administrative state, not its operational state, and will only take  
effect the next time an aggregate link is established with the partner.  
3-97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Web – Click Port, LACP, Aggregation Port. Set the System Priority, Admin Key, and  
Port Priority for the Port Actor. You can optionally configure these settings for the  
Port Partner. (Be aware that these settings only affect the administrative state of the  
partner, and will not take effect until the next time an aggregate link is formed with  
this device.) After you have completed setting the port LACP parameters, click Apply.  
Figure 3-57 LACP - Aggregation Port  
3-98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Port Configuration  
3
CLI – The following example configures LACP parameters for ports 1-4. Ports 1-4  
are used as active members of the LAG.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1  
Console(config-if)#lacp actor system-priority 3  
Console(config-if)#lacp actor admin-key 120  
Console(config-if)#lacp actor port-priority 128  
Console(config-if)#exit  
.
.
.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/4  
Console(config-if)#lacp actor system-priority 3  
Console(config-if)#lacp actor admin-key 120  
Console(config-if)#lacp actor port-priority 512  
Console(config-if)#end  
Console#show lacp sysid  
Port Channel  
System Priority  
System MAC Address  
-------------------------------------------------------------------------  
1
2
3
4
3
32768  
32768  
32768  
00-00-E9-31-31-31  
00-00-E9-31-31-31  
00-00-E9-31-31-31  
00-00-E9-31-31-31  
Console#show lacp 1 internal  
Port channel : 1  
-------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Oper Key : 120  
Admin Key : 0  
Eth 1/1  
-------------------------------------------------------------------------  
LACPDUs Internal:  
30 sec  
LACP System Priority: 3  
LACP Port Priority:  
Admin Key:  
Oper Key:  
128  
120  
120  
Admin State : defaulted, aggregation, long timeout, LACP-activity  
Oper State:  
distributing, collecting, synchronization,  
aggregation, long timeout, LACP-activity  
.
.
.
Displaying LACP Port Counters  
You can display statistics for LACP protocol messages.  
Table 3-8 LACP Port Counters  
Field  
Description  
LACPDUs Sent  
LACPDUs Received  
Marker Sent  
Number of valid LACPDUs transmitted from this channel group.  
Number of valid LACPDUs received on this channel group.  
Number of valid Marker PDUs transmitted from this channel group.  
Number of valid Marker PDUs received by this channel group.  
Marker Received  
3-99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
Table 3-8 LACP Port Counters (Continued)  
Field  
Description  
LACPDUs Unknown Pkts  
Number of frames received that either (1) Carry the Slow Protocols  
Ethernet Type value, but contain an unknown PDU, or (2) are addressed  
to the Slow Protocols group MAC Address, but do not carry the Slow  
Protocols Ethernet Type.  
LACPDUs Illegal Pkts  
Number of frames that carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type value, but  
contain a badly formed PDU or an illegal value of Protocol Subtype.  
Web – Click Port, LACP, Port Counters Information. Select a member port to display  
the corresponding information.  
Figure 3-58 LACP - Port Counters Information  
CLI – The following example displays LACP counters for port channel 1.  
Console#show lacp counters  
Port channel : 1  
-------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Eth 1/ 1  
-------------------------------------------------------------------------  
LACPDUs Sent:  
LACPDUs Receive:  
Marker Sent:  
91  
43  
0
Marker Receive:  
0
LACPDUs Unknown Pkts: 0  
LACPDUs Illegal Pkts: 0  
.
.
.
3-100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Port Configuration  
3
Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Local Side  
You can display configuration settings and the operational state for the local side of  
an link aggregation.  
Table 3-9 LACP Internal Configuration Information  
Field  
Description  
Oper Key  
Current operational value of the key for the aggregation port.  
Current administrative value of the key for the aggregation port.  
Number of seconds before invalidating received LACPDU information.  
Admin Key  
LACPDUs Internal  
LACP System Priority LACP system priority assigned to this port channel.  
LACP Port Priority  
LACP port priority assigned to this interface within the channel group.  
Admin State,  
Oper State  
Administrative or operational values of the actor’s state parameters:  
• Expired – The actor’s receive machine is in the expired state;  
• Defaulted – The actor’s receive machine is using defaulted operational partner  
information, administratively configured for the partner.  
• Distributing – If false, distribution of outgoing frames on this link is disabled; i.e.,  
distribution is currently disabled and is not expected to be enabled in the absence  
of administrative changes or changes in received protocol information.  
• Collecting – Collection of incoming frames on this link is enabled; i.e., collection  
is currently enabled and is not expected to be disabled in the absence of  
administrative changes or changes in received protocol information.  
• Synchronization – The System considers this link to be IN_SYNC; i.e., it has  
been allocated to the correct Link Aggregation Group, the group has been  
associated with a compatible Aggregator, and the identity of the Link Aggregation  
Group is consistent with the System ID and operational Key information  
transmitted.  
• Aggregation – The system considers this link to be aggregatable; i.e., a potential  
candidate for aggregation.  
• Long timeout – Periodic transmission of LACPDUs uses a slow transmission rate.  
• LACP-Activity – Activity control value with regard to this link.  
(0: Passive; 1: Active)  
3-101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
Web – Click Port, LACP, Port Internal Information. Select a port channel to display  
the corresponding information.  
Figure 3-59 LACP - Port Internal Information  
CLI – The following example displays the LACP configuration settings and  
operational state for the local side of port channel 1.  
Console#show lacp 1 internal  
Port channel : 1  
-------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Oper Key : 120  
Admin Key : 0  
Eth 1/1  
-------------------------------------------------------------------------  
LACPDUs Internal:  
30 sec  
LACP System Priority: 3  
LACP Port Priority:  
Admin Key:  
Oper Key:  
128  
120  
120  
Admin State : defaulted, aggregation, long timeout, LACP-activity  
Oper State:  
distributing, collecting, synchronization,  
aggregation, long timeout, LACP-activity  
.
.
.
3-102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Port Configuration  
3
Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Remote Side  
You can display configuration settings and the operational state for the remote side  
of an link aggregation.  
Table 3-10 LACP Neighbor Configuration Information  
Field  
Description  
Partner Admin System ID  
Partner Oper System ID  
LAG partner’s system ID assigned by the user.  
LAG partner’s system ID assigned by the LACP protocol.  
Partner Admin Port Number Current administrative value of the port number for the protocol Partner.  
Partner Oper Port Number  
Operational port number assigned to this aggregation port by the port’s  
protocol partner.  
Port Admin Priority  
Port Oper Priority  
Admin Key  
Current administrative value of the port priority for the protocol partner.  
Priority value assigned to this aggregation port by the partner.  
Current administrative value of the Key for the protocol partner.  
Current operational value of the Key for the protocol partner.  
Oper Key  
Admin State  
Oper State  
Administrative values of the partner’s state parameters. (See preceding table.)  
Operational values of the partner’s state parameters. (See preceding table.)  
Web – Click Port, LACP, Port Neighbors Information. Select a port channel to  
display the corresponding information.  
Figure 3-60 LACP - Port Neighbors Information  
3-103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the Switch  
3
CLI – The following example displays the LACP configuration settings and  
operational state for the remote side of port channel 1.  
Console#show lacp 1 neighbors  
Port channel 1 neighbors  
-------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Eth 1/1  
-------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Partner Admin System ID:  
Partner Oper System ID:  
Partner Admin Port Number: 5  
Partner Oper Port Number: 3  
Port Admin Priority:  
32768, 00-00-00-00-00-00  
3, 00-30-F1-CE-2A-20  
32768  
128  
Port Oper Priority:  
Admin Key:  
Oper Key:  
0
120  
Admin State:  
defaulted, distributing, collecting,  
synchronization, long timeout,  
distributing, collecting, synchronization,  
aggregation, long timeout, LACP-activity  
Oper State:  
.
.
.
3-104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Port Configuration  
3
Setting Broadcast Storm Thresholds  
Broadcast storms may occur when a device on your network is malfunctioning, or if  
application programs are not well designed or properly configured. If there is too  
much broadcast traffic on your network, performance can be severely degraded or  
everything can come to complete halt.  
You can protect your network from broadcast storms by setting a threshold for  
broadcast traffic. Any broadcast packets exceeding the specified threshold will then  
be dropped.  
Command Usage  
• Broadcast Storm Control is enabled by default.  
• Broadcast control does not effect IP multicast traffic.  
• The specified threshold applies to all ports on the switch.  
Command Attributes  
Threshold – Threshold as percentage of port bandwidth.  
(Range: 64-95232000; Default: 32000 octets per second)  
Protect Status – Shows whether or not broadcast storm control has been enabled.  
(Default: Enabled)  
Web – Click Port, Port/Trunk Broadcast Control. Set the threshold, mark the  
Enabled field for the desired interface and click Apply.  
Figure 3-61 Port Broadcast Control  
3-105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the Switch  
3
CLI – Specify any interface, and then enter the threshold. The following disables  
broadcast storm control for port 1, and then sets broadcast suppression at 600  
octets per second for port 2 (which applies to all ports).  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1  
Console(config-if)#no switchport broadcast  
Console(config-if)#exit  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2  
Console(config-if)#switchport broadcast octet-rate 600  
Console(config-if)#end  
Console#show interfaces switchport ethernet 1/2  
Information of Eth 1/2  
Broadcast threshold:  
Lacp status:  
Enabled, 600 octets/second  
Enabled  
Ingress rate limit: disable, Level: 30  
Egress rate limit: disable, Level: 30  
VLAN membership mode:  
Ingress rule:  
Acceptable frame type:  
Native VLAN:  
Hybrid  
Disabled  
All frames  
1
Priority for untagged traffic: 0  
Gvrp status:  
Disabled  
Allowed Vlan:  
1(u),  
Forbidden Vlan:  
Private-VLAN mode:  
NONE  
Private-VLAN host-association: NONE  
Private-VLAN mapping:  
Console#  
NONE  
Configuring Port Mirroring  
You can mirror traffic from any source port to a  
target port for real-time analysis. You can then  
attach a logic analyzer or RMON probe to the  
target port and study the traffic crossing the  
source port in a completely unobtrusive manner.  
Source  
port(s)  
Single  
target  
port  
Command Usage  
• Monitor port speed should match or exceed source port speed, otherwise traffic  
may be dropped from the monitor port.  
• All mirror sessions have to share the same destination port.  
• When mirroring port traffic, the target port must be included in the same VLAN as  
the source port.  
Command Attributes  
Mirror Sessions – Displays a list of current mirror sessions.  
Source Port – The port whose traffic will be monitored.  
Type – Allows you to select which traffic to mirror to the target port, Rx (receive),  
or Tx (transmit).  
Target Port – The port that will mirror the traffic on the source port.  
3-106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Port Configuration  
3
Web – Click Port, Mirror Port Configuration. Specify the source port, the traffic type  
to be mirrored, and the monitor port, then click Add.  
Figure 3-62 Mirror Port Configuration  
CLI – Use the interface command to select the monitor port, then use the port  
monitor command to specify the source port and traffic type.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/10  
Console(config-if)#port monitor ethernet 1/13 tx  
Console(config-if)#  
Configuring Rate Limits  
This function allows the network manager to control the maximum rate for traffic  
transmitted or received on a port. Rate limiting is configured on ports at the edge of  
a network to limit traffic coming into or out of the network. Traffic that falls within the  
rate limit is transmitted, while packets that exceed the acceptable amount of traffic  
are dropped.  
Rate limiting can be applied to individual ports or trunks. When an interface is  
configured with this feature, the traffic rate will be monitored by the hardware to  
verify conformity. Non-conforming traffic is dropped, conforming traffic is forwarded  
without any changes.  
Rate Limit Granularity  
Rate limit granularity is an additional feature enabling the network manager greater  
control over traffic on the network. The “rate limit granularity” is multiplied by the  
“rate limit level” (page 3-108) to set the actual rate limit for an interface. Granularity  
is a global setting that applies to Fast Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet interfaces.  
Command Usage  
• For Fast Ethernet interfaces, the rate limit granularity can be set to 512 Kbps,  
1 Mbps, or 3.3 Mbps  
• For Gigabit Ethernet interfaces, the rate limit granularity is 33.3 Mbps.  
3-107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configuring the Switch  
3
Web – Click Port, Rate Limit, Granularity. Select the required rate limit granularity for  
Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet, and click apply.  
Figure 3-63 Rate Limit Granularity Configuration  
CLI - This example sets and displays Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet granularity.  
Console(config)#rate-limit fastethernet granularity 512  
Console(config)#rate-limit gigabitethernet granularity 33300  
console#show rate-limit  
Fast ethernet granularity: 512  
Gigabit ethernet granularity: 33300  
Console#  
Rate Limit Configuration  
Use the rate limit configuration pages to apply rate limiting.  
Command Usage  
Input and output rate limit can be enabled or disabled for individual interfaces.  
Command Attributes  
Port/Trunk – Displays the port number.  
Rate Limit Status – Enables or disables the rate limit. (Default: Disabled)  
Rate Limit Level – Sets the rate limit level.  
Note: Actual rate limit = Rate Limit Level * Granularity  
3-108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Port Configuration  
3
Web – Click Port, Rate Limit, Input/Output Port/Trunk Configuration. Enable the  
Rate Limit Status for the required interfaces, set the Rate Limit Level, and click  
Apply.  
Figure 3-64 Output Rate Limit Port Configuration  
CLI - This example sets the rate limit level for input and output traffic passing  
through port 3.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3  
Console(config-if)#rate-limit input level 25  
Console(config-if)#rate-limit output level 25  
Console(config-if)#  
Showing Port Statistics  
You can display standard statistics on network traffic from the Interfaces Group and  
Ethernet-like MIBs, as well as a detailed breakdown of traffic based on the RMON  
MIB. Interfaces and Ethernet-like statistics display errors on the traffic passing  
through each port. This information can be used to identify potential problems with  
the switch (such as a faulty port or unusually heavy loading). RMON statistics  
provide access to a broad range of statistics, including a total count of different  
frame types and sizes passing through each port. All values displayed have been  
accumulated since the last system reboot, and are shown as counts per second.  
Statistics are refreshed every 60 seconds by default.  
Note: RMON groups 2, 3 and 9 can only be accessed using SNMP management  
software such as HP OpenView.  
3-109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configuring the Switch  
3
Table 3-11 Port Statistics  
Description  
Parameter  
Interface Statistics  
Received Octets  
The total number of octets received on the interface, including framing  
characters.  
Received Unicast Packets  
Received Multicast Packets  
Received Broadcast Packets  
Received Discarded Packets  
The number of subnetwork-unicast packets delivered to a higher-layer  
protocol.  
The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub-)layer,  
which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer.  
The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub-)layer,  
which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer.  
The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even  
though no errors had been detected to prevent their being deliverable to a  
higher-layer protocol. One possible reason for discarding such a packet  
could be to free up buffer space.  
Received Unknown Packets  
Received Errors  
The number of packets received via the interface which were discarded  
because of an unknown or unsupported protocol.  
The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them  
from being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.  
Transmit Octets  
The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including  
framing characters.  
Transmit Unicast Packets  
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be  
transmitted to a subnetwork-unicast address, including those that were  
discarded or not sent.  
Transmit Multicast Packets  
Transmit Broadcast Packets  
Transmit Discarded Packets  
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be  
transmitted, and which were addressed to a multicast address at this  
sub-layer, including those that were discarded or not sent.  
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be  
transmitted, and which were addressed to a broadcast address at this  
sub-layer, including those that were discarded or not sent.  
The number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even  
though no errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted.  
One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up  
buffer space.  
Transmit Errors  
The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of  
errors.  
Etherlike Statistics  
Alignment Errors  
Late Collisions  
The number of alignment errors (missynchronized data packets).  
The number of times that a collision is detected later than 512 bit-times  
into the transmission of a packet.  
FCS Errors  
A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral  
number of octets in length but do not pass the FCS check. This count does  
not include frames received with frame-too-long or frame-too-short error.  
3-110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Port Configuration  
3
Table 3-11 Port Statistics (Continued)  
Parameter  
Description  
Excessive Collisions  
A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due  
to excessive collisions. This counter does not increment when the  
interface is operating in full-duplex mode.  
Single Collision Frames  
Internal MAC Transmit Errors  
Multiple Collision Frames  
Carrier Sense Errors  
The number of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission is  
inhibited by exactly one collision.  
A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due  
to an internal MAC sublayer transmit error.  
A count of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission is  
inhibited by more than one collision.  
The number of times that the carrier sense condition was lost or never  
asserted when attempting to transmit a frame.  
SQE Test Errors  
A count of times that the SQE TEST ERROR message is generated by the  
PLS sublayer for a particular interface.  
Frames Too Long  
A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the  
maximum permitted frame size.  
Deferred Transmissions  
Internal MAC Receive Errors  
A count of frames for which the first transmission attempt on a particular  
interface is delayed because the medium was busy.  
A count of frames for which reception on a particular interface fails due to  
an internal MAC sublayer receive error.  
RMON Statistics  
Drop Events  
The total number of events in which packets were dropped due to lack of  
resources.  
Jabbers  
The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets  
(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets), and had either an FCS  
or alignment error.  
Received Bytes  
Collisions  
Total number of bytes of data received on the network. This statistic can  
be used as a reasonable indication of Ethernet utilization.  
The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet  
segment.  
Received Frames  
Broadcast Frames  
The total number of frames (bad, broadcast and multicast) received.  
The total number of good frames received that were directed to the  
broadcast address. Note that this does not include multicast packets.  
Multicast Frames  
The total number of good frames received that were directed to this  
multicast address.  
CRC/Alignment Errors  
Undersize Frames  
The number of CRC/alignment errors (FCS or alignment errors).  
The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets long  
(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well  
formed.  
Oversize Frames  
The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets  
(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well  
formed.  
3-111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the Switch  
3
Table 3-11 Port Statistics (Continued)  
Parameter  
Description  
Fragments  
The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets in length  
(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and had either an FCS  
or alignment error.  
64 Bytes Frames  
The total number of frames (including bad packets) received and  
transmitted that were 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but  
including FCS octets).  
65-127 Byte Frames  
The total number of frames (including bad packets) received and  
transmitted where the number of octets fall within the specified range  
(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).  
128-255 Byte Frames  
256-511 Byte Frames  
512-1023 Byte Frames  
1024-1518 Byte Frames  
1519-1536 Byte Frames  
3-112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Port Configuration  
3
Web – Click Port, Port Statistics. Select the required interface, and click Query. You  
can also use the Refresh button at the bottom of the page to update the screen.  
Figure 3-65 Port Statistics  
3-113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
CLI – This example shows statistics for port 13.  
Console#show interfaces counters ethernet 1/13  
Ethernet 1/13  
Iftable stats:  
Octets input: 868453, Octets output: 3492122  
Unicast input: 7315, Unitcast output: 6658  
Discard input: 0, Discard output: 0  
Error input: 0, Error output: 0  
Unknown protos input: 0, QLen output: 0  
Extended iftable stats:  
Multi-cast input: 0, Multi-cast output: 17027  
Broadcast input: 231, Broadcast output: 7  
Ether-like stats:  
Alignment errors: 0, FCS errors: 0  
Single Collision frames: 0, Multiple collision frames: 0  
SQE Test errors: 0, Deferred transmissions: 0  
Late collisions: 0, Excessive collisions: 0  
Internal mac transmit errors: 0, Internal mac receive errors: 0  
Frame too longs: 0, Carrier sense errors: 0  
Symbol errors: 0  
RMON stats:  
Drop events: 0, Octets: 4422579, Packets: 31552  
Broadcast pkts: 238, Multi-cast pkts: 17033  
Undersize pkts: 0, Oversize pkts: 0  
Fragments: 0, Jabbers: 0  
CRC align errors: 0, Collisions: 0  
Packet size <= 64 octets: 25568, Packet size 65 to 127 octets: 1616  
Packet size 128 to 255 octets: 1249, Packet size 256 to 511 octets: 1449  
Packet size 512 to 1023 octets: 802, Packet size 1024 to 1518 octets: 871  
Console#  
Address Table Settings  
Switches store the addresses for all known devices. This information is used to pass  
traffic directly between the inbound and outbound ports. All the addresses learned  
by monitoring traffic are stored in the dynamic address table. You can also manually  
configure static addresses that are bound to a specific port.  
Setting Static Addresses  
A static address can be assigned to a specific interface on this switch. Static  
addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved. When a static  
address is seen on another interface, the address will be ignored and will not be  
written to the address table.  
Command Attributes  
8
Static Address Counts – The number of manually configured addresses.  
Current Static Address Table – Lists all the static addresses.  
Interface – Port or trunk associated with the device assigned a static address.  
MAC Address – Physical address of a device mapped to this interface.  
VLAN – ID of configured VLAN (1-4094).  
8. Web Only.  
3-114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Address Table Settings  
3
Web – Click Address Table, Static Addresses. Specify the interface, the MAC  
address and VLAN, then click Add Static Address.  
Figure 3-66 Static Addresses  
CLI – This example adds an address to the static address table, but sets it to be  
deleted when the switch is reset.  
Console(config)#mac-address-table static 00-e0-29-94-34-de interface  
ethernet 1/1 vlan 1 delete-on-reset  
Console(config)#  
Displaying the Address Table  
The Dynamic Address Table contains the MAC addresses learned by monitoring the  
source address for traffic entering the switch. When the destination address for  
inbound traffic is found in the database, the packets intended for that address are  
forwarded directly to the associated port. Otherwise, the traffic is flooded to all ports.  
Command Attributes  
Interface – Indicates a port or trunk.  
MAC Address – Physical address associated with this interface.  
VLAN – ID of configured VLAN (1-4094).  
Address Table Sort Key – You can sort the information displayed based on MAC  
address, VLAN or interface (port or trunk).  
Dynamic Address Counts – The number of addresses dynamically learned.  
Current Dynamic Address Table – Lists all the dynamic addresses.  
3-115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the Switch  
3
Web – Click Address Table, Dynamic Addresses. Specify the search type (i.e., mark  
the Interface, MAC Address, or VLAN checkbox), select the method of sorting the  
displayed addresses, and then click Query.  
Figure 3-67 Dynamic Addresses  
CLI – This example also displays the address table entries for port 1.  
Console#show mac-address-table interface ethernet 1/1  
Interface Mac Address Vlan Type  
--------- ----------------- ---- -----------------  
Eth 1/ 1 00-E0-29-94-34-DE  
Eth 1/ 1 00-20-9C-23-CD-60  
1 Delete-on-reset  
2 Learned  
Console#  
3-116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration  
3
Changing the Aging Time  
You can set the aging time for entries in the dynamic address table.  
Command Attributes  
Aging Status – Enables/disables the function.  
Aging Time – The time after which a learned entry is discarded.  
(Range: 10-30000 seconds; Default: 300 seconds)  
Web – Click Address Table, Address Aging. Specify the new aging time, click Apply.  
Figure 3-68 Address Aging  
CLI – This example sets the aging time to 300 seconds.  
Console(config)#mac-address-table aging-time 300  
Console(config)#  
Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration  
The Spanning Tree Algorithm (STA) can be used to detect and disable network  
loops, and to provide backup links between switches, bridges or routers. This allows  
the switch to interact with other bridging devices (that is, an STA-compliant switch,  
bridge or router) in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any  
two stations on the network, and provide backup links which automatically take over  
when a primary link goes down.  
The spanning tree algorithms supported by this switch include these versions:  
• STP – Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1D)  
• RSTP – Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1w)  
• MSTP – Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1s)  
STP – STP uses a distributed algorithm to select a bridging device (STP-compliant  
switch, bridge or router) that serves as the root of the spanning tree network. It  
selects a root port on each bridging device (except for the root device) which incurs  
the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that device to the root device.  
Then it selects a designated bridging device from each LAN which incurs the lowest  
path cost when forwarding a packet from that LAN to the root device. All ports  
connected to designated bridging devices are assigned as designated ports. After  
determining the lowest cost spanning tree, it enables all root ports and designated  
3-117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Configuring the Switch  
3
ports, and disables all other ports. Network packets are therefore only forwarded  
between root ports and designated ports, eliminating any possible network loops.  
Designated  
Root  
Root  
Port  
x
x
Designated  
Port  
x
Designated  
Bridge  
x
x
Once a stable network topology has been established, all bridges listen for Hello  
BPDUs (Bridge Protocol Data Units) transmitted from the Root Bridge. If a bridge  
does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined interval (Maximum Age), the bridge  
assumes that the link to the Root Bridge is down. This bridge will then initiate  
negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the network to reestablish a valid  
network topology.  
RSTP – RSTP is designed as a general replacement for the slower, legacy STP.  
RSTP is also incorporated into MSTP. RSTP achieves must faster reconfiguration  
(i.e., around 1 to 3 seconds, compared to 30 seconds or more for STP) by reducing  
the number of state changes before active ports start learning, predefining an  
alternate route that can be used when a node or port fails, and retaining the  
forwarding database for ports insensitive to changes in the tree structure when  
reconfiguration occurs.  
MSTP – When using STP or RSTP, it may be difficult to maintain a stable path  
between all VLAN members. Frequent changes in the tree structure can easily  
isolate some of the group members. MSTP (which is based on RSTP for fast  
convergence) is designed to support independent spanning trees based on VLAN  
groups. Using multiple spanning trees can provide multiple forwarding paths and  
enable load balancing. One or more VLANs can be grouped into a Multiple Spanning  
Tree Instance (MSTI). MSTP builds a separate Multiple Spanning Tree (MST) for  
each instance to maintain connectivity among each of the assigned VLAN groups.  
3-118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration  
3
MSTP then builds a Internal Spanning Tree (IST) for the Region containing all  
commonly configured MSTP bridges.  
IST  
(for this Region)  
MST 1  
Region R  
MST 2  
An MST Region consists of a group of interconnected bridges that have the same  
MST Configuration Identifiers (including the Region Name, Revision Level and  
An MST Region may contain multiple MSTP Instances. An Internal Spanning Tree  
(IST) is used to connect all the MSTP switches within an MST region. A Common  
Spanning Tree (CST) interconnects all adjacent MST Regions, and acts as a virtual  
bridge node for communications with STP or RSTP nodes in the global network.  
Region 1  
Region 1  
CIST  
CST  
Region 4  
Region 4  
IST  
Region 2  
Region 3  
Region 2  
Region 3  
MSTP connects all bridges and LAN segments with a single Common and Internal  
Spanning Tree (CIST). The CIST is formed as a result of the running spanning tree  
algorithm between switches that support the STP, RSTP, MSTP protocols.  
Displaying Global Settings  
You can display a summary of the current bridge STA information that applies to the  
entire switch using the STA Information screen.  
Field Attributes  
Spanning Tree State – Shows if the switch is enabled to participate in an  
STA-compliant network.  
3-119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
Bridge ID – A unique identifier for this bridge, consisting of the bridge priority, the  
MST Instance ID 0 for the Common Spanning Tree when spanning tree mode is  
set to MSTP (page 3-123), and MAC address (where the address is taken from the  
switch system).  
Max Age – The maximum time (in seconds) a device can wait without receiving a  
configuration message before attempting to reconfigure. All device ports (except  
for designated ports) should receive configuration messages at regular intervals.  
Any port that ages out STA information (provided in the last configuration  
message) becomes the designated port for the attached LAN. If it is a root port, a  
new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network.  
(References to “ports” in this section mean “interfaces,” which includes both ports  
and trunks.)  
Hello Time – Interval (in seconds) at which the root device transmits a  
configuration message.  
Forward Delay – The maximum time (in seconds) the root device will wait before  
changing states (i.e., discarding to learning to forwarding). This delay is required  
because every device must receive information about topology changes before it  
starts to forward frames. In addition, each port needs time to listen for conflicting  
information that would make it return to a discarding state; otherwise, temporary  
data loops might result.  
Designated Root – The priority and MAC address of the device in the Spanning  
Tree that this switch has accepted as the root device.  
- Root Port – The number of the port on this switch that is closest to the root. This  
switch communicates with the root device through this port. If there is no root  
port, then this switch has been accepted as the root device of the Spanning Tree  
network.  
- Root Path Cost – The path cost from the root port on this switch to the root  
device.  
Configuration Changes – The number of times the Spanning Tree has been  
reconfigured.  
Last Topology Change – Time since the Spanning Tree was last reconfigured.  
These additional parameters are only displayed for the CLI:  
Spanning tree mode – Specifies the type of spanning tree used on this switch:  
- STP: Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1D)  
- RSTP: Rapid Spanning Tree (IEEE 802.1w)  
- MSTP: Multiple Spanning Tree (IEEE 802.1s)  
Instance – Instance identifier of this spanning tree. (This is always 0 for the CIST.)  
VLANs configuration – VLANs assigned to the CIST.  
Priority – Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device, root port, and  
designated port. The device with the highest priority (i.e., lower numeric value)  
becomes the STA root device. However, if all devices have the same priority, the  
device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device.  
Root Hello Time – Interval (in seconds) at which this device transmits a  
configuration message.  
3-120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration  
3
Root Maximum Age – The maximum time (in seconds) this device can wait  
without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure. All  
device ports (except for designated ports) should receive configuration messages  
at regular intervals. If the root port ages out STA information (provided in the last  
configuration message), a new root port is selected from among the device ports  
attached to the network. (References to “ports” in this section means “interfaces,”  
which includes both ports and trunks.)  
Root Forward Delay – The maximum time (in seconds) this device will wait before  
changing states (i.e., discarding to learning to forwarding). This delay is required  
because every device must receive information about topology changes before it  
starts to forward frames. In addition, each port needs time to listen for conflicting  
information that would make it return to a discarding state; otherwise, temporary  
data loops might result.  
Max hops – The max number of hop counts for the MST region.  
Remaining hops – The remaining number of hop counts for the MST instance.  
Transmission limit – The minimum interval between the transmission of  
consecutive RSTP/MSTP BPDUs.  
Path Cost Method – The path cost is used to determine the best path between  
devices. The path cost method is used to determine the range of values that can  
be assigned to each interface.  
Web – Click Spanning Tree, STA, Information.  
Figure 3-69 STA Information  
3-121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
CLI – This command displays global STA settings, followed by settings for each port  
.
Console#show spanning-tree  
Spanning-tree information  
---------------------------------------------------------------  
Spanning tree mode:  
Spanning tree enable/disable:  
Instance:  
MSTP  
enable  
0
Vlans configuration:  
Priority:  
1-4093  
32768  
Bridge Hello Time (sec.):  
Bridge Max Age (sec.):  
Bridge Forward Delay (sec.):  
Root Hello Time (sec.):  
Root Max Age (sec.):  
Root Forward Delay (sec.):  
Max hops:  
2
20  
15  
2
20  
15  
20  
Remaining hops:  
20  
Designated Root  
32768.0.0000ABCD0000  
Current root port:  
Current root cost  
Number of topology changes:  
1
200000  
1
Last topology changes time (sec.): 13380  
Transmission limit:  
Path Cost Method:  
3
long  
---------------------------------------------------------------  
Eth 1/ 1 information  
---------------------------------------------------------------  
Admin status:  
Role:  
enabled  
disable  
State:  
discarding  
External admin path cost: 10000  
Internal admin cost: 10000  
External oper path cost: 10000  
Internal oper path cost: 10000  
Priority:  
128  
Designated cost:  
Designated port:  
Designated root:  
Designated bridge:  
Fast forwarding:  
Forward transitions:  
Admin edge port:  
Oper edge port:  
Admin Link type:  
Oper Link type:  
Spanning Tree Status:  
300000  
128.1  
32768.0000E8AAAA00  
32768.0030F1D473A0  
disabled  
0
disabled  
disabled  
auto  
point-to-point  
enabled  
.
.
.
Note: The current root port and current root cost display as zero when this device is not  
connected to the network.  
3-122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration  
3
Configuring Global Settings  
Global settings apply to the entire switch.  
Command Usage  
9
• Spanning Tree Protocol  
Uses RSTP for the internal state machine, but sends only 802.1D BPDUs. This  
creates one spanning tree instance for the entire network. If multiple VLANs are  
implemented on a network, the path between specific VLAN members may be  
inadvertently disabled to prevent network loops, thus isolating group members.  
When operating multiple VLANs, we recommend selecting the MSTP option.  
• Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol  
RSTP supports connections to either STP or RSTP nodes by monitoring the  
incoming protocol messages and dynamically adjusting the type of protocol  
messages the RSTP node transmits, as described below:  
- STP Mode – If the switch receives an 802.1D BPDU (i.e., STP BPDU) after a  
port’s migration delay timer expires, the switch assumes it is connected to an  
802.1D bridge and starts using only 802.1D BPDUs.  
- RSTP Mode – If RSTP is using 802.1D BPDUs on a port and receives an RSTP  
BPDU after the migration delay expires, RSTP restarts the migration delay timer  
and begins using RSTP BPDUs on that port.  
• Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol  
- To allow multiple spanning trees to operate over the network, you must configure  
a related set of bridges with the same MSTP configuration, allowing them to  
participate in a specific set of spanning tree instances.  
- A spanning tree instance can exist only on bridges that have compatible VLAN  
instance assignments.  
- Be careful when switching between spanning tree modes. Changing modes  
stops all spanning-tree instances for the previous mode and restarts the system  
in the new mode, temporarily disrupting user traffic.  
Command Attributes  
Basic Configuration of Global Settings  
Spanning Tree State – Enables/disables STA on this switch. (Default: Enabled)  
Spanning Tree Type – Specifies the type of spanning tree used on this switch:  
- STP: Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1D); i.e., when this option is selected,  
the switch will use RSTP set to STP forced compatibility mode).  
- RSTP: Rapid Spanning Tree (IEEE 802.1w); RSTP is the default.  
- MSTP: Multiple Spanning Tree (IEEE 802.1s)  
Priority – Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device, root port, and  
designated port. The device with the highest priority becomes the STA root device.  
However, if all devices have the same priority, the device with the lowest MAC  
9. STP and RSTP BPDUs are transmitted as untagged frames, and will cross any VLAN  
boundaries.  
3-123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configuring the Switch  
3
address will then become the root device. (Note that lower numeric values indicate  
higher priority.)  
• Default: 32768  
• Range: 0-61440, in steps of 4096  
• Options: 0, 4096, 8192, 12288, 16384, 20480, 24576, 28672, 32768, 36864,  
40960, 45056, 49152, 53248, 57344, 61440  
Root Device Configuration  
Hello Time – Interval (in seconds) at which the root device transmits a  
configuration message.  
• Default: 2  
• Minimum: 1  
• Maximum: The lower of 10 or [(Max. Message Age / 2) -1]  
Maximum Age – The maximum time (in seconds) a device can wait without  
receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure. All device  
ports (except for designated ports) should receive configuration messages at  
regular intervals. Any port that ages out STA information (provided in the last  
configuration message) becomes the designated port for the attached LAN. If it is  
a root port, a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the  
network. (References to “ports” in this section mean “interfaces,” which includes  
both ports and trunks.)  
• Default: 20  
• Minimum: The higher of 6 or [2 x (Hello Time + 1)].  
• Maximum: The lower of 40 or [2 x (Forward Delay - 1)]  
Forward Delay – The maximum time (in seconds) this device will wait before  
changing states (i.e., discarding to learning to forwarding). This delay is required  
because every device must receive information about topology changes before it  
starts to forward frames. In addition, each port needs time to listen for conflicting  
information that would make it return to a discarding state; otherwise, temporary  
data loops might result.  
• Default: 15  
• Minimum: The higher of 4 or [(Max. Message Age / 2) + 1]  
• Maximum: 30  
Configuration Settings for RSTP  
The following attributes apply to both RSTP and MSTP:  
Path Cost Method – The path cost is used to determine the best path between  
devices. The path cost method is used to determine the range of values that can  
be assigned to each interface.  
- Long: Specifies 32-bit based values that range from 1-200,000,000.  
(This is the default.)  
- Short: Specifies 16-bit based values that range from 1-65535.  
Transmission Limit – The maximum transmission rate for BPDUs is specified by  
setting the minimum interval between the transmission of consecutive protocol  
messages. (Range: 1-10; Default: 3)  
3-124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration  
3
Configuration Settings for MSTP  
Max Instance Numbers – The maximum number of MSTP instances to which this  
switch can be assigned.  
Configuration Digest – An MD5 signature key that contains the VLAN ID to MST  
ID mapping table. In other words, this key is a mapping of all VLANs to the CIST.  
10  
Region Revision – The revision for this MSTI. (Range: 0-65535; Default: 0)  
Region Name – The name for this MSTI. (Maximum length: 32 characters)  
Max Hop Count – The maximum number of hops allowed in the MST region before  
a BPDU is discarded. (Range: 1-40; Default: 20)  
10. The MST name and revision number are both required to uniquely identify an MST region.  
3-125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the Switch  
3
Web – Click Spanning Tree, STA, Configuration. Modify the required attributes, and  
click Apply.  
Figure 3-70 STA Global Configuration  
3-126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration  
3
CLI – This example enables Spanning Tree Protocol, sets the mode to MST, and  
then configures the STA and MSTP parameters.  
Console(config)#spanning-tree  
Console(config)#spanning-tree mode mstp  
Console(config)#spanning-tree priority 40000  
Console(config)#spanning-tree hello-time 5  
Console(config)#spanning-tree max-age 38  
Console(config)#spanning-tree forward-time 20  
Console(config)#spanning-tree pathcost method long  
Console(config)#spanning-tree transmission-limit 4  
Console(config)#spanning-tree mst-configuration  
Console(config-mstp)#revision 1  
Console(config-mstp)#name R&D  
Console(config-mstp)#max-hops 30  
Console(config-mstp)#  
Displaying Interface Settings  
The STA Port Information and STA Trunk Information pages display the current  
status of ports and trunks in the Spanning Tree.  
Field Attributes  
Spanning Tree – Shows if STA has been enabled on this interface.  
STA Status – Displays current state of this port within the Spanning Tree:  
- Discarding - Port receives STA configuration messages, but does not forward  
packets.  
- Learning - Port has transmitted configuration messages for an interval set by  
the Forward Delay parameter without receiving contradictory information. Port  
address table is cleared, and the port begins learning addresses.  
- Forwarding - Port forwards packets, and continues learning addresses.  
The rules defining port status are:  
- A port on a network segment with no other STA compliant bridging device is  
always forwarding.  
- If two ports of a switch are connected to the same segment and there is no other  
STA device attached to this segment, the port with the smaller ID forwards  
packets and the other is discarding.  
- All ports are discarding when the switch is booted, then some of them change  
state to learning, and then to forwarding.  
Forward Transitions – The number of times this port has transitioned from the  
Learning state to the Forwarding state.  
Designated Cost – The cost for a packet to travel from this port to the root in the  
current Spanning Tree configuration. The slower the media, the higher the cost.  
Designated Bridge – The bridge priority and MAC address of the device through  
which this port must communicate to reach the root of the Spanning Tree.  
Designated Port – The port priority and number of the port on the designated  
bridging device through which this switch must communicate with the root of the  
Spanning Tree.  
3-127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the Switch  
3
Oper Path Cost – The contribution of this port to the path cost of paths towards  
the spanning tree root which include this port.  
Oper Link Type – The operational point-to-point status of the LAN segment  
attached to this interface. This parameter is determined by manual configuration or  
by auto-detection, as described for Admin Link Type in STA Port Configuration on  
Oper Edge Port – This parameter is initialized to the setting for Admin Edge Port  
in STA Port Configuration on page 3-130 (i.e., true or false), but will be set to false  
if a BPDU is received, indicating that another bridge is attached to this port.  
Port Role – Roles are assigned according to whether the port is part of the active  
topology connecting the bridge to the root bridge (i.e., root port), connecting a LAN  
through the bridge to the root bridge (i.e., designated port), or is the MSTI regional  
root (i.e., master port); or is an alternate or backup port that may provide  
connectivity if other bridges, bridge ports, or LANs fail or are removed. The role is  
set to disabled (i.e., disabled port) if a port has no role within the spanning tree.  
R: Root Port  
Alternate port receives more  
useful BPDUs from another  
bridge and is therefore not  
selected as the designated  
port.  
A: Alternate Port  
D: Designated Port  
B: Backup Port  
R
A
R
D
B
x
Backup port receives more  
useful BPDUs from the same  
bridge and is therefore not  
selected as the designated  
port.  
R
R
A
D
B
x
Trunk Member – Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk.  
(STA Port Information only)  
These additional parameters are only displayed for the CLI:  
Admin status – Shows if this interface is enabled.  
External path cost – The path cost for the IST. This parameter is used by the  
STA to determine the best path between devices. Therefore, lower values should  
be assigned to ports attached to faster media, and higher values assigned to ports  
with slower media. (Path cost takes precedence over port priority.)  
3-128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration  
3
Internal path cost – The path cost for the MST. See the preceding item.  
Priority – Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree Algorithm. If  
the path cost for all ports on a switch is the same, the port with the highest priority  
(i.e., lowest value) will be configured as an active link in the Spanning Tree. This  
makes a port with higher priority less likely to be blocked if the Spanning Tree  
Algorithm is detecting network loops. Where more than one port is assigned the  
highest priority, the port with the lowest numeric identifier will be enabled.  
Designated root – The priority and MAC address of the device in the Spanning  
Tree that this switch has accepted as the root device.  
Fast forwarding – This field provides the same information as Admin Edge port,  
and is only included for backward compatibility with earlier products.  
Admin Edge Port – You can enable this option if an interface is attached to a LAN  
segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node. Since end nodes  
cannot cause forwarding loops, they can pass directly through to the spanning tree  
forwarding state. Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker convergence for devices  
such as workstations or servers, retains the current forwarding database to reduce  
the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild address tables during  
reconfiguration events, does not cause the spanning tree to reconfigure when the  
interface changes state, and also overcomes other STA-related timeout problems.  
However, remember that Edge Port should only be enabled for ports connected to  
an end-node device.  
Admin Link Type – The link type attached to this interface.  
- Point-to-Point – A connection to exactly one other bridge.  
- Shared – A connection to two or more bridges.  
- Auto – The switch automatically determines if the interface is attached to a  
point-to-point link or to shared media.  
Web – Click Spanning Tree, STA, Port Information or STA Trunk Information.  
Figure 3-71 STA Port Information  
3-129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configuring the Switch  
3
CLI – This example shows the STA attributes for port 5.  
Console#show spanning-tree ethernet 1/5  
Eth 1/ 5 information  
--------------------------------------------------------------  
Admin status:  
Role:  
enabled  
disable  
State:  
discarding  
External admin path cost: 10000  
Internal admin cost: 10000  
External oper path cost: 10000  
Internal oper path cost: 10000  
Priority:  
128  
Designated cost:  
Designated port:  
Designated root:  
Designated bridge:  
Fast forwarding:  
Forward transitions:  
Admin edge port:  
Oper edge port:  
Admin Link type:  
Oper Link type:  
Spanning Tree Status:  
10000  
128.1  
32768.0.0000E8AAAA00  
32768.0.0030F1D473A0  
disabled  
2
disabled  
disabled  
auto  
point-to-point  
enabled  
Console#  
Configuring Interface Settings  
You can configure RSTP and MSTP attributes for specific interfaces, including port  
priority, path cost, link type, and edge port. You may use a different priority or path  
cost for ports of the same media type to indicate the preferred path, link type to  
indicate a point-to-point connection or shared-media connection, and edge port to  
indicate if the attached device can support fast forwarding. (References to “ports” in  
this section means “interfaces,” which includes both ports and trunks.)  
Command Attributes  
The following attributes are read-only and cannot be changed:  
STA State – Displays current state of this port within the Spanning Tree.  
(See Displaying Interface Settings on page 3-127 for additional information.)  
Discarding - Port receives STA configuration messages, but does not forward  
packets.  
Learning - Port has transmitted configuration messages for an interval set by  
the Forward Delay parameter without receiving contradictory information. Port  
address table is cleared, and the port begins learning addresses.  
Forwarding - Port forwards packets, and continues learning addresses.  
11  
Trunk – Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk.  
11. STA Port Configuration only  
3-130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration  
3
The following interface attributes can be configured:  
Spanning Tree – Enables/disables STA on this interface. (Default: Enabled)  
Priority – Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree Protocol. If  
the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same, the port with the highest priority  
(i.e., lowest value) will be configured as an active link in the Spanning Tree. This  
makes a port with higher priority less likely to be blocked if the Spanning Tree  
Protocol is detecting network loops. Where more than one port is assigned the  
highest priority, the port with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled.  
• Default: 128  
• Range: 0-240, in steps of 16  
Admin Path Cost – This parameter is used by the STA to determine the best path  
between devices. Therefore, lower values should be assigned to ports attached to  
faster media, and higher values assigned to ports with slower media. (Path cost  
takes precedence over port priority.) (Range: 0 for auto-configuration, 1-65535 for  
the short path cost method (see page 3-123), 1-200,000,000 for the long path cost  
method)  
By default, the system automatically detects the speed and duplex mode used on  
each port, and configures the path cost according to the values shown below. Path  
cost “0” is used to indicate auto-configuration mode.  
When the short path cost method is selected and the default path cost  
recommended by the IEEE 8021w standard exceeds 65,535, the default is set to  
65,535.  
• Range –  
-Ethernet: 200,000-20,000,000  
-Fast Ethernet: 20,000-2,000,000  
-Gigabit Ethernet: 2,000-200,000  
• Default –  
-Ethernet – Half duplex: 2,000,000; full duplex: 1,000,000; trunk: 500,000  
-Fast Ethernet – Half duplex: 200,000; full duplex: 100,000; trunk: 50,000  
-Gigabit Ethernet – Full duplex: 10,000; trunk: 5,000  
Admin Link Type – The link type attached to this interface.  
• Point-to-Point – A connection to exactly one other bridge.  
• Shared – A connection to two or more bridges.  
• Auto – The switch automatically determines if the interface is attached to a  
point-to-point link or to shared media. (This is the default setting.)  
Admin Edge Port (Fast Forwarding) – You can enable this option if an interface is  
attached to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node.  
Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops, they can pass directly through to  
the spanning tree forwarding state. Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker  
convergence for devices such as workstations or servers, retains the current  
forwarding database to reduce the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild  
address tables during reconfiguration events, does not cause the spanning tree to  
initiate reconfiguration when the interface changes state, and also overcomes  
3-131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
other STA-related timeout problems. However, remember that Edge Port should  
only be enabled for ports connected to an end-node device. (Default: Disabled)  
Migration – If at any time the switch detects STP BPDUs, including Configuration  
or Topology Change Notification BPDUs, it will automatically set the selected  
interface to forced STP-compatible mode. However, you can also use the Protocol  
Migration button to manually re-check the appropriate BPDU format (RSTP or  
STP-compatible) to send on the selected interfaces. (Default: Disabled)  
Web – Click Spanning Tree, STA, Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration. Modify  
the required attributes, then click Apply.  
Figure 3-72 STA Port Configuration  
CLI – This example sets STA attributes for port 7.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/7  
Console(config-if)#no spanning-tree spanning-disabled  
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree port-priority 0  
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree cost 50  
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree link-type auto  
Console(config-if)#no spanning-tree edge-port  
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree protocol-migration  
Configuring Multiple Spanning Trees  
MSTP generates a unique spanning tree for each instance. This provides multiple  
pathways across the network, thereby balancing the traffic load, preventing  
wide-scale disruption when a bridge node in a single instance fails, and allowing for  
faster convergence of a new topology for the failed instance.  
By default all VLANs are assigned to the Internal Spanning Tree (MST Instance 0)  
that connects all bridges and LANs within the MST region. This switch supports up  
to 33 instances. You should try to group VLANs which cover the same general area  
of your network. However, remember that you must configure all bridges within the  
same MSTI Region (page 3-125) with the same set of instances, and the same  
instance (on each bridge) with the same set of VLANs. Also, note that RSTP treats  
each MSTI region as a single node, connecting all regions to the Common Spanning  
Tree.  
3-132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration  
3
To use multiple spanning trees:  
1. Set the spanning tree type to MSTP (STA Configuration, page 3-123).  
2. Enter the spanning tree priority for the selected MST instance (MSTP VLAN  
Configuration).  
3. Add the VLANs that will share this MSTI (MSTP VLAN Configuration).  
Note: All VLANs are automatically added to the IST (Instance 0).  
To ensure that the MSTI maintains connectivity across the network, you must  
configure a related set of bridges with the same MSTI settings.  
Command Attributes  
MST Instance – Instance identifier of this spanning tree. (Default: 0)  
Priority – The priority of a spanning tree instance. (Range: 0-61440 in steps of  
4096; Options: 0, 4096, 8192, 12288, 16384, 20480, 24576, 28672, 32768, 36864,  
40960, 45056, 49152, 53248, 57344, 61440; Default: 32768)  
VLANs in MST Instance – VLANs assigned this instance.  
MST ID – Instance identifier to configure. (Range: 0-4094; Default: 0)  
VLAN ID – VLAN to assign to this selected MST instance. (Range: 1-4093)  
The other global attributes are described under “Displaying Global Settings,” page 3-119. The  
attributes displayed by the CLI for individual interfaces are described under “Displaying Interface  
3-133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the Switch  
3
Web – Click Spanning Tree, MSTP, VLAN Configuration. Select an instance  
identifier from the list, set the instance priority, and click Apply. To add the VLAN  
members to an MSTI instance, enter the instance identifier, the VLAN identifier, and  
click Add.  
Figure 3-73 MSTP VLAN Configuration  
CLI – This displays STA settings for instance 1, followed by settings for each port.  
Console#show spanning-tree mst 1  
Spanning-tree information  
---------------------------------------------------------------  
Spanning tree mode:  
Spanning tree enabled/disabled:  
Instance:  
MSTP  
enabled  
1
VLANs configuration:  
Priority:  
1
32768  
Bridge Hello Time (sec.):  
Bridge Max Age (sec.):  
Bridge Forward Delay (sec.):  
Root Hello Time (sec.):  
Root Max Age (sec.):  
Root Forward Delay (sec.):  
Max hops:  
2
20  
15  
2
20  
15  
20  
Remaining hops:  
20  
Designated Root:  
32768.1.0030F1D473A0  
Current root port:  
Current root cost:  
Number of topology changes:  
7
10000  
2
Last topology changes time (sec.):85  
Transmission limit:  
Path Cost Method:  
3
long  
3-134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration  
3
---------------------------------------------------------------  
Eth 1/ 7 information  
---------------------------------------------------------------  
Admin status:  
Role:  
enabled  
master  
State:  
forwarding  
External admin path cost: 10000  
Internal admin path cost: 10000  
External oper path cost: 10000  
Internal oper path cost: 10000  
Priority:  
128  
Designated cost:  
Designated port:  
Designated root:  
Designated bridge:  
Fast forwarding:  
Forward transitions:  
Admin edge port:  
Oper edge port:  
Admin Link type:  
Oper Link type:  
Spanning Tree Status:  
0
128.1  
32768.1.0030F1D473A0  
32768.1.0030F1D473A0  
disabled  
1
disabled  
disabled  
auto  
point-to-point  
enabled  
.
.
.
CLI – This example sets the priority for MSTI 1, and adds VLANs 1-5 to this MSTI.  
Console(config)#spanning-tree mst-configuration  
Console(config-mst)#mst 1 priority 4096  
Console(config-mstp)#mst 1 vlan 1-5  
Console(config-mst)#  
3-135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the Switch  
3
Displaying Interface Settings for MSTP  
The MSTP Port Information and MSTP Trunk Information pages display the current  
status of ports and trunks in the selected MST instance.  
Field Attributes  
MST Instance ID – Instance identifier to configure. (Range: 0-4094; Default: 0)  
The other attributes are described under “Displaying Interface Settings,” page 3-127.  
Web – Click Spanning Tree, MSTP, Port Information or Trunk Information. Select the  
required MST instance to display the current spanning tree values.  
Figure 3-74 MSTP Port Information  
CLI – This displays STA settings for instance 0, followed by settings for each port.  
The settings for instance 0 are global settings that apply to the IST (page 3-119), the  
settings for other instances only apply to the local spanning tree.  
Console#show spanning-tree mst 0  
Spanning-tree information  
---------------------------------------------------------------  
Spanning tree mode:  
Spanning tree enabled/disabled:  
Instance:  
MSTP  
enabled  
0
VLANs configuration:  
Priority:  
2-4093  
32768  
Bridge Hello Time (sec.):  
Bridge Max Age (sec.):  
Bridge Forward Delay (sec.):  
Root Hello Time (sec.):  
Root Max Age (sec.):  
Root Forward Delay (sec.):  
Max hops:  
2
20  
15  
2
20  
15  
20  
Remaining hops:  
20  
Designated Root:  
32768.0.0000E8AAAA00  
Current root port:  
Current root cost:  
Number of topology changes:  
1
10000  
12  
Last topology changes time (sec.):303  
Transmission limit:  
Path Cost Method:  
3
long  
3-136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration  
3
---------------------------------------------------------------  
Eth 1/ 1 information  
---------------------------------------------------------------  
Admin status:  
Role:  
enabled  
root  
State:  
forwarding  
External admin path cost: 10000  
Internal admin path cost: 10000  
External oper path cost: 10000  
Internal oper path cost: 10000  
Priority:  
128  
Designated cost:  
Designated port:  
Designated root:  
Designated bridge:  
Fast forwarding:  
Forward transitions:  
Admin edge port:  
Oper edge port:  
Admin Link type:  
Oper Link type:  
Spanning Tree Status:  
0
128.4  
32768.0.0000E8AAAA00  
32768.0.0000E8AAAA00  
disabled  
2
disabled  
disabled  
auto  
point-to-point  
enabled  
.
.
.
Configuring Interface Settings for MSTP  
You can configure the STA interface settings for an MST Instance using the MSTP  
Port Configuration and MSTP Trunk Configuration pages.  
Field Attributes  
The following attributes are read-only and cannot be changed:  
STA State – Displays current state of this port within the Spanning Tree.  
(See Displaying Interface Settings on page 3-127 for additional information.)  
Discarding - Port receives STA configuration messages, but does not forward  
packets.  
Learning - Port has transmitted configuration messages for an interval set by  
the Forward Delay parameter without receiving contradictory information. Port  
address table is cleared, and the port begins learning addresses.  
Forwarding - Port forwards packets, and continues learning addresses.  
Trunk – Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk.  
(STA Port Configuration only)  
The following interface attributes can be configured:  
MST Instance ID – Instance identifier to configure. (Range: 0-4094; Default: 0)  
Priority – Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree Protocol. If  
the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same, the port with the highest priority  
(i.e., lowest value) will be configured as an active link in the Spanning Tree. This  
makes a port with higher priority less likely to be blocked if the Spanning Tree  
Protocol is detecting network loops. Where more than one port is assigned the  
highest priority, the port with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled.  
• Default: 128  
• Range: 0-240, in steps of 16  
3-137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
Admin MST Path Cost – This parameter is used by the MSTP to determine the  
best path between devices. Therefore, lower values should be assigned to ports  
attached to faster media, and higher values assigned to ports with slower media.  
(Path cost takes precedence over port priority.) Note that when the Path Cost  
Method is set to short (page 3-63), the maximum path cost is 65,535.  
By default, the system automatically detects the speed and duplex mode used on  
each port, and configures the path cost according to the values shown below. Path  
cost “0” is used to indicate auto-configuration mode. When the short path cost  
method is selected and the default path cost recommended by the IEEE 8021w  
standard exceeds 65,535, the default is set to 65,535.  
• Range –  
-Ethernet: 200,000-20,000,000  
-Fast Ethernet: 20,000-2,000,000  
-Gigabit Ethernet: 2,000-200,000  
• Default –  
-Ethernet – Half duplex: 2,000,000; full duplex: 1,000,000; trunk: 500,000  
-Fast Ethernet – Half duplex: 200,000; full duplex: 100,000; trunk: 50,000  
-Gigabit Ethernet – Full duplex: 10,000; trunk: 5,000  
Web – Click Spanning Tree, MSTP, Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration. Enter  
the priority and path cost for an interface, and click Apply.  
Figure 3-75 MSTP Port Configuration  
CLI – This example sets the MSTP attributes for port 4.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/4  
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree mst port-priority 0  
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree mst cost 50  
Console(config-if)  
3-138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VLAN Configuration  
3
VLAN Configuration  
IEEE 802.1Q VLANs  
In large networks, routers are used to isolate broadcast traffic for each subnet into  
separate domains. This switch provides a similar service at Layer 2 by using VLANs  
to organize any group of network nodes into separate broadcast domains. VLANs  
confine broadcast traffic to the originating group, and can eliminate broadcast  
storms in large networks. This also provides a more secure and cleaner network  
environment.  
An IEEE 802.1Q VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the  
network, but communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment.  
VLANs help to simplify network management by allowing you to move devices to a  
new VLAN without having to change any physical connections. VLANs can be easily  
organized to reflect departmental groups (such as Marketing or R&D), usage groups  
(such as e-mail), or multicast groups (used for multimedia applications such as  
videoconferencing).  
VLANs provide greater network efficiency by reducing broadcast traffic, and allow  
you to make network changes without having to update IP addresses or IP subnets.  
VLANs inherently provide a high level of network security since traffic must pass  
through a configured Layer 3 link to reach a different VLAN.  
This switch supports the following VLAN features:  
• Up to 255 VLANs based on the IEEE 802.1Q standard  
• Distributed VLAN learning across multiple switches using explicit or implicit tagging  
and GVRP protocol  
• Port overlapping, allowing a port to participate in multiple VLANs  
• End stations can belong to multiple VLANs  
• Passing traffic between VLAN-aware and VLAN-unaware devices  
• Priority tagging  
Assigning Ports to VLANs  
Before enabling VLANs for the switch, you must first assign each port to the VLAN  
group(s) in which it will participate. By default all ports are assigned to VLAN 1 as  
untagged ports. Add a port as a tagged port if you want it to carry traffic for one or  
more VLANs, and any intermediate network devices or the host at the other end of  
the connection supports VLANs. Then assign ports on the other VLAN-aware  
network devices along the path that will carry this traffic to the same VLAN(s), either  
manually or dynamically using GVRP. However, if you want a port on this switch to  
participate in one or more VLANs, but none of the intermediate network devices nor  
the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs, then you should add  
this port to the VLAN as an untagged port.  
3-139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the Switch  
3
Note: VLAN-tagged frames can pass through VLAN-aware or VLAN-unaware network  
interconnection devices, but the VLAN tags should be stripped off before passing it  
on to any end-node host that does not support VLAN tagging.  
tagged frames  
VA  
VA  
VA: VLAN Aware  
VU: VLAN Unaware  
tagged  
frames  
untagged  
frames  
VA  
VA  
VU  
VLAN Classification – When the switch receives a frame, it classifies the frame in  
one of two ways. If the frame is untagged, the switch assigns the frame to an  
associated VLAN (based on the default VLAN ID of the receiving port). But if the  
frame is tagged, the switch uses the tagged VLAN ID to identify the port broadcast  
domain of the frame.  
Port Overlapping – Port overlapping can be used to allow access to commonly  
shared network resources among different VLAN groups, such as file servers or  
printers. Note that if you implement VLANs which do not overlap, but still need to  
communicate, you can connect them by enabled routing on this switch.  
Untagged VLANs – Untagged (or static) VLANs are typically used to reduce  
broadcast traffic and to increase security. A group of network users assigned to a  
VLAN form a broadcast domain that is separate from other VLANs configured on the  
switch. Packets are forwarded only between ports that are designated for the same  
VLAN. Untagged VLANs can be used to manually isolate user groups or subnets.  
However, you should use IEEE 802.3 tagged VLANs with GVRP whenever possible  
to fully automate VLAN registration.  
Automatic VLAN Registration – GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol)  
defines a system whereby the switch can automatically learn the VLANs to which  
each end station should be assigned. If an end station (or its network adapter)  
supports the IEEE 802.1Q VLAN protocol, it can be configured to broadcast a  
message to your network indicating the VLAN groups it wants to join. When this  
switch receives these messages, it will automatically place the receiving port in the  
specified VLANs, and then forward the message to all other ports. When the  
message arrives at another switch that supports GVRP, it will also place the  
receiving port in the specified VLANs, and pass the message on to all other ports.  
VLAN requirements are propagated in this way throughout the network. This allows  
GVRP-compliant devices to be automatically configured for VLAN groups based  
solely on endstation requests.  
To implement GVRP in a network, first add the host devices to the required VLANs  
(using the operating system or other application software), so that these VLANs can  
be propagated onto the network. For both the edge switches attached directly to  
3-140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VLAN Configuration  
3
these hosts, and core switches in the network, enable GVRP on the links between  
these devices. You should also determine security boundaries in the network and  
disable GVRP on the boundary ports to prevent advertisements from being  
propagated, or forbid those ports from joining restricted VLANs.  
Note: If you have host devices that do not support GVRP, you should configure static or  
untagged VLANs for the switch ports connected to these devices (as described in  
enable GVRP on these edge switches, as well as on the core switches in the  
network.  
Port-based VLAN  
2
1
9
3
4
5
6
7
8
13  
14  
18  
19  
10 11  
15 16  
12  
Forwarding Tagged/Untagged Frames  
If you want to create a small port-based VLAN for devices attached directly to a  
single switch, you can assign ports to the same untagged VLAN. However, to  
participate in a VLAN group that crosses several switches, you should create a  
VLAN for that group and enable tagging on all ports.  
Ports can be assigned to multiple tagged or untagged VLANs. Each port on the  
switch is therefore capable of passing tagged or untagged frames. When forwarding  
a frame from this switch along a path that contains any VLAN-aware devices, the  
switch should include VLAN tags. When forwarding a frame from this switch along a  
path that does not contain any VLAN-aware devices (including the destination host),  
the switch must first strip off the VLAN tag before forwarding the frame. When the  
switch receives a tagged frame, it will pass this frame onto the VLAN(s) indicated by  
the frame tag. However, when this switch receives an untagged frame from a  
VLAN-unaware device, it first decides where to forward the frame, and then inserts a  
VLAN tag reflecting the ingress port’s default VID.  
3-141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the Switch  
3
Enabling or Disabling GVRP (Global Setting)  
GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP) defines a way for switches to exchange  
VLAN information in order to register VLAN members on ports across the network.  
VLANs are dynamically configured based on join messages issued by host devices  
and propagated throughout the network. GVRP must be enabled to permit automatic  
VLAN registration, and to support VLANs which extend beyond the local switch.  
(Default: Disabled)  
Web – Click VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, GVRP Status. Enable or disable GVRP, and click  
Apply.  
Figure 3-76 GLobally Enabling GVRP  
CLI – This example enables GVRP for the switch.  
Console(config)#bridge-ext gvrp  
Console(config)#  
Displaying Basic VLAN Information  
The VLAN Basic Information page displays basic information on the VLAN type  
supported by the switch.  
Field Attributes  
12  
VLAN Version Number – The VLAN version used by this switch as specified in  
the IEEE 802.1Q standard.  
Maximum VLAN ID – Maximum VLAN ID recognized by this switch.  
Maximum Number of Supported VLANs – Maximum number of VLANs that can  
be configured on this switch.  
Web – Click VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, Basic Information.  
Figure 3-77 VLAN Basic Information  
12. Web Only.  
3-142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
VLAN Configuration  
3
CLI – Enter the following command.  
Console#show bridge-ext  
Max support vlan numbers:  
Max support vlan ID:  
255  
4094  
Extended multicast filtering services: No  
Static entry individual port:  
VLAN learning:  
Yes  
IVL  
Configurable PVID tagging:  
Local VLAN capable:  
Traffic classes:  
Global GVRP status:  
GMRP:  
Yes  
No  
Enabled  
Enabled  
Disabled  
Console#  
Displaying Current VLANs  
The VLAN Current Table shows the current port members of each VLAN and  
whether or not the port supports VLAN tagging. Ports assigned to a large VLAN  
group that crosses several switches should use VLAN tagging. However, if you just  
want to create a small port-based VLAN for one or two switches, you can disable  
tagging.  
Command Attributes (Web)  
VLAN ID – ID of configured VLAN (1-4094).  
Up Time at Creation – Time this VLAN was created (i.e., System Up Time).  
Status – Shows how this VLAN was added to the switch.  
- Dynamic GVRP: Automatically learned via GVRP.  
- Permanent: Added as a static entry.  
Egress Ports – Shows all the VLAN port members.  
Untagged Ports – Shows the untagged VLAN port members.  
3-143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
Web – Click VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, Current Table. Select any ID from the scroll-down  
list.  
Figure 3-78 VLAN Current Table  
Command Attributes (CLI)  
VLAN – ID of configured VLAN (1-4094, no leading zeroes).  
Type – Shows how this VLAN was added to the switch.  
- Dynamic: Automatically learned via GVRP.  
- Static: Added as a static entry.  
Name – Name of the VLAN (1 to 32 characters).  
Status – Shows if this VLAN is enabled or disabled.  
- Active: VLAN is operational.  
- Suspend: VLAN is suspended; i.e., does not pass packets.  
Ports / Channel groups – Shows the VLAN interface members.  
3-144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VLAN Configuration  
3
CLI – Current VLAN information can be displayed with the following command.  
Console#show vlan id 1  
Vlan ID:  
Type:  
Name:  
1
Static  
DefaultVlan  
Active  
Status:  
Ports/Port channel: Eth1/ 1(S) Eth1/ 2(S) Eth1/ 3(S) Eth1/ 4(S) Eth1/ 5(S)  
Eth1/ 6(S) Eth1/ 7(S) Eth1/ 8(S) Eth1/ 9(S) Eth1/10(S)  
Eth1/11(S) Eth1/12(S) Eth1/13(S) Eth1/14(S) Eth1/15(S)  
Eth1/16(S) Eth1/17(S) Eth1/18(S) Eth1/19(S) Eth1/20(S)  
Eth1/21(S) Eth1/22(S) Eth1/23(S) Eth1/24(S) Eth1/25(S)  
Eth1/26(S) Eth1/27(S) Eth1/28(S) Eth1/29(S) Eth1/30(S)  
Eth1/31(S) Eth1/32(S) Eth1/33(S) Eth1/34(S) Eth1/35(S)  
Eth1/36(S) Eth1/37(S) Eth1/38(S) Eth1/39(S) Eth1/40(S)  
Eth1/41(S) Eth1/42(S) Eth1/43(S) Eth1/44(S) Eth1/45(S)  
Eth1/46(S) Eth1/47(S) Eth1/48(S) Eth1/49(S) Eth1/50(S)  
Eth1/51(S) Eth1/52(S)  
Console#  
Creating VLANs  
Use the VLAN Static List to create or remove VLAN groups. To propagate  
information about VLAN groups used on this switch to external network devices, you  
must specify a VLAN ID for each of these groups.  
Command Attributes  
Current – Lists all the current VLAN groups created for this system. Up to 255  
VLAN groups can be defined. VLAN 1 is the default untagged VLAN.  
New – Allows you to specify the name and numeric identifier for a new VLAN  
group. (The VLAN name is only used for management on this system; it is not  
added to the VLAN tag.)  
VLAN ID – ID of configured VLAN (1-4094, no leading zeroes).  
VLAN Name – Name of the VLAN (1 to 32 characters).  
Status (Web) – Enables or disables the specified VLAN.  
- Enabled: VLAN is operational.  
- Disabled: VLAN is suspended; i.e., does not pass packets.  
State (CLI) – Enables or disables the specified VLAN.  
- Active: VLAN is operational.  
- Suspend: VLAN is suspended; i.e., does not pass packets.  
Add – Adds a new VLAN group to the current list.  
Remove – Removes a VLAN group from the current list. If any port is assigned to  
this group as untagged, it will be reassigned to VLAN group 1 as untagged.  
3-145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
Web – Click VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, Static List. To create a new VLAN, enter the  
VLAN ID and VLAN name, mark the Enable checkbox to activate the VLAN, and  
then click Add.  
Figure 3-79 VLAN Static List - Creating VLANs  
CLI – This example creates a new VLAN.  
Console(config)#vlan database  
Console(config-vlan)#vlan 2 name R&D media ethernet state active  
Console(config-vlan)#end  
Console#show vlan  
Vlan ID:  
Type:  
Name:  
1
Static  
DefaultVlan  
Active  
Status:  
Ports/Port channel: Eth1/ 1(S) Eth1/ 2(S) Eth1/ 3(S) Eth1/ 4(S) Eth1/ 5(S)  
Eth1/ 6(S) Eth1/ 7(S) Eth1/ 8(S) Eth1/ 9(S) Eth1/10(S)  
Eth1/11(S) Eth1/12(S) Eth1/13(S) Eth1/14(S) Eth1/15(S)  
Eth1/16(S) Eth1/17(S) Eth1/18(S) Eth1/19(S) Eth1/20(S)  
Eth1/21(S) Eth1/22(S) Eth1/23(S) Eth1/24(S) Eth1/25(S)  
Eth1/26(S) Eth1/27(S) Eth1/28(S) Eth1/29(S) Eth1/30(S)  
Eth1/31(S) Eth1/32(S) Eth1/33(S) Eth1/34(S) Eth1/35(S)  
Eth1/36(S) Eth1/37(S) Eth1/38(S) Eth1/39(S) Eth1/40(S)  
Eth1/41(S) Eth1/42(S) Eth1/43(S) Eth1/44(S) Eth1/45(S)  
Eth1/46(S) Eth1/47(S) Eth1/48(S) Eth1/49(S) Eth1/50(S)  
Eth1/51(S) Eth1/52(S)  
Vlan ID:  
2
Type:  
Name:  
Static  
R&D  
Status:  
Active  
Ports/Port Channel:  
Console#  
3-146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VLAN Configuration  
3
Adding Static Members to VLANs (VLAN Index)  
Use the VLAN Static Table to configure port members for the selected VLAN index.  
Assign ports as tagged if they are connected to 802.1Q VLAN compliant devices, or  
untagged they are not connected to any VLAN-aware devices. Or configure a port  
as forbidden to prevent the switch from automatically adding it to a VLAN via the  
GVRP protocol.  
Notes: 1. You can also use the VLAN Static Membership by Port page to configure  
VLAN groups based on the port index (page 3-148). However, note that this  
configuration page can only add ports to a VLAN as tagged members.  
2. VLAN 1 is the default untagged VLAN containing all ports on the switch, and  
can only be modified by first reassigning the default port VLAN ID as  
Command Attributes  
VLAN – ID of configured VLAN (1-4094).  
Name – Name of the VLAN (1 to 32 characters).  
Status – Enables or disables the specified VLAN.  
- Enable: VLAN is operational.  
- Disable: VLAN is suspended; i.e., does not pass packets.  
Port – Port identifier.  
Membership Type – Select VLAN membership for each interface by marking the  
appropriate radio button for a port or trunk:  
- Tagged: Interface is a member of the VLAN. All packets transmitted by the port  
will be tagged, that is, carry a tag and therefore carry VLAN or CoS information.  
- Untagged: Interface is a member of the VLAN. All packets transmitted by the  
port will be untagged, that is, not carry a tag and therefore not carry VLAN or  
CoS information. Note that an interface must be assigned to at least one group  
as an untagged port.  
- Forbidden: Interface is forbidden from automatically joining the VLAN via  
GVRP. For more information, see “Automatic VLAN Registration” on page  
- None: Interface is not a member of the VLAN. Packets associated with this  
VLAN will not be transmitted by the interface.  
Trunk Member – Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk. To add a trunk to the  
selected VLAN, use the last table on the VLAN Static Table page.  
3-147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
Web – Click VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, Static Table. Select a VLAN ID from the  
scroll-down list. Modify the VLAN name and status if required. Select the  
membership type by marking the appropriate radio button in the list of ports or  
trunks. Click Apply.  
Figure 3-80 VLAN Static Table - Adding Static Members  
CLI – The following example adds tagged and untagged ports to VLAN 2.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1  
Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan add 2 tagged  
Console(config-if)#exit  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2  
Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan add 2 untagged  
Console(config-if)#exit  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/13  
Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan add 2 tagged  
Console(config-if)#  
Adding Static Members to VLANs (Port Index)  
Use the VLAN Static Membership by Port menu to assign VLAN groups to the  
selected interface as a tagged member.  
Command Attributes  
Interface – Port or trunk identifier.  
Member – VLANs for which the selected interface is a tagged member.  
Non-Member – VLANs for which the selected interface is not a tagged member.  
3-148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
VLAN Configuration  
3
Web – Open VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, Static Membership by Port. Select an interface  
from the scroll-down box (Port or Trunk). Click Query to display membership  
information for the interface. Select a VLAN ID, and then click Add to add the  
interface as a tagged member, or click Remove to remove the interface. After  
configuring VLAN membership for each interface, click Apply.  
Figure 3-81 VLAN Static Membership by Port  
CLI – This example adds Port 3 to VLAN 1 as a tagged port, and removes Port 3  
from VLAN 2.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3  
Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan add 1 tagged  
Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan remove 2  
Console(config-if)#  
3-149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces  
You can configure VLAN behavior for specific interfaces, including the default VLAN  
identifier (PVID), accepted frame types, ingress filtering, GVRP status, and GARP  
timers.  
Command Usage  
GVRP – GARP VLAN Registration Protocol defines a way for switches to  
exchange VLAN information in order to automatically register VLAN members on  
interfaces across the network.  
GARP – Group Address Registration Protocol is used by GVRP to register or  
deregister client attributes for client services within a bridged LAN. The default  
values for the GARP timers are independent of the media access method or data  
rate. These values should not be changed unless you are experiencing difficulties  
with GVRP registration/deregistration.  
Command Attributes  
PVID VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames received on the interface. (Default: 1)  
- If an interface is not a member of VLAN 1 and you assign its PVID to this VLAN,  
the interface will automatically be added to VLAN 1 as an untagged member. For  
all other VLANs, an interface must first be configured as an untagged member  
before you can assign its PVID to that group.  
Acceptable Frame Type – Sets the interface to accept all frame types, including  
tagged or untagged frames, or only tagged frames. When set to receive all frame  
types, any received frames that are untagged are assigned to the default VLAN.  
(Options: All, Tagged; Default: All)  
Ingress Filtering – Determines how to process frames tagged for VLANs for which  
the ingress port is not a member. (Default: Disabled)  
- Ingress filtering only affects tagged frames.  
- If ingress filtering is disabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for  
which it is not a member, these frames will be flooded to all other ports (except  
for those VLANs explicitly forbidden on this port).  
- If ingress filtering is enabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for  
which it is not a member, these frames will be discarded.  
-
Ingress filtering does not affect VLAN independent BPDU frames, such as GVRP  
or STP. However, they do affect VLAN dependent BPDU frames, such as GMRP.  
GVRP Status – Enables/disables GVRP for the interface. GVRP must be globally  
enabled for the switch before this setting can take effect. (See “Displaying Bridge  
Extension Capabilities” on page 3-13.) When disabled, any GVRP packets  
received on this port will be discarded and no GVRP registrations will be  
propagated from other ports. (Default: Disabled)  
13  
GARP Join Timer – The interval between transmitting requests/queries to  
participate in a VLAN group. (Range: 20-1000 centiseconds; Default: 20)  
13. Timer settings should follow this rule: 2 x (join timer) < leave timer < leaveAll timer  
3-150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
VLAN Configuration  
3
10  
GARP Leave Timer – The interval a port waits before leaving a VLAN group.  
This time should be set to more than twice the join time. This ensures that after a  
Leave or LeaveAll message has been issued, the applicants can rejoin before the  
port actually leaves the group. (Range: 60-3000 centiseconds; Default: 60)  
10  
GARP LeaveAll Timer – The interval between sending out a LeaveAll query  
message for VLAN group participants and the port leaving the group. This interval  
should be considerably larger than the Leave Time to minimize the amount of traffic  
generated by nodes rejoining the group.  
(Range: 500-18000 centiseconds; Default: 1000)  
Mode – Indicates VLAN membership mode for an interface. (Default: Hybrid)  
- 1Q Trunk – Specifies a port as an end-point for a VLAN trunk. A trunk is a direct  
link between two switches, so the port transmits tagged frames that identify the  
source VLAN. Note that frames belonging to the port’s default VLAN (i.e.,  
associated with the PVID) are also transmitted as tagged frames.  
- Hybrid – Specifies a hybrid VLAN interface. The port may transmit tagged or  
untagged frames.  
Trunk Member – Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk. To add a trunk to the  
selected VLAN, use the last table on the VLAN Static Table page.  
Web – Click VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, Port Configuration or VLAN Trunk Configuration.  
Fill in the required settings for each interface, click Apply.  
Figure 3-82 VLAN Port Configuration  
3-151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
CLI – This example sets port 3 to accept only tagged frames, assigns PVID 3 as the  
native VLAN ID, enables GVRP, sets the GARP timers, and then sets the switchport  
mode to hybrid.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3  
Console(config-if)#switchport acceptable-frame-types tagged  
Console(config-if)#switchport ingress-filtering  
Console(config-if)#switchport native vlan 3  
Console(config-if)#switchport gvrp  
Console(config-if)#garp timer join 20  
Console(config-if)#garp timer leave 90  
Console(config-if)#garp timer leaveall 2000  
Console(config-if)#switchport mode hybrid  
Console(config-if)#  
Private VLANs  
Private VLANs provide port-based security and isolation between ports within  
the assigned VLAN. This switch supports two types of private VLANs: primary/  
secondary associated groups, and stand-alone isolated VLANs. A primary VLAN  
contains promiscuous ports that can communicate with all other ports in the private  
VLAN group, while a secondary (or community) VLAN contains community ports  
that can only communicate with other hosts within the secondary VLAN and with any  
of the promiscuous ports in the associated primary VLAN. Isolated VLANs, on the  
other hand, consist a single stand-alone VLAN that contains one promiscuous port  
and one or more isolated (or host) ports. In all cases, the promiscuous ports are  
designed to provide open access to an external network such as the Internet, while  
the community or isolated ports provide restricted access to local users.  
Multiple primary VLANs can be configured on this switch, and multiple community  
VLANs can be associated with each primary VLAN. One or more isolated VLANs  
can also be configured. (Note that private VLANs and normal VLANs can exist  
simultaneously within the same switch.)  
To configure primary/secondary associated groups, follow these steps:  
1. Use the Private VLAN Configuration menu (page 3-154) to designate one or  
more community VLANs, and the primary VLAN that will channel traffic outside  
of the VLAN groups.  
2. Use the Private VLAN Association menu (page 3-154) to map the secondary  
(i.e., community) VLAN(s) to the primary VLAN.  
3. Use the Private VLAN Port Configuration menu (page 3-156) to set the port  
type to promiscuous (i.e., having access to all ports in the primary VLAN), or  
host (i.e., having access restricted to community VLAN members, and  
channeling all other traffic through promiscuous ports). Then assign any  
promiscuous ports to a primary VLAN and any host ports a community VLAN.  
To configure an isolated VLAN, follow these steps:  
1. Use the Private VLAN Configuration menu (page 3-154) to designate an  
isolated VLAN that will channel all traffic through a single promiscuous port.  
3-152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
VLAN Configuration  
3
2. Use the Private VLAN Port Configuration menu (page 3-156) to set the port  
type to promiscuous (i.e., the single channel to the external network), or  
isolated (i.e., having access only to the promiscuous port in its own VLAN).  
Then assign the promiscuous port and all host ports to an isolated VLAN.  
Displaying Current Private VLANs  
The Private VLAN Information page displays information on the private VLANs  
configured on the switch, including primary, community, and isolated VLANs, and  
their assigned interfaces.  
Command Attributes  
VLAN ID – ID of configured VLAN (1-4094), and VLAN type.  
Primary VLAN – The VLAN with which the selected VLAN ID is associated. A  
primary VLAN displays its own ID, a community VLAN displays the associated  
primary VLAN, and an isolated VLAN displays the stand-alone VLAN.  
Ports List – The list of ports (and assigned port type) in the selected private VLAN.  
Web – Click VLAN, Private VLAN, Information. Select the desired port from the  
VLAN ID drop-down menu.  
Figure 3-83 Private VLAN Information  
CLI – This example shows the switch configured with primary VLAN 5 and  
secondary VLAN 6. Port 3 has been configured as a promiscuous port and mapped  
to VLAN 5, while ports 4 and 5 have been configured as a host ports and are  
associated with VLAN 6. This means that traffic for port 4 and 5 can only pass  
through port 3.  
Console#show vlan private-vlan  
Primary Secondary Type  
-------- ----------- ---------- --------------------------------------  
4-153  
Interfaces  
5
5
primary  
community  
Eth1/ 3  
Eth1/ 4 Eth1/ 5  
6
Console#  
3-153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the Switch  
3
Configuring Private VLANs  
The Private VLAN Configuration page is used to create/remove primary, community,  
or isolated VLANs.  
Command Attributes  
VLAN ID – ID of configured VLAN (1-4094).  
Type – There are three types of VLANs within a private VLAN:  
- Primary VLANs – Conveys traffic between promiscuous ports, and to  
community ports within secondary (or community) VLANs.  
- Community VLANs - Conveys traffic between community ports, and to their  
promiscuous ports in the associated primary VLAN.  
- Isolated VLANs – Conveys traffic only between the VLAN’s isolated ports and  
the promiscuous port. Traffic between isolated ports within the VLAN is blocked.  
Current – Displays a list of the currently configured VLANs.  
Web – Click VLAN, Private VLAN, Configuration. Enter the VLAN ID number, select  
Primary, Isolated or Community type, then click Add. To remove a private VLAN from  
the switch, highlight an entry in the Current list box and then click Remove. Note that  
all member ports must be removed from the VLAN before it can be deleted.  
Figure 3-84 Private VLAN Configuration  
CLI – This example configures VLAN 5 as a primary VLAN, and VLAN 6 as a  
community VLAN and VLAN 7 as an isolated VLAN.  
Console(config)#vlan database  
Console(config-vlan)#private-vlan 5 primary  
Console(config-vlan)#private-vlan 6 community  
Console(config-vlan)#private-vlan 7 isolated  
Console(config-vlan)#  
Associating VLANs  
Each community or isolated VLAN must be associated with a primary VLAN.  
Command Attributes  
Primary VLAN ID – ID of primary VLAN (1-4094).  
Association – Community VLANs associated with the selected primary VLAN.  
Non-Association – Community VLANs not associated with the selected VLAN.  
3-154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
VLAN Configuration  
3
Web – Click VLAN, Private VLAN, Association. Select the required primary VLAN  
from the scroll-down box, highlight one or more community VLANs in the  
Non-Association list box, and click Add to associate these entries with the selected  
primary VLAN. (A community VLAN can only be associated with one primary VLAN.)  
Figure 3-85 Private VLAN Association  
CLI – This example associates community VLANs 6 and 7 with primary VLAN 5.  
Console(config)#vlan database  
Console(config-vlan)#private-vlan 5 association 6  
Console(config-vlan)#private-vlan 5 association 7  
Console(config-vlan)#  
Displaying Private VLAN Interface Information  
Use the Private VLAN Port Information and Private VLAN Trunk Information menus  
to display the interfaces associated with private VLANs.  
Command Attributes  
Port/Trunk – The switch interface.  
PVLAN Port Type – Displays private VLAN port types.  
- Normal – The port is not configured in a private VLAN.  
- Host – The port is a community port and can only communicate with other ports  
in its own community VLAN, and with the designated promiscuous port(s). Or the  
port is an isolated port that can only communicate with the lone promiscuous  
port within its own isolated VLAN.  
- Promiscuous – A promiscuous port can communicate with all the interfaces  
within a private VLAN.  
Primary VLAN – Conveys traffic between promiscuous ports, and between  
promiscuous ports and community ports within the associated secondary VLANs.  
Community VLAN – A community VLAN conveys traffic between community  
ports, and from community ports to their designated promiscuous ports.  
Isolated VLAN – Conveys traffic only between the VLAN’s isolated ports and  
promiscuous ports. Traffic between isolated ports within the VLAN is blocked.  
Trunk – The trunk identifier. (Port Information only)  
3-155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
Web – Click VLAN, Private VLAN, Port Information or Trunk Information.  
Figure 3-86 Private VLAN Port Information  
CLI – This example shows the switch configured with primary VLAN 5 and  
community VLAN 6. Port 3 has been configured as a promiscuous port and mapped  
to VLAN 5, while ports 4 and 5 have been configured as host ports and associated  
with VLAN 6. This means that traffic for port 4 and 5 can only pass through port 3.  
Console#show vlan private-vlan  
Primary Secondary Type  
-------- ----------- ---------- ------------------------------  
Interfaces  
5
5
primary  
community  
Eth1/ 3  
Eth1/ 4 Eth1/ 5  
6
Console#  
Configuring Private VLAN Interfaces  
Use the Private VLAN Port Configuration and Private VLAN Trunk Configuration  
menus to set the private VLAN interface type, and associate the interfaces with a  
private VLAN.  
Command Attributes  
Port/Trunk – The switch interface.  
PVLAN Port Type – Sets the private VLAN port types.  
- Normal – The port is not assigned to a private VLAN.  
- Host – The port is a community port or an isolated port. A community port can  
communicate with other ports in its own community VLAN and with designated  
promiscuous port(s). An isolated port can only communicate with the single  
designated promiscuous port in the isolated VLAN; it cannot communicate with  
any other host ports.  
- Promiscuous – A promiscuous port can communicate with all interfaces within  
a private VLAN.  
Primary VLAN – Conveys traffic between promiscuous ports, and between  
promiscuous ports and community ports within the associated secondary VLANs.  
If PVLAN type is “Promiscuous,” then specify the associated primary VLAN.  
3-156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
VLAN Configuration  
3
Community VLAN – A community VLAN conveys traffic between community  
ports, and from community ports to their designated promiscuous ports. Set  
PVLAN Port Type to “Host,” and then specify the associated Community VLAN.  
Isolated VLAN – Conveys traffic only between the VLAN’s isolated ports and the  
promiscuous port. Traffic between isolated ports within the VLAN is blocked. Set  
the PVLAN Port Type to “Host,” then specify an isolated VLAN by marking the  
check box for an “Isolated VLAN,” and selecting the required VLAN from the  
drop-down box.  
Web – Click VLAN, Private VLAN, Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration. Set the  
PVLAN Port Type for each port that will join a private VLAN. Assign promiscuous  
ports to a primary or isolated VLAN. Assign host ports to a community or isolated  
VLAN. After all the ports have been configured, click Apply.  
Figure 3-87 Private VLAN Port Configuration  
CLI – This example shows the switch configured with primary VLAN 5 and  
secondary VLAN 6. Port 3 has been configured as a promiscuous port and mapped  
to VLAN 5, while ports 4 and 5 have been configured as a host ports and associated  
with VLAN 6. This means that traffic for port 4 and 5 can only pass through port 3.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3Console(config-if)#switchportmode  
private-vlan promiscuous  
Console(config-if)#switchport private-vlan mapping 5  
Console(config-if)#exit  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/4  
Console(config-if)#switchport mode private-vlan host  
Console(config-if)#switchport private-vlan host-association 6  
Console(config-if)#exit  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5  
Console(config-if)#switchport mode private-vlan host  
Console(config-if)#switchport private-vlan host-association 6  
Console(config-if)#  
3-157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Class of Service Configuration  
Class of Service (CoS) allows you to specify which data packets have greater  
precedence when traffic is buffered in the switch due to congestion. This switch  
supports CoS with four priority queues for each port. Data packets in a port’s  
high-priority queue will be transmitted before those in the lower-priority queues. You  
can set the default priority for each interface, and configure the mapping of frame  
priority tags to the switch’s priority queues.  
Layer 2 Queue Settings  
Setting the Default Priority for Interfaces  
You can specify the default port priority for each interface on the switch. All untagged  
packets entering the switch are tagged with the specified default port priority, and  
then sorted into the appropriate priority queue at the output port.  
Command Usage  
• This switch provides four priority queues for each port. It uses Weighted Round  
Robin to prevent head-of-queue blockage.  
• The default priority applies for an untagged frame received on a port set to accept  
all frame types (i.e, receives both untagged and tagged frames). This priority does  
not apply to IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tagged frames. If the incoming frame is an IEEE  
802.1Q VLAN tagged frame, the IEEE 802.1p User Priority bits will be used.  
• If the output port is an untagged member of the associated VLAN, these frames are  
stripped of all VLAN tags prior to transmission.  
Command Attributes  
14  
Default Priority – The priority that is assigned to untagged frames received on  
the specified interface. (Range: 0-7, Default: 0)  
Number of Egress Traffic Classes – The number of queue buffers provided for  
each port.  
14. CLI displays this information as “Priority for untagged traffic.”  
3-158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Class of Service Configuration  
3
Web – Click Priority, Default Port Priority or Default Trunk Priority. Modify the default  
priority for any interface, then click Apply.  
Figure 3-88 Port Priority Configuration  
CLI – This example assigns a default priority of 5 to port 3.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3  
Console(config-if)#switchport priority default 5  
Console(config-if)#end  
Console#show interfaces switchport ethernet 1/3  
Information of Eth 1/3  
Broadcast threshold:  
LACP status:  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Ingress rate limit: disable, Level: 30  
Egress rate limit: disable, Level: 30  
VLAN membership mode:  
Ingress rule:  
Hybrid  
Enabled  
Acceptable frame type:  
Native VLAN:  
Tagged frames only  
1
Priority for untagged traffic: 5  
GVRP status:  
Disabled  
Allowed VLAN:  
Forbidden VLAN:  
Private-VLAN mode:  
1(u),  
NONE  
Private-VLAN host-association: NONE  
Private-VLAN mapping:  
Console#  
NONE  
3-159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues  
This switch processes Class of Service (CoS) priority tagged traffic by using four  
priority queues for each port, with service schedules based on strict or Weighted  
Round Robin (WRR). Up to eight separate traffic priorities are defined in IEEE  
802.1p. The default priority levels are assigned according to recommendations in  
the IEEE 802.1p standard as shown in the following table.  
Table 3-12 Egress Queue Priority Mapping  
Queue  
0
1
2
3
Priority  
1,2  
0,3  
4,5  
6,7  
1,2  
0,3  
4,5  
6,7  
Q0  
Q1  
Q2  
Q3  
Serviced  
by weighted  
round robin  
The priority levels recommended in the IEEE 802.1p standard for various network  
applications are shown in the following table. However, you can map the priority  
levels to the switch’s output queues in any way that benefits application traffic for  
your own network.  
Table 3-13 CoS Priority Levels  
Priority Level  
Traffic Type  
1
Background  
2
(Spare)  
0 (default)  
Best Effort  
3
4
5
6
7
Excellent Effort  
Controlled Load  
Video, less than 100 milliseconds latency and jitter  
Voice, less than 10 milliseconds latency and jitter  
Network Control  
Command Attributes  
Priority – CoS value. (Range: 0-7, where 7 is the highest priority)  
15  
Traffic Class – Output queue buffer. (Range: 0-3, where 3 is the highest CoS  
priority queue)  
15. CLI shows Queue ID.  
3-160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Class of Service Configuration  
3
Web – Click Priority, Traffic Classes. Assign priorities to the traffic classes (i.e.,  
output queues), then click Apply.  
Figure 3-89 Traffic Classes  
CLI – The following example shows how to change the CoS assignments.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1  
Console(config-if)#queue cos-map 0 0  
Console(config-if)#queue cos-map 1 1  
Console(config-if)#queue cos-map 2 2  
Console(config-if)#end  
Console#show queue cos-map ethernet 1/1  
Information of Eth 1/1  
CoS Value  
: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7  
Priority Queue: 0 1 2 1 2 2 3 3  
Console#  
*
Mapping specific values for CoS priorities is implemented as an interface configuration  
command, but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch.  
3-161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Selecting the Queue Mode  
You can set the switch to service the queues based on a strict rule that requires all  
traffic in a higher priority queue to be processed before lower priority queues are  
serviced, or use Weighted Round-Robin (WRR) queuing that specifies a relative  
weight of each queue. WRR uses a predefined relative weight for each queue that  
determines the percentage of service time the switch services each queue before  
moving on to the next queue. This prevents the head-of-line blocking that can occur  
with strict priority queuing.  
Command Attributes  
WRR - Weighted Round-Robin shares bandwidth at the egress ports by using  
scheduling weights 1, 2, 4, 6 for queues 0 through 3 respectively. (This is the  
default selection.)  
Strict - Services the egress queues in sequential order, transmitting all traffic in the  
higher priority queues before servicing lower priority queues.  
Web – Click Priority, Queue Mode. Select Strict or WRR, then click Apply.  
Figure 3-90 Queue Mode  
CLI – The following sets the queue mode to strict priority service mode.  
Console(config)#queue mode wrr  
Console(config)#exit  
Console#show queue mode  
Queue mode: wrr  
Console#  
3-162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Class of Service Configuration  
3
Setting the Service Weight for Traffic Classes  
This switch uses the Weighted Round Robin (WRR) algorithm to determine the  
frequency at which it services each priority queue. As described in “Mapping CoS  
Values to Egress Queues” on page 3-160, the traffic classes are mapped to one of  
the four egress queues provided for each port. You can assign a weight to each of  
these queues (and thereby to the corresponding traffic priorities). This weight sets  
the frequency at which each queue will be polled for service, and subsequently  
affects the response time for software applications assigned a specific priority value.  
Command Attributes  
16  
WRR Setting Table – Displays a list of weights for each traffic class (i.e., queue).  
Weight Value – Set a new weight for the selected traffic class. However, note that  
Queue 0 is fixed at a weight of 1, and cannot be configured. (Range: 1-31)  
Web – Click Priority, Queue Scheduling. Highlight a traffic class (i.e., output queue),  
enter a weight, then click Apply.  
Figure 3-91 Configuring Queue Scheduling  
CLI – The following example shows how to assign WRR weights to each of the  
priority queues.  
Console(config)#queue bandwidth 6 9 12  
Console(config)#exit  
Console#show queue bandwidth  
Queue ID Weight  
-------- ------  
0
1
1
6
2
3
9
12  
Console  
16. CLI shows Queue ID.  
3-163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the Switch  
3
Layer 3/4 Priority Settings  
Mapping Layer 3/4 Priorities to CoS Values  
This switch supports several common methods of prioritizing layer 3/4 traffic to meet  
application requirements. Traffic priorities can be specified in the IP header of a  
frame, using the priority bits in the Type of Service (ToS) octet or the number of the  
TCP port. If priority bits are used, the ToS octet may contain three bits for IP  
Precedence or six bits for Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) service. When  
these services are enabled, the priorities are mapped to a Class of Service value by  
the switch, and the traffic then sent to the corresponding output queue.  
Because different priority information may be contained in the traffic, this switch  
maps priority values to the output queues in the following manner:  
• The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port Priority, IP Precedence or DSCP  
Priority, and then Default Port Priority.  
• IP Precedence and DSCP Priority cannot both be enabled. Enabling one of these  
priority types will automatically disable the other.  
Selecting IP Precedence/DSCP Priority  
The switch allows you to choose between using IP Precedence or DSCP priority.  
Select one of the methods or disable this feature.  
Command Attributes  
Disabled – Disables both priority services. (This is the default setting.)  
IP Precedence – Maps layer 3/4 priorities using IP Precedence.  
IP DSCP – Maps layer 3/4 priorities using Differentiated Services Code Point  
Mapping.  
Web – Click Priority, IP Precedence/DSCP Priority Status. Select Disabled,  
IP Precedence or IP DSCP from the scroll-down menu, then click Apply.  
Figure 3-92 IP Precedence/DSCP Priority Status  
CLI – The following example enables IP Precedence service on the switch.  
Console(config)#map ip precedence  
Console(config)#  
3-164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Class of Service Configuration  
3
Mapping IP Precedence  
The Type of Service (ToS) octet in the IPv4 header includes three precedence bits  
defining eight different priority levels ranging from highest priority for network control  
packets to lowest priority for routine traffic. The default IP Precedence values are  
mapped one-to-one to Class of Service values (i.e., Precedence value 0 maps to  
CoS value 0, and so forth). Bits 6 and 7 are used for network control, and the other  
bits for various application types. ToS bits are defined in the following table.  
Table 3-14 Mapping IP Precedence  
Priority Level  
Traffic Type  
Priority Level  
Traffic Type  
Flash  
7
6
5
4
Network Control  
Internetwork Control  
Critical  
3
2
1
0
Immediate  
Priority  
Flash Override  
Routine  
Command Attributes  
IP Precedence Priority Table – Shows the IP Precedence to CoS map.  
Class of Service Value – Maps a CoS value to the selected IP Precedence value.  
Note that “0” represents low priority and “7” represent high priority.  
Web – Click Priority, IP Precedence Priority. Select an entry from the IP Precedence  
Priority Table, enter a value in the Class of Service Value field, and then click Apply.  
Figure 3-93 Mapping IP Precedence Priority Values  
3-165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configuring the Switch  
3
CLI – The following example globally enables IP Precedence service on the switch,  
maps IP Precedence value 1 to CoS value 0 (on port 1), and then displays the IP  
Precedence settings.  
Console(config)#map ip precedence  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1  
Console(config-if)#map ip precedence 1 cos 0  
Console(config-if)#end  
Console#show map ip precedence ethernet 1/1  
Precedence mapping status: enabled  
Port  
Precedence COS  
--------- ---------- ---  
Eth 1/ 1  
Eth 1/ 1  
Eth 1/ 1  
Eth 1/ 1  
Eth 1/ 1  
Eth 1/ 1  
Eth 1/ 1  
Eth 1/ 1  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
0
2
3
4
5
6
7
Console#  
Note: Mapping specific values for IP Precedence is implemented as an interface  
configuration command, but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the  
switch.  
Mapping DSCP Priority  
The DSCP is six bits wide, allowing coding for up to 64 different forwarding  
behaviors. The DSCP replaces the ToS bits, but it retains backward compatibility  
with the three precedence bits so that non-DSCP compliant, ToS-enabled devices,  
will not conflict with the DSCP mapping. Based on network policies, different kinds of  
traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding. The DSCP default values are  
defined in the following table. Note that all the DSCP values that are not specified  
are mapped to CoS value 0.  
Table 3-15 Mapping DSCP Priority Values  
IP DSCP Value  
CoS Value  
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10, 12, 14, 16  
18, 20, 22, 24  
26, 28, 30, 32, 34, 36  
38, 40, 42  
48  
46, 56  
3-166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Class of Service Configuration  
3
Command Attributes  
DSCP Priority Table – Shows the DSCP Priority to CoS map.  
Class of Service Value – Maps a CoS value to the selected DSCP Priority value.  
Note that “0” represents low priority and “7” represent high priority.  
Note: IP DSCP settings apply to all interfaces.  
Web – Click Priority, IP DSCP Priority. Select an entry from the DSCP table, enter a  
value in the Class of Service Value field, then click Apply.  
Figure 3-94 Mapping IP DSCP Priority Values  
CLI – The following example globally enables DSCP Priority service on the switch,  
maps DSCP value 0 to CoS value 1 (on port 1), and then displays the DSCP Priority  
settings.  
Console(config)#map ip dscp  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1  
Console(config-if)#map ip dscp 1 cos 0  
Console(config-if)#end  
Console#show map ip dscp ethernet 1/1  
DSCP mapping status: disabled  
Port  
DSCP COS  
--------- ---- ---  
Eth 1/ 1  
Eth 1/ 1  
Eth 1/ 1  
Eth 1/ 1  
0
1
2
3
0
0
0
0
.
.
.
Eth 1/ 1  
Eth 1/ 1  
Eth 1/ 1  
61  
62  
63  
0
0
0
Console#  
Note: Mapping specific values for IP DSCP is implemented as an interface configuration  
command, but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch.  
3-167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Mapping IP Port Priority  
You can also map network applications to Class of Service values based on the IP  
port number (i.e., TCP/UDP port number) in the frame header. Some of the more  
common TCP service ports include: HTTP: 80, FTP: 21, Telnet: 23 and POP3: 110.  
Command Attributes  
IP Port Priority Status – Enables or disables the IP port priority.  
IP Port Priority Table – Shows the IP port to CoS map.  
IP Port Number (TCP/UDP) – Set a new IP port number.  
Class of Service Value – Sets a CoS value for a new IP port. Note that “0”  
represents low priority and “7” represent high priority.  
Web – Click Priority, IP Port Priority Status. Set IP Port Priority Status to Enabled.  
Figure 3-95 IP Port Priority Status  
Click Priority, IP Port Priority. Enter the port number for a network application in the  
IP Port Number box and the new CoS value in the Class of Service box, and then  
click Apply.  
Figure 3-96 IP Port Priority  
3-168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Class of Service Configuration  
3
CLI* – The following example globally enables IP Port Priority service on the switch,  
maps HTTP traffic on port 5 to CoS value 0, and then displays all the IP Port Priority  
settings for that port.  
Console(config)#map ip port  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5  
Console(config-if)#map ip port 80 cos 0  
Console(config-if)#end  
Console#show map ip port ethernet 1/5  
TCP port mapping status: disabled  
Port  
--------- -------- ---  
Eth 1/ 5 80  
Console#  
Port no. COS  
0
Note: Mapping specific values for IP Port Priority is implemented as an interface  
configuration command, but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the  
switch.  
Mapping CoS Values to ACLs  
Use the ACL CoS Mapping page to set the output queue for packets matching an  
ACL rule as shown in the following table. Note that the specified CoS value is only  
used to map the matching packet to an output queue; it is not written to the packet  
itself. For information on mapping the CoS values to output queues, see page 3-160.  
Table 3-16 Egress Queue Priority Mapping  
Queue  
0
1
2
3
Priority  
1,2  
0,3  
4,5  
6,7  
Command Attributes  
Port – Port identifier.  
17  
Name – Name of ACL.  
Type – Type of ACL (IP or MAC).  
CoS Priority – CoS value used for packets matching an IP ACL rule. (Range: 0-7)  
ACL CoS Priority Mapping – Displays the configured information.  
17. For information on configuring ACLs, see page 3-82.  
3-169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the Switch  
3
Web – Click Priority, ACL CoS Priority. Enable mapping for any port, select an ACL  
from the scroll-down list, then click Add.  
Figure 3-97 ACL CoS Priority  
CLI – This example assigns a CoS value of zero to packets matching rules within  
the specified ACL on port 24.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/24  
Console(config-if)#map access-list ip bill cos 0  
Console(config-if)#  
Multicast Filtering  
Multicasting is used to support real-time  
Unicast  
Flow  
applications such as videoconferencing or  
streaming audio. A multicast server does not have  
to establish a separate connection with each  
client. It merely broadcasts its service to the  
network, and any hosts that want to receive the  
multicast register with their local multicast switch/  
router. Although this approach reduces the  
network overhead required by a multicast server,  
the broadcast traffic must be carefully pruned at  
every multicast switch/router it passes through to  
ensure that traffic is only passed on to the hosts  
which subscribed to this service.  
Multicast  
Flow  
This switch uses IGMP (Internet Group  
Management Protocol) to query for any attached  
hosts that want to receive a specific multicast  
service. It identifies the ports containing hosts  
3-170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Multicast Filtering  
3
requesting to join the service and sends data out to those ports only. It then  
propagates the service request up to any neighboring multicast switch/router to  
ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service. This procedure is called  
multicast filtering.  
The purpose of IP multicast filtering is to optimize a switched network’s  
performance, so multicast packets will only be forwarded to those ports containing  
multicast group hosts or multicast routers/switches, instead of flooding traffic to all  
ports in the subnet (VLAN).  
Layer 2 IGMP (Snooping and Query)  
IGMP Snooping and Query – If multicast routing is not supported on other switches  
in your network, you can use IGMP Snooping and Query (page 3-171) to monitor  
IGMP service requests passing between multicast clients and servers, and  
dynamically configure the switch ports which need to forward multicast traffic.  
Static IGMP Router Interface – If IGMP snooping cannot locate the IGMP querier,  
you can manually designate a known IGMP querier (i.e., a multicast router/switch)  
connected over the network to an interface on your switch (page 3-175). This  
interface will then join all the current multicast groups supported by the attached  
router/switch to ensure that multicast traffic is passed to all appropriate interfaces  
within the switch.  
Static IGMP Host Interface – For multicast applications that you need to control  
more carefully, you can manually assign a multicast service to specific interfaces on  
the switch (page 3-177).  
Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters  
You can configure the switch to forward multicast traffic intelligently. Based on the  
IGMP query and report messages, the switch forwards traffic only to the ports that  
request multicast traffic. This prevents the switch from broadcasting the traffic to all  
ports and possibly disrupting network performance.  
Command Usage  
IGMP Snooping – This switch can passively snoop on IGMP Query and Report  
packets transferred between IP multicast routers/switches and IP multicast host  
groups to identify the IP multicast group members. It simply monitors the IGMP  
packets passing through it, picks out the group registration information, and  
configures the multicast filters accordingly.  
IGMP Querier – A router, or multicast-enabled switch, can periodically ask their  
hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic. If there is more than one router/switch  
on the LAN performing IP multicasting, one of these devices is elected “querier”  
and assumes the role of querying the LAN for group members. It then propagates  
the service requests on to any upstream multicast switch/router to ensure that it will  
continue to receive the multicast service.  
Note: Multicast routers use this information, along with a multicast routing protocol such  
as DVMRP or PIM, to support IP multicasting across the Internet.  
3-171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Configuring the Switch  
3
Command Attributes  
IGMP Status — When enabled, the switch will monitor network traffic to determine  
which hosts want to receive multicast traffic. This is also referred to as IGMP  
Snooping. (Default: Enabled)  
Act as IGMP Querier — When enabled, the switch can serve as the Querier,  
which is responsible for asking hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic.  
(Default: Enabled)  
IGMP Query Count — Sets the maximum number of queries issued for which  
there has been no response before the switch takes action to drop a client from the  
multicast group. (Range: 2-10; Default: 2)  
IGMP Query Interval — Sets the frequency at which the switch sends IGMP  
host-query messages. (Range: 60-125 seconds; Default: 125)  
IGMP Report Delay — Sets the time between receiving an IGMP Report for an IP  
multicast address on a port before the switch sends an IGMP Query out of that port  
and removes the entry from its list. (Range: 5-25 seconds; Default: 10)  
IGMP Query Timeout — The time the switch waits after the previous querier stops  
before it considers the router port (i.e., the interface which had been receiving  
query packets) to have expired. (Range: 300-500 seconds; Default: 300)  
IGMP Version — Sets the protocol version for compatibility with other devices on  
the network. (Range: 1-2; Default: 2)  
Notes: 1. All systems on the subnet must support the same version.  
2. Some attributes are only enabled for IGMPv2, including IGMP Report Delay  
and IGMP Query Timeout.  
Web – Click IGMP Snooping, IGMP Configuration. Adjust the IGMP settings as  
required, and then click Apply. (The default settings are shown below.)  
Figure 3-98 IGMP Configuration  
3-172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Multicast Filtering  
3
CLI – This example modifies the settings for multicast filtering, and then displays the  
current status.  
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping  
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping querier  
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping query-count 10  
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping query-interval 100  
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping query-max-response-time 20  
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping router-port-expire-time 300  
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping version 2  
Console(config)#exit  
Console#show ip igmp snooping  
Service status  
Querier status  
Query count  
: Enabled  
: Enabled  
: 10  
Query interval  
: 100 sec  
Query max response time : 20 sec  
Router port expire time : 300 sec  
IGMP snooping version  
Console#  
: Version 2  
Enabling IGMP Immediate Leave  
The IGMP snooping immediate-leave feature enables a Layer 2 LAN interface to be  
removed from the multicast forwarding table without first sending an IGMP  
group-specific query to the interface. Upon receiving a group-specific IGMPv2 leave  
message, the switch immediately removes the interface from the Layer 2 forwarding  
table entry for that multicast group, unless a multicast router was learned on the  
port.  
IGMP immediate leave improves bandwidth management for all hosts in a switched  
network.  
Command Attributes  
VLAN ID – ID of configured VLAN (1-4093).  
Immediate Leave – Enable or disable IGMP immediate leave for the selected  
VLAN.  
Web – Click IGMP Snooping, IGMP Immediate Leave.  
Figure 3-99 IGMP Immediate Leave  
3-173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
CLI – This example enables IGMP immediate leave for VLAN 1 and then displays  
the current IGMP snooping status.  
Console(config)#interface vlan 1  
Console(config-if)#ip igmp snooping immediate-leave  
Console(config-if)#end  
Console#show ip igmp snooping  
Service status:  
Querier status:  
Query count:  
Enabled  
Enabled  
2
Query interval:  
125 sec  
Query max response time: 10 sec  
Router port expire time: 300 sec  
Immediate Leave Processing: Enabled on VLAN  
1,  
IGMP snooping version:  
Console#  
Version 2  
Displaying Interfaces Attached to a Multicast Router  
Multicast routers that are attached to ports on the switch use information obtained  
from IGMP, along with a multicast routing protocol such as DVMRP or PIM, to  
support IP multicasting across the Internet. These routers may be dynamically  
discovered by the switch or statically assigned to an interface on the switch.  
You can use the Multicast Router Port Information page to display the ports on this  
switch attached to a neighboring multicast router/switch for each VLAN ID.  
Command Attributes  
VLAN ID – ID of configured VLAN (1-4094).  
Multicast Router List – Multicast routers dynamically discovered by this switch or  
those that are statically assigned to an interface on this switch.  
Web – Click IGMP Snooping, Multicast Router Port Information. Select the required  
VLAN ID from the scroll-down list to display the associated multicast routers.  
Figure 3-100 Displaying Multicast Router Port Information  
3-174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Multicast Filtering  
3
CLI – This example shows that Port 11 has been statically configured as a port  
attached to a multicast router.  
Console#show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1  
VLAN M'cast Router Port Type  
---- ------------------ -------  
1
Eth 1/11 Static  
Console#  
Specifying Static Interfaces for a Multicast Router  
Depending on your network connections, IGMP snooping may not always be able to  
locate the IGMP querier. Therefore, if the IGMP querier is a known multicast router/  
switch connected over the network to an interface (port or trunk) on your switch, you  
can manually configure the interface (and a specified VLAN) to join all the current  
multicast groups supported by the attached router. This can ensure that multicast  
traffic is passed to all the appropriate interfaces within the switch.  
Command Attributes  
Interface – Activates the Port or Trunk scroll down list.  
VLAN ID – Selects the VLAN to propagate all multicast traffic coming from the  
attached multicast router.  
Port or Trunk – Specifies the interface attached to a multicast router.  
Web – Click IGMP Snooping, Static Multicast Router Port Configuration. Specify the  
interfaces attached to a multicast router, indicate the VLAN which will forward all the  
corresponding multicast traffic, and then click Add. After you have finished adding  
interfaces to the list, click Apply.  
Figure 3-101 Static Multicast Router Port Configuration  
CLI – This example configures port 11 as a multicast router port within VLAN 1.  
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping vlan 1 mrouter ethernet 1/11  
Console(config)#exit  
Console#show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1  
VLAN M'cast Router Port Type  
---- ------------------ -------  
1
Eth 1/11 Static  
Console#  
3-175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the Switch  
3
Displaying Port Members of Multicast Services  
You can display the port members associated with a specified VLAN and multicast  
service.  
Command Attributes  
VLAN ID – Selects the VLAN for which to display port members.  
Multicast IP Address – The IP address for a specific multicast service.  
Multicast Group Port List – Shows the interfaces that have already been  
assigned to the selected VLAN to propagate a specific multicast service.  
Web – Click IGMP Snooping, IP Multicast Registration Table. Select a VLAN ID and  
the IP address for a multicast service from the scroll-down lists. The switch will  
display all the interfaces that are propagating this multicast service.  
Figure 3-102 IP Multicast Registration Table  
CLI – This example displays all the known multicast services supported on VLAN 1,  
along with the ports propagating the corresponding services. The Type field shows if  
this entry was learned dynamically or was statically configured.  
Console#show bridge 1 multicast vlan 1  
VLAN M'cast IP addr. Member ports Type  
---- --------------- ------------ -------  
1
1
224.1.1.12  
224.1.2.3  
Eth1/12  
Eth1/12  
USER  
IGMP  
Console#  
3-176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Multicast Filtering  
3
Assigning Ports to Multicast Services  
Multicast filtering can be dynamically configured using IGMP Snooping and IGMP  
Query messages as described in “Configuring IGMP snooping and Query  
Parameters” on page 3-133. For certain applications that require tighter control, you  
may need to statically configure a multicast service on the switch. First add all the  
ports attached to participating hosts to a common VLAN, and then assign the  
multicast service to that VLAN group.  
Command Usage  
• Static multicast addresses are never aged out.  
• When a multicast address is assigned to an interface in a specific VLAN, the  
corresponding traffic can only be forwarded to ports within that VLAN.  
Command Attributes  
Interface – Activates the Port or Trunk scroll down list.  
VLAN ID – Selects the VLAN to propagate all multicast traffic coming from the  
attached multicast router/switch.  
Multicast IP – The IP address for a specific multicast service  
Port or Trunk – Specifies the interface attached to a multicast router/switch.  
Web – Click IGMP Snooping, IGMP Member Port Table. Specify the interface  
attached to a multicast service (via an IGMP-enabled switch or multicast router),  
indicate the VLAN that will propagate the multicast service, specify the multicast IP  
address, and click Add. After you have completed adding ports to the member list,  
click Apply.  
Figure 3-103 IGMP Member Port Table  
3-177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the Switch  
3
CLI – This example assigns a multicast address to VLAN 1, and then displays all the  
known multicast services supported on VLAN 1.  
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping vlan 1 static 224.1.1.12  
ethernet 1/12  
Console(config)#exit  
Console#show mac-address-table multicast vlan 1  
VLAN M'cast IP addr. Member ports Type  
---- --------------- ------------ -------  
1
1
224.1.1.12  
224.1.2.3  
Eth1/12  
Eth1/12  
USER  
IGMP  
Console#  
IGMP Filtering and Throttling  
In certain switch applications, the administrator may want to control the multicast  
services that are available to end users. For example, an IP/TV service based on a  
specific subscription plan. The IGMP filtering feature fulfills this requirement by  
restricting access to specified multicast services on a switch port and IGMP  
throttling limits the number of simultaneous multicast groups a port can join.  
IGMP filtering enables you to assign a profile to a switch port that specifies multcast  
groups that are permitted or denied on the port. An IGMP filter profile can contain  
one or more, or a range of multicast addresses, but only one profile can be assigned  
to a port. When enabled, IGMP join reports received on the port are checked against  
the filter profile. If a requested multicast group is permitted, the IGMP join report is  
forwarded as normal. If a requested multicast group is denied, the IGMP join report  
is dropped.  
IGMP throttling sets a maximum number of multicast groups that a port can join at  
the same time. When the maximum number of groups is reached on a port, the  
switch can take one of two actions; either “deny” or “replace.” If the action is set to  
deny, any new IGMP join reports will be dropped. If the action is set to replace, the  
switch randomly removes an existing group and replaces it with the new multicast  
group.  
Note: IGMP filtering and throttling only applies to dynamically learned multicast groups, it  
does not apply to statically configured groups.  
Enabling IGMP Filtering and Throttling  
To implement IGMP filtering and throttling on the switch, you must first enable the  
feature globally and create IGMP profile numbers.  
Command Attributes  
IGMP Filter – Enables IGMP filtering and throttling globally for the switch.  
(Default: Disabled)  
IGMP Profile – Creates IGMP profile numbers. (Range: 1-4294967295)  
3-178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Multicast Filtering  
3
Web – Click IGMP Snooping, IGMP Filter Configuration. Create a profile number by  
entering the number in text box and clicking Add. Enable the IGMP filter status, then  
click Apply.  
Figure 3-104 Enabling IGMP Filtering and Throttling  
CLI – This example enables IGMP filtering and creates a profile number, then  
displays the current status and the existing profile numbers.  
Console(config)#ip igmp filter  
Console(config)#ip igmp profile 19  
Console(config-igmp-profile)#end  
Console#show ip igmp filter  
IGMP filter enable  
Console#show ip igmp profile  
IGMP Profile 19  
IGMP Profile 50  
Console#  
Configuring IGMP Filter Profiles  
When you have created an IGMP profile number, you can then configure the  
multicast groups to filter and set the access mode.  
Command Usage  
• Each profile has only one access mode; either permit or deny.  
• When the access mode is set to permit, IGMP join reports are processed when a  
multicast group falls within the controlled range. When the access mode is set to  
deny, IGMP join reports are only processed when a multicast group is not in the  
controlled range.  
3-179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
Command Attributes  
Profile ID – Selects an existing profile number to configure. After selecting an ID  
number, click the Query button to display the current configuration.  
Access Mode – Sets the access mode of the profile; either permit or deny.  
(Default: Deny)  
New Multicast Address Range List – Specifies multicast groups to include in the  
profile. Specify a multicast group range by entering a start and end IP address.  
Specify a single multicast group by entering the same IP address for the start and  
end of the range. Click the Add button to add a range to the current list.  
Current Multicast Address Range List – Lists multicast groups currently  
included in the profile. Select an entry and click the Remove button to delete it from  
the list.  
Web – Click IGMP Snooping, IGMP Filter Profile Configuration. Select the profile  
number you want to configure, then click Query to display the current settings.  
Specify the access mode for the profile and then add multicast groups to the profile  
list. Click Apply.  
Figure 3-105 IGMP Profile Configuration  
3-180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Multicast Filtering  
3
CLI – This example configures profile number 19 by setting the access mode to  
“permit” and then specifying a range of multicast groups that a user can join. The  
current profile configuration is then displayed.  
Console(config)#ip igmp profile 19  
Console(config-igmp-profile)#permit  
Console(config-igmp-profile)#range 239.1.1.1  
Console(config-igmp-profile)#range 239.2.3.1 239.2.3.100  
Console(config-igmp-profile)#end  
Console#show ip igmp profile 19  
IGMP Profile 19  
permit  
range 239.1.1.1 239.1.1.1  
range 239.2.3.1 239.2.3.100  
Console#  
Configuring IGMP Filtering and Throttling for Interfaces  
Once you have configured IGMP profiles, you can then assign them to interfaces on  
the switch. Also, you can set the IGMP throttling number to limit the number of  
multicast groups an interface can join at the same time.  
Command Usage  
• Only one profile can be assigned to an interface.  
• An IGMP profile or throttling setting can be applied to a trunk interface. When ports  
are configured as trunk members, the trunk uses the settings applied to the first  
port member in the trunk.  
• IGMP throttling sets a maximum number of multicast groups that a port can join at  
the same time. When the maximum number of groups is reached on a port, the  
switch can take one of two actions; either “deny” or “replace.” If the action is set to  
deny, any new IGMP join reports will be dropped. If the action is set to replace, the  
switch randomly removes an existing group and replaces it with the new multicast  
group.  
Command Attributes  
Profile – Selects an existing profile number to assign to an interface.  
Max Multicast Groups – Sets the maximum number of multicast groups an  
interface can join at the same time. (Range: 0-64; Default: 64)  
Current Multicast Groups – Displays the current number of multicast groups the  
interface has joined.  
Throttling Action Mode – Sets the action to take when the maximum number of  
multicast groups for the interface has been exceeded. (Default: Deny)  
deny - The new multicast group join report is dropped.  
replace - The new multicast group replaces an existing group.  
Throttling Status – Indicates if the throttling action has been implemented on the  
interface. (Options: True or False)  
3-181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Trunk – Indicates if a port is a trunk member.  
Web – Click IGMP Snooping, IGMP Filter/Throttling Port Configuration or IGMP  
Filter/Throttling Trunk Configuration. Select a profile to assign to an interface, then  
set the throttling number and action. Click Apply.  
Figure 3-106 IGMP Filter and Throttling Port Configuration  
CLI – This example assigns IGMP profile number 19 to port 1, and then sets the  
throttling number and action. The current IGMP filtering and throttling settings for the  
interface are then displayed.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1  
Console(config-if)#ip igmp filter 19  
Console(config-if)#ip igmp max-groups 10  
Console(config-if)#ip igmp max-groups action replace  
Console(config-if)#end  
Console#show ip igmp filter interface ethernet 1/1  
Information of Eth 1/1  
IGMP Profile 19  
deny  
range 239.1.1.1 239.1.1.1  
range 239.2.3.1 239.2.3.100  
Console#show ip igmp throttle interface ethernet 1/1  
Information of Eth 1/1  
status : FALSE  
action : replace  
max multicast groups : 10  
current multicast groups : 1  
Console#  
3-182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Multicast VLAN Registration  
3
Multicast VLAN Registration  
Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) is a protocol that controls access to a single  
network-wide VLAN most commonly used for transmitting multicast traffic (such as  
television channels or video-on-demand) across a service provider’s network. Any  
multicast traffic entering an MVR VLAN is sent to all attached subscribers. This  
protocol can significantly reduce to processing overhead required to dynamically  
monitor and establish the distribution tree for a normal multicast VLAN. This makes  
it possible to support common multicast services over a wide part of the network  
without having to use any multicast routing protocol.  
MVR maintains the user isolation and data security provided by VLAN segregation  
by passing only multicast traffic into other VLANs to which the subscribers belong.  
Even though common multicast streams are passed onto different VLAN groups  
from the MVR VLAN, users in different IEEE 802.1Q or private VLANs cannot  
exchange any information (except through upper-level routing services).  
Multicast Router  
Satellite Services  
Service  
Network  
Multicast Server  
Source  
Layer 2 Switch  
Port  
Receiver  
Ports  
Set-top Box  
TV  
Set-top Box  
TV  
PC  
General Configuration Guidelines for MVR  
1. Enable MVR globally on the switch, select the MVR VLAN, and add the  
multicast groups that will stream traffic to attached hosts (see “Configuring  
2. Set the interfaces that will join the MVR as source ports or receiver ports (see  
3. Enable IGMP Snooping to a allow a subscriber to dynamically join or leave an  
page 3-171). Note that only IGMP version 2 or 3 hosts can issue multicast join  
or leave messages.  
3-183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
4. For multicast streams that will run for a long term and be associated with a  
stable set of hosts, you can statically bind the multicast group to the  
Configuring Global MVR Settings  
The global settings for Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) include enabling or  
disabling MVR for the switch, selecting the VLAN that will serve as the sole channel  
for common multicast streams supported by the service provider, and assigning the  
multicast group address for each of these services to the MVR VLAN.  
Command Attributes  
MVR Status – When MVR is enabled on both the switch, any multicast data  
associated an MVR group is sent from all designated source ports, and to all  
receiver ports that have registered to receive data from that multicast group.  
(Default: Disabled)  
MVR Running Status – Indicates whether or not all necessary conditions in the  
MVR environment are satisfied.  
MVR VLAN – Identifier of the VLAN that serves as the channel for streaming  
multicast services using MVR. (Range: 1-4094; Default: 1)  
MVR Group IP – IP address for an MVR multicast group. The IP address range of  
224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255 is used for multicast streams. MVR group addresses  
cannot fall within the reserved IP multicast address range of 224.0.0.x. (Range:  
224.0.1.0 - 239.255.255.255; Default: no groups are assigned to the MVR VLAN)  
Count – The number of contiguous MVR group addresses. (Range: 1-255;  
Default: 0)  
Web – Click MVR, Configuration. Enable MVR globally on the switch, select the  
MVR VLAN, add the multicast groups that will stream traffic to attached hosts, and  
then click Apply.  
Figure 3-107 MVR Global Configuration  
3-184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Multicast VLAN Registration  
3
CLI – This example first enables IGMP snooping, enables MVR globally, and then  
configures a range of MVR group addresses.  
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping  
Console(config)#mvr  
Console(config)#mvr group 228.1.23.1 10  
Console(config)#  
Displaying MVR Interface Status  
You can display information about the interfaces attached to the MVR VLAN.  
Field Attributes  
Type – Shows the MVR port type.  
Oper Status – Shows the link status.  
MVR Status – Shows the MVR status. MVR status for source ports is “ACTIVE” if  
MVR is globally enabled on the switch. MVR status for receiver ports is “ACTIVE”  
only if there are subscribers receiving multicast traffic from one of the MVR groups,  
or a multicast group has been statically assigned to an interface.  
Immediate Leave – Shows if immediate leave is enabled or disabled.  
18  
Trunk Member – Shows if port is a trunk member.  
Web – Click MVR, Port or Trunk Information.  
Figure 3-108 MVR Port Information  
CLI – This example shows information about interfaces attached to the MVR VLAN.  
Console#show mvr interface  
Port  
Type  
Status  
Immediate Leave  
------- -------- ------------- ---------------  
eth1/1 SOURCE  
eth1/2 RECEIVER ACTIVE/UP  
Console#  
ACTIVE/UP  
Disable  
Disable  
18. Port Information only.  
3-185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the Switch  
3
Displaying Port Members of Multicast Groups  
You can display the multicast groups assigned to the MVR VLAN either through  
IGMP snooping or static configuration.  
Field Attributes  
Group IP – Multicast groups assigned to the MVR VLAN.  
Group Port List – Shows the interfaces with subscribers for multicast services  
provided through the MVR VLAN.  
Web – Click MVR, Group IP Information.  
Figure 3-109 MVR Group IP Information  
CLI – This example following shows information about the interfaces associated with  
multicast groups assigned to the MVR VLAN.  
Console#show mvr interface  
MVR Group IP  
Status  
Members  
---------------- -------- -------  
225.0.0.1  
225.0.0.2  
225.0.0.3  
225.0.0.4  
225.0.0.5  
225.0.0.6  
225.0.0.7  
225.0.0.8  
225.0.0.9  
225.0.0.10  
Console#  
ACTIVE  
eth1/1(d), eth1/2(s)  
INACTIVE None  
INACTIVE None  
INACTIVE None  
INACTIVE None  
INACTIVE None  
INACTIVE None  
INACTIVE None  
INACTIVE None  
INACTIVE None  
3-186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Multicast VLAN Registration  
3
Configuring MVR Interface Status  
Each interface that participates in the MVR VLAN must be configured as an MVR  
source port or receiver port. If only one subscriber attached to an interface is  
receiving multicast services, you can enable the immediate leave function.  
Command Usage  
• One or more interfaces may be configured as MVR source ports.  
• MVR receiver ports cannot be members of a trunk. Receiver ports can belong to  
different VLANs, but should not be configured as a member of the MVR VLAN.  
• IGMP snooping can be used to allow a source port or receiver port to dynamically  
join or leave multicast groups within the MVR VLAN using the standard rules for  
multicast filtering. Multicast groups can also be statically assigned to a source port  
or receiver port (see “Assigning Static Multicast Groups to Interfaces” on page  
15-15).  
• Immediate leave applies only to receiver ports. When enabled, the receiver port is  
immediately removed from the multicast group identified in the leave message.  
When immediate leave is disabled, the switch follows the standard rules by  
sending a group-specific query to the receiver port and waiting for a response to  
determine if there are any remaining subscribers for that multicast group before  
removing the port from the group list. Using immediate leave can speed up leave\  
latency, but should only be enabled on a port attached to one multicast subscriber  
to avoid disrupting services to other group members attached to the same  
interface. Note that immediate leave does not apply to multicast groups which have  
been statically assigned to a port.  
Command Attributes  
MVR Type – The following interface types are supported:  
- Source – An uplink port that can send and receive multicast data for the groups  
assigned to the MVR VLAN.  
- Receiver – A subscriber port that can receive multicast data sent through the  
MVR VLAN.  
- Non-MVR – An interface that does not participate in the MVR VLAN. (This is the  
default type.)  
Immediate Leave – Configures the switch to immediately remove an interface  
from a multicast stream as soon as it receives a leave message for that group.  
19  
Trunk – Shows if port is a trunk member.  
19. Port Information only.  
3-187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
Web – Click MVR, Port or Trunk Configuration.  
Figure 3-110 MVR Port Configuration  
CLI – This example configures an MVR source port and receiver port, and then  
enables immediate leave on the receiver port.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1  
Console(config-if)#mvr type source  
Console(config-if)#exit  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2  
Console(config-if)#mvr type receiver  
Console(config-if)#mvr immediate  
Console(config-if)#  
Assigning Static Multicast Groups to Interfaces  
For multicast streams that will run for a long term and be associated with a stable set  
of hosts, you can statically bind the multicast group to the participating interfaces.  
Command Usage  
• Any multicast groups that use the MVR VLAN must be statically assigned to it  
under the MVR Configuration menu (see “Configuring Global MVR Settings” on  
page 15-10).  
• The IP address range from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255 is used for multicast  
streams. MVR group addresses cannot fall within the reserved IP multicast  
address range of 224.0.0.x.  
Command Attributes  
Interface – Indicates a port or trunk.  
Member – Shows the IP addresses for MVR multicast groups which have been  
statically assigned to the selected interface.  
Non-Member – Shows the IP addresses for all MVR multicast groups which have  
not been statically assigned to the selected interface.  
3-188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring Domain Name Service  
3
Web – Click MVR, Group Member Configuration. Select a port or trunk from the  
“Interface” field, and click Query to display the assigned multicast groups. Select a  
multicast address from the displayed lists, and click the Add or Remove button to  
modify the Member list.  
Figure 3-111 MVR Group Member Configuration  
CLI – This example statically assigns a multicast group to a receiver port.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2  
Console(config-if)#mvr group 228.1.23.1  
Console(config-if)#  
Configuring Domain Name Service  
The Domain Naming System (DNS) service on this switch allows host names to be  
mapped to IP addresses using static table entries or by redirection to other name  
servers on the network. When a client device designates this switch as a DNS  
server, the client will attempt to resolve host names into IP addresses by forwarding  
DNS queries to the switch, and waiting for a response.  
You can manually configure entries in the DNS table used for mapping domain  
names to IP addresses, configure default domain names, or specify one or more  
name servers to use for domain name to address translation.  
Configuring General DNS Service Parameters  
Command Usage  
To enable DNS service on this switch, first configure one or more name servers,  
and then enable domain lookup status.  
To append domain names to incomplete host names received from a DNS client  
(i.e., not formatted with dotted notation), you can specify a default domain name or  
a list of domain names to be tried in sequential order.  
3-189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Configuring the Switch  
3
• If there is no domain list, the default domain name is used. If there is a domain list,  
the default domain name is not used.  
• When an incomplete host name is received by the DNS service on this switch and  
a domain name list has been specified, the switch will work through the domain list,  
appending each domain name in the list to the host name, and checking with the  
specified name servers for a match.  
• When more than one name server is specified, the servers are queried in the  
specified sequence until a response is received, or the end of the list is reached  
with no response.  
• Note that if all name servers are deleted, DNS will automatically be disabled.  
Command Attributes  
Domain Lookup Status – Enables DNS host name-to-address translation.  
20  
Default Domain Name – Defines the default domain name appended to  
incomplete host names. (Range: 1-64 alphanumeric characters)  
Domain Name List – Defines a list of domain names that can be appended to  
incomplete host names. (Range: 1-64 alphanumeric characters. 1-5 names)  
Name Server List – Specifies the address of one or more domain name servers  
to use for name-to-address resolution. (Range: 1-6 IP addresses)  
20. Do not include the initial dot that separates the host name from the domain name.  
3-190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Domain Name Service  
3
Web – Select DNS, General Configuration. Set the default domain name or list of  
domain names, specify one or more name servers to use to use for address  
resolution, enable domain lookup status, and click Apply.  
Figure 3-112 DNS General Configuration  
CLI - This example sets a default domain name and a domain list. However,  
remember that if a domain list is specified, the default domain name is not used.  
Console(config)#ip domain-name sample.com  
Console(config)#ip domain-list sample.com.uk  
Console(config)#ip domain-list sample.com.jp  
Console(config)#ip name-server 192.168.1.55 10.1.0.55  
Console(config)#ip domain-lookup  
Console#show dns  
Domain Lookup Status:  
DNS enabled  
Default Domain Name:  
.sample.com  
Domain Name List:  
.sample.com.uk  
.sample.com.jp  
Name Server List:  
192.168.1.55  
10.1.0.55  
Console#  
3-191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Switch  
3
Configuring Static DNS Host to Address Entries  
You can manually configure static entries in the DNS table that are used to map  
domain names to IP addresses.  
Command Usage  
• Static entries may be used for local devices connected directly to the attached  
network, or for commonly used resources located elsewhere on the network.  
• Servers or other network devices may support one or more connections via  
multiple IP addresses. If more than one IP address is associated with a host name  
in the static table or via information returned from a name server, a DNS client can  
try each address in succession, until it establishes a connection with the target  
device.  
Field Attributes  
Host Name – Name of a host device that is mapped to one or more IP addresses.  
(Range: 1-64 characters)  
IP Address – Internet address(es) associated with a host name.  
(Range: 1-8 addresses)  
Alias – Displays the host names that are mapped to the same address(es) as a  
previously configured entry.  
Web – Select DNS, Static Host Table. Enter a host name and one or more  
corresponding addresses, then click Apply.  
Figure 3-113 DNS Static Host Table  
3-192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring Domain Name Service  
3
CLI - This example maps two address to a host name, and then configures an alias  
host name for the same addresses.  
Console(config)#ip host rd5 192.168.1.55 10.1.0.55  
Console(config)#ip host rd6 10.1.0.55  
Console#show hosts  
Hostname  
rd5  
Inet address  
10.1.0.55 192.168.1.55  
Alias  
1.rd6  
Console#  
Displaying the DNS Cache  
You can display entries in the DNS cache that have been learned via the designated  
name servers.  
Field Attributes  
No – The entry number for each resource record.  
Flag – The flag is always “4” indicating a cache entry and therefore unreliable.  
Type – This field includes CNAME which specifies the canonical or primary name  
for the owner, and ALIAS which specifies multiple domain names which are  
mapped to the same IP address as an existing entry.  
IP – The IP address associated with this record.  
TTL – The time to live reported by the name server.  
Domain – The domain name associated with this record.  
Web – Select DNS, Cache.  
Figure 3-114 DNS Cache  
3-193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the Switch  
3
CLI - This example displays all the resource records learned from the designated  
name servers.  
Console#show dns cache  
NO  
FLAG  
TYPE  
IP  
TTL  
DOMAIN  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
CNAME  
CNAME  
CNAME  
CNAME  
CNAME  
ALIAS  
CNAME  
ALIAS  
CNAME  
ALIAS  
CNAME  
207.46.134.222 51  
207.46.134.190 51  
207.46.134.155 51  
207.46.249.222 51  
www.microsoft.akadns.net  
www.microsoft.akadns.net  
www.microsoft.akadns.net  
www.microsoft.akadns.net  
www.microsoft.akadns.net  
www.microsoft.com  
msn.com.tw  
www.msn.com.tw  
passportimages.com  
www.passportimages.com  
global.msads.net  
207.46.249.27  
POINTER TO:4  
207.46.68.27  
POINTER TO:6  
65.54.131.192  
POINTER TO:8  
51  
51  
71964  
71964  
605  
8
9
10  
605  
165.193.72.190 87  
Console#  
Switch Clustering  
Switch Clustering is a method of grouping switches together to enable centralized  
management through a single unit. Switches that support clustering can be grouped  
together regardless of physical location or switch type, as long as they are  
connected to the same local network.  
A switch cluster has a “Commander” unit that is used to manage all other “Member”  
switches in the cluster. The management station uses Telnet to communicate  
directly with the Commander throught its IP address, and the Commander manages  
Member switches using cluster “internal” IP addresses. There can be up to 36  
Member switches in one cluster. Cluster switches are limited to within a single IP  
subnet.  
Once a switch has been configured to be a cluster Commander, it automatically  
discovers other cluster-enabled switches in the network. These “Candidate”  
switches only become cluster Members when manually selected by the  
administrator through the management station.  
Note: Cluster Member switches can be managed through only using a Telnet connection  
to the Commander. From the Commander CLI prompt, use the “rcommand”  
command (see page 4-252) to connect to the Member switch.  
Cluster Configuration  
To create a switch cluster, first be sure that clustering is enabled on the switch (the  
default is enabled), then set the switch as a Cluster Commander. Set a Cluster IP  
Pool that does not conflict with the network IP subnet. Cluster IP addresses are  
assigned to switches when they become Members and are used for communication  
between Member switches and the Commander.  
Command Attributes  
Cluster Status – Enables or disables clustering on the switch.  
Cluster Commander – Enables or disables the switch as a cluster Commander.  
3-194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Switch Clustering  
3
Role – Indicates the current role of the switch in the cluster; either Commander,  
Member, or Candidate.  
Cluster IP Pool – An “internal” IP address pool that is used to assign IP addresses  
to Member switches in the cluster. Internal cluster IP addresses are in the form  
10.x.x.member-ID. Only the base IP address of the pool needs to be set since  
Member IDs can only be between 1 and 36. Note that you cannot change the cluster  
IP pool when the switch is currently in Commander mode. Commander mode must first  
be disabled.  
Number of Members – The current number of Member switches in the cluster.  
Number of Candidates – The current number of Candidate switches discovered  
in the network that are available to become Members.  
Web – Click Cluster, Configuration.  
Figure 3-115 Cluster Configuration  
CLI – This example first enables clustering on the switch, sets the switch as the  
cluster Commander, and then configures the cluster IP pool.  
Console(config)#cluster  
Console(config)#cluster commander  
Console(config)#cluster ip-pool 10.2.3.4  
Console(config)#  
Cluster Member Configuration  
Adds Candidate switches to the cluster as Members.  
Command Attributes  
Member ID – Specify a Member ID number for the selected Candidate switch.  
(Range: 1-36)  
MAC Address – Select a discoverd switch MAC address from the Candidate  
Table, or enter a specific MAC address of a known switch.  
3-195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
Web – Click Cluster, Member Configuration.  
Figure 3-116 Cluster Member Configuration  
CLI – This example creates a new cluster Member by specifying the Candidate  
switch MAC address and setting a Member ID.  
Console(config)#cluster member mac-address 00-12-34-56-78-9a id 5  
Console(config)#  
Cluster Member Information  
Displays current cluster Member switch information.  
Command Attributes  
Member ID – The ID number of the Member switch. (Range: 1-36)  
Role – Indicates the current status of the switch in the cluster.  
IP Address – The internal cluster IP address assigned to the Member switch.  
MAC Address – The MAC address of the Member switch.  
Description – The system description string of the Member switch.  
Web – Click Cluster, Member Information.  
Figure 3-117 Cluster Member Information  
3-196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Switch Clustering  
3
CLI – This example shows information about cluster Member switches.  
Vty-0#show cluster members  
Cluster Members:  
ID:  
1
Role:  
Active member  
IP Address: 10.254.254.2  
MAC Address: 00-12-cf-23-49-c0  
Description: 24/48 L2/L4 IPV4/IPV6 GE Switch  
Vty-0#  
Cluster Candidate Information  
Displays information about discovered switches in the network that are already  
cluster Members or are available to become cluster Members.  
Command Attributes  
Role – Indicates the current status of Candidate switches in the network.  
MAC Address – The MAC address of the Candidate switch.  
Description – The system description string of the Candidate switch.  
Web – Click Cluster, Candidate Information.  
Figure 3-118 Cluster Candidate Information  
CLI – This example shows information about cluster Candidate switches.  
Vty-0#show cluster candidates  
Cluster Candidates:  
Role  
Mac  
Description  
--------------- ----------------- -----------------------------------------  
ACTIVE MEMBER  
CANDIDATE  
Vty-0#  
00-12-cf-23-49-c0 24/48 L2/L4 IPV4/IPV6 GE Switch  
00-12-cf-0b-47-a0 24/48 L2/L4 IPV4/IPV6 GE Switch  
3-197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Switch  
3
3-198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4: Command Line Interface  
This chapter describes how to use the Command Line Interface (CLI).  
Using the Command Line Interface  
Accessing the CLI  
When accessing the management interface for the switch over a direct connection  
to the server’s console port, or via a Telnet connection, the switch can be managed  
by entering command keywords and parameters at the prompt. Using the switch's  
command-line interface (CLI) is very similar to entering commands on a UNIX  
system.  
Console Connection  
To access the switch through the console port, perform these steps:  
1. At the console prompt, enter the user name and password. (The default user  
names are “admin” and “guest” with corresponding passwords of “admin” and  
“guest.”) When the administrator user name and password is entered, the CLI  
displays the “Console#” prompt and enters privileged access mode  
(i.e., Privileged Exec). But when the guest user name and password is entered,  
the CLI displays the “Console>” prompt and enters normal access mode  
(i.e., Normal Exec).  
2. Enter the necessary commands to complete your desired tasks.  
3. When finished, exit the session with the “quit” or “exit” command.  
After connecting to the system through the console port, the login screen displays:  
User Access Verification  
Username: admin  
Password:  
CLI session with the Standalone Intelligent Switch is opened.  
To end the CLI session, enter [Exit].  
Console#  
Telnet Connection  
Telnet operates over the IP transport protocol. In this environment, your  
management station and any network device you want to manage over the network  
must have a valid IP address. Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers, 0 to 255,  
separated by periods. Each address consists of a network portion and host portion.  
For example, the IP address assigned to this switch, 10.1.0.1, with subnet mask  
255.255.255.0, consists of a network portion (10.1.0) and a host portion (1).  
Note: The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default.  
4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Command Line Interface  
4
To access the switch through a Telnet session, you must first set the IP address for  
the switch, and set the default gateway if you are managing the switch from a  
different IP subnet. For example,  
Console(config)#interface vlan 1  
Console(config-if)#ip address 10.1.0.254 255.255.255.0  
Console(config-if)#exit  
Console(config)#ip default-gateway 10.1.0.254  
If your corporate network is connected to another network outside your office or to  
the Internet, you need to apply for a registered IP address. However, if you are  
attached to an isolated network, then you can use any IP address that matches the  
network segment to which you are attached.  
After you configure the switch with an IP address, you can open a Telnet session by  
performing these steps:  
1. From the remote host, enter the Telnet command and the IP address of the  
device you want to access.  
2. At the prompt, enter the user name and system password. The CLI will display  
the “Vty-n#” prompt for the administrator to show that you are using privileged  
access mode (i.e., Privileged Exec), or “Vty-n>” for the guest to show that you  
are using normal access mode (i.e., Normal Exec), where n indicates the  
number of the current Telnet session.  
3. Enter the necessary commands to complete your desired tasks.  
4. When finished, exit the session with the “quit” or “exit” command.  
After entering the Telnet command, the login screen displays:  
Username: admin  
Password:  
CLI session with the Standalone Intelligent Switch is opened.  
To end the CLI session, enter [Exit].  
Vty-0#  
Note: You can open up to four sessions to the device via Telnet.  
4-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entering Commands  
4
Entering Commands  
This section describes how to enter CLI commands.  
Keywords and Arguments  
A CLI command is a series of keywords and arguments. Keywords identify a  
command, and arguments specify configuration parameters. For example, in the  
command “show interfaces status ethernet 1/5,” show interfaces and status are  
keywords, ethernet is an argument that specifies the interface type, and 1/5  
specifies the unit/port.  
You can enter commands as follows:  
• To enter a simple command, enter the command keyword.  
• To enter multiple commands, enter each command in the required order. For  
example, to enable Privileged Exec command mode, and display the startup  
configuration, enter:  
Console>enable  
Console#show startup-config  
• To enter commands that require parameters, enter the required parameters after  
the command keyword. For example, to set a password for the administrator,  
enter:  
Console(config)#username admin password 0 smith  
Minimum Abbreviation  
The CLI will accept a minimum number of characters that uniquely identify a  
command. For example, the command “configure” can be entered as con. If an  
entry is ambiguous, the system will prompt for further input.  
Command Completion  
If you terminate input with a Tab key, the CLI will print the remaining characters of a  
partial keyword up to the point of ambiguity. In the “logging history” example, typing  
log followed by a tab will result in printing the command up to “logging.”  
Getting Help on Commands  
You can display a brief description of the help system by entering the help  
command. You can also display command syntax by using the “?” character to list  
keywords or parameters.  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Command Line Interface  
4
Showing Commands  
If you enter a “?” at the command prompt, the system will display the first level of  
keywords for the current command class (Normal Exec or Privileged Exec) or  
configuration class (Global, ACL, Interface, Line or VLAN Database). You can also  
display a list of valid keywords for a specific command. For example, the command  
show ?” displays a list of possible show commands:  
Console#show ?  
access-group  
access-list  
bridge-ext  
calendar  
cluster  
dns  
Access groups  
Access lists  
Bridge extend information  
Date and time information  
Display cluster information  
DNS information  
dot1x  
802.1X content  
garp  
GARP properties  
gvrp  
history  
hosts  
GVRP interface information  
History information  
Host information  
interfaces  
ip  
Interface information  
IP information  
lacp  
LACP statistics  
line  
log  
TTY line information  
Login records  
logging  
mac  
Login setting  
MAC access lists  
mac-address-table Configuration of the address table  
management  
map  
Management IP filter  
Maps priority  
mvr  
CLI_MSG_PRIVILEGE_EXEC_CMD_W2_SHOW_MVR  
Network Access  
Network Time Protocol configuration  
Port Characteristics  
network-access  
ntp  
port  
public-key  
queue  
radius-server  
rate-limit  
running-config  
snmp  
sntp  
spanning-tree  
ssh  
Public Key information  
Priority queue information  
RADIUS server information  
Configures rate-limits  
Information on the running configuration  
Simple Network Management Protocol statistics  
Simple Network Time Protocol configuration  
Spanning-tree configuration  
Secure shell server connections  
Startup system configuration  
System Information  
startup-config  
system  
tacacs-server  
users  
version  
TACACS server settings  
Information about terminal lines  
System hardware and software versions  
Virtual LAN settings  
vlan  
Console#show  
The command “show interfaces ?” will display the following information:  
Console#show interfaces ?  
counters  
status  
switchport  
Interface counters information  
Interface status information  
Interface switchport information  
Console#  
4-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Entering Commands  
4
Partial Keyword Lookup  
If you terminate a partial keyword with a question mark, alternatives that match the  
initial letters are provided. (Remember not to leave a space between the command  
and question mark.) For example “s?” shows all the keywords starting with “s.”  
Console#show s?  
snmp  
sntp  
spanning-tree  
ssh  
startup-config  
system  
Console#show s  
Negating the Effect of Commands  
For many configuration commands you can enter the prefix keyword “no” to cancel  
the effect of a command or reset the configuration to the default value. For example,  
the logging command will log system messages to a host server. To disable  
logging, specify the no logging command. This guide describes the negation effect  
for all applicable commands.  
Using Command History  
The CLI maintains a history of commands that have been entered. You can scroll  
back through the history of commands by pressing the up arrow key. Any command  
displayed in the history list can be executed again, or first modified and then  
executed.  
Using the show history command displays a longer list of recently executed  
commands.  
Understanding Command Modes  
The command set is divided into Exec and Configuration classes. Exec commands  
generally display information on system status or clear statistical counters.  
Configuration commands, on the other hand, modify interface parameters or enable  
certain switching functions. These classes are further divided into different modes.  
Available commands depend on the selected mode. You can always enter a  
question mark “?” at the prompt to display a list of the commands available for the  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
current mode. The command classes and associated modes are displayed in the  
following table:  
Table 4-1 Command Modes  
Class  
Exec  
Mode  
Normal  
Privileged  
*
Configuration  
Global  
Access Control List  
IGMP Profile  
Interface  
Line  
Multiple Spanning Tree  
VLAN Database  
*
You must be in Privileged Exec mode to access the Global configuration mode.  
You must be in Global Configuration mode to access any of the other configuration modes.  
Exec Commands  
When you open a new console session on the switch with the user name and  
password “guest,” the system enters the Normal Exec command mode (or guest  
mode), displaying the “Console>” command prompt. Only a limited number of the  
commands are available in this mode. You can access all commands only from the  
Privileged Exec command mode (or administrator mode). To access Privilege Exec  
mode, open a new console session with the user name and password “admin.” The  
system will now display the “Console#” command prompt. You can also enter  
Privileged Exec mode from within Normal Exec mode, by entering the enable  
command, followed by the privileged level password “super” (page 4-28).  
To enter Privileged Exec mode, enter the following user names and passwords:  
Username: admin  
Password: [admin login password]  
CLI session with the Standalone Intelligent Switch is opened.  
To end the CLI session, enter [Exit].  
Console#  
Username: guest  
Password: [guest login password]  
CLI session with the Standalone Intelligent Switch is opened.  
To end the CLI session, enter [Exit].  
Console#enable  
Password: [privileged level password]  
Console#  
4-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Entering Commands  
4
Configuration Commands  
Configuration commands are privileged level commands used to modify switch  
settings. These commands modify the running configuration only and are not saved  
when the switch is rebooted. To store the running configuration in non-volatile  
storage, use the copy running-config startup-config command.  
The configuration commands are organized into different modes:  
• Global Configuration - These commands modify the system level configuration,  
and include commands such as hostname and snmp-server community.  
• Access Control List Configuration - These commands are used for packet filtering.  
• Interface Configuration - These commands modify the port configuration such as  
speed-duplex and negotiation.  
• Line Configuration - These commands modify the console port and Telnet  
configuration, and include command such as parity and databits.  
• VLAN Configuration - Includes the command to create VLAN groups.  
To enter the Global Configuration mode, enter the command configure in Privileged  
Exec mode. The system prompt will change to “Console(config)#” which gives you  
access privilege to all Global Configuration commands.  
Console#configure  
Console(config)#  
To enter the other modes, at the configuration prompt type one of the following  
commands. Use the exit or end command to return to the Privileged Exec mode.  
Table 4-2 Configuration Modes  
Mode  
Command  
Prompt  
Page  
Line  
line {console | vty}  
Console(config-line)#  
Access  
Control List  
access-list ip standard  
access-list ip extended  
access-list mac  
Console(config-std-acl)#  
Console(config-ext-acl)#  
Console(config-mac-acl)#  
Interface  
MSTP  
interface {ethernet port | port-channel id| vlan id} Console(config-if)#  
spanning-tree mst-configuration  
vlan database  
Console(config-mstp)#  
Console(config-vlan)#  
VLAN  
IGMP Profile ip igmp profile  
Console(config-igmp-profile)#  
For example, you can use the following commands to enter interface configuration  
mode, and then return to Privileged Exec mode  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5  
.
.
.
Console(config-if)#exit  
Console(config)#  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
Command Line Processing  
Commands are not case sensitive. You can abbreviate commands and parameters  
as long as they contain enough letters to differentiate them from any other currently  
available commands or parameters. You can use the Tab key to complete partial  
commands, or enter a partial command followed by the “?” character to display a list  
of possible matches. You can also use the following editing keystrokes for  
command-line processing:  
Table 4-3 Command Line Processing  
Keystroke  
Function  
Ctrl-A  
Shifts cursor to start of command line.  
Shifts cursor to the left one character.  
Terminates the current task and displays the command prompt.  
Shifts cursor to end of command line.  
Shifts cursor to the right one character.  
Deletes all characters from the cursor to the end of the line.  
Repeats current command line on a new line.  
Enters the next command line in the history buffer.  
Enters the last command.  
Ctrl-B  
Ctrl-C  
Ctrl-E  
Ctrl-F  
Ctrl-K  
Ctrl-L  
Ctrl-N  
Ctrl-P  
Ctrl-R  
Repeats current command line on a new line.  
Deletes from the cursor to the beginning of the line.  
Deletes the last word typed.  
Ctrl-U  
Ctrl-W  
Esc-B  
Moves the cursor back one word.  
Esc-D  
Deletes from the cursor to the end of the word.  
Moves the cursor forward one word.  
Esc-F  
Delete key or backspace key  
Erases a mistake when entering a command.  
4-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Groups  
4
Command Groups  
The system commands can be broken down into the functional groups shown below.  
Table 4-4 Command Groups  
Command Group  
Description  
Page  
Line  
Sets communication parameters for the serial port and Telnet,  
including baud rate and console time-out  
General  
Basic commands for entering privileged access mode, restarting the  
system, or quitting the CLI  
System Management  
Controls system logs, system passwords, user name, browser  
management options, and a variety of other system information  
Flash/File  
Manages code image or switch configuration files  
Authentication  
Configures logon access using local or remote authentication;  
also configures port security, IEEE 802.1X port access control, and  
MAC address authentication  
Access Control List  
Provides filtering for IP frames (based on address, protocol, TCP/UDP  
port number or TCP control code) or non-IP frames (based on MAC  
address or Ethernet type)  
SNMP  
Activates authentication failure traps; configures community access  
strings, and trap managers; also configures IP address filtering  
Interface  
Mirror Port  
Configures the connection parameters for all Ethernet ports,  
aggregated links, and VLANs  
Mirrors data to another port for analysis without affecting the data  
passing through or the performance of the monitored port  
Rate Limiting  
Controls the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or received on a port 4-144  
Link Aggregation  
Statically groups multiple ports into a single logical trunk; configures  
Link Aggregation Control Protocol for port trunks  
Address Table  
Configures the address table for filtering specified addresses, displays 4-156  
current entries, clears the table, or sets the aging time  
Spanning Tree  
VLANs  
Configures Spanning Tree settings for the switch  
Configures VLAN settings, and defines port membership for VLAN  
groups; also enables or configures private VLANs  
GVRP and  
Bridge Extension  
Configures GVRP settings that permit automatic VLAN learning;  
shows the configuration for the bridge extension MIB  
Priority  
Sets port priority for untagged frames, selects strict priority or weighted 4-198  
round robin, relative weight for each priority queue, also sets priority for  
TCP/UDP traffic types, IP precedence, and DSCP  
Multicast Filtering  
Configures IGMP multicast filtering, query parameters, specifies ports  
attached to a multicast router, and enables multicast VLAN registration  
Domain Name Service  
DHCP Relay  
Configures DNS services.  
Configures DHCP relay and Option 82 functions  
Configures IP address for the switch  
Configures switch clustering  
IP Interface  
Switch Cluster  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
The access mode shown in the following tables is indicated by these abbreviations:  
NE (Normal Exec)  
PE (Privileged Exec)  
IC (Interface Configuration)  
LC (Line Configuration)  
GC (Global Configuration)  
ACL (Access Control List Configuration)  
IPC (IGMP Profile Configuration)  
VC (VLAN Database Configuration)  
MST (Multiple Spanning Tree)  
4-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Line Commands  
4
Line Commands  
You can access the onboard configuration program by attaching a VT100  
compatible device to the server’s serial port. These commands are used to set  
communication parameters for the serial port or Telnet (i.e., a virtual terminal).  
Table 4-5 Line Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode  
Page  
line  
Identifies a specific line for configuration and starts the line  
configuration mode  
GC  
login  
Enables password checking at login  
Specifies a password on a line  
LC  
LC  
password  
timeout login  
response  
Sets the interval that the system waits for a user to log into the LC  
CLI  
exec-timeout  
password-thresh  
silent-time*  
Sets the interval that the command interpreter waits until user LC  
input is detected  
4-15  
Sets the password intrusion threshold, which limits the number LC  
of failed logon attempts  
Sets the amount of time the management console is  
inaccessible after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts  
exceeds the threshold set by the password-thresh command  
LC  
databits*  
Sets the number of data bits per character that are interpreted LC  
and generated by hardware  
parity*  
Defines the generation of a parity bit  
Sets the terminal baud rate  
LC  
speed*  
LC  
stopbits*  
disconnect  
show line  
Sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per byte  
Terminates a line connection  
LC  
PE  
Displays a terminal line's parameters  
NE, PE  
* These commands only apply to the serial port.  
line  
This command identifies a specific line for configuration, and to process subsequent  
line configuration commands.  
Syntax  
line {console | vty}  
console - Console terminal line.  
vty - Virtual terminal for remote console access (i.e., Telnet).  
Default Setting  
There is no default line.  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Command Line Interface  
4
Command Usage  
Telnet is considered a virtual terminal connection and will be shown as “Vty” in  
screen displays such as show users. However, the serial communication  
parameters (e.g., databits) do not affect Telnet connections.  
Example  
To enter console line mode, enter the following command:  
Console(config)#line console  
Console(config-line)#  
Related Commands  
login  
This command enables password checking at login. Use the no form to disable  
password checking and allow connections without a password.  
Syntax  
login [local]  
no login  
local - Selects local password checking. Authentication is based on the  
user name specified with the username command.  
Default Setting  
login local  
Command Mode  
Line Configuration  
Command Usage  
• There are three authentication modes provided by the switch itself at login:  
- login selects authentication by a single global password as specified by the  
password line configuration command. When using this method, the  
management interface starts in Normal Exec (NE) mode.  
- login local selects authentication via the user name and password  
specified by the username command (i.e., default setting). When using this  
method, the management interface starts in Normal Exec (NE) or Privileged  
Exec (PE) mode, depending on the user’s privilege level (0 or 15  
respectively).  
- no login selects no authentication. When using this method, the  
management interface starts in Normal Exec (NE) mode.  
• This command controls login authentication via the switch itself. To configure  
user names and passwords for remote authentication servers, you must use  
the RADIUS or TACACS software installed on those servers.  
4-12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Line Commands  
4
Example  
Console(config-line)#login local  
Console(config-line)#  
Related Commands  
password  
This command specifies the password for a line. Use the no form to remove the  
password.  
Syntax  
password {0 | 7} password  
no password  
• {0 | 7} - 0 means plain password, 7 means encrypted password  
password - Character string that specifies the line password.  
(Maximum length: 8 characters plain text, 32 encrypted, case sensitive)  
Default Setting  
No password is specified.  
Command Mode  
Line Configuration  
Command Usage  
• When a connection is started on a line with password protection, the system  
prompts for the password. If you enter the correct password, the system  
shows a prompt. You can use the password-thresh command to set the  
number of times a user can enter an incorrect password before the system  
terminates the line connection and returns the terminal to the idle state.  
• The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password  
settings (i.e., plain text or encrypted) when reading the configuration file  
during system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from a TFTP  
server. There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords.  
Example  
Console(config-line)#password 0 secret  
Console(config-line)#  
Related Commands  
4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
timeout login response  
This command sets the interval that the system waits for a user to log into the CLI.  
Use the no form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
timeout login response [seconds]  
no timeout login response  
seconds - Integer that specifies the timeout interval.  
(Range: 0 - 300 seconds; 0: disabled)  
Default Setting  
• CLI: Disabled (0 seconds)  
• Telnet: 600 seconds  
Command Mode  
Line Configuration  
Command Usage  
• If a login attempt is not detected within the timeout interval, the connection is  
terminated for the session.  
• This command applies to both the local console and Telnet connections.  
• The timeout for Telnet cannot be disabled.  
• Using the command without specifying a timeout restores the default setting.  
Example  
To set the timeout to two minutes, enter this command:  
Console(config-line)#timeout login response 120  
Console(config-line)#  
Related Commands  
exec-timeout (4-14)  
exec-timeout  
This command sets the interval that the system waits until user input is detected.  
Use the no form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
exec-timeout [seconds]  
no exec-timeout  
seconds - Integer that specifies the number of seconds.  
(Range: 0-65535 seconds; 0: no timeout)  
Default Setting  
CLI: No timeout  
Telnet: 10 minutes  
4-14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Line Commands  
4
Command Mode  
Line Configuration  
Command Usage  
• If user input is detected within the timeout interval, the session is kept open;  
otherwise the session is terminated.  
• This command applies to both the local console and Telnet connections.  
• The timeout for Telnet cannot be disabled.  
• Using the command without specifying a timeout restores the default setting.  
Example  
To set the timeout to two minutes, enter this command:  
Console(config-line)#exec-timeout 120  
Console(config-line)#  
Related Commands  
timeout login response (4-13)  
password-thresh  
This command sets the password intrusion threshold which limits the number of  
failed logon attempts. Use the no form to remove the threshold value.  
Syntax  
password-thresh [threshold]  
no password-thresh  
threshold - The number of allowed password attempts.  
(Range: 1-120; 0: no threshold)  
Default Setting  
The default value is three attempts.  
Command Mode  
Line Configuration  
Command Usage  
• When the logon attempt threshold is reached, the system interface becomes  
silent for a specified amount of time before allowing the next logon attempt.  
(Use the silent-time command to set this interval.) When this threshold is  
reached for Telnet, the Telnet logon interface shuts down.  
• This command applies to both the local console and Telnet connections.  
Example  
To set the password threshold to five attempts, enter this command:  
Console(config-line)#password-thresh 5  
Console(config-line)#  
4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
Related Commands  
timeout login response (4-13)  
silent-time  
This command sets the amount of time the management console is inaccessible  
after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts exceeds the threshold set by the  
password-thresh command. Use the no form to remove the silent time value.  
Syntax  
silent-time [seconds]  
no silent-time  
seconds - The number of seconds to disable console response.  
(Range: 0-65535; 0: no silent-time)  
Default Setting  
The default value is no silent-time.  
Command Mode  
Line Configuration  
Example  
To set the silent time to 60 seconds, enter this command:  
Console(config-line)#silent-time 60  
Console(config-line)#  
Related Commands  
databits  
This command sets the number of data bits per character that are interpreted and  
generated by the console port. Use the no form to restore the default value.  
Syntax  
databits {7 | 8}  
no databits  
• 7 - Seven data bits per character.  
• 8 - Eight data bits per character.  
Default Setting  
8 data bits per character  
Command Mode  
Line Configuration  
4-16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Line Commands  
4
Command Usage  
The databits command can be used to mask the high bit on input from  
devices that generate 7 data bits with parity. If parity is being generated,  
specify 7 data bits per character. If no parity is required, specify 8 data bits per  
character.  
Example  
To specify 7 data bits, enter this command:  
Console(config-line)#databits 7  
Console(config-line)#  
Related Commands  
parity  
This command defines the generation of a parity bit. Use the no form to restore the  
default setting.  
Syntax  
parity {none | even | odd}  
no parity  
none - No parity  
even - Even parity  
odd - Odd parity  
Default Setting  
No parity  
Command Mode  
Line Configuration  
Command Usage  
Communication protocols provided by devices such as terminals and modems  
often require a specific parity bit setting.  
Example  
To specify no parity, enter this command:  
Console(config-line)#parity none  
Console(config-line)#  
4-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
speed  
This command sets the terminal line’s baud rate. This command sets both the  
transmit (to terminal) and receive (from terminal) speeds. Use the no form to restore  
the default setting.  
Syntax  
speed bps  
no speed  
bps - Baud rate in bits per second.  
(Options: 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 bps)  
Default Setting  
9600  
Command Mode  
Line Configuration  
Command Usage  
Set the speed to match the baud rate of the device connected to the serial  
port. Some baud rates available on devices connected to the port might not be  
supported. The system indicates if the speed you selected is not supported.  
Example  
To specify 57600 bps, enter this command:  
Console(config-line)#speed 57600  
Console(config-line)#  
stopbits  
This command sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per byte. Use the no  
form to restore the default setting.  
Syntax  
stopbits {1 | 2}  
• 1 - One stop bit  
• 2 - Two stop bits  
Default Setting  
1 stop bit  
Command Mode  
Line Configuration  
Example  
To specify 2 stop bits, enter this command:  
Console(config-line)#stopbits 2  
Console(config-line)#  
4-18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Line Commands  
4
disconnect  
This command terminates an SSH, Telnet, or console connection.  
Syntax  
disconnect session-id  
session-id – The session identifier for an SSH, Telnet or console  
connection. (Range: 0-4)  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
Specifying session identifier “0” will disconnect the console connection.  
Specifying any other identifiers for an active session will disconnect an SSH or  
Telnet connection.  
Example  
Console#disconnect 1  
Console#  
Related Commands  
show line  
This command displays the terminal line’s parameters.  
Syntax  
show line [console | vty]  
console - Console terminal line.  
vty - Virtual terminal for remote console access (i.e., Telnet).  
Default Setting  
Shows all lines  
Command Mode  
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec  
4-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
Example  
To show all lines, enter this command:  
Console#show line  
Console configuration:  
Password threshold: 3 times  
Interactive timeout: Disabled  
Login timeout: Disabled  
Silent time:  
Baudrate:  
Databits:  
Parity:  
Disabled  
9600  
8
none  
1
Stopbits:  
VTY configuration:  
Password threshold: 3 times  
Interactive timeout: 600 sec  
Login timeout: 300 sec  
console#  
General Commands  
Table 4-6 General Commands  
Command  
enable  
Function  
Mode  
NE  
Page  
Activates privileged mode  
disable  
Returns to normal mode from privileged mode  
Activates global configuration mode  
Shows the command history buffer  
Restarts the system  
PE  
configure  
show history  
reload  
PE  
NE, PE  
PE  
end  
Returns to Privileged Exec mode  
any  
config.  
mode  
exit  
quit  
help  
?
Returns to the previous configuration mode, or exits the CLI  
Exits a CLI session  
any  
NA  
NE, PE  
any  
Shows how to use help  
Shows options for command completion (context sensitive)  
any  
NA  
enable  
This command activates Privileged Exec mode. In privileged mode, additional  
commands are available, and certain commands display additional information. See  
Syntax  
enable [level]  
level - Privilege level to log into the device.  
The device has two predefined privilege levels: 0: Normal Exec,  
15: Privileged Exec. Enter level 15 to access Privileged Exec mode.  
4-20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
General Commands  
4
Default Setting  
Level 15  
Command Mode  
Normal Exec  
Command Usage  
• “super” is the default password required to change the command mode from  
Normal Exec to Privileged Exec. (To set this password, see the enable  
password command on page 4-28.)  
• The “#” character is appended to the end of the prompt to indicate that the  
system is in privileged access mode.  
Example  
Console>enable  
Password: [privileged level password]  
Console#  
Related Commands  
disable  
This command returns to Normal Exec mode from privileged mode. In normal  
access mode, you can only display basic information on the switch's configuration or  
Ethernet statistics. To gain access to all commands, you must use the privileged  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
The “>” character is appended to the end of the prompt to indicate that the  
system is in normal access mode.  
Example  
Console#disable  
Console>  
Related Commands  
4-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command Line Interface  
4
configure  
This command activates Global Configuration mode. You must enter this mode to  
modify any settings on the switch. You must also enter Global Configuration mode  
prior to enabling some of the other configuration modes, including Interface  
Configuration, Line Configuration, and VLAN Database Configuration. See  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#configure  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
show history  
This command shows the contents of the command history buffer.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
The history buffer size is fixed at 10 Execution commands and  
10 Configuration commands.  
Example  
In this example, the show history command lists the contents of the command  
history buffer:  
Console#show history  
Execution command history:  
2 config  
1 show history  
Configuration command history:  
4 interface vlan 1  
3 exit  
2 interface vlan 1  
1 end  
Console#  
4-22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
General Commands  
4
The ! command repeats commands from the Execution command history buffer  
when you are in Normal Exec or Privileged Exec Mode, and commands from the  
Configuration command history buffer when you are in any of the configuration  
modes. In this example, the !2 command repeats the second command in the  
Execution history buffer (config).  
Console#!2  
Console#config  
Console(config)#  
reload  
This command restarts the system.  
Note: When the system is restarted, it will always run the Power-On Self-Test. It will also  
retain all configuration information stored in non-volatile memory by the copy  
running-config startup-config command.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
This command resets the entire system.  
Example  
This example shows how to reset the switch:  
Console#reload  
System will be restarted, continue <y/n>? y  
end  
This command returns to Privileged Exec mode.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration, Interface Configuration, Line Configuration, and VLAN  
Database Configuration.  
Example  
This example shows how to return to the Privileged Exec mode from the Interface  
Configuration mode:  
Console(config-if)#end  
Console#  
4-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
exit  
This command returns to the previous configuration mode or exit the configuration  
program.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Any  
Example  
This example shows how to return to the Privileged Exec mode from the Global  
Configuration mode, and then quit the CLI session:  
Console(config)#exit  
Console#exit  
Press ENTER to start session  
User Access Verification  
Username:  
quit  
This command exits the configuration program.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
The quit and exit commands can both exit the configuration program.  
Example  
This example shows how to quit a CLI session:  
Console#quit  
Press ENTER to start session  
User Access Verification  
Username:  
4-24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Management Commands  
4
System Management Commands  
These commands are used to control system logs, passwords, user names, browser  
configuration options, and display or configure a variety of other system information.  
Table 4-7 System Management Commands  
Command Group  
Device Designation  
User Access  
IP Filter  
Function  
Page  
Configures information that uniquely identifies this switch  
Configures the basic user names and passwords for management access  
Configures IP addresses that are allowed management access  
Enables management access via a web browser  
Enables management access via Telnet  
Web Server  
Telnet Server  
Secure Shell  
Event Logging  
Provides secure replacement for Telnet  
Controls logging of error messages  
Time (System Clock) Sets the system clock automatically via NTP/SNTP or manually  
System Status  
Frame Size  
Displays system configuration, active managers, and version information  
Enables support for jumbo frames  
Device Designation Commands  
Table 4-8 Device Designation Commands  
Function  
Command  
prompt  
Mode  
GC  
Page  
Customizes the prompt used in PE and NE mode  
Specifies the host name for the switch  
Sets the system contact string  
hostname  
GC  
snmp-server contact  
GC  
snmp-server location Sets the system location string  
GC  
prompt  
This command customizes the CLI prompt. Use the no form to restore the default  
prompt.  
Syntax  
prompt string  
no prompt  
string - Any alphanumeric string to use for the CLI prompt. (Maximum  
length: 255 characters)  
Default Setting  
Console  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
4-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Command Line Interface  
4
Example  
Console(config)#prompt RD2  
RD2(config)#  
hostname  
This command specifies or modifies the host name for this device. Use the no form  
to restore the default host name.  
Syntax  
hostname name  
no hostname  
name - The name of this host. (Maximum length: 255 characters)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#hostname RD#1  
Console(config)#  
User Access Commands  
The basic commands required for management access are listed in this section.  
This switch also includes other options for password checking via the console or a  
Telnet connection (page 4-11), user authentication via a remote authentication  
server (page 4-76), and host access authentication for specific ports (page 4-85).  
Table 4-9 User Access Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode  
Page  
username  
Establishes a user name-based authentication system at login GC  
Sets a password to control access to the Privileged Exec level GC  
enable password  
4-26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
System Management Commands  
4
username  
This command adds named users, requires authentication at login, specifies or  
changes a user's password (or specify that no password is required), or specifies or  
changes a user's access level. Use the no form to remove a user name.  
Syntax  
username name {access-level level | nopassword |  
password {0 | 7} password}  
no username name  
name - The name of the user.  
(Maximum length: 8 characters, case sensitive. Maximum users: 16)  
access-level level - Specifies the user level.  
The device has two predefined privilege levels:  
0: Normal Exec, 15: Privileged Exec.  
nopassword - No password is required for this user to log in.  
• {0 | 7} - 0 means plain password, 7 means encrypted password.  
password password - The authentication password for the user.  
(Maximum length: 8 characters plain text, 32 encrypted, case sensitive)  
Default Setting  
• The default access level is Normal Exec.  
• The factory defaults for the user names and passwords are:  
Table 4-10 Default Login Settings  
username  
access-level  
password  
guest  
0
guest  
admin  
15  
admin  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password  
settings (i.e., plain text or encrypted) when reading the configuration file during  
system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from a TFTP server.  
There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords.  
Example  
This example shows how to set the access level and password for a user.  
Console(config)#username bob access-level 15  
Console(config)#username bob password 0 smith  
Console(config)#  
4-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
enable password  
After initially logging onto the system, you should set the Privileged Exec password.  
Remember to record it in a safe place. This command controls access to the  
Privileged Exec level from the Normal Exec level. Use the no form to reset the  
default password.  
Syntax  
enable password [level level] {0 | 7} password  
no enable password [level level]  
level level - Level 15 for Privileged Exec. (Levels 0-14 are not used.)  
• {0 | 7} - 0 means plain password, 7 means encrypted password.  
password - password for this privilege level.  
(Maximum length: 8 characters plain text, 32 encrypted, case sensitive)  
Default Setting  
• The default is level 15.  
• The default password is “super”  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• You cannot set a null password. You will have to enter a password to change  
the command mode from Normal Exec to Privileged Exec with the enable  
command (page 4-20).  
• The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password  
settings (i.e., plain text or encrypted) when reading the configuration file  
during system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from a TFTP  
server. There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords.  
Example  
Console(config)#enable password level 15 0 admin  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
4-28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Management Commands  
4
IP Filter Commands  
Table 4-11 IP Filter Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode  
Page  
management  
show management  
Configures IP addresses that are allowed management access GC  
Displays the switch to be monitored or configured from a  
browser  
PE  
management  
This command specifies the client IP addresses that are allowed management  
access to the switch through various protocols. Use the no form to restore the  
default setting.  
Syntax  
[no] management {all-client | http-client | snmp-client | telnet-client}  
start-address [end-address]  
all-client - Adds IP address(es) to the SNMP, web and Telnet groups.  
http-client - Adds IP address(es) to the web group.  
snmp-client - Adds IP address(es) to the SNMP group.  
telnet-client - Adds IP address(es) to the Telnet group.  
• start-address - A single IP address, or the starting address of a range.  
• end-address - The end address of a range.  
Default Setting  
All addresses  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• If anyone tries to access a management interface on the switch from an invalid  
address, the switch will reject the connection, enter an event message in the  
system log, and send a trap message to the trap manager.  
• IP address can be configured for SNMP, web and Telnet access respectively.  
Each of these groups can include up to five different sets of addresses, either  
individual addresses or address ranges.  
• When entering addresses for the same group (i.e., SNMP, web or Telnet), the  
switch will not accept overlapping address ranges. When entering addresses  
for different groups, the switch will accept overlapping address ranges.  
• You cannot delete an individual address from a specified range. You must  
delete the entire range, and reenter the addresses.  
• You can delete an address range just by specifying the start address, or by  
specifying both the start address and end address.  
4-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
Example  
This example restricts management access to the indicated addresses.  
Console(config)#management all-client 192.168.1.19  
Console(config)#management all-client 192.168.1.25 192.168.1.30  
Console(config)#  
show management  
This command displays the client IP addresses that are allowed management  
access to the switch through various protocols.  
Syntax  
show management {all-client | http-client | snmp-client | telnet-client}  
all-client - Adds IP address(es) to the SNMP, web and Telnet groups.  
http-client - Adds IP address(es) to the web group.  
snmp-client - Adds IP address(es) to the SNMP group.  
telnet-client - Adds IP address(es) to the Telnet group.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show management all-client  
Management IP Filter  
HTTP-Client:  
Start IP address  
End IP address  
-----------------------------------------------  
1. 192.168.1.19  
2. 192.168.1.25  
192.168.1.19  
192.168.1.30  
SNMP-Client:  
Start IP address  
End IP address  
-----------------------------------------------  
1. 192.168.1.19  
2. 192.168.1.25  
192.168.1.19  
192.168.1.30  
TELNET-Client:  
Start IP address  
End IP address  
-----------------------------------------------  
1. 192.168.1.19  
2. 192.168.1.25  
192.168.1.19  
192.168.1.30  
Console#  
4-30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Management Commands  
4
Web Server Commands  
Table 4-12 Web Server Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode  
Page  
ip http port  
Specifies the port to be used by the web browser interface  
GC  
ip http server  
Allows the switch to be monitored or configured from a browser GC  
ip http secure-server  
ip http secure-port  
Enables HTTPS/SSL for encrypted communications  
Specifies the UDP port number for HTTPS/SSL  
GC  
GC  
ip http port  
This command specifies the TCP port number used by the web browser interface.  
Use the no form to use the default port.  
Syntax  
ip http port port-number  
no ip http port  
port-number - The TCP port to be used by the browser interface.  
(Range: 1-65535)  
Default Setting  
80  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#ip http port 769  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
ip http server  
This command allows this device to be monitored or configured from a browser. Use  
the no form to disable this function.  
Syntax  
[no] ip http server  
Default Setting  
Enabled  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
4-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
Example  
Console(config)#ip http server  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
ip http secure-server  
This command enables the secure hypertext transfer protocol (HTTPS) over the  
Secure Socket Layer (SSL), providing secure access (i.e., an encrypted connection)  
to the switch’s web interface. Use the no form to disable this function.  
Syntax  
[no] ip http secure-server  
Default Setting  
Enabled  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• Both HTTP and HTTPS service can be enabled independently on the switch.  
However, you cannot configure the HTTP and HTTPS servers to use the  
same UDP port.  
• If you enable HTTPS, you must indicate this in the URL that you specify in  
your browser: https://device[:port_number]  
• When you start HTTPS, the connection is established in this way:  
- The client authenticates the server using the server’s digital certificate.  
- The client and server negotiate a set of security protocols to use for the  
connection.  
- The client and server generate session keys for encrypting and decrypting  
data.  
• The client and server establish a secure encrypted connection.  
A padlock icon should appear in the status bar for Internet Explorer 5.x and  
Netscape Navigator 6.2 or later versions.  
• The following web browsers and operating systems currently support HTTPS:  
Table 4-13 HTTPS System Support  
Web Browser  
Operating System  
Internet Explorer 5.0 or later  
Windows 98,Windows NT (with service pack 6a),  
Windows 2000, Windows XP  
Netscape Navigator 6.2 or later  
Windows 98,Windows NT (with service pack 6a),  
Windows 2000, Windows XP, Solaris 2.6  
• To specify a secure-site certificate, see “Replacing the Default Secure-site  
Certificate” on page 3-60. Also refer to the copy command on page 4-70.  
4-32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
System Management Commands  
4
Example  
Console(config)#ip http secure-server  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
copy tftp https-certificate (4-70)  
ip http secure-port  
This command specifies the UDP port number used for HTTPS/SSL connection to  
the switch’s web interface. Use the no form to restore the default port.  
Syntax  
ip http secure-port port_number  
no ip http secure-port  
port_number – The UDP port used for HTTPS/SSL.  
(Range: 1-65535)  
Default Setting  
443  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• You cannot configure the HTTP and HTTPS servers to use the same port.  
• If you change the HTTPS port number, clients attempting to connect to the  
HTTPS server must specify the port number in the URL, in this format:  
https://device:port_number  
Example  
Console(config)#ip http secure-port 1000  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
4-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
Telnet Server Commands  
Table 4-14 Telnet Server Commands  
Function  
Command  
Mode  
GC  
Page  
ip telnet port  
ip telnet server  
Specifies the port to be used by the Telnet interface  
Allows the switch to be monitored or configured from Telnet  
GC  
ip telnet port  
This command specifies the TCP port number used by the Telnet interface. Use the  
no form to use the default port.  
Syntax  
ip telnet port port-number  
no ip telnet port  
port-number - The TCP port to be used by the browser interface.  
(Range: 1-65535)  
Default Setting  
23  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#ip telnet port 123  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
ip telnet server  
This command allows this device to be monitored or configured from Telnet. Use the  
no form to disable this function.  
Syntax  
[no] ip telnet server  
Default Setting  
Enabled  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#ip telnet server  
Console(config)#  
4-34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
System Management Commands  
4
Related Commands  
Secure Shell Commands  
The Berkley-standard includes remote access tools originally designed for Unix  
systems. Some of these tools have also been implemented for Microsoft Windows  
and other environments. These tools, including commands such as rlogin (remote  
login), rsh (remote shell), and rcp (remote copy), are not secure from hostile attacks.  
The Secure Shell (SSH) includes server/client applications intended as a secure  
replacement for the older Berkley remote access tools. SSH can also provide  
remote management access to this switch as a secure replacement for Telnet.  
When a client contacts the switch via the SSH protocol, the switch uses a public-key  
that the client must match along with a local user name and password for access  
authentication. SSH also encrypts all data transfers passing between the switch and  
SSH-enabled management station clients, and ensures that data traveling over the  
network arrives unaltered.  
This section describes the commands used to configure the SSH server. However,  
note that you also need to install a SSH client on the management station when  
using this protocol to configure the switch.  
Note: The switch supports both SSH Version 1.5 and 2.0.  
Table 4-15 SSH Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode  
GC  
Page  
ip ssh server  
ip ssh timeout  
Enables the SSH server on the switch  
Specifies the authentication timeout for the SSH server  
Specifies the number of retries allowed by a client  
GC  
ip ssh  
authentication-retries  
GC  
ip ssh server-key size Sets the SSH server key size  
GC  
copy tftp public-key  
delete public-key  
Copies the user’s public key from a TFTP server to the switch PE  
Deletes the public key for the specified user  
PE  
PE  
ip ssh crypto host-key Generates the host key  
generate  
ip ssh crypto zeroize  
ip ssh save host-key  
disconnect  
Clear the host key from RAM  
PE  
PE  
PE  
Saves the host key from RAM to flash memory  
Terminates a line connection  
show ip ssh  
Displays the status of the SSH server and the configured values PE  
for authentication timeout and retries  
show ssh  
Displays the status of current SSH sessions  
PE  
PE  
show public-key  
show users  
Shows the public key for the specified user or for the host  
Shows SSH users, including privilege level and public key type PE  
4-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
The SSH server on this switch supports both password and public key  
authentication. If password authentication is specified by the SSH client, then the  
password can be authenticated either locally or via a RADIUS or TACACS+ remote  
authentication server, as specified by the authentication login command on  
page 4-76. If public key authentication is specified by the client, then you must  
configure authentication keys on both the client and the switch as described in the  
following section. Note that regardless of whether you use public key or password  
authentication, you still have to generate authentication keys on the switch and  
enable the SSH server.  
To use the SSH server, complete these steps:  
1. Generate a Host Key Pair – Use the ip ssh crypto host-key generate  
command to create a host public/private key pair.  
2. Provide Host Public Key to Clients – Many SSH client programs automatically  
import the host public key during the initial connection setup with the switch.  
Otherwise, you need to manually create a known hosts file on the management  
station and place the host public key in it. An entry for a public key in the known  
hosts file would appear similar to the following example:  
10.1.0.54 1024 35 15684995401867669259333946775054617325313674890836547254  
15020245593199868544358361651999923329781766065830956 10825913212890233  
76546801726272571413428762941301196195566782 59566410486957427888146206  
51941746772984865468615717739390164779355942303577413098022737087794545  
24083971752646358058176716709574804776117  
3. Import Client’s Public Key to the Switch – Use the copy tftp public-key  
command to copy a file containing the public key for all the SSH client’s granted  
management access to the switch. (Note that these clients must be configured  
locally on the switch via the User Accounts page as described on page 3-54.)  
The clients are subsequently authenticated using these keys. The current  
firmware only accepts public key files based on standard UNIX format as shown  
in the following example for an RSA Version 1 key:  
1024 35 1341081685609893921040944920155425347631641921872958921143173880  
05553616163105177594083868631109291232226828519254374603100937187721199  
69631781366277414168985132049117204830339254324101637997592371449011938  
00609025394840848271781943722884025331159521348610229029789827213532671  
31629432532818915045306393916643 steve@192.168.1.19  
4. Set the Optional Parameters – Set other optional parameters, including the  
authentication timeout, the number of retries, and the server key size.  
5. Enable SSH Service – Use the ip ssh server command to enable the SSH  
server on the switch.  
6. Configure Challenge-Response Authentication – When an SSH client attempts  
to contact the switch, the SSH server uses the host key pair to negotiate a  
session key and encryption method. Only clients that have a private key  
4-36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Management Commands  
4
corresponding to the public keys stored on the switch can gain access. The  
following exchanges take place during this process:  
a. The client sends its public key to the switch.  
b. The switch compares the client's public key to those stored in memory.  
c. If a match is found, the switch uses the public key to encrypt a random  
sequence of bytes, and sends this string to the client.  
d. The client uses its private key to decrypt the bytes, and sends the  
decrypted bytes back to the switch.  
e. The switch compares the decrypted bytes to the original bytes it sent. If the  
two sets match, this means that the client's private key corresponds to an  
authorized public key, and the client is authenticated.  
Note: To use SSH with only password authentication, the host public key must still be  
given to the client, either during initial connection or manually entered into the  
known host file. However, you do not need to configure the client’s keys.  
ip ssh server  
This command enables the Secure Shell (SSH) server on this switch. Use the no  
form to disable this service.  
Syntax  
[no] ip ssh server  
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• The SSH server supports up to four client sessions. The maximum number of  
client sessions includes both current Telnet sessions and SSH sessions.  
• The SSH server uses DSA or RSA for key exchange when the client first  
establishes a connection with the switch, and then negotiates with the client  
to select either DES (56-bit) or 3DES (168-bit) for data encryption.  
• You must generate the host key before enabling the SSH server.  
Example  
Console#ip ssh crypto host-key generate dsa  
Console#configure  
Console(config)#ip ssh server  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
4-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
ip ssh timeout  
This command configures the timeout for the SSH server. Use the no form to restore  
the default setting.  
Syntax  
ip ssh timeout seconds  
no ip ssh timeout  
seconds – The timeout for client response during SSH negotiation.  
(Range: 1-120)  
Default Setting  
10 seconds  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
The timeout specifies the interval the switch will wait for a response from the  
client during the SSH negotiation phase. Once an SSH session has been  
established, the timeout for user input is controlled by the exec-timeout  
command for vty sessions.  
Example  
Console(config)#ip ssh timeout 60  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
ip ssh authentication-retries  
This command configures the number of times the SSH server attempts to  
reauthenticate a user. Use the no form to restore the default setting.  
Syntax  
ip ssh authentication-retries count  
no ip ssh authentication-retries  
count – The number of authentication attempts permitted after which the  
interface is reset. (Range: 1-5)  
Default Setting  
3
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
4-38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
System Management Commands  
4
Example  
Console(config)#ip ssh authentication-retires 2  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
ip ssh server-key size  
This command sets the SSH server key size. Use the no form to restore the default  
setting.  
Syntax  
ip ssh server-key size key-size  
no ip ssh server-key size  
key-size – The size of server key. (Range: 512-896 bits)  
Default Setting  
768 bits  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• The server key is a private key that is never shared outside the switch.  
• The host key is shared with the SSH client, and is fixed at 1024 bits.  
Example  
Console(config)#ip ssh server-key size 512  
Console(config)#  
delete public-key  
This command deletes the specified user’s public key.  
Syntax  
delete public-key username [dsa | rsa]  
• username – Name of an SSH user. (Range: 1-8 characters)  
dsa – DSA public key type.  
rsa – RSA public key type.  
Default Setting  
Deletes both the DSA and RSA key.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
4-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
Example  
Console#delete public-key admin dsa  
Console#  
ip ssh crypto host-key generate  
This command generates the host key pair (i.e., public and private).  
Syntax  
ip ssh crypto host-key generate [dsa | rsa]  
dsa – DSA (Version 2) key type.  
rsa – RSA (Version 1) key type.  
Default Setting  
Generates both the DSA and RSA key pairs.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
• This command stores the host key pair in memory (i.e., RAM). Use the ip ssh  
save host-key command to save the host key pair to flash memory.  
• Some SSH client programs automatically add the public key to the known  
hosts file as part of the configuration process. Otherwise, you must manually  
create a known hosts file and place the host public key in it.  
• The SSH server uses this host key to negotiate a session key and encryption  
method with the client trying to connect to it.  
Example  
Console#ip ssh crypto host-key generate dsa  
Console#  
Related Commands  
ip ssh crypto zeroize  
This command clears the host key from memory (i.e. RAM).  
Syntax  
ip ssh crypto zeroize [dsa | rsa]  
dsa – DSA key type.  
rsa – RSA key type.  
Default Setting  
Clears both the DSA and RSA key.  
4-40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Management Commands  
4
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
• This command clears the host key from volatile memory (RAM). Use the no  
ip ssh save host-key command to clear the host key from flash memory.  
• The SSH server must be disabled before you can execute this command.  
Example  
Console#ip ssh crypto zeroize dsa  
Console#  
Related Commands  
ip ssh save host-key  
This command saves host key from RAM to flash memory.  
Syntax  
ip ssh save host-key [dsa | rsa]  
dsa – DSA key type.  
rsa – RSA key type.  
Default Setting  
Saves both the DSA and RSA key.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#ip ssh save host-key dsa  
Console#  
Related Commands  
show ip ssh  
This command displays the connection settings used when authenticating client  
access to the SSH server.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
4-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
Example  
Console#show ip ssh  
SSH Enabled - version 1.99  
Negotiation timeout: 120 secs; Authentication retries: 3  
Server key size: 768 bits  
Console#  
show ssh  
This command displays the current SSH server connections.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show ssh  
Connection Version State  
Username Encryption  
admin ctos aes128-cbc-hmac-md5  
stoc aes128-cbc-hmac-md5  
0
2.0  
Session-Started  
Console#  
Table 4-16 show ssh - display description  
Description  
Field  
Session  
Version  
State  
The session number. (Range: 0-3)  
The Secure Shell version number.  
The authentication negotiation state.  
(Values: Negotiation-Started, Authentication-Started, Session-Started)  
Username  
Encryption  
The user name of the client.  
The encryption method is automatically negotiated between the client and server.  
Options for SSHv1.5 include: DES, 3DES  
Options for SSHv2.0 can include different algorithms for the client-to-server (ctos)  
and server-to-client (stoc):  
aes128-cbc-hmac-sha1  
aes192-cbc-hmac-sha1  
aes256-cbc-hmac-sha1  
3des-cbc-hmac-sha1  
blowfish-cbc-hmac-sha1  
aes128-cbc-hmac-md5  
aes192-cbc-hmac-md5  
aes256-cbc-hmac-md5  
3des-cbc-hmac-md5  
blowfish-cbc-hmac-md5  
Terminology:  
DES – Data Encryption Standard (56-bit key)  
3DES – Triple-DES (Uses three iterations of DES, 112-bit key)  
aes – Advanced Encryption Standard (160 or 224-bit key)  
blowfish – Blowfish (32-448 bit key)  
cbc – cypher-block chaining  
sha1 – Secure Hash Algorithm 1 (160-bit hashes)  
md5 – Message Digest algorithm number 5 (128-bit hashes)  
4-42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
System Management Commands  
4
show public-key  
This command shows the public key for the specified user or for the host.  
Syntax  
show public-key [user [username]| host]  
username – Name of an SSH user. (Range: 1-8 characters)  
Default Setting  
Shows all public keys.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
• If no parameters are entered, all keys are displayed. If the user keyword is  
entered, but no user name is specified, then the public keys for all users are  
displayed.  
• When an RSA key is displayed, the first field indicates the size of the host key  
(e.g., 1024), the second field is the encoded public exponent (e.g., 35), and  
the last string is the encoded modulus. When a DSA key is displayed, the first  
field indicates that the encryption method used by SSH is based on the Digital  
Signature Standard (DSS), and the last string is the encoded modulus.  
Example  
Console#show public-key host  
Host:  
RSA:  
1024 35  
1568499540186766925933394677505461732531367489083654725415020245593199868  
5443583616519999233297817660658309586108259132128902337654680172627257141  
3428762941301196195566782595664104869574278881462065194174677298486546861  
5717739390164779355942303577413098022737087794545240839717526463580581767  
16709574804776117  
DSA:  
ssh-dss AAAB3NzaC1kc3MAAACBAPWKZTPbsRIB8ydEXcxM3dyV/yrDbKStIlnzD/Dg0h2Hxc  
YV44sXZ2JXhamLK6P8bvuiyacWbUW/a4PAtp1KMSdqsKeh3hKoA3vRRSy1N2XFfAKxl5fwFfv  
JlPdOkFgzLGMinvSNYQwiQXbKTBH0Z4mUZpE85PWxDZMaCNBPjBrRAAAAFQChb4vsdfQGNIjw  
bvwrNLaQ77isiwAAAIEAsy5YWDC99ebYHNRj5kh47wY4i8cZvH+/p9cnrfwFTMU01VFDly3IR  
2G395NLy5Qd7ZDxfA9mCOfT/yyEfbobMJZi8oGCstSNOxrZZVnMqWrTYfdrKX7YKBw/Kjw6Bm  
iFq7O+jAhf1Dg45loAc27s6TLdtny1wRq/ow2eTCD5nekAAACBAJ8rMccXTxHLFAczWS7EjOy  
DbsloBfPuSAb4oAsyjKXKVYNLQkTLZfcFRu41bS2KV5LAwecsigF/+DjKGWtPNIQqabKgYCw2  
o/dVzX4Gg+yqdTlYmGA7fHGm8ARGeiG4ssFKy4Z6DmYPXFum1Yg0fhLwuHpOSKdxT3kk475S7  
w0W  
Console#  
4-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command Line Interface  
4
Event Logging Commands  
Table 4-17 Event Logging Commands  
Function  
Command  
logging on  
Mode  
GC  
Page  
Controls logging of error messages  
logging history  
Limits syslog messages saved to switch memory based on  
severity  
GC  
logging host  
Adds a syslog server host IP address that will receive logging GC  
messages  
logging facility  
logging trap  
Sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages  
GC  
GC  
Limits syslog messages saved to a remote server based on  
severity  
clear logging  
show logging  
show log  
Clears messages from the logging buffer  
Displays the state of logging  
Displays log messages  
PE  
PE  
PE  
logging on  
This command controls logging of error messages, sending debug or error  
messages to switch memory. The no form disables the logging process.  
Syntax  
[no] logging on  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
The logging process controls error messages saved to switch memory. You  
can use the logging history command to control the type of error messages  
that are stored.  
Example  
Console(config)#logging on  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
4-44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
System Management Commands  
4
logging history  
This command limits syslog messages saved to switch memory based on severity.  
The no form returns the logging of syslog messages to the default level.  
Syntax  
logging history {flash | ram} level  
no logging history {flash | ram}  
flash - Event history stored in flash memory (i.e., permanent memory).  
ram - Event history stored in temporary RAM (i.e., memory flushed on  
power reset).  
level - One of the levels listed below. Messages sent include the selected  
level down to level 0. (Range: 0-7)  
Table 4-18 Logging Levels  
Level Severity Name  
Description  
7
6
5
4
3
2
debugging  
informational  
notifications  
warnings  
errors  
Debugging messages  
Informational messages only  
Normal but significant condition, such as cold start  
Warning conditions (e.g., return false, unexpected return)  
Error conditions (e.g., invalid input, default used)  
critical  
Critical conditions (e.g., memory allocation, or free  
memory error - resource exhausted)  
1
0
alerts  
Immediate action needed  
System unusable  
emergencies  
* There are only Level 2, 5 and 6 error messages for the current firmware release.  
Default Setting  
Flash: errors (level 3 - 0)  
RAM: warnings (level 6 - 0)  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
The message level specified for flash memory must be a higher priority (i.e.,  
numerically lower) than that specified for RAM.  
Example  
Console(config)#logging history ram 0  
Console(config)#  
4-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
logging host  
This command adds a syslog server host IP address that will receive logging  
messages. Use the no form to remove a syslog server host.  
Syntax  
[no] logging host host_ip_address  
host_ip_address - The IP address of a syslog server.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• By using this command more than once you can build up a list of host IP  
addresses.  
• The maximum number of host IP addresses allowed is five.  
Example  
Console(config)#logging host 10.1.0.3  
Console(config)#  
logging facility  
This command sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages. Use the  
no form to return the type to the default.  
Syntax  
[no] logging facility type  
type - A number that indicates the facility used by the syslog server to  
dispatch log messages to an appropriate service. (Range: 16-23)  
Default Setting  
23  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
The command specifies the facility type tag sent in syslog messages. (See  
RFC 3164.) This type has no effect on the kind of messages reported by the  
switch. However, it may be used by the syslog server to sort messages or to  
store messages in the corresponding database.  
Example  
Console(config)#logging facility 19  
Console(config)#  
4-46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
System Management Commands  
4
logging trap  
This command enables the logging of system messages to a remote server, or  
limits the syslog messages saved to a remote server based on severity. Use this  
command without a specified level to enable remote logging. Use the no form to  
disable remote logging.  
Syntax  
logging trap [level]  
no logging trap  
level - One of the level arguments listed below. Messages sent include the  
selected level up through level 0. (Refer to the table on page 4-45.)  
Default Setting  
• Enabled  
• Level 6 - 0  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• Using this command with a specified level enables remote logging and sets  
the minimum severity level to be saved.  
• Using this command without a specified level also enables remote logging, but  
restores the minimum severity level to the default.  
Example  
Console(config)#logging trap 4  
Console(config)#  
clear logging  
This command clears messages from the log buffer.  
Syntax  
clear logging [flash | ram]  
flash - Event history stored in flash memory (i.e., permanent memory).  
ram - Event history stored in temporary RAM (i.e., memory flushed on  
power reset).  
Default Setting  
Flash and RAM  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#clear logging  
Console#  
4-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
Related Commands  
show logging  
This command displays the configuration settings for logging messages to local  
switch memory, to an SMTP event handler, or to a remote syslog server.  
Syntax  
show logging {flash | ram | sendmail | trap}  
flash - Displays settings for storing event messages in flash memory  
(i.e., permanent memory).  
ram - Displays settings for storing event messages in temporary RAM  
(i.e., memory flushed on power reset).  
sendmail - Displays settings for the SMTP event handler (page 4-53).  
trap - Displays settings for the trap function.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
The following example shows that system logging is enabled, the message level for  
flash memory is “errors” (i.e., default level 3 - 0), the message level for RAM is  
“debugging” (i.e., default level 7 - 0).  
Console#show logging flash  
Syslog logging:  
Enabled  
History logging in FLASH: level errors  
Console#show logging ram  
Syslog logging:  
Enabled  
History logging in RAM: level debugging  
Console#  
Table 4-19 show logging flash/ram - display description  
Description  
Shows if system logging has been enabled via the logging on command.  
Field  
Syslog logging  
History logging in FLASH The message level(s) reported based on the logging history command.  
History logging in RAM The message level(s) reported based on the logging history command.  
4-48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
System Management Commands  
4
The following example displays settings for the trap function.  
Console#show logging trap  
Syslog logging: Enable  
REMOTELOG status: disable  
REMOTELOG facility type: local use 7  
REMOTELOG level type: Debugging messages  
REMOTELOG server IP address: 1.2.3.4  
REMOTELOG server IP address: 0.0.0.0  
REMOTELOG server IP address: 0.0.0.0  
REMOTELOG server IP address: 0.0.0.0  
REMOTELOG server IP address: 0.0.0.0  
Console#  
Table 4-20 show logging trap - display description  
Description  
Field  
Syslog logging  
REMOTELOG status  
Shows if system logging has been enabled via the logging on command.  
Shows if remote logging has been enabled via the logging trap command.  
REMOTELOG  
facility type  
The facility type for remote logging of syslog messages as specified in the logging  
facility command.  
REMOTELOG level type The severity threshold for syslog messages sent to a remote server as specified in  
the logging trap command.  
REMOTELOG  
server IP address  
The address of syslog servers as specified in the logging host command.  
Related Commands  
show log  
This command displays the system and event messages stored in memory.  
Syntax  
show log {flash | ram} [login] [tail]  
flash - Event history stored in flash memory (i.e., permanent memory).  
ram - Event history stored in temporary RAM (i.e., memory flushed on  
power reset).  
tail - Shows event history starting from the most recent entry.  
login - Shows the login record only.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
This command shows the system and event messages stored in memory,  
including the time stamp, message level (page 4-45), program module,  
function, and event number.  
4-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
Example  
The following example shows sample messages stored in RAM.  
Console#show log ram  
[5] 00:01:06 2001-01-01  
"STA root change notification."  
level: 6, module: 6, function: 1, and event no.: 1  
[4] 00:01:00 2001-01-01  
"STA root change notification."  
level: 6, module: 6, function: 1, and event no.: 1  
[3] 00:00:54 2001-01-01  
"STA root change notification."  
level: 6, module: 6, function: 1, and event no.: 1  
[2] 00:00:50 2001-01-01  
"STA topology change notification."  
level: 6, module: 6, function: 1, and event no.: 1  
[1] 00:00:48 2001-01-01  
"VLAN 1 link-up notification."  
level: 6, module: 6, function: 1, and event no.: 1  
Console#  
SMTP Alert Commands  
These commands configure SMTP event handling, and forwarding of alert  
messages to the specified SMTP servers and email recipients.  
Table 4-21 SMTP Alert Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode Page  
logging sendmail host  
logging sendmail level  
SMTP servers to receive alert messages  
Severity threshold used to trigger alert messages  
Email address used for “From” field of alert messages  
GC  
GC  
GC  
logging sendmail  
source-email  
logging sendmail  
destination-email  
Email recipients of alert messages  
GC  
logging sendmail  
Enables SMTP event handling  
GC  
show logging sendmail  
Displays SMTP event handler settings  
NE, PE  
logging sendmail host  
This command specifies SMTP servers that will be sent alert messages. Use the no  
form to remove an SMTP server.  
Syntax  
[no] logging sendmail host ip_address  
ip_address - IP address of an SMTP server that will be sent alert  
messages for event handling.  
Default Setting  
None  
4-50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
System Management Commands  
4
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• You can specify up to three SMTP servers for event handing. However, you  
must enter a separate command to specify each server.  
• To send email alerts, the switch first opens a connection, sends all the email  
alerts waiting in the queue one by one, and finally closes the connection.  
• To open a connection, the switch first selects the server that successfully sent  
mail during the last connection, or the first server configured by this command.  
If it fails to send mail, the switch selects the next server in the list and tries to  
send mail again. If it still fails, the system will repeat the process at a periodic  
interval. (A trap will be triggered if the switch cannot successfully open a  
connection.)  
Example  
Console(config)#logging sendmail host 192.168.1.200  
Console(config)#  
logging sendmail level  
This command sets the severity threshold used to trigger alert messages.  
Syntax  
logging sendmail level level  
level - One of the system message levels (page 4-45). Messages sent  
include the selected level down to level 0. (Range: 0-7; Default: 7)  
Default Setting  
Level 7  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
The specified level indicates an event threshold. All events at this level or  
higher will be sent to the configured email recipients. (For example, using  
Level 7 will report all events from level 7 to level 0.)  
Example  
This example will send email alerts for system errors from level 4 through 0.  
Console(config)#logging sendmail level 4  
Console(config)#  
4-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
logging sendmail source-email  
This command sets the email address used for the “From” field in alert messages.  
Use the no form to delete the source email address.  
Syntax  
[no] logging sendmail source-email email-address  
email-address - The source email address used in alert messages.  
(Range: 0-41 characters)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
You may use an symbolic email address that identifies the switch, or the  
address of an administrator responsible for the switch.  
Example  
This example will set the source email john@acme.com.  
Console(config)#logging sendmail source-email john@acme.com  
Console(config)#  
logging sendmail destination-email  
This command specifies the email recipients of alert messages. Use the no form to  
remove a recipient.  
Syntax  
[no] logging sendmail destination-email email-address  
email-address - The source email address used in alert messages.  
(Range: 1-41 characters)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
You can specify up to five recipients for alert messages. However, you must  
enter a separate command to specify each recipient.  
Example  
Console(config)#logging sendmail destination-email ted@this-company.com  
Console(config)#  
4-52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
System Management Commands  
4
logging sendmail  
This command enables SMTP event handling. Use the no form to disable this  
function.  
Syntax  
[no] logging sendmail  
Default Setting  
Enabled  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#logging sendmail  
Console(config)#  
show logging sendmail  
This command displays the settings for the SMTP event handler.  
Command Mode  
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show logging sendmail  
SMTP servers  
-----------------------------------------------  
1. 192.168.1.200  
SMTP minimum severity level: 4  
SMTP destination email addresses  
-----------------------------------------------  
1. geoff@acme.com  
SMTP source email address:  
john@acme.com  
Enabled  
SMTP status:  
Console#  
4-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
Time Commands  
The system clock can be dynamically set by polling a set of specified NTP time  
servers. Maintaining an accurate time on the switch enables the system log to  
record meaningful dates and times for event entries. If the clock is not set, the switch  
will only record the time from the factory default set at the last bootup.  
Table 4-22 Time Commands  
Command  
sntp client  
sntp server  
sntp poll  
Function  
Mode  
Page  
Enables the SNTP client for time updates from specified servers GC  
Specifies one or more time servers  
GC  
Sets the interval at which the SNTP client polls for time  
Shows current SNTP configuration settings  
GC  
show sntp  
ntp client  
NE, PE  
Enables the NTP client for time updates from specified servers GC  
ntp server  
ntp poll  
Specifies NTP servers to poll for time updates  
Sets the interval at which the NTP client polls for time  
Enables authentication for NTP traffic  
GC  
GC  
ntp authenticate  
GC  
ntp authentication-key Configures authentication keys  
GC  
show ntp  
Shows current NTP configuration settings  
NE, PE  
GC  
clock timezone  
calendar set  
show calendar  
Sets the time zone for the switch’s internal clock  
Sets the system date and time  
PE  
Displays the current date and time setting  
NE, PE  
sntp client  
This command enables SNTP client requests for time synchronization from NTP or  
SNTP time servers specified with the sntp servers command. Use the no form to  
disable SNTP client requests.  
Syntax  
[no] sntp client  
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• The time acquired from time servers is used to record accurate dates and  
times for log events. Without SNTP, the switch only records the time starting  
from the factory default set at the last bootup (i.e., 00:00:00, Jan. 1, 2001).  
• This command enables client time requests to time servers specified via the  
sntp servers command. It issues time synchronization requests based on the  
interval set via the sntp poll command.  
4-54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
System Management Commands  
4
Example  
Console(config)#sntp server 10.1.0.19  
Console(config)#sntp poll 60  
Console(config)#sntp client  
Console(config)#end  
Console#show sntp  
Current time: Dec 23 02:52:44 2002  
Poll interval: 60  
Current mode: unicast  
SNTP status: Enabled  
SNTP server: 10.1.0.19 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0  
Current server: 10.1.0.19  
Console#  
Related Commands  
sntp server  
This command sets the IP address of the servers to which SNTP time requests are  
issued. Use this command with no arguments to clear all time servers from the  
current list.  
Syntax  
sntp server [ip1 [ip2 [ip3]]]  
ip - IP address of an NTP time server.  
(Range: 1-3 addresses)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
This command specifies time servers from which the switch will poll for time  
updates when set to SNTP client mode. The client will poll the time servers in  
the order specified until a response is received. It issues time synchronization  
requests based on the interval set via the sntp poll command.  
Example  
Console(config)#sntp server 10.1.0.19  
Related Commands  
4-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
sntp poll  
This command sets the interval between sending time requests when the switch is  
set to SNTP client mode. Use the no form to restore to the default.  
Syntax  
sntp poll seconds  
no sntp poll  
seconds - Interval between time requests. (Range: 16-16384 seconds)  
Default Setting  
16 seconds  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#sntp poll 60  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
show sntp  
This command displays the current time and configuration settings for the SNTP  
client, and indicates whether or not the local time has been properly updated.  
Command Mode  
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
This command displays the current time, the poll interval used for sending  
time synchronization requests, and the current SNTP mode (i.e., unicast).  
Example  
Console#show sntp  
Current time: Dec 23 05:13:28 2002  
Poll interval: 16  
Current mode: unicast  
SNTP status : Enabled  
SNTP server 137.92.140.80 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0  
Current server: 137.92.140.80  
Console#  
4-56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
System Management Commands  
4
ntp client  
This command enables NTP client requests for time synchronization from NTP time  
servers specified with the ntp servers command. Use the no form to disable NTP  
client requests.  
Syntax  
[no] ntp client  
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• The SNTP and NTP clients cannot be enabled at the same time. First disable  
the SNTP client before using this command.  
• The time acquired from time servers is used to record accurate dates and  
times for log events. Without NTP, the switch only records the time starting  
from the factory default set at the last bootup (i.e., 00:00:00, Jan. 1, 2001).  
• This command enables client time requests to time servers specified via the  
ntp servers command. It issues time synchronization requests based on the  
interval set via the ntp poll command.  
Example  
Console(config)#ntp client  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
ntp server  
This command sets the IP addresses of the servers to which NTP time requests are  
issued. Use the no form of the command to clear a specific time server or all servers  
from the current list.  
Syntax  
ntp server ip-address [version number] [key key-number]  
no ntp server [ip-address]  
ip-address - IP address of an NTP time server.  
number - The NTP version number supported by the server. (Range: 1-3)  
key-number - The number of an authentication key to use in  
communications with the server. (Range: 1-65535)  
4-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
Default Setting  
Version number: 3  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• This command specifies time servers that the switch will poll for time updates  
when set to NTP client mode. It issues time synchronization requests based  
on the interval set with the ntp poll command. The client will poll all the time  
servers configured, the responses received are filtered and compared to  
determine the most reliable and accurate time update for the switch.  
• You can configure up to 50 NTP servers on the switch. Re-enter this  
command for each server you want to configure.  
• NTP authentication is optional. If enabled with the ntp authenticate  
command, you must also configure at least one key number using the ntp  
authentication-key command.  
• Use the no form of this command without an argument to clear all configured  
servers in the list.  
Example  
Console(config)#ntp server 192.168.3.20  
Console(config)#ntp server 192.168.3.21  
Console(config)#ntp server 192.168.4.22 version 2  
Console(config)#ntp server 192.168.5.23 version 3 key 19  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
ntp poll  
This command sets the interval between sending time requests when the switch is  
set to NTP client mode. Use the no form to restore to the default.  
Syntax  
ntp poll seconds  
no ntp poll  
seconds - Interval between time requests. (Range: 16-16384 seconds)  
Default Setting  
16 seconds  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
4-58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Management Commands  
4
Example  
Console(config)#ntp poll 60  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
ntp authenticate  
This command enables authentication for NTP client-server communications. Use  
the no form to disable authentication.  
Syntax  
[no] ntp authenticate  
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
You can enable NTP authentication to ensure that reliable updates are  
received from only authorized NTP servers. The authentication keys and their  
associated key number must be centrally managed and manually distributed to  
NTP servers and clients. The key numbers and key values must match on  
both the server and client.  
Example  
Console(config)#ntp authenticate  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
ntp authentication-key  
This command configures authentication keys and key numbers to use when NTP  
authentication is enabled. Use the no form of the command to clear a specific  
authentication key or all keys from the current list.  
Syntax  
ntp authentication-key number md5 key  
no ntp authentication-key [number]  
number - The NTP authentication key ID number. (Range: 1-65535)  
md5 - Specifies that authentication is provided by using the message digest  
algorithm 5.  
4-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
key - An MD5 authentication key string. The key string can be up to 32  
case-sensitive printable ASCII characters (no spaces).  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• The key number specifies a key value in the NTP authentication key list. Up  
to 255 keys can be configured on the switch. Re-enter this command for each  
server you want to configure.  
• Note that NTP authentication key numbers and values must match on both the  
server and client.  
• NTP authentication is optional. When enabled with the ntp authenticate  
command, you must also configure at least one key number using this  
command.  
• Use the no form of this command without an argument to clear all  
authentication keys in the list.  
Example  
Console(config)#ntp authentication-key 45 md5 thisiskey45  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
show ntp  
This command displays the current time and configuration settings for the NTP  
client, and indicates whether or not the local time has been properly updated.  
Command Mode  
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
This command displays the current time, the poll interval used for sending  
time synchronization requests, and the current NTP mode (i.e., unicast).  
4-60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
System Management Commands  
4
Example  
Console#show ntp  
Current time: Jan 1 02:58:58 2001  
Poll interval: 16  
Current mode: unicast  
NTP status : Enabled  
NTP Authenticate status : Enabled  
Last Update NTP Server: 0.0.0.0  
Port: 0  
Last Update time: Dec 31 00:00:00 2000 UTC  
NTP Server 192.168.3.20 version 3  
NTP Server 192.168.3.21 version 3  
NTP Server 192.168.3.22 version 2  
NTP Server 192.168.4.50 version 3 key 30  
NTP Server 192.168.5.35 version 3 key 19  
NTP Authentication-Key 12 md5 156S46Q24142414222711K66N80 7  
NTP Authentication-Key 19 md5 Q33O16Q6338241J022S29Q731K7 7  
NTP Authentication-Key 30 md5 D2V8777I51K1132K3552L26R6141O4 7  
NTP Authentication-Key 45 md5 3U865531O13K38F0R8 7  
NTP Authentication-Key 125 md5 A48S2810327947M76 7  
Console#  
clock timezone  
This command sets the time zone for the switch’s internal clock.  
Syntax  
clock timezone name hour hours minute minutes {before-utc | after-utc}  
name - Name of timezone, usually an acronym. (Range: 1-29 characters)  
hours - Number of hours before/after UTC. (Range: 0-12 hours)  
minutes - Number of minutes before/after UTC. (Range: 0-59 minutes)  
before-utc - Sets the local time zone before (east) of UTC.  
after-utc - Sets the local time zone after (west) of UTC.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
This command sets the local time zone relative to the Coordinated Universal  
Time (UTC, formerly Greenwich Mean Time or GMT), based on the earth’s  
prime meridian, zero degrees longitude. To display a time corresponding to  
your local time, you must indicate the number of hours and minutes your time  
zone is east (before) or west (after) of UTC.  
Example  
Console(config)#clock timezone Japan hours 8 minute 0 after-UTC  
Console(config)#  
4-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
Related Commands  
calendar set  
This command sets the system clock. It may be used if there is no time server on  
your network, or if you have not configured the switch to receive signals from a time  
server.  
Syntax  
calendar set hour min sec {day month year | month day year}  
hour - Hour in 24-hour format. (Range: 0-23)  
min - Minute. (Range: 0-59)  
sec - Second. (Range: 0-59)  
day - Day of month. (Range: 1-31)  
month - january | february | march | april | may | june | july | august |  
september | october | november | december  
year - Year (4-digit). (Range: 2001-2100)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
This example shows how to set the system clock to 15:12:34, April 1st, 2004.  
Console#calendar set 15 12 34 1 April 2004  
Console#  
show calendar  
This command displays the system clock.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show calendar  
15:12:34 April 1 2004  
Console#  
4-62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
System Management Commands  
4
System Status Commands  
Table 4-23 System Status Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode  
Page  
show startup-config  
Displays the contents of the configuration file (stored in flash  
memory) that is used to start up the system  
PE  
show running-config  
show system  
Displays the configuration data currently in use  
Displays system information  
PE  
NE, PE  
NE, PE  
show users  
Shows all active console and Telnet sessions, including user  
name, idle time, and IP address of Telnet clients  
show version  
Displays version information for the system  
NE, PE  
show startup-config  
This command displays the configuration file stored in non-volatile memory that is  
used to start up the system.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
• Use this command in conjunction with the show running-config command to  
compare the information in running memory to the information stored in  
non-volatile memory.  
• This command displays settings for key command modes. Each mode group  
is separated by “!” symbols, and includes the configuration mode command,  
and corresponding commands. This command displays the following  
information:  
- SNMP community strings  
- Users (names and access levels)  
- VLAN database (VLAN ID, name and state)  
- VLAN configuration settings for each interface  
- IP address configured for the switch  
- Spanning tree settings  
- Any configured settings for the console port and Telnet  
4-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
Example  
Console#show startup-config  
building startup-config, please wait.....  
!
!
username admin access-level 15  
username admin password 0 admin  
!
username guest access-level 0  
username guest password 0 guest  
!
enable password level 15 0 super  
!
snmp-server community public ro  
snmp-server community private rw  
!
logging history ram 6  
logging history flash 3  
!
vlan database  
vlan 1 name DefaultVlan media ethernet state active  
!
interface ethernet 1/1  
switchport allowed vlan add 1 untagged  
switchport native vlan 1  
.
.
.
interface vlan 1  
ip address dhcp  
!
line console  
!
line vty  
!
end  
Console#  
Related Commands  
4-64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Management Commands  
4
show running-config  
This command displays the configuration information currently in use.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
• Use this command in conjunction with the show startup-config command to  
compare the information in running memory to the information stored in  
non-volatile memory.  
• This command displays settings for key command modes. Each mode group  
is separated by “!” symbols, and includes the configuration mode command,  
and corresponding commands. This command displays the following  
information:  
- SNTP server settings  
- SNMP community strings  
- Users (names, access levels, and encrypted passwords)  
- Event log settings  
- VLAN database (VLAN ID, name and state)  
- VLAN configuration settings for each interface  
- IP address configured for the switch  
- Layer 4 precedence settings  
- Any configured settings for the console port and Telnet  
4-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command Line Interface  
4
Example  
Console#show running-config  
building running-config, please wait.....  
!
SNTP server 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0  
!
clock timezone hours 0 minute 0 after-UTC  
!
!
SNMP-server community private rw  
SNMP-server community public ro  
!
!
username admin access-level 15  
username admin password 7 21232f297a57a5a743894a0e4a801fc3  
username guest access-level 0  
username guest password 7 084e0343a0486ff05530df6c705c8bb4  
enable password level 15 7 1b3231655cebb7a1f783eddf27d254ca  
!
!
logging history ram 6  
logging history flash 3  
!
vlan database  
vlan 1 name DefaultVlan media ethernet state active  
!
!
interface ethernet 1/1  
switchport allowed vlan add 1 untagged  
switchport native vlan 1  
.
.
.
!
interface vlan 1  
ip address DHCP  
!
!
no map IP precedence  
no map IP DSCP  
!
!
line console  
!
line vty  
!
end  
!
Console#  
Related Commands  
4-66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Management Commands  
4
show system  
This command displays system information.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
• For a description of the items shown by this command, refer to “Displaying  
• The POST results should all display “PASS.” If any POST test indicates  
“FAIL,” contact your distributor for assistance.  
Example  
Console#show system  
System description: Layer2+ Fast Ethernet Standalone Switch ES3526XA  
System OID string: 1.3.6.1.4.1.259.6.10.74  
System information  
System Up time:  
System Name:  
0 days, 0 hours, 0 minutes, and 7.18 seconds  
[NONE]  
System Location:  
System Contact:  
MAC address:  
Web server:  
Web server port:  
Web secure server:  
[NONE]  
[NONE]  
00-30-F1-D3-26-00  
enabled  
80  
enabled  
Web secure server port: 443  
Telnet server  
Telnet port  
Jumbo Frame :  
POST result  
: enable  
: 23  
Disabled  
Dummy Test 1.................PASS  
UART LOOP BACK Test..........PASS  
DRAM Test....................PASS  
Timer Test...................PASS  
Switch Int Loopback test.....PASS  
Done All Pass.  
Console#  
show users  
Shows all active console and Telnet sessions, including user name, idle time, and IP  
address of Telnet client.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec  
4-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
Command Usage  
The session used to execute this command is indicated by a “*” symbol next to  
the Line (i.e., session) index number.  
Example  
Console#show users  
Username accounts:  
Username Privilege Public-Key  
-------- --------- ----------  
admin  
guest  
steve  
15  
0
15  
None  
None  
RSA  
Online users:  
Line  
Username Idle time (h:m:s) Remote IP addr.  
----------- -------- ----------------- ---------------  
0
* 1  
2
console  
VTY 0  
SSH 1  
admin  
admin  
steve  
0:14:14  
0:00:00  
0:00:06  
192.168.1.19  
192.168.1.19  
Web online users:  
Line Remote IP addr Username Idle time (h:m:s).  
----------- -------------- -------- ------------------  
HTTP 192.168.1.19 admin 0:00:00  
1
Console#  
show version  
This command displays hardware and software version information for the system.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
information on the items displayed by this command.  
4-68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
System Management Commands  
4
Example  
Console#show version  
Unit1  
Serial number  
Service tag:  
:A419048860  
Hardware version  
Module A type  
Module B type  
Number of ports  
Main power status  
:R0B  
:1000BaseT  
:1000BaseT  
:26  
:up  
Redundant power status :not present  
Agent(master)  
Loader version:  
Boot ROM version:  
2.2.1.4  
2.2.1.9  
Operation code version: 0.2.6.3  
Console#  
Frame Size Commands  
Table 4-24 Frame Size Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode  
Page  
jumbo frame  
Enables support for jumbo frames  
GC  
jumbo frame  
This command enables support for jumbo frames. Use the no form to disable it.  
Syntax  
[no] jumbo frame  
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• This switch provides more efficient throughput for large sequential data  
transfers by supporting jumbo frames up to 9216 bytes. Compared to  
standard Ethernet frames that run only up to 1.5 KB, using jumbo frames  
significantly reduces the per-packet overhead required to process protocol  
encapsulation fields.  
• To use jumbo frames, both the source and destination end nodes (such as a  
computer or server) must support this feature. Also, when the connection is  
operating at full duplex, all switches in the network between the two end nodes  
must be able to accept the extended frame size. And for half-duplex  
connections, all devices in the collision domain would need to support jumbo  
frames.  
4-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
• Enabling jumbo frames will limit the maximum threshold for broadcast storm  
control. (See the switchport broadcast command on page 4-137.)  
• The current setting for jumbo frames can be displayed with the show system  
command (page 4-67).  
Example  
Console(config)#jumbo frame  
Console(config)#  
Flash/File Commands  
These commands are used to manage the system code or configuration files.  
Table4-25 Flash/File Commands  
Command  
copy  
Function  
Mode  
Page  
Copies a code image or a switch configuration to or from flash PE  
memory or a TFTP server  
delete  
Deletes a file or code image  
PE  
PE  
PE  
GC  
dir  
Displays a list of files in flash memory  
Displays the files booted  
whichboot  
boot system  
Specifies the file or image used to start up the system  
copy  
This command moves (upload/download) a code image or configuration file  
between the switch’s flash memory and a TFTP server. When you save the system  
code or configuration settings to a file on a TFTP server, that file can later be  
downloaded to the switch to restore system operation. The success of the file  
transfer depends on the accessibility of the TFTP server and the quality of the  
network connection.  
Syntax  
copy file {file | running-config | startup-config | tftp }  
copy running-config { file | startup-config | tftp }  
copy startup-config { file | running-config | tftp }  
copy tftp {file | running-config | startup-config | https-certificate |  
public-key }  
• file - Keyword that allows you to copy to/from a file.  
• running-config - Keyword that allows you to copy to/from the current  
running configuration.  
• startup-config - The configuration used for system initialization.  
• tftp - Keyword that allows you to copy to/from a TFTP server.  
• https-certificate - Copies an HTTPS certificate from an TFTP server to the  
switch.  
4-70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Flash/File Commands  
4
public-key - Keyword that allows you to copy a SSH key from a TFTP  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
• The system prompts for data required to complete the copy command.  
• The destination file name should not contain slashes (\ or /), the leading letter  
of the file name should not be a period (.), and the maximum length for file  
names on the TFTP server is 127 characters or 31 characters for files on the  
switch. (Valid characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, “.”, “-”, “_”)  
• Due to the size limit of the flash memory, the switch supports only two  
operation code files.  
• The maximum number of user-defined configuration files depends on  
available memory.  
• You can use “Factory_Default_Config.cfg” as the source to copy from the  
factory default configuration file, but you cannot use it as the destination.  
• To replace the startup configuration, you must use startup-config as the  
destination.  
• The Boot ROM and Loader cannot be uploaded or downloaded from the TFTP  
server. You must follow the instructions in the release notes for new firmware,  
or contact your distributor for help.  
• For information on specifying an https-certificate, see “Replacing the Default  
Secure-site Certificate” on page 3-60. For information on configuring the  
switch to use HTTPS/SSL for a secure connection, see “ip http secure-server”  
Example  
The following example shows how to upload the configuration settings to a file on  
the TFTP server:  
Console#copy file tftp  
Choose file type:  
1. config: 2. opcode: <1-2>: 1  
Source file name: startup  
TFTP server ip address: 10.1.0.99  
Destination file name: startup.01  
TFTP completed.  
Success.  
Console#  
4-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Line Interface  
4
The following example shows how to copy the running configuration to a startup file.  
Console#copy running-config file  
destination file name: startup  
Write to FLASH Programming.  
\Write to FLASH finish.  
Success.  
Console#  
The following example shows how to download a configuration file:  
Console#copy tftp startup-config  
TFTP server ip address: 10.1.0.99  
Source configuration file name: startup.01  
Startup configuration file name [startup]:  
Write to FLASH Programming.  
\Write to FLASH finish.  
Success.  
Console#  
This example shows how to copy a secure-site certificate from an TFTP server. It  
then reboots the switch to activate the certificate:  
Console#copy tftp https-certificate  
TFTP server ip address: 10.1.0.19  
Source certificate file name: SS-certificate  
Source private file name: SS-private  
Private password: ********  
Success.  
Console#reload  
System will be restarted, continue <y/n>? y  
This example shows how to copy a public-key used by SSH from an TFTP server.  
Note that public key authentication via SSH is only supported for users configured  
locally on the switch:  
Console#copy tftp public-key  
TFTP server IP address: 192.168.1.19  
Choose public key type:  
1. RSA: 2. DSA: <1-2>: 1  
Source file name: steve.pub  
Username: steve  
TFTP Download  
Success.  
Write to FLASH Programming.  
Success.  
Console#  
4-72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Flash/File Commands  
4
delete  
This command deletes a file or image.  
Syntax  
delete filename  
filename - Name of the configuration file or image name.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
• If the file type is used for system startup, then this file cannot be deleted.  
• “Factory_Default_Config.cfg” cannot be deleted.  
Example  
This example shows how to delete the test2.cfg configuration file from flash memory.  
Console#delete test2.cfg  
Console#  
Related Commands  
dir  
This command displays a list of files in flash memory.  
Syntax  
dir {{boot-rom: | config: | opcode:} [:filename]}  
The type of file or image to display includes:  
boot-rom - Boot ROM (or diagnostic) image file.  
config - Switch configuration file.  
opcode - Run-time operation code image file.  
filename - Name of the configuration file or code image.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
If you enter the command dir without any parameters, the system displays all  
files.  
4-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
• File information is shown below:  
Table 4-26 File Directory Information  
Description  
Column Heading  
file name  
file type  
The name of the file.  
File types: Boot-Rom, Operation Code, and Config file.  
Shows if this file is used when the system is started.  
The length of the file in bytes.  
startup  
size  
Example  
The following example shows how to display all file information:  
Console#dir 1:  
file name  
file type  
startup size (byte)  
-----------------------------------  
ES3552XA_diag_v2.2.1.8.bix  
ES3552XA_Opcode_V2.2.6.2.bix  
ES3552XA_V2260.bix  
-------------- ------- -----------  
Boot-Rom image Y  
Operation Code Y  
Operation Code N  
214124  
1749228  
1745500  
5197  
Factory_Default_Config.cfg  
Config File  
Y
-------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Total free space: 3345728  
Console#  
whichboot  
This command displays which files were booted when the system powered up.  
Syntax  
whichboot  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
This example shows the information displayed by the whichboot command. See  
the table under the dir command for a description of the file information displayed by  
this command.  
Console#whichboot  
file name  
------------------  
file type startup  
------------- -------  
Boot-Rom image Y  
size (byte)  
-----------  
ES3552XA_diag_v2.2.1.8.bix  
214124  
ES3552XA_Opcode_V2.2.6.2.bix  
Factory_Default_Config.cfg  
Operation Code Y  
1749228  
5197  
Config File  
Y
Console#  
4-74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Flash/File Commands  
4
boot system  
This command specifies the image used to start up the system.  
Syntax  
boot system {boot-rom| config | opcode}: filename  
The type of file or image to set as a default includes:  
boot-rom* - Boot ROM.  
config* - Configuration file.  
opcode* - Run-time operation code.  
filename - Name of the configuration file or code image.  
* The colon (:) is required.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• A colon (:) is required after the specified file type.  
• If the file contains an error, it cannot be set as the default file.  
Example  
Console(config)#boot system config: startup  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
4-75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
Authentication Commands  
You can configure this switch to authenticate users logging into the system for  
management access using local or RADIUS authentication methods. You can also  
enable port-based authentication for network client access using IEEE 802.1X.  
Table 4-27 Authentication Commands  
Command Group  
Authentication Sequence  
RADIUS Client  
Function  
Page  
Defines logon authentication method and precedence  
Configures settings for authentication via a RADIUS server  
Configures settings for authentication via a TACACS+ server  
Configures secure addresses for a port  
TACACS+ Client  
Port Security  
Port Authentication  
Network Access  
Configures host authentication on specific ports using 802.1X  
Configures MAC authentication and dynamic VLAN assignment  
Authentication Sequence  
Table 4-28 Authentication Sequence  
Function  
Command  
Mode  
GC  
Page  
authentication login  
authentication enable  
Defines logon authentication method and precedence  
Defines the authentication method and precedence for  
command mode change  
GC  
authentication login  
This command defines the login authentication method and precedence. Use the no  
form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
authentication login {[local] [radius] [tacacs]}  
no authentication login  
local - Use local password.  
radius - Use RADIUS server password.  
tacacs - Use TACACS server password.  
Default Setting  
Local  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS+ uses TCP. UDP only offers best effort  
delivery, while TCP offers a connection-oriented transport. Also, note that  
RADIUS encrypts only the password in the access-request packet from the  
client to the server, while TACACS+ encrypts the entire body of the packet.  
4-76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Authentication Commands  
4
• RADIUS and TACACS+ logon authentication assigns a specific privilege level  
for each user name and password pair. The user name, password, and  
privilege level must be configured on the authentication server.  
• You can specify three authentication methods in a single command to indicate  
the authentication sequence. For example, if you enter “authentication login  
radius tacacs local,” the user name and password on the RADIUS server is  
verified first. If the RADIUS server is not available, then authentication is  
attempted on the TACACS+ server. If the TACACS+ server is not available,  
the local user name and password is checked.  
Example  
Console(config)#authentication login radius  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
username - for setting the local user names and passwords (4-27)  
authentication enable  
This command defines the authentication method and precedence to use when  
changing from Exec command mode to Privileged Exec command mode with the  
enable command (see page 4-20). Use the no form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
authentication enable {[local] [radius] [tacacs]}  
no authentication enable  
local - Use local password only.  
radius - Use RADIUS server password only.  
tacacs - Use TACACS server password.  
Default Setting  
Local  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS+ uses TCP. UDP only offers best effort  
delivery, while TCP offers a connection-oriented transport. Also, note that  
RADIUS encrypts only the password in the access-request packet from the  
client to the server, while TACACS+ encrypts the entire body of the packet.  
• RADIUS and TACACS+ logon authentication assigns a specific privilege level  
for each user name and password pair. The user name, password, and  
privilege level must be configured on the authentication server.  
• You can specify three authentication methods in a single command to indicate  
the authentication sequence. For example, if you enter “authentication  
enable radius tacacs local,” the user name and password on the RADIUS  
server is verified first. If the RADIUS server is not available, then  
4-77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
authentication is attempted on the TACACS+ server. If the TACACS+ server  
is not available, the local user name and password is checked.  
Example  
Console(config)#authentication enable radius  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
enable password - sets the password for changing command modes (4-28)  
RADIUS Client  
Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service (RADIUS) is a logon authentication  
protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to  
RADIUS-aware devices on the network. An authentication server contains a  
database of multiple user name/password pairs with associated privilege levels for  
each user or group that require management access to a switch.  
Table 4-29 RADIUS Client Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode  
GC  
Page  
radius-server host  
radius-server port  
radius-server key  
radius-server retransmit  
radius-server timeout  
show radius-server  
Specifies the RADIUS server  
Sets the RADIUS server network port  
Sets the RADIUS encryption key  
Sets the number of retries  
GC  
GC  
GC  
Sets the interval between sending authentication requests GC  
Shows the current RADIUS settings PE  
radius-server host  
This command specifies primary and backup RADIUS servers and authentication  
parameters that apply to each server. Use the no form to restore the default values.  
Syntax  
[no] radius-server index host {host_ip_address | host_alias}  
[auth-port auth_port] [timeout timeout] [retransmit retransmit] [key key]  
index - Allows you to specify up to five servers. These servers are queried  
in sequence until a server responds or the retransmit period expires.  
host_ip_address - IP address of server.  
host_alias - Symbolic name of server. (Maximum length: 20 characters)  
port_number - RADIUS server UDP port used for authentication messages.  
(Range: 1-65535)  
timeout - Number of seconds the switch waits for a reply before resending  
a request. (Range: 1-65535)  
4-78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Authentication Commands  
4
retransmit - Number of times the switch will try to authenticate logon access  
via the RADIUS server. (Range: 1-30)  
key - Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client. Do not  
use blank spaces in the string. (Maximum length: 20 characters)  
Default Setting  
auth-port - 1812  
timeout - 5 seconds  
retransmit - 2  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#radius-server 1 host 192.168.1.20 auth-port 181 timeout  
10 retransmit 5 key green  
Console(config)#  
radius-server port  
This command sets the RADIUS server network port. Use the no form to restore the  
default.  
Syntax  
radius-server port port_number  
no radius-server port  
port_number - RADIUS server UDP port used for authentication  
messages. (Range: 1-65535)  
Default Setting  
1812  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#radius-server port 181  
Console(config)#  
radius-server key  
This command sets the RADIUS encryption key. Use the no form to restore the  
default.  
Syntax  
radius-server key key_string  
no radius-server key  
key_string - Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client.  
Do not use blank spaces in the string. (Maximum length: 20 characters)  
4-79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#radius-server key green  
Console(config)#  
radius-server retransmit  
This command sets the number of retries. Use the no form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
radius-server retransmit number_of_retries  
no radius-server retransmit  
number_of_retries - Number of times the switch will try to authenticate  
logon access via the RADIUS server. (Range: 1-30)  
Default Setting  
2
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#radius-server retransmit 5  
Console(config)#  
radius-server timeout  
This command sets the interval between transmitting authentication requests to the  
RADIUS server. Use the no form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
radius-server timeout number_of_seconds  
no radius-server timeout  
number_of_seconds - Number of seconds the switch waits for a reply  
before resending a request. (Range: 1-65535)  
Default Setting  
5
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
4-80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Authentication Commands  
4
Example  
Console(config)#radius-server timeout 10  
Console(config)#  
show radius-server  
This command displays the current settings for the RADIUS server.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show radius-server  
Remote RADIUS server configuration:  
Global settings  
Communication key with RADIUS server:  
Server port number:  
Retransmit times:  
Request timeout:  
1812  
2
5
Sever 1:  
Server IP address: 192.168.1.1  
Communication key with RADIUS server: *****  
Server port number: 1812  
Retransmit times: 2  
Request timeout: 5  
Console#  
TACACS+ Client  
Terminal Access Controller Access Control System (TACACS+) is a logon  
authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control  
access to TACACS-aware devices on the network. An authentication server  
contains a database of multiple user name/password pairs with associated privilege  
levels for each user or group that require management access to a switch.  
Table 4-30 TACACS Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode  
GC  
Page  
tacacs-server host  
tacacs-server port  
tacacs-server key  
show tacacs-server  
Specifies the TACACS+ server  
Specifies the TACACS+ server network port  
Sets the TACACS+ encryption key  
Shows the current TACACS+ settings  
GC  
GC  
GC  
4-81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Command Line Interface  
4
tacacs-server host  
This command specifies the TACACS+ server. Use the no form to restore the  
default.  
Syntax  
tacacs-server host host_ip_address  
no tacacs-server host  
host_ip_address - IP address of a TACACS+ server.  
Default Setting  
10.11.12.13  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#tacacs-server host 192.168.1.25  
Console(config)#  
tacacs-server port  
This command specifies the TACACS+ server network port. Use the no form to  
restore the default.  
Syntax  
tacacs-server port port_number  
no tacacs-server port  
port_number - TACACS+ server TCP port used for authentication  
messages. (Range: 1-65535)  
Default Setting  
49  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#tacacs-server port 181  
Console(config)#  
tacacs-server key  
This command sets the TACACS+ encryption key. Use the no form to restore the  
default.  
4-82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Authentication Commands  
4
Syntax  
tacacs-server key key_string  
no tacacs-server key  
key_string - Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for the  
client. Do not use blank spaces in the string.  
(Maximum length: 20 characters)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#tacacs-server key green  
Console(config)#  
show tacacs-server  
This command displays the current settings for the TACACS+ server.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show tacacs-server  
Remote TACACS server configuration:  
Server IP address:  
10.11.12.13  
Communication key with TACACS server: *****  
Server port number:  
Console#  
49  
4-83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
Port Security Commands  
These commands can be used to enable port security on a port. When using port  
security, the switch stops learning new MAC addresses on the specified port when it  
has reached a configured maximum number. Only incoming traffic with source  
addresses already stored in the dynamic or static address table for this port will be  
authorized to access the network. The port will drop any incoming frames with a  
source MAC address that is unknown or has been previously learned from another  
port. If a device with an unauthorized MAC address attempts to use the switch port,  
the intrusion will be detected and the switch can automatically take action by  
disabling the port and sending a trap message.  
Table 4-31 Port Security Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode  
IC  
Page  
port security  
Configures a secure port  
mac-address-table static  
show mac-address-table  
Maps a static address to a port in a VLAN  
Displays entries in the bridge-forwarding database  
GC  
PE  
port security  
This command enables or configures port security. Use the no form without any  
keywords to disable port security. Use the no form with the appropriate keyword to  
restore the default settings for a response to security violation or for the maximum  
number of allowed addresses.  
Syntax  
port security [action {shutdown | trap | trap-and-shutdown}  
| max-mac-count address-count]  
no port security [action | max-mac-count]  
action - Response to take when port security is violated.  
- shutdown - Disable port only.  
- trap - Issue SNMP trap message only.  
- trap-and-shutdown - Issue SNMP trap message and disable port.  
• max-mac-count  
- address-count - The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be  
learned on a port. (Range: 0-1024)  
Default Setting  
• Status: Disabled  
• Action: None  
• Maximum Addresses: 0  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)  
4-84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Authentication Commands  
4
Command Usage  
• If you enable port security, the switch stops learning new MAC addresses on  
the specified port when it has reached a configured maximum number. Only  
incoming traffic with source addresses already stored in the dynamic or static  
address table will be accepted.  
• First use the port security max-mac-count command to set the number of  
addresses, and then use the port security command to enable security on the  
port.  
• Use the no port security max-mac-count command to disable port security  
and reset the maximum number of addresses to the default.  
• You can also manually add secure addresses with the mac-address-table  
static command.  
• A secure port has the following restrictions:  
- Cannot use port monitoring.  
- Cannot be a multi-VLAN port.  
- Cannot be connected to a network interconnection device.  
- Cannot be a trunk port.  
• If a port is disabled due to a security violation, it must be manually re-enabled  
using the no shutdown command.  
Example  
The following example enables port security for port 5, and sets the response to a  
security violation to issue a trap message:  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5  
Console(config-if)#port security action trap  
Related Commands  
802.1X Port Authentication  
The switch supports IEEE 802.1X (dot1x) port-based access control that prevents  
unauthorized access to the network by requiring users to first submit credentials for  
authentication. Client authentication is controlled centrally by a RADIUS server  
using EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol).  
Table 4-32 802.1X Port Authentication  
Command  
Function  
Mode  
GC  
Page  
dot1x system-auth-control  
dot1x default  
Enables dot1x globally on the switch.  
Resets all dot1x parameters to their default values  
GC  
dot1x max-req  
Sets the maximum number of times that the switch  
retransmits an EAP request/identity packet to the client  
before it times out the authentication session  
IC  
dot1x port-control  
Sets dot1x mode for a port interface  
IC  
4-85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
Table 4-32 802.1X Port Authentication (Continued)  
Command  
Function  
Mode  
IC  
Page  
dot1x operation-mode  
dot1x re-authenticate  
dot1x re-authentication  
dot1x timeout quiet-period  
Allows single or multiple hosts on an dot1x port  
Forces re-authentication on specific ports  
Enables re-authentication for all ports  
PE  
IC  
Sets the time that a switch port waits after the Max  
Request Count has been exceeded before attempting to  
acquire a new client  
IC  
dot1x timeout re-authperiod Sets the time period after which a connected client must IC  
be re-authenticated  
dot1x timeout tx-period  
Sets the time period during an authentication session that IC  
the switch waits before re-transmitting an EAP packet  
show dot1x  
Shows all dot1x related information  
PE  
dot1x system-auth-control  
This command enables 802.1X port authentication globally on the switch. Use the  
no form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
[no] system-auth-control  
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#dot1x system-auth-control  
Console(config)#  
dot1x default  
This command sets all configurable dot1x global and port settings to their default  
values.  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#dot1x default  
Console(config)#  
4-86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Authentication Commands  
4
dot1x max-req  
This command sets the maximum number of times the switch port will retransmit an  
EAP request/identity packet to the client before it times out the authentication  
session. Use the no form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
dot1x max-req count  
no dot1x max-req  
count – The maximum number of requests (Range: 1-10)  
Default  
2
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#interface eth 1/2  
Console(config-if)#dot1x max-req 2  
Console(config-if)#  
dot1x port-control  
This command sets the dot1x mode on a port interface. Use the no form to restore  
the default.  
Syntax  
dot1x port-control {auto | force-authorized | force-unauthorized}  
no dot1x port-control  
auto – Requires a dot1x-aware connected client to be authorized by the  
RADIUS server. Clients that are not dot1x-aware will be denied access.  
force-authorized – Configures the port to grant access to all clients, either  
dot1x-aware or otherwise.  
force-unauthorized – Configures the port to deny access to all clients,  
either dot1x-aware or otherwise.  
Default  
force-authorized  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#interface eth 1/2  
Console(config-if)#dot1x port-control auto  
Console(config-if)#  
4-87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
dot1x operation-mode  
This command allows single or multiple hosts (clients) to connect to an  
802.1X-authorized port. Use the no form with no keywords to restore the default to  
single host. Use the no form with the multi-host max-count keywords to restore the  
default maximum count.  
Syntax  
dot1x operation-mode {single-host | multi-host [max-count count]}  
no dot1x operation-mode [multi-host max-count]  
single-host – Allows only a single host to connect to this port.  
• multi-host – Allows multiple host to connect to this port.  
• max-count – Keyword for the maximum number of hosts.  
- count – The maximum number of hosts that can connect to a port.  
(Range: 1-20; Default: 5)  
Default  
Single-host  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration  
Command Usage  
• The “max-count” parameter specified by this command is only effective if the  
dot1x mode is set to “auto” by the dot1x port-control command (page 4-87).  
• In “multi-host” mode, only one host connected to a port needs to pass  
authentication for all other hosts to be granted network access. Similarly, a  
port can become unauthorized for all hosts if one attached host fails  
re-authentication or sends an EAPOL logoff message.  
Example  
Console(config)#interface eth 1/2  
Console(config-if)#dot1x operation-mode multi-host max-count 10  
Console(config-if)#  
dot1x re-authenticate  
This command forces re-authentication on all ports or a specific interface.  
Syntax  
dot1x re-authenticate [interface]  
interface  
ethernet unit/port  
- unit - This is unit 1.  
- port - Port number. (Range: 1-26/52)  
4-88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Authentication Commands  
4
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#dot1x re-authenticate  
Console#  
dot1x re-authentication  
This command enables periodic re-authentication globally for all ports. Use the no  
form to disable re-authentication.  
Syntax  
[no] dot1x re-authentication  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#interface eth 1/2  
Console(config-if)#dot1x re-authentication  
Console(config-if)#  
dot1x timeout quiet-period  
This command sets the time that a switch port waits after the Max Request Count  
has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client. Use the no form to  
reset the default.  
Syntax  
dot1x timeout quiet-period seconds  
no dot1x timeout quiet-period  
seconds - The number of seconds. (Range: 1-65535)  
Default  
60 seconds  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#interface eth 1/2  
Console(config-if)#dot1x timeout quiet-period 350  
Console(config-if)#  
4-89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
dot1x timeout re-authperiod  
This command sets the time period after which a connected client must be  
re-authenticated.  
Syntax  
dot1x timeout re-authperiod seconds  
no dot1x timeout re-authperiod  
seconds - The number of seconds. (Range: 1-65535)  
Default  
3600 seconds  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#interface eth 1/2  
Console(config-if)#dot1x timeout re-authperiod 300  
Console(config-if)#  
dot1x timeout tx-period  
This command sets the time that an interface on the switch waits during an  
authentication session before re-transmitting an EAP packet. Use the no form to  
reset to the default value.  
Syntax  
dot1x timeout tx-period seconds  
no dot1x timeout tx-period  
seconds - The number of seconds. (Range: 1-65535)  
Default  
30 seconds  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#interface eth 1/2  
Console(config-if)#dot1x timeout tx-period 300  
Console(config-if)#  
show dot1x  
This command shows general port authentication related settings on the switch or a  
specific interface.  
4-90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Authentication Commands  
4
Syntax  
show dot1x [statistics] [interface interface]  
statistics - Displays dot1x status for each port.  
• interface  
ethernet unit/port  
- unit - This is unit 1.  
- port - Port number. (Range: 1-26/52)  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
This command displays the following information:  
Global 802.1X Parameters – Shows whether or not 802.1X port  
authentication is globally enabled on the switch.  
802.1X Port Summary – Displays the port access control parameters for  
each interface, including the following items:  
- Status  
– Administrative state for port access control.  
- Operation Mode – Dot1x port control operation mode (page 4-88).  
- Mode  
– Dot1x port control mode (page 4-87).  
- Authorized  
– Authorization status (yes or n/a - not authorized).  
802.1X Port Details – Displays the port access control parameters for each  
interface, including the following items:  
- reauth-enabled  
- reauth-period  
– Periodic re-authentication (page 4-89).  
– Time after which a connected client must be  
re-authenticated (page 4-90).  
- quiet-period  
- tx-period  
– Time a port waits after Max Request Count is  
exceeded before attempting to acquire a new  
client (page 4-89).  
– Time a port waits during authentication session  
before re-transmitting EAP packet (page 4-90).  
- supplicant-timeout – Supplicant timeout.  
- server-timeout  
- reauth-max  
- max-req  
– Server timeout.  
– Maximum number of reauthentication attempts.  
– Maximum number of times a port will retransmit  
an EAP request/identity packet to the client  
before it times out the authentication session  
- Status  
- Operation Mode  
– Authorization status (authorized or not).  
– Shows if single or multiple hosts (clients) can  
connect to an 802.1X-authorized port.  
– The maximum number of hosts allowed to  
access this port (page 4-88).  
- Max Count  
4-91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Line Interface  
4
- Port-control  
– Shows the dot1x mode on a port as auto,  
force-authorized, or force-unauthorized  
- Supplicant  
- Current Identifier  
– MAC address of authorized client.  
– The integer (0-255) used by the Authenticator to  
identify the current authentication session.  
Authenticator State Machine  
- State  
– Current state (including initialize, disconnected,  
connecting, authenticating, authenticated, aborting,  
held, force_authorized, force_unauthorized).  
– Number of times connecting state is re-entered.  
- Reauth Count  
Backend State Machine  
- State  
– Current state (including request, response,  
success, fail, timeout, idle, initialize).  
– Number of EAP Request packets sent to the  
Supplicant without receiving a response.  
- Request Count  
- Identifier(Server) – Identifier carried in the most recent EAP Success,  
Failure or Request packet received from the  
Authentication Server.  
Reauthentication State Machine  
- State  
– Current state (including initialize, reauthenticate).  
4-92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Authentication Commands  
4
Example  
Console#show dot1x  
Global 802.1X Parameters  
system-auth-control: enable  
802.1X Port Summary  
Port Name Status  
Operation Mode  
Mode  
Authorized  
1/1  
disabled  
enabled  
Single-Host  
Single-Host  
ForceAuthorized  
auto  
n/a  
yes  
1/2  
.
.
.
1/26  
disabled  
Single-Host  
ForceAuthorized  
n/a  
802.1X Port Details  
802.1X is disabled on port 1/1  
802.1X is enabled on port 1/2  
reauth-enabled: Enable  
reauth-period: 1800  
quiet-period:  
tx-period:  
30  
40  
supplicant-timeout:  
server-timeout: 10  
30  
reauth-max:  
max-req:  
2
5
Status  
Authorized  
Operation mode  
Max count  
Single-Host  
5
Port-control  
Supplicant  
Auto  
00-00-e8-49-5e-dc  
Current Identifier 3  
Authenticator State Machine  
State  
Authenticated  
Reauth Count  
0
Backend State Machine  
State  
Idle  
Request Count  
0
Identifier(Server) 2  
Reauthentication State Machine  
State  
Initialize  
.
.
.
802.1X is disabled on port 1/26  
Console#  
4-93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Line Interface  
4
Network Access  
The Network Access feature controls host access to the network by authenticating  
its MAC address on the connected switch port. Traffic received from a specific MAC  
address is forwarded by the switch only if the source MAC address is successfully  
authenticated by a central RADIUS server. While authentication for a MAC address  
is in progress, all traffic is blocked until authentication is completed. On successful  
authentication, the RADIUS server may optionally assign VLAN settings for the  
switch port.  
Table 4-33 Network Access  
Command  
Function  
Mode  
Page  
network-access mode  
Enables MAC authentication on an interface  
IC  
network-access  
max-mac-count  
Sets a maximum for authenticated MAC addresses on an IC  
interface  
network-access mac-filter  
Configures a MAC address filter  
GC  
network-access  
port-mac-filter  
Binds a MAC address filter to an interface  
IC  
network-access  
dynamic-vlan  
Enables dynamic VLAN assignment from a RADIUS  
server  
IC  
mac-authentication  
reauth-time  
Sets the time period after which a connected MAC  
address must be re-authenticated  
GC  
clear network-access  
Clears authenticated MAC addresses from the address PE  
table  
show network-access  
Displays the MAC authentication settings for port  
interfaces  
PE  
PE  
PE  
show network-access  
mac-filter  
Displays the configuration of MAC authentication filters  
show network-access  
mac-address-table  
Displays information for entries in the secure MAC  
address table  
network-access mode  
Use this command to enable network access authentication on a port interface. Use  
the no form of this command to disable authentication.  
Syntax  
[no] network-access mode mac-authentication  
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration  
4-94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Authentication Commands  
4
Command Usage  
• When enabled on a port interface, the authentication process sends a  
Password Authentication Protocol (PAP) request to a configured RADIUS  
server. The username and password are both equal to the MAC address  
being authenticated.  
• On the RADIUS server, PAP username and passwords must be configured in  
the MAC address format XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX (all in upper case).  
• The RADIUS server may optionally return a VLAN identifier list. VLAN  
identifier list is carried in the “Tunnel-Private-Group-ID” attribute. The VLAN  
list can contain multiple VLAN identifiers in the format “1u,2t,” where “u”  
indicates untagged VLAN and “t” tagged VLAN. The “Tunnel-Type” attribute  
should be set to “VLAN,” and the “Tunnel-Medium-Type” attribute set to “802.”  
• Authenticated MAC addresses are stored as dynamic entries in the switch  
secure MAC address table and are removed when the aging time expires. The  
maximum number of secure MAC addresses supported for the switch system  
is 1024.  
• Configured static MAC addresses are added to the secure address table  
when seen on a switch port. Static addresses are treated as authenticated  
without sending a request to a RADIUS server.  
• MAC authentication, 802.1X, and port security cannot be configured together  
on the same port. Only one security mechanism can be applied.  
• MAC authentication cannot be configured on trunk ports.  
• When a port interface status changes to down, all MAC addresses are cleared  
from the secure MAC address table. Static VLAN assignments are not  
restored.  
Example  
Console(config-if)#network-access mode mac-authentication  
Console(config-if)#  
network-access max-mac-count  
Use this command to set the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be  
authenticated on a port interface. Use the no form of this command to restore the  
default.  
Syntax  
network-access max-mac-count count  
no network-access max-mac-count  
count - The maximum number of authenticated MAC addresses allowed.  
(Range: 1 to 1024)  
Default Setting  
1024  
4-95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration  
Command Usage  
The maximum number of MAC addresses per port is 1024, and the maximum  
number of secure MAC addresses supported for the switch system is 1024.  
When the limit is reached, all new MAC addresses are treated as  
authentication failed.  
Example  
Console(config-if)#network-access max-mac-count 5  
Console(config-if)#  
network-access mac-filter  
Use this command to define MAC address filters for network access. The MAC  
address filters are used to specify MAC addresses to be excluded from network  
access authentication. Use the no form of this command to remove existing MAC  
address filters.  
Syntax  
[no] network-access mac-filter filter-id mac-address  
filter-id - The number that identifies the filter. (Range: 1-64)  
mac-address - A MAC address to be excluded from authentication. (Must  
be in the format: xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx.)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• Enter this command more than once with the same filter ID to add multiple  
MAC addresses to a filter.  
• Once created, filters must be applied to a port interface using the  
network-access port-mac-filter command. Only one filter can be applied to  
a port.  
• MAC addresses in a filter are not authenticated by a RADIUS server when  
seen on a port, the addresses are immediately added to the secure MAC  
address table.  
4-96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Authentication Commands  
4
Example  
The following example creates MAC filter 1 and adds MAC address  
00-00-E8-12-11-01 to the filter.  
Console(config)#network-access mac-filter 1 00-00-e8-12-11-01  
Console(config)#  
network-access port-mac-filter  
Use this command to apply a MAC address filter to a port interface. Use the no form  
of this command to remove a MAC address filter from an interface.  
Syntax  
network-access port-mac-filter filter-id  
no network-access port-mac-filter  
filter-id - The number that identifies the filter. (Range: 1-64)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration  
Command Usage  
• MAC address filters must first be created using the network-access  
mac-filter command.  
• Only one filter can be applied to a port.  
Example  
The following example assigns MAC filter 1 to port 1.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1  
Console(config-if)#network-access port-mac-filter 1  
Console(config-if)#  
network-access dynamic-vlan  
Use this command to enable dynamic VLAN assignment for an authenticated port.  
Use the no to disable dynamic VLAN assignment.  
Syntax  
[no] network-access dynamic-vlan  
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration  
4-97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
Command Usage  
• When enabled, the VLAN identifiers returned by the RADIUS server will be  
applied to the port, providing the VLANs have been already created on the  
switch. GVRP is not used to create the VLANs.  
• The VLAN settings specified by the first authenticated MAC address are  
implemented for a port. Other authenticated MAC address on the port must  
have same VLAN configuration, or they are treated as authentication failure.  
• If dynamic VLAN assignment is enabled on a port and the RADIUS server  
returns no VLAN configuration, the authentication is still treated as a success.  
• When the dynamic VLAN assignment status is changed on a port, all  
authenticated addresses are cleared from the secure MAC address table.  
Example  
The following example enables dynamic VLAN assignment on port 1.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1  
Console(config-if)#network-access dynamic-vlan  
Console(config-if)#  
mac-authentication reauth-time  
Use this command to set the time period after which a connected MAC address  
must be re-authenticated. Use the no form of this command to restore the default  
value.  
Syntax  
mac-authentication reauth-time seconds  
no mac-authentication reauth-time  
seconds - The reauthentication time period.  
(Range: 120-1000000 seconds)  
Default Setting  
1800  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• The reauthentication time is a global setting and applies to all ports.  
• When the reauthentication time expires for a secure MAC address it is  
reauthenticated with the RADIUS server. During the reauthentication process  
traffic through the port remains unaffected.  
Example  
Console(config)#mac-authentication reauth-time 300  
Console(config)#  
4-98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Authentication Commands  
4
clear network-access  
Use this command to clear entries from the secure MAC addresses table.  
Syntax  
clear network-access mac-address-table [static | dynamic]  
[address mac-address] [interface interface]  
static - Specifies static address entries.  
dynamic - Specifies dynamic address entries.  
mac-address - Specifies a MAC address entry. (Format: xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx)  
interface - Specifies a port interface.  
ethernet unit/port  
- unit - This is unit 1.  
- port - Port number. (Range: 1-26/52)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#clear network-access mac-address-table interface ethernet 1/1  
Console#  
show network-access  
Use this command to display the MAC authentication settings for port interfaces.  
Syntax  
show network-access [interface interface]  
interface - Specifies a port interface.  
ethernet unit/port  
- unit - This is unit 1.  
- port - Port number. (Range: 1-26/52)  
Default Setting  
Displays the settings for all interfaces.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
4-99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
Example  
Console#show network-access interface ethernet 1/1  
Port:1/1  
--------------------------------------------------  
--------------------------------------------------  
MAC Authentication  
Maximum MAC Count  
:Disabled  
:1024  
Dynamic VLAN Assignment :Disabled  
Reauthentication Time  
Authenticated Age  
MAC Filter ID  
:1800  
:300  
:None  
Console#  
show network-access mac-filter  
Use this command to display MAC authentication filters.  
Syntax  
show network-access mac-filter [filter-id]  
filter-id - Specifies a filter number. (Range: 1-64)  
Default Setting  
Displays all filters.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show network-access mac-filter 1  
--------- -----------------  
Filter-id MAC-Address  
--------- -----------------  
1
1
1
00-12-34-56-78-9A  
00-12-34-56-78-9B  
00-12-34-56-78-9C  
Console#  
show network-access mac-address-table  
Use this command to display secure MAC address table entries.  
Syntax  
show network-access mac-address-table [static | dynamic]  
[address mac-address [mask]] [interface interface] [sort {address |  
interface}]  
static - Specifies static address entries.  
dynamic - Specifies dynamic address entries.  
mac-address - Specifies a MAC address entry. (Format: xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx)  
mask - Specifies a MAC address bit mask for filtering displayed addresses.  
interface - Specifies a port interface.  
4-100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Authentication Commands  
4
ethernet unit/port  
- unit - This is unit 1.  
- port - Port number. (Range: 1-26/52)  
sort - Sorts displayed entries by either MAC address or interface.  
Default Setting  
Displays all filters.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
When using a bit mask to filter displayed MAC addresses, a 1 means "care"  
and a 0 means "don't care". For example, a MAC of 00-00-01-02-03-04 and  
mask FF-FF-FF-00-00-00 would result in all MACs in the range  
00-00-01-00-00-00 to 00-00-01-FF-FF-FF to be displayed. All other MACs  
would be filtered out.  
Example  
Console#show network-access mac-address-table  
---- ----------------- --------------- --------- -------------------------  
Port MAC-Address  
RADIUS-Server  
Attribute Time  
---- ----------------- --------------- --------- -------------------------  
1/1 00-00-01-02-03-04 172.155.120.17 Static  
1/1 00-00-01-02-03-05 172.155.120.17 Dynamic  
1/1 00-00-01-02-03-06 172.155.120.17 Static  
1/3 00-00-01-02-03-07 172.155.120.17 Dynamic  
00d06h32m50s  
00d06h33m20s  
00d06h35m10s  
00d06h34m20s  
Console#  
4-101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Line Interface  
4
Access Control List Commands  
Access Control Lists (ACL) provide packet filtering for IP frames (based on address,  
protocol, Layer 4 protocol port number or TCP control code) or any frames (based  
on MAC address or Ethernet type). To filter packets, first create an access list, add  
the required rules and then bind the list to a specific port.  
Access Control Lists  
An ACL is a sequential list of permit or deny conditions that apply to IP addresses,  
MAC addresses, or other more specific criteria. This switch tests ingress or egress  
packets against the conditions in an ACL one by one. A packet will be accepted as  
soon as it matches a permit rule, or dropped as soon as it matches a deny rule. If no  
rules match for a list of all permit rules, the packet is dropped; and if no rules match  
for a list of all deny rules, the packet is accepted.  
There are three filtering modes:  
• Standard IP ACL mode (STD-ACL) filters packets based on the source IP address.  
• Extended IP ACL mode (EXT-ACL) filters packets based on source or destination  
IP address, as well as protocol type and protocol port number. If the TCP protocol  
is specified, then you can also filter packets based on the TCP control code.  
• MAC ACL mode (MAC-ACL) filters packets based on the source or destination  
MAC address and the Ethernet frame type (RFC 1060).  
The following restrictions apply to ACLs:  
• Each ACL can have up to 32 rules.  
• The maximum number of ACLs is 88.  
• However, due to resource restrictions, the average number of rules bound the  
ports should not exceed 20.  
• This switch supports ACLs for ingress filtering only. You can only bind one IP ACL  
to any port and one MAC ACL globally for ingress filtering. In other words, only two  
ACLs can be bound to an interface - Ingress IP ACL and Ingress MAC ACL.  
The order in which active ACLs are checked is as follows:  
1. User-defined rules in the Ingress MAC ACL for ingress ports.  
2. User-defined rules in the Ingress IP ACL for ingress ports.  
3. Explicit default rule (permit any any) in the ingress IP ACL for ingress ports.  
4. Explicit default rule (permit any any) in the ingress MAC ACL for ingress ports.  
5. If no explicit rule is matched, the implicit default is permit all.  
4-102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Access Control List Commands  
4
Table 4-34 Access Control Lists  
Function  
Command Groups  
Page  
IP ACLs  
Configures ACLs based on IP addresses, TCP/UDP port number,  
protocol type, and TCP control code  
MAC ACLs  
Configures ACLs based on hardware addresses, packet format, and  
Ethernet type  
ACL Information  
Displays ACLs and associated rules; shows ACLs assigned to each port 4-115  
IP ACLs  
Table 4-35 IP ACLs  
Command  
Function  
Mode  
Page  
access-list ip  
permit, deny  
permit, deny  
Creates an IP ACL and enters configuration mode  
Filters packets matching a specified source IP address  
GC  
STD-ACL 4-104  
EXT-ACL 4-105  
Filters packets meeting the specified criteria, including  
source and destination IP address, TCP/UDP port number,  
protocol type, and TCP control code  
show ip access-list  
ip access-group  
Displays the rules for configured IP ACLs  
Adds a port to an IP ACL  
PE  
IC  
show ip access-group  
map access-list ip  
Shows port assignments for IP ACLs  
PE  
IC  
Sets the CoS value and corresponding output queue for  
packets matching an ACL rule  
show map access-list ip Shows CoS value mapped to an access list for an interface PE  
access-list ip  
This command adds an IP access list and enters configuration mode for standard or  
extended IP ACLs. Use the no form to remove the specified ACL.  
Syntax  
[no] access-list ip {standard | extended} acl_name  
standard – Specifies an ACL that filters packets based on the source IP  
address.  
extended – Specifies an ACL that filters packets based on the source or  
destination IP address, and other more specific criteria.  
acl_name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
4-103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Command Line Interface  
4
Command Usage  
• When you create a new ACL or enter configuration mode for an existing ACL,  
use the permit or deny command to add new rules to the bottom of the list.  
To create an ACL, you must add at least one rule to the list.  
• To remove a rule, use the no permit or no deny command followed by the  
exact text of a previously configured rule.  
• An ACL can contain up to 32 rules.  
Example  
Console(config)#access-list ip standard david  
Console(config-std-acl)#  
Related Commands  
permit, deny 4-104  
permit, deny (Standard ACL)  
This command adds a rule to a Standard IP ACL. The rule sets a filter condition for  
packets emanating from the specified source. Use the no form to remove a rule.  
Syntax  
[no] {permit | deny} {any | source bitmask | host source}  
any – Any source IP address.  
source – Source IP address.  
bitmask – Decimal number representing the address bits to match.  
host – Keyword followed by a specific IP address.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Standard ACL  
Command Usage  
• New rules are appended to the end of the list.  
• Address bitmasks are similar to a subnet mask, containing four integers from  
0 to 255, each separated by a period. The binary mask uses 1 bits to indicate  
“match” and 0 bits to indicate “ignore.” The bitmask is bitwise ANDed with the  
specified source IP address, and then compared with the address for each IP  
packet entering the port(s) to which this ACL has been assigned.  
4-104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Access Control List Commands  
4
Example  
This example configures one permit rule for the specific address 10.1.1.21 and  
another rule for the address range 168.92.16.x – 168.92.31.x using a bitmask.  
Console(config-std-acl)#permit host 10.1.1.21  
Console(config-std-acl)#permit 168.92.16.0 255.255.240.0  
Console(config-std-acl)#  
Related Commands  
permit, deny (Extended ACL)  
This command adds a rule to an Extended IP ACL. The rule sets a filter condition for  
packets with specific source or destination IP addresses, protocol types, source or  
destination protocol ports, or TCP control codes. Use the no form to remove a rule.  
Syntax  
[no] {permit | deny} [protocol-number | udp]  
{any | source address-bitmask | host source}  
{any | destination address-bitmask | host destination}  
[precedence precedence] [tos tos] [dscp dscp]  
[source-port sport [end]] [destination-port dport [end]]  
[no] {permit | deny} tcp  
{any | source address-bitmask | host source}  
{any | destination address-bitmask | host destination}  
[precedence precedence] [tos tos] [dscp dscp]  
[source-port sport [end]] [destination-port dport [end]]  
[control-flag control-flags flag-bitmask]  
protocol-number – A specific protocol number. (Range: 0-255)  
source – Source IP address.  
destination – Destination IP address.  
address-bitmask – Decimal number representing the address bits to match.  
host – Keyword followed by a specific IP address.  
• precedence – IP precedence level. (Range: 0-7)  
• tos – Type of Service level. (Range: 0-15)  
dscp – DSCP priority level. (Range: 0-63)  
21  
sport – Protocol source port number. (Range: 0-65535)  
1
dport – Protocol destination port number. (Range: 0-65535)  
end – Upper bound of the protocol port range. (Range: 0-65535)  
control-flags – Decimal number (representing a bit string) that specifies flag  
bits in byte 14 of the TCP header. (Range: 0-63)  
flag-bitmask – Decimal number representing the code bits to match.  
(Range: 0-63)  
21. Includes TCP, UDP or other Protocol types.  
4-105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Extended ACL  
Command Usage  
• All new rules are appended to the end of the list.  
• Address bitmasks are similar to a subnet mask, containing four integers from  
0 to 255, each separated by a period. The binary mask uses 1 bits to indicate  
“match” and 0 bits to indicate “ignore.” The bitmask is bitwise ANDed with the  
specified source IP address, and then compared with the address for each IP  
packet entering the port(s) to which this ACL has been assigned.  
• You can specify both Precedence and ToS in the same rule. However, if  
DSCP is used, then neither Precedence nor ToS can be specified.  
• The control-code bitmask is a decimal number (representing an equivalent bit  
mask) that is applied to the control code. Enter a decimal number, where the  
equivalent binary bit “1” means to match a bit and “0” means to ignore a bit.  
The following bits may be specified:  
- 1 (fin) – Finish  
- 2 (syn) – Synchronize  
- 4 (rst) – Reset  
- 8 (psh) – Push  
- 16 (ack) – Acknowledgement  
- 32 (urg) – Urgent pointer  
For example, use the code value and mask below to catch packets with the  
following flags set:  
- SYN flag valid, use “control-code 2 2”  
- Both SYN and ACK valid, use “control-code 18 18”  
- SYN valid and ACK invalid, use “control-code 2 18”  
Example  
This example accepts any incoming packets if the source address is within subnet  
10.7.1.x. For example, if the rule is matched; i.e., the rule (10.7.1.0 & 255.255.255.0)  
equals the masked address (10.7.1.2 & 255.255.255.0), the packet passes through.  
Console(config-ext-acl)#permit 10.7.1.1 255.255.255.0 any  
Console(config-ext-acl)#  
This allows TCP packets from class C addresses 192.168.1.0 to any destination  
address when set for destination TCP port 80 (i.e., HTTP).  
Console(config-ext-acl)#permit 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 any  
destination-port 80  
Console(config-ext-acl)#  
4-106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Access Control List Commands  
4
This permits all TCP packets from class C addresses 192.168.1.0 with the TCP  
control code set to “SYN.”  
Console(config-ext-acl)#permit tcp 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 any  
control-flag 2 2  
Console(config-ext-acl)#  
Related Commands  
show ip access-list  
This command displays the rules for configured IP ACLs.  
Syntax  
show ip access-list {standard | extended} [acl_name]  
standard – Specifies a standard IP ACL.  
extended – Specifies an extended IP ACL.  
acl_name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show ip access-list standard  
IP standard access-list david:  
permit host 10.1.1.21  
permit 168.92.0.0 255.255.240.0  
Console#  
Related Commands  
permit, deny 4-104  
ip access-group  
This command binds a port to an IP ACL. Use the no form to remove the port.  
Syntax  
[no] ip access-group acl_name in  
acl_name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)  
in – Indicates that this list applies to ingress packets.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)  
4-107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
Command Usage  
• A port can only be bound to one ACL.  
• If a port is already bound to an ACL and you bind it to a different ACL, the  
switch will replace the old binding with the new one.  
• You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port.  
Example  
Console(config)#int eth 1/25  
Console(config-if)#ip access-group david in  
Console(config-if)#  
Related Commands  
show ip access-group  
This command shows the ports assigned to IP ACLs.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show ip access-group  
Interface ethernet 1/25  
IP access-list david in  
Console#  
Related Commands  
map access-list ip  
This command sets the output queue for packets matching an ACL rule. The  
specified CoS value is only used to map the matching packet to an output queue; it  
is not written to the packet itself. Use the no form to remove the CoS mapping.  
Syntax  
[no] map access-list ip acl_name cos cos-value  
acl_name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)  
cos-value – CoS value. (Range: 0-7)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)  
4-108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Access Control List Commands  
4
Command Usage  
A packet matching a rule within the specified ACL is mapped to one of the  
output queues as shown in the following table. For information on mapping the  
CoS values to output queues, see queue cos-map on page 4-201.  
Table 4-36 Egress Queue Priority Mapping  
Queue  
0
1
2
3
Priority  
1,2  
0,3  
4,5  
6,7  
Example  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/25  
Console(config-if)#map access-list ip david cos 0  
Console(config-if)#  
Related Commands  
show map access-list ip  
This command shows the CoS value mapped to an IP ACL for the current interface.  
(The CoS value determines the output queue for packets matching an ACL rule.)  
Syntax  
show map access-list ip [interface]  
interface  
ethernet unit/port  
- unit - This is unit 1.  
- port - Port number.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show map access-list ip  
Eth 1/25  
Access-list ip david cos 0  
Console#  
Related Commands  
4-109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
MAC ACLs  
Table 4-37 MAC ACLs  
Command  
Function  
Mode  
GC  
Page  
access-list mac  
permit, deny  
Creates a MAC ACL and enters configuration mode  
Filters packets matching a specified source and  
destination address, packet format, and Ethernet type  
MAC-ACL  
show mac access-list  
mac access-group  
Displays the rules for configured MAC ACLs  
Adds a port to a MAC ACL  
PE  
IC  
show mac access-group Shows port assignments for MAC ACLs  
PE  
map access-list mac  
Sets the CoS value and corresponding output queue for IC  
packets matching an ACL rule  
show map access-list  
mac  
Shows CoS value mapped to an access list for an interface PE  
access-list mac  
This command adds a MAC access list and enters MAC ACL configuration mode.  
Use the no form to remove the specified ACL.  
Syntax  
[no] access-list mac acl_name  
acl_name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• When you create a new ACL or enter configuration mode for an existing ACL,  
use the permit or deny command to add new rules to the bottom of the list.  
To create an ACL, you must add at least one rule to the list.  
• To remove a rule, use the no permit or no deny command followed by the  
exact text of a previously configured rule.  
• An ACL can contain up to 32 rules.  
Example  
Console(config)#access-list mac jerry  
Console(config-mac-acl)#  
4-110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Access Control List Commands  
4
Related Commands  
permit, deny (MAC ACL)  
This command adds a rule to a MAC ACL. The rule filters packets matching a  
specified MAC source or destination address (i.e., physical layer address), or  
Ethernet protocol type. Use the no form to remove a rule.  
Syntax  
[no]  
{
{
{
permit deny}  
|
any  
any  
|
|
host source | source address-bitmask}  
host destination | destination address-bitmask}  
[vid vid [vid-end]] [ethertype protocol [protocol-end]]  
Note:- The default is for Ethernet II packets.  
any – Any MAC source or destination address.  
host – A specific MAC address.  
source – Source MAC address.  
destination – Destination MAC address range with bitmask.  
address-bitmask22 – Bitmask for MAC address (in hexidecimal format).  
vid – VLAN ID. (Range: 1-4094)  
vid-end – Upper bound of VID range. (Range: 1-4094)  
protocol – A specific Ethernet protocol number. (Range: 0-65535)  
protocol-end – Upper bound of protocol range. (Range: 0-65535)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
MAC ACL  
Command Usage  
• New rules are added to the end of the list.  
• The ethertype option can only be used to filter Ethernet II formatted packets.  
• A detailed listing of Ethernet protocol types can be found in RFC 1060. A few  
of the more common types include the following:  
- 0800 - IP  
- 0806 - ARP  
- 8137 - IPX  
22. For all bitmasks, “1” means care and “0” means ignore.  
4-111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
Example  
This rule permits packets from any source MAC address to the destination address  
00-e0-29-94-34-de where the Ethernet type is 0800.  
Console(config-mac-acl)#permit any host 00-e0-29-94-34-de ethertype 0800  
Console(config-mac-acl)#  
Related Commands  
show mac access-list  
This command displays the rules for configured MAC ACLs.  
Syntax  
show mac access-list [acl_name]  
acl_name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show mac access-list  
MAC access-list jerry:  
permit any host 00-e0-29-94-34-de ethertype 800 800  
Console#  
Related Commands  
permit, deny 4-111  
mac access-group  
This command binds a port to a MAC ACL. Use the no form to remove the port.  
Syntax  
mac access-group acl_name in  
acl_name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)  
in – Indicates that this list applies to ingress packets.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)  
4-112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Access Control List Commands  
4
Command Usage  
• A port can only be bound to one ACL.  
• If a port is already bound to an ACL and you bind it to a different ACL, the  
switch will replace the old binding with the new one.  
Example  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/25  
Console(config-if)#mac access-group jerry in  
Console(config-if)#  
Related Commands  
show mac access-group  
This command shows the ports assigned to MAC ACLs.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show mac access-group  
Interface ethernet 1/25  
MAC access-list jerry in  
Console#  
Related Commands  
map access-list mac  
This command sets the output queue for packets matching an ACL rule. The  
specified CoS value is only used to map the matching packet to an output queue; it  
is not written to the packet itself. Use the no form to remove the CoS mapping.  
Syntax  
[no] map access-list mac acl_name cos cos-value  
acl_name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)  
cos-value – CoS value. (Range: 0-7)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)  
4-113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
Command Usage  
• You must configure an ACL mask before you can map CoS values to the rule.  
• A packet matching a rule within the specified ACL is mapped to one of the  
output queues as shown below.  
Table 4-38 Egress Queue Priority Mapping  
Queue  
0
1
2
3
Priority  
1,2  
0,3  
4,5  
6,7  
Example  
Console(config)#int eth 1/5  
Console(config-if)#map access-list mac jerry cos 0  
Console(config-if)#  
Related Commands  
show map access-list mac  
This command shows the CoS value mapped to a MAC ACL for the current  
interface. (The CoS value determines the output queue for packets matching an  
ACL rule.)  
Syntax  
show map access-list mac [interface]  
interface  
ethernet unit/port  
- unit - This is unit 1.  
- port - Port number.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show map access-list mac  
Access-list to COS of Eth 1/5  
Access-list jerry cos 0  
Console#  
Related Commands  
4-114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Access Control List Commands  
4
ACL Information  
Table 4-39 ACL Information  
Command  
Function  
Mode  
PE  
Page  
show access-list  
show access-group  
Show all ACLs and associated rules  
Shows the ACLs assigned to each port  
PE  
show access-list  
This command shows all ACLs and associated rules, as well as all the user-defined  
masks.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
Once the ACL is bound to an interface (i.e., the ACL is active), the order in  
which the rules are displayed is determined by the associated mask.  
Example  
Console#show access-list  
IP standard access-list david:  
permit host 10.1.1.21  
permit 168.92.16.0 255.255.240.0  
IP extended access-list bob:  
permit 10.7.1.1 255.255.255.0 any  
permit 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 any destination-port 80 80  
permit 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 any protocol tcp control-code 2 2  
MAC access-list jerry:  
permit any host 00-30-29-94-34-de ethertype 800 800  
IP extended access-list A6:  
deny tcp any any control-flag 2 2  
permit any any  
IP ingress mask ACL:  
mask protocol any any control-flag 2  
Console#  
show access-group  
This command shows the port assignments of ACLs.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Executive  
Example  
Console#show access-group  
Interface ethernet 1/25  
IP standard access-list david  
MAC access-list jerry  
Console#  
4-115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
SNMP Commands  
Controls access to this switch from management stations using the Simple Network  
Management Protocol (SNMP), as well as the error types sent to trap managers.  
SNMP Version 3 also provides security features that cover message integrity,  
authentication, and encryption; as well as controlling user access to specific areas of  
the MIB tree. To use SNMPv3, first set an SNMP engine ID (or accept the default),  
specify read and write access views for the MIB tree, configure SNMP user groups  
with the required security model (i.e., SNMP v1, v2c or v3) and security level (i.e.,  
authentication and privacy), and then assign SNMP users to these groups, along  
with their specific authentication and privacy passwords.  
Table 4-40 SNMP Commands  
Command  
snmp-server  
show snmp  
Function  
Mode Page  
Enables the SNMP agent  
Displays the status of SNMP communications  
GC  
NE, PE  
GC  
snmp-server community Sets up the community access string to permit access to  
SNMP commands  
snmp-server contact  
snmp-server location  
snmp-server host  
Sets the system contact string  
GC  
GC  
GC  
GC  
Sets the system location string  
Specifies the recipient of an SNMP notification operation  
snmp-server enable traps Enables the device to send SNMP traps (i.e., SNMP  
notifications)  
snmp-server engine-id  
show snmp engine-id  
snmp-server view  
show snmp view  
Sets the SNMP engine ID  
Shows the SNMP engine ID  
Adds an SNMP view  
GC  
PE  
GC  
PE  
GC  
PE  
GC  
PE  
Shows the SNMP views  
snmp-server group  
show snmp group  
snmp-server user  
show snmp user  
Adds an SNMP group, mapping users to views  
Shows the SNMP groups  
Adds a user to an SNMP group  
Shows the SNMP users  
4-116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
SNMP Commands  
4
snmp-server  
This command enables the SNMPv3 engine and services for all management clients  
(i.e., versions 1, 2c, 3). Use the no form to disable the server.  
Syntax  
[no] snmp-server  
Default Setting  
Enabled  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#snmp-server  
Console(config)#  
show snmp  
This command can be used to check the status of SNMP communications.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
This command provides information on the community access strings, counter  
information for SNMP input and output protocol data units, and whether or not  
SNMP logging has been enabled with the snmp-server enable traps  
command.  
4-117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
Example  
Console#show snmp  
SNMP Agent: enabled  
SNMP traps:  
Authentication: enable  
Link-up-down: enable  
SNMP communities:  
1. private, and the privilege is read-write  
2. public, and the privilege is read-only  
0 SNMP packets input  
0 Bad SNMP version errors  
0 Unknown community name  
0 Illegal operation for community name supplied  
0 Encoding errors  
0 Number of requested variables  
0 Number of altered variables  
0 Get-request PDUs  
0 Get-next PDUs  
0 Set-request PDUs  
0 SNMP packets output  
0 Too big errors  
0 No such name errors  
0 Bad values errors  
0 General errors  
0 Response PDUs  
0 Trap PDUs  
SNMP logging: disabled  
Console#  
snmp-server community  
This command defines the SNMP v1 and v2c community access string. Use the no  
form to remove the specified community string.  
Syntax  
snmp-server community string [ro|rw]  
no snmp-server community string  
string - Community string that acts like a password and permits access to  
the SNMP protocol. (Maximum length: 32 characters, case sensitive;  
Maximum number of strings: 5)  
ro - Specifies read-only access. Authorized management stations are only  
able to retrieve MIB objects.  
rw - Specifies read/write access. Authorized management stations are able  
to both retrieve and modify MIB objects.  
Default Setting  
• public - Read-only access. Authorized management stations are only able to  
retrieve MIB objects.  
4-118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
SNMP Commands  
4
• private - Read/write access. Authorized management stations are able to both  
retrieve and modify MIB objects.  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#snmp-server community alpha rw  
Console(config)#  
snmp-server contact  
This command sets the system contact string. Use the no form to remove the  
system contact information.  
Syntax  
snmp-server contact string  
no snmp-server contact  
string - String that describes the system contact information.  
(Maximum length: 255 characters)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#snmp-server contact Paul  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
snmp-server location  
This command sets the system location string. Use the no form to remove the  
location string.  
Syntax  
snmp-server location text  
no snmp-server location  
text - String that describes the system location.  
(Maximum length: 255 characters)  
Default Setting  
None  
4-119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#snmp-server location WC-19  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
snmp-server host  
This command specifies the recipient of a Simple Network Management Protocol  
notification operation. Use the no form to remove the specified host.  
Syntax  
snmp-server host host-addr [inform [retry retries | timeout seconds]]  
community-string [version {1 | 2c | 3 {auth | noauth | priv} [udp-port port]}  
no snmp-server host host-addr  
host-addr - Internet address of the host (the targeted recipient).  
(Maximum host addresses: 5 trap destination IP address entries)  
inform - Notifications are sent as inform messages. Note that this option is  
only available for version 2c and 3 hosts. (Default: traps are used)  
- retries - The maximum number of times to resend an inform message if  
the recipient does not acknowledge receipt. (Range: 0-255; Default: 3)  
- seconds - The number of seconds to wait for an acknowledgment before  
resending an inform message. (Range: 0-2147483647 centiseconds;  
Default: 1500 centiseconds)  
community-string - Password-like community string sent with the  
notification operation to SNMP V1 and V2c hosts. Although you can set this  
string using the snmp-server host command by itself, we recommend that  
you define this string using the snmp-server community command prior  
to using the snmp-server host command. (Maximum length:  
32 characters)  
version - Specifies whether to send notifications as SNMP Version 1, 2c or  
3 traps. (Range: 1, 2c, 3; Default: 1)  
- auth | noauth | priv - This group uses SNMPv3 with authentication, no  
authentication, or with authentication and privacy. See “Simple Network  
Management Protocol” on page 3-38 for further information about these  
authentication and encryption options.  
port - Host UDP port to use. (Range: 1-65535; Default: 162)  
Default Setting  
• Host Address: None  
• Notification Type: Traps  
4-120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
SNMP Commands  
4
• SNMP Version: 1  
• UDP Port: 162  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• If you do not enter an snmp-server host command, no notifications are sent.  
In order to configure the switch to send SNMP notifications, you must enter at  
least one snmp-server host command. In order to enable multiple hosts, you  
must issue a separate snmp-server host command for each host.  
• The snmp-server host command is used in conjunction with the  
snmp-server enable traps command. Use the snmp-server enable traps  
command to enable the sending of traps or informs and to specify which  
SNMP notifications are sent globally. For a host to receive notifications, at  
least one snmp-server enable traps command and the snmp-server host  
command for that host must be enabled.  
• Some notification types cannot be controlled with the snmp-server enable  
traps command. For example, some notification types are always enabled.  
• Notifications are issued by the switch as trap messages by default. The  
recipient of a trap message does not send a response to the switch. Traps are  
therefore not as reliable as inform messages, which include a request for  
acknowledgement of receipt. Informs can be used to ensure that critical  
information is received by the host. However, note that informs consume more  
system resources because they must be kept in memory until a response is  
received. Informs also add to network traffic. You should consider these  
effects when deciding whether to issue notifications as traps or informs.  
To send an inform to a SNMPv2c host, complete these steps:  
1. Enable the SNMP agent (page 4-117).  
2. Allow the switch to send SNMP traps; i.e., notifications (page 4-122).  
3. Specify the target host that will receive inform messages with the  
snmp-server host command as described in this section.  
4. Create a view with the required notification messages (page 4-125).  
5. Create a group that includes the required notify view (page 4-126).  
To send an inform to a SNMPv3 host, complete these steps:  
1. Enable the SNMP agent (page 4-117).  
2. Allow the switch to send SNMP traps; i.e., notifications (page 4-122).  
3. Specify the target host that will receive inform messages with the  
snmp-server host command as described in this section.  
4. Create a view with the required notification messages (page 4-125).  
5. Create a group that includes the required notify view (page 4-126).  
6. Specify a remote engine ID where the user resides (page 4-123).  
7. Then configure a remote user (page 4-128).  
• The switch can send SNMP Version 1, 2c or 3 notifications to a host IP  
address, depending on the SNMP version that the management station  
4-121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Line Interface  
4
supports. If the snmp-server host command does not specify the SNMP  
version, the default is to send SNMP version 1 notifications.  
• If you specify an SNMP Version 3 host, then the community string is  
interpreted as an SNMP user name. If you use the V3 “auth” or “priv” options,  
the user name must first be defined with the snmp-server user command.  
Otherwise, the authentication password and/or privacy password will not  
exist, and the switch will not authorize SNMP access for the host. However, if  
you specify a V3 host with the “noauth” option, an SNMP user account will be  
generated, and the switch will authorize SNMP access for the host.  
Example  
Console(config)#snmp-server host 10.1.19.23 batman  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
snmp-server enable traps  
This command enables this device to send Simple Network Management Protocol  
traps or informs (i.e., SNMP notifications). Use the no form to disable SNMP  
notifications.  
Syntax  
[no] snmp-server enable traps [authentication | link-up-down]  
authentication - Keyword to issue authentication failure notifications.  
link-up-down - Keyword to issue link-up or link-down notifications.  
Default Setting  
Issue authentication and link-up-down traps.  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• If you do not enter an snmp-server enable traps command, no notifications  
controlled by this command are sent. In order to configure this device to send  
SNMP notifications, you must enter at least one snmp-server enable traps  
command. If you enter the command with no keywords, both authentication  
and link-up-down notifications are enabled. If you enter the command with a  
keyword, only the notification type related to that keyword is enabled.  
• The snmp-server enable traps command is used in conjunction with the  
snmp-server host command. Use the snmp-server host command to  
specify which host or hosts receive SNMP notifications. In order to send  
notifications, you must configure at least one snmp-server host command.  
• The authentication, link-up, and link-down traps are legacy notifications, and  
therefore when used for SNMP Version 3 hosts, they must be enabled in  
4-122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
SNMP Commands  
4
conjunction with the corresponding entries in the Notify View assigned by the  
Example  
Console(config)#snmp-server enable traps link-up-down  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
snmp-server engine-id  
This command configures an identification string for the SNMPv3 engine. Use the  
no form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
snmp-server engine-id {local | remote {ip-address}} engineid-string  
no snmp-server engine-id {local | remote {ip-address}}  
local - Specifies the SNMP engine on this switch.  
remote - Specifies an SNMP engine on a remote device.  
ip-address - The Internet address of the remote device.  
engineid-string - String identifying the engine ID.  
(Range: 10-64 hexadecimal characters)  
Default Setting  
A unique engine ID is automatically generated by the switch based on its MAC  
address.  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• An SNMP engine is an independent SNMP agent that resides either on this  
switch or on a remote device. This engine protects against message replay,  
delay, and redirection. The engine ID is also used in combination with user  
passwords to generate the security keys for authenticating and encrypting  
SNMPv3 packets.  
• A remote engine ID is required when using SNMPv3 informs. (See  
snmp-server host on page 4-120.) The remote engine ID is used to compute  
the security digest for authenticating and encrypting packets sent to a user on  
the remote host. SNMP passwords are localized using the engine ID of the  
authoritative agent. For informs, the authoritative SNMP agent is the remote  
agent. You therefore need to configure the remote agent’s SNMP engine ID  
before you can send proxy requests or informs to it.  
• Trailing zeroes need not be entered to uniquely specify a engine ID. In other  
words, the value “0123456789” is equivalent to “0123456789” followed by 22  
zeroes.  
4-123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
• A local engine ID is automatically generated that is unique to the switch. This  
is referred to as the default engine ID. If the local engine ID is deleted or  
changed, all SNMP users will be cleared. You will need to reconfigure all  
existing users (page 4-128).  
Example  
Console(config)#snmp-server engine-id local 12345  
Console(config)#snmp-server engineID remote 54321 192.168.1.19  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
show snmp engine-id  
This command shows the SNMP engine ID.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
This example shows the default engine ID.  
Console#show snmp engine-id  
Local SNMP engineID: 8000002a8000000000e8666672  
Local SNMP engineBoots: 1  
Remote SNMP engineID  
80000000030004e2b316c54321  
Console#  
IP address  
192.168.1.19  
Table 4-41 show snmp engine-id - display description  
Description  
String identifying the engine ID.  
Field  
Local SNMP engineID  
Local SNMP engineBoots The number of times that the engine has (re-)initialized since the snmp EngineID  
was last configured.  
Remote SNMP engineID String identifying an engine ID on a remote device.  
IP address  
IP address of the device containing the corresponding remote SNMP engine.  
4-124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
SNMP Commands  
4
snmp-server view  
This command adds an SNMP view which controls user access to the MIB. Use the  
no form to remove an SNMP view.  
Syntax  
snmp-server view view-name oid-tree {included | excluded}  
no snmp-server view view-name  
• view-name - Name of an SNMP view. (Range: 1-64 characters)  
oid-tree - Object identifier of a branch within the MIB tree. Wild cards can  
be used to mask a specific portion of the OID string. (Refer to the  
examples.)  
included - Defines an included view.  
excluded - Defines an excluded view.  
Default Setting  
defaultview (includes access to the entire MIB tree)  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• Views are used in the snmp-server group command to restrict user access  
to specified portions of the MIB tree.  
• The predefined view “defaultview” includes access to the entire MIB tree.  
Examples  
This view includes MIB-2.  
Console(config)#snmp-server view mib-2 1.3.6.1.2.1 included  
Console(config)#  
This view includes the MIB-2 interfaces table, ifDescr. The wild card is used to select  
all the index values in this table.  
Console(config)#snmp-server view ifEntry.2 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.*.2 included  
Console(config)#  
This view includes the MIB-2 interfaces table, and the mask selects all index entries.  
Console(config)#snmp-server view ifEntry.a 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.* included  
Console(config)#  
4-125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
show snmp view  
This command shows information on the SNMP views.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show snmp view  
View Name: mib-2  
Subtree OID: 1.2.2.3.6.2.1  
View Type: included  
Storage Type: permanent  
Row Status: active  
View Name: defaultview  
Subtree OID: 1  
View Type: included  
Storage Type: volatile  
Row Status: active  
Console#  
Table 4-42 show snmp view - display description  
Field  
Description  
View Name  
Subtree OID  
View Type  
Storage Type  
Row Status  
Name of an SNMP view.  
A branch in the MIB tree.  
Indicates if the view is included or excluded.  
The storage type for this entry.  
The row status of this entry.  
snmp-server group  
This command adds an SNMP group, mapping SNMP users to SNMP views. Use  
the no form to remove an SNMP group.  
Syntax  
snmp-server group groupname {v1 | v2c | v3 {auth | noauth | priv}}  
[read readview] [write writeview] [notify notifyview]  
no snmp-server group groupname  
• groupname - Name of an SNMP group. (Range: 1-32 characters)  
v1 | v2c | v3 - Use SNMP version 1, 2c or 3.  
auth | noauth | priv - This group uses SNMPv3 with authentication, no  
authentication, or with authentication and privacy. See “Simple Network  
Management Protocol” on page 3-38 for further information about these  
authentication and encryption options.  
readview - Defines the view for read access. (1-64 characters)  
writeview - Defines the view for write access. (1-64 characters)  
notifyview - Defines the view for notifications. (1-64 characters)  
4-126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
SNMP Commands  
4
Default Setting  
23  
24  
• Default groups: public (read only), private (read/write)  
readview - Every object belonging to the Internet OID space (1.3.6.1).  
• writeview - Nothing is defined.  
notifyview - Nothing is defined.  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• A group sets the access policy for the assigned users.  
• When authentication is selected, the MD5 or SHA algorithm is used as  
specified in the snmp-server user command.  
• When privacy is selected, the DES 56-bit algorithm is used for data encryption.  
• For additional information on the notification messages supported by this  
the authentication, link-up and link-down messages are legacy traps and must  
therefore be enabled in conjunction with the snmp-server enable traps  
Example  
Console(config)#snmp-server group r&d v3 auth write daily  
Console(config)#  
show snmp group  
Four default groups are provided – SNMPv1 read-only access and read/write  
access, and SNMPv2c read-only access and read/write access.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show snmp group  
Group Name: r&d  
Security Model: v3  
Read View: defaultview  
Write View: daily  
Notify View: none  
Storage Type: permanent  
Row Status: active  
Group Name: public  
Security Model: v1  
Read View: defaultview  
Write View: none  
Notify View: none  
Storage Type: volatile  
Row Status: active  
23. No view is defined.  
24. Maps to the defaultview.  
4-127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
Group Name: public  
Security Model: v2c  
Read View: defaultview  
Write View: none  
Notify View: none  
Storage Type: volatile  
Row Status: active  
Group Name: private  
Security Model: v1  
Read View: defaultview  
Write View: defaultview  
Notify View: none  
Storage Type: volatile  
Row Status: active  
Group Name: private  
Security Model: v2c  
Read View: defaultview  
Write View: defaultview  
Notify View: none  
Storage Type: volatile  
Row Status: active  
Console#  
Table 4-43 show snmp group - display description  
Field  
Description  
groupname  
security model  
readview  
Name of an SNMP group.  
The SNMP version.  
The associated read view.  
The associated write view.  
The associated notify view.  
The storage type for this entry.  
The row status of this entry.  
writeview  
notifyview  
storage-type  
Row Status  
snmp-server user  
This command adds a user to an SNMP group, restricting the user to a specific  
SNMP Read, Write, or Notify View. Use the no form to remove a user from an SNMP  
group.  
Syntax  
snmp-server user username groupname [remote ip-address] {v1 | v2c | v3  
[encrypted] [auth {md5 | sha} auth-password [priv des56 priv-password]]  
no snmp-server user username {v1 | v2c | v3 | remote}  
username - Name of user connecting to the SNMP agent.  
(Range: 1-32 characters)  
• groupname - Name of an SNMP group to which the user is assigned.  
(Range: 1-32 characters)  
4-128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
SNMP Commands  
4
remote - Specifies an SNMP engine on a remote device.  
ip-address - The Internet address of the remote device.  
v1 | v2c | v3 - Use SNMP version 1, 2c or 3.  
encrypted - Accepts the password as encrypted input.  
auth - Uses SNMPv3 with authentication.  
md5 | sha - Uses MD5 or SHA authentication.  
auth-password - Authentication password. Enter as plain text if the  
encrypted option is not used. Otherwise, enter an encrypted password.  
(A minimum of eight characters is required.)  
priv des56 - Uses SNMPv3 with privacy with DES56 encryption.  
priv-password - Privacy password. Enter as plain text if the encrypted  
option is not used. Otherwise, enter an encrypted password.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• The SNMP engine ID is used to compute the authentication/privacy digests  
from the password. You should therefore configure the engine ID with the  
snmp-server engine-id command before using this configuration command.  
• Before you configure a remote user, use the snmp-server engine-id  
command (page 4-123) to specify the engine ID for the remote device where  
the user resides. Then use the snmp-server user command to specify the  
user and the IP address for the remote device where the user resides. The  
remote agent’s SNMP engine ID is used to compute authentication/privacy  
digests from the user’s password. If the remote engine ID is not first configured,  
the snmp-server user command specifying a remote user will fail.  
• SNMP passwords are localized using the engine ID of the authoritative agent.  
For informs, the authoritative SNMP agent is the remote agent. You therefore  
need to configure the remote agent’s SNMP engine ID before you can send  
proxy requests or informs to it.  
Example  
Console(config)#snmp-server user steve group r&d v3 auth md5 greenpeace  
priv des56 einstien  
Console(config)#snmp-server user mark group r&d remote 192.168.1.19 v3  
auth md5 greenpeace priv des56 einstien  
Console(config)#  
4-129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Line Interface  
4
show snmp user  
This command shows information on SNMP users.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show snmp user  
EngineId: 800000ca030030f1df9ca00000  
User Name: steve  
Authentication Protocol: md5  
Privacy Protocol: des56  
Storage Type: nonvolatile  
Row Status: active  
SNMP remote user  
EngineId: 80000000030004e2b316c54321  
User Name: mark  
Authentication Protocol: mdt  
Privacy Protocol: des56  
Storage Type: nonvolatile  
Row Status: active  
Console#  
Table 4-44 show snmp user - display description  
Description  
Field  
EngineId  
String identifying the engine ID.  
User Name  
Name of user connecting to the SNMP agent.  
The authentication protocol used with SNMPv3.  
The privacy protocol used with SNMPv3.  
The storage type for this entry.  
Authentication Protocol  
Privacy Protocol  
Storage Type  
Row Status  
The row status of this entry.  
SNMP remote user  
A user associated with an SNMP engine on a remote device.  
4-130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Interface Commands  
4
Interface Commands  
These commands are used to display or set communication parameters for an  
Ethernet port, aggregated link, or VLAN.  
Table 4-45 Interface Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode  
Page  
interface  
Configures an interface type and enters interface configuration GC  
mode  
description  
Adds a description to an interface configuration  
IC  
speed-duplex  
Configures the speed and duplex operation of a given interface IC  
when autonegotiation is disabled  
negotiation  
capabilities  
Enables autonegotiation of a given interface  
IC  
IC  
Advertises the capabilities of a given interface for use in  
autonegotiation  
flowcontrol  
shutdown  
Enables flow control on a given interface  
Disables an interface  
IC  
IC  
IC  
switchport broadcast Configures the broadcast storm control threshold  
packet-rate  
clear counters  
Clears statistics on an interface  
PE  
show interfaces status Displays status for the specified interface  
NE, PE 4-138  
NE, PE 4-139  
show interfaces  
counters  
Displays statistics for the specified interfaces  
show interfaces  
switchport  
Displays the administrative and operational status of an  
interface  
NE, PE 4-140  
interface  
This command configures an interface type and enter interface configuration mode.  
Use the no form to remove a trunk.  
Syntax  
interface interface  
no interface port-channel channel-id  
interface  
ethernet unit/port  
- unit - This is unit 1.  
- port - Port number. (Range: 1-26/52)  
port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)  
vlan vlan-id (Range: 1-4094)  
Default Setting  
None  
4-131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Command Line Interface  
4
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
To specify port 24, enter the following command:  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/24  
Console(config-if)#  
description  
This command adds a description to an interface. Use the no form to remove the  
description.  
Syntax  
description string  
no description  
string - Comment or a description to help you remember what is attached  
to this interface. (Range: 1-64 characters)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Example  
The following example adds a description to port 24.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/24  
Console(config-if)#description RD-SW#3  
Console(config-if)#  
speed-duplex  
This command configures the speed and duplex mode of a given interface when  
autonegotiation is disabled. Use the no form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
speed-duplex {1000full | 100full | 100half | 10full | 10half}  
no speed-duplex  
1000full - Forces 1000 Mbps full-duplex operation  
100full - Forces 100 Mbps full-duplex operation  
100half - Forces 100 Mbps half-duplex operation  
10full - Forces 10 Mbps full-duplex operation  
10half - Forces 10 Mbps half-duplex operation  
4-132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Interface Commands  
4
Default Setting  
• Auto-negotiation is enabled by default.  
• When auto-negotiation is disabled, the default speed-duplex setting is 100half  
for 100BASE-TX ports and 1000full for Gigabit Ethernet ports.  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
• To force operation to the speed and duplex mode specified in a speed-duplex  
command, use the no negotiation command to disable auto-negotiation on  
the selected interface.  
• When using the negotiation command to enable auto-negotiation, the  
optimal settings will be determined by the capabilities command. To set the  
speed/duplex mode under auto-negotiation, the required mode must be  
specified in the capabilities list for an interface.  
Example  
The following example configures port 5 to 100 Mbps, half-duplex operation.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5  
Console(config-if)#speed-duplex 100half  
Console(config-if)#no negotiation  
Console(config-if)#  
Related Commands  
negotiation  
This command enables autonegotiation for a given interface. Use the no form to  
disable autonegotiation.  
Syntax  
[no] negotiation  
Default Setting  
Enabled  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
• When auto-negotiation is enabled the switch will negotiate the best settings  
for a link based on the capabilities command. When auto-negotiation is  
disabled, you must manually specify the link attributes with the speed-duplex  
and flowcontrol commands.  
4-133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
• If autonegotiation is disabled, auto-MDI/MDI-X pin signal configuration will  
also be disabled for the RJ-45 ports.  
Example  
The following example configures port 11 to use autonegotiation.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/11  
Console(config-if)#negotiation  
Console(config-if)#  
Related Commands  
capabilities  
This command advertises the port capabilities of a given interface during  
autonegotiation. Use the no form with parameters to remove an advertised  
capability, or the no form without parameters to restore the default values.  
Syntax  
[no] capabilities {1000full | 100full | 100half | 10full | 10half | flowcontrol |  
symmetric}  
1000full - Supports 1000 Mbps full-duplex operation  
100full - Supports 100 Mbps full-duplex operation  
100half - Supports 100 Mbps half-duplex operation  
10full - Supports 10 Mbps full-duplex operation  
10half - Supports 10 Mbps half-duplex operation  
flowcontrol - Supports flow control  
symmetric (Gigabit only) - When specified, the port transmits and receives  
pause frames; when not specified, the port will auto-negotiate to determine  
the sender and receiver for asymmetric pause frames. (The current switch  
ASIC only supports symmetric pause frames.)  
Default Setting  
• 100BASE-TX: 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full  
• 1000BASE-T: 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full, 1000full  
• SFP: 1000full  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
When auto-negotiation is enabled with the negotiation command, the switch  
will negotiate the best settings for a link based on the capabilites command.  
When auto-negotiation is disabled, you must manually specify the link  
attributes with the speed-duplex and flowcontrol commands.  
4-134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Interface Commands  
4
Example  
The following example configures Ethernet port 5 capabilities to 100half, 100full and  
flow control.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5  
Console(config-if)#capabilities 100half  
Console(config-if)#capabilities 100full  
Console(config-if)#capabilities flowcontrol  
Console(config-if)#  
Related Commands  
flowcontrol  
This command enables flow control. Use the no form to disable flow control.  
Syntax  
[no] flowcontrol  
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
• Flow control can eliminate frame loss by “blocking” traffic from end stations or  
segments connected directly to the switch when its buffers fill. When enabled,  
back pressure is used for half-duplex operation and IEEE 802.3x for  
full-duplex operation.  
• To force flow control on or off (with the flowcontrol or no flowcontrol  
command), use the no negotiation command to disable auto-negotiation on  
the selected interface.  
• When using the negotiation command to enable auto-negotiation, the  
optimal settings will be determined by the capabilities command. To enable  
flow control under auto-negotiation, “flowcontrol” must be included in the  
capabilities list for any port  
• Avoid using flow control on a port connected to a hub unless it is actually  
required to solve a problem. Otherwise back pressure jamming signals may  
degrade overall performance for the segment attached to the hub.  
4-135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
Example  
The following example enables flow control on port 5.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5  
Console(config-if)#flowcontrol  
Console(config-if)#no negotiation  
Console(config-if)#  
Related Commands  
capabilities (flowcontrol, symmetric) (4-134)  
shutdown  
This command disables an interface. To restart a disabled interface, use the no  
form.  
Syntax  
[no] shutdown  
Default Setting  
All interfaces are enabled.  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
This command allows you to disable a port due to abnormal behavior  
(e.g., excessive collisions), and then reenable it after the problem has been  
resolved. You may also want to disable a port for security reasons.  
Example  
The following example disables port 5.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5  
Console(config-if)#shutdown  
Console(config-if)#  
4-136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Interface Commands  
4
switchport broadcast packet-rate  
This command configures broadcast storm control. Use the no form to disable  
broadcast storm control.  
Syntax  
switchport broadcast octet-rate rate  
no switchport broadcast  
rate - Threshold level as a rate; i.e., octets per second.  
(Range: 64-95232000)  
Default Setting  
Enabled for all ports  
Packet-rate limit: 32000 octets per second  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)  
Command Usage  
• When broadcast traffic exceeds the specified threshold, packets above that  
threshold are dropped.  
• This command can enable or disable broadcast storm control for the selected  
interface. However, the specified threshold value applies to all ports on the  
switch.  
Example  
The following shows how to configure broadcast storm control at 600 packets per  
second:  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5  
Console(config-if)#switchport broadcast octet-rate 600  
Console(config-if)#  
clear counters  
This command clears statistics on an interface.  
Syntax  
clear counters interface  
interface  
ethernet unit/port  
- unit - This is unit 1.  
- port - Port number. (Range: 1-26/52)  
port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)  
Default Setting  
None  
4-137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
Statistics are only initialized for a power reset. This command sets the base  
value for displayed statistics to zero for the current management session.  
However, if you log out and back into the management interface, the statistics  
displayed will show the absolute value accumulated since the last power reset.  
Example  
The following example clears statistics on port 5.  
Console#clear counters ethernet 1/5  
Console#  
show interfaces status  
This command displays the status for an interface.  
Syntax  
show interfaces status [interface]  
interface  
ethernet unit/port  
- unit - This is unit 1.  
- port - Port number. (Range: 1-26/52)  
port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)  
vlan vlan-id (Range: 1-4094)  
Default Setting  
Shows the status for all interfaces.  
Command Mode  
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
If no interface is specified, information on all interfaces is displayed. For a  
description of the items displayed by this command, see “Displaying  
4-138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Interface Commands  
4
Example  
Console#show interfaces status ethernet 1/5  
Information of Eth 1/5  
Basic information:  
Port type:  
Mac address:  
Configuration:  
Name:  
100TX  
00-00-AB-CD-00-01  
Port admin:  
Speed-duplex:  
Capabilities:  
Broadcast storm:  
Up  
Auto  
10half, 10full, 100half, 100full,  
Enabled  
Broadcast storm limit: 32000 octets/second  
Flow control:  
Lacp:  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Disabled  
0
Port security:  
Max MAC count:  
Port security action:  
Current status:  
Link status:  
None  
Up  
Port operation status: Up  
Operation speed-duplex: 100full  
Flow control type:  
None  
Console#show interfaces status vlan 1  
Information of VLAN 1  
MAC address:  
Console#  
00-00-AB-CD-00-00  
show interfaces counters  
This command displays interface statistics.  
Syntax  
show interfaces counters [interface]  
interface  
ethernet unit/port  
- unit - This is unit 1.  
- port - Port number. (Range: 1-26/52)  
port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)  
Default Setting  
Shows the counters for all interfaces.  
Command Mode  
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
If no interface is specified, information on all interfaces is displayed. For a  
description of the items displayed by this command, see “Showing Port  
4-139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
Example  
Console#show interfaces counters ethernet 1/7  
Ethernet 1/7  
Iftable stats:  
Octets input: 30658, Octets output: 196550  
Unicast input: 6, Unicast output: 5  
Discard input: 0, Discard output: 0  
Error input: 0, Error output: 0  
Unknown protos input: 0, QLen output: 0  
Extended iftable stats:  
Multi-cast input: 0, Multi-cast output: 3064  
Broadcast input: 262, Broadcast output: 1  
Ether-like stats:  
Alignment errors: 0, FCS errors: 0  
Single Collision frames: 0, Multiple collision frames: 0  
SQE Test errors: 0, Deferred transmissions: 0  
Late collisions: 0, Excessive collisions: 0  
Internal mac transmit errors: 0, Internal mac receive errors: 0  
Frame too longs: 0, Carrier sense errors: 0  
Symbol errors: 0  
RMON stats:  
Drop events: 0, Octets: 227208, Packets: 3338  
Broadcast pkts: 263, Multi-cast pkts: 3064  
Undersize pkts: 0, Oversize pkts: 0  
Fragments: 0, Jabbers: 0  
CRC align errors: 0, Collisions: 0  
Packet size <= 64 octets: 3150, Packet size 65 to 127 octets: 139  
Packet size 128 to 255 octets: 49, Packet size 256 to 511 octets: 0  
Packet size 512 to 1023 octets: 0, Packet size 1024 to 1518 octets: 0  
Console#  
show interfaces switchport  
This command displays the administrative and operational status of the specified  
interfaces.  
Syntax  
show interfaces switchport [interface]  
interface  
ethernet unit/port  
- unit - This is unit 1.  
- port - Port number. (Range: 1-26/52)  
port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)  
Default Setting  
Shows all interfaces.  
Command Mode  
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
If no interface is specified, information on all interfaces is displayed.  
4-140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Interface Commands  
4
Example  
This example shows the configuration setting for port 24.  
Console#show interfaces switchport ethernet 1/24  
Broadcast threshold:  
LACP status:  
Enabled, 600 octets/second  
Enabled  
Ingress rate limit: disable, Level: 30  
Egress rate limit: disable, Level: 30  
VLAN membership mode:  
Ingress rule:  
Acceptable frame type:  
Native VLAN:  
Hybrid  
Disabled  
All frames  
1
Priority for untagged traffic: 0  
Gvrp status:  
Disabled  
Allowed Vlan:  
Forbidden Vlan:  
Private-VLAN mode:  
1(u),  
NONE  
Private-VLAN host-association: NONE  
Private-VLAN mapping:  
Console#  
NONE  
Table 4-46 Interfaces Switchport Statistics  
Field  
Description  
Broadcast threshold  
Shows if broadcast storm suppression is enabled or disabled; if enabled it also  
shows the threshold level (page 4-137).  
Lacp status  
Shows if Link Aggregation Control Protocol has been enabled or disabled  
(page 4-148).  
Ingress/Egress rate limit Shows if rate limiting is enabled, and the current rate limit. (page 4-144).  
VLAN membership mode Indicates membership mode as Trunk or Hybrid (page 4-182).  
Ingress rule  
Shows if ingress filtering is enabled or disabled (page 4-183).  
Acceptable frame type  
Shows if acceptable VLAN frames include all types or tagged frames only  
(page 4-182).  
Native VLAN  
Indicates the default Port VLAN ID (page 4-184).  
Priority for untagged traffic Indicates the default priority for untagged frames (page 4-198).  
Gvrp status  
Shows if GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is enabled or disabled (page 4-195).  
Allowed Vlan  
Shows the VLANs this interface has joined, where “(u)” indicates untagged and  
“(t)” indicates tagged (page 4-185).  
Forbidden Vlan  
Shows the VLANs this interface can not dynamically join via GVRP (page 4-186).  
Shows the private VLAN mode as host, promiscuous, or none (4-191).  
Private VLAN mode  
Private VLAN  
host-association  
Shows the secondary (or community) VLAN with which this port is associated  
(4-191).  
Private VLAN mapping  
Shows the primary VLAN mapping for a promiscuous port (4-193).  
4-141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command Line Interface  
4
Mirror Port Commands  
This section describes how to mirror traffic from a source port to a target port.  
Table 4-47 Mirror Port Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode  
IC  
Page  
port monitor  
Configures a mirror session  
Shows the configuration for a mirror port  
show port monitor  
PE  
port monitor  
This command configures a mirror session. Use the no form to clear a mirror  
session.  
Syntax  
port monitor interface [rx | tx]  
no port monitor interface  
interface - ethernet unit/port (source port)  
- unit - This is unit 1.  
- port - Port number. (Range: 1-26/52)  
rx - Mirror received packets.  
tx - Mirror transmitted packets.  
Default Setting  
No mirror session is defined.  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, destination port)  
Command Usage  
• You can mirror traffic from any source port to a destination port for real-time  
analysis. You can then attach a logic analyzer or RMON probe to the  
destination port and study the traffic crossing the source port in a completely  
unobtrusive manner.  
• The destination port is set by specifying an Ethernet interface.  
• The mirror port and monitor port speeds should match, otherwise traffic may  
be dropped from the monitor port.  
• You can create multiple mirror sessions, but all sessions must share the same  
destination port. However, you should avoid sending too much traffic to the  
destination port from multiple source ports.  
4-142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Mirror Port Commands  
4
Example  
The following example configures the switch to mirror received packets from port 6  
to 11:  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/11  
Console(config-if)#port monitor ethernet 1/6 rx  
Console(config-if)#  
show port monitor  
This command displays mirror information.  
Syntax  
show port monitor [interface]  
interface - ethernet unit/port (source port)  
unit - This is unit 1.  
port - Port number. (Range: 1-26/52)  
Default Setting  
Shows all sessions.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
This command displays the currently configured source port, destination port,  
and mirror mode (i.e., RX, TX).  
Example  
The following shows mirroring configured from port 6 to port 11:  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/11  
Console(config-if)#port monitor ethernet 1/6 rx  
Console(config-if)#end  
Console#show port monitor  
Port Mirroring  
-------------------------------------  
Destination port(listen port):Eth1/11  
Source port(monitored port) :Eth1/6  
Mode  
:RX  
Console#  
4-143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command Line Interface  
4
Rate Limit Commands  
This function allows the network manager to control the maximum rate for traffic  
transmitted or received on an interface. Rate limiting is configured on interfaces at  
the edge of a network to limit traffic into or out of the network. Traffic that falls within  
the rate limit is transmitted, while packets that exceed the acceptable amount of  
traffic are dropped.  
Rate limiting can be applied to individual ports or trunks. When an interface is  
configured with this feature, the traffic rate will be monitored by the hardware to  
verify conformity. Non-conforming traffic is dropped, conforming traffic is forwarded  
without any changes.  
Note: The “rate limit granularity” is multiplied by the “rate limit” (page 4-144) to set the  
actual rate limit for an interface. Granularity is a global setting that applies to Fast  
Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet interfaces.  
Table 4-48 Rate Limit Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode  
IC  
Page  
rate-limit  
Configures the maximum input or output rate for a port  
Sets the Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet granularity  
Shows the rate limit granularity  
rate-limit granularity  
show rate-limit  
IC  
PE  
rate-limit  
Use this command to define the rate limit level for a specific interface. Use this  
command without specifying a rate to restore the default rate limit level. Use the no  
form to restore the default status of disabled.  
Syntax  
rate-limit {input | output} level [rate]  
no rate-limit {input | output}  
input – Input rate  
output – Output rate  
rate – Maximum value. (Fast Etherne:Range:1-255;Gigabit Ethernet:Range:1-30)  
Default Setting  
Fast Ethernet:255 ; Gigabit Ethernet:30  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
Actual rate limit = Rate limit level * Granularity  
4-144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Rate Limit Commands  
4
Example  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1  
Console(config-if)#rate-limit input level 20  
Console(config-if)#  
rate-limit granularity  
Use this command to define the rate limit granularity for the Fast Ethernet ports, and  
the Gigabit Ethernet ports. Use the no form of this command to restore the default  
setting.  
Syntax  
rate-limit {fastethernet | gigabitethernet} granularity [granularity]  
no rate-limit {fastethernet | gigabitethernet} granularity  
fastethernet – Fast Ethernet granularity  
gigabitethernet – Gigabit Ethernet granularity  
granularity – Sets rate limit granularity for the system. For Fast Ethernet,  
choose 512 Kbps, 1 Mbps, or 3.3 Mbps. For Gigabit Ethernet, only one  
granularity option is supported, 33.3 Mbps  
Default Setting  
Fast Ethernet interface – 3.3 Mbps  
Gigabit Ethernet interface – 33.3 Mbps  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
Actual rate limit = Rate limit level * Granularity  
Example  
The following sets Fast Ethernet granularity to 1 Mbps, and Gigabit Ethernet  
granularity to 33.3 Mbps.  
Console(config)#rate-limit fastethernet granularity 1000  
Console(config)#rate-limit gigabitethernet granularity 33300  
Console(config)#  
show rate-limit  
Use this command to display the rate limit granularity.  
Default Setting  
Fast Ethernet interface – 3.3 Mbps  
Gigabit Ethernet interface – 33.3 Mbps  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
4-145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
Command Usage  
• For Fast Ethernet interfaces, the rate limit granularity is 512 Kbps, 1 Mbps, or  
3.3 Mbps.  
• For Gigabit Ethernet interfaces, the rate limit granularity is 33.3 Mbps.  
Example  
Console#show rate-limit  
Fast ethernet granularity: 1000  
Gigabit ethernet granularity: 33300  
Console#  
Link Aggregation Commands  
Ports can be statically grouped into an aggregate link (i.e., trunk) to increase the  
bandwidth of a network connection or to ensure fault recovery. Or you can use the  
Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) to automatically negotiate a trunk link  
between this switch and another network device. For static trunks, the switches have  
to comply with the Cisco EtherChannel standard. For dynamic trunks, the switches  
have to comply with LACP. This switch supports up to four trunks. For example, a  
trunk consisting of two 1000 Mbps ports can support an aggregate bandwidth of  
4 Gbps when operating at full duplex.  
Table 4-49 Link Aggregation Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode  
Page  
Manual Configuration Commands  
interface port-channel  
channel-group  
Configures a trunk and enters interface  
GC  
configuration mode for the trunk  
Adds a port to a trunk  
IC (Ethernet)  
Dynamic Configuration Command  
lacp  
Configures LACP for the current interface  
IC (Ethernet)  
IC (Ethernet)  
IC (Ethernet)  
lacp system-priority  
lacp admin-key  
lacp admin-key  
lacp port-priority  
Configures a port's LACP system priority  
Configures a port's administration key  
Configures an port channel’s administration key IC (Port Channel) 4-151  
Configures a port's LACP port priority  
IC (Ethernet)  
Trunk Status Display Command  
show interfaces status  
port-channel  
Shows trunk information  
NE, PE  
PE  
show lacp  
Shows LACP information  
4-146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Link Aggregation Commands  
4
Guidelines for Creating Trunks  
General Guidelines –  
• Finish configuring port trunks before you connect the corresponding network  
cables between switches to avoid creating a loop.  
• A trunk can have up to eight ports.  
• The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as trunk ports.  
• All ports in a trunk must be configured in an identical manner, including  
communication mode (i.e., speed, duplex mode and flow control), VLAN  
assignments, and CoS settings.  
• Any of the Gigabit ports on the front panel can be trunked together, including  
ports of different media types.  
• All the ports in a trunk have to be treated as a whole when moved from/to,  
added or deleted from a VLAN via the specified port-channel.  
• STP, VLAN, and IGMP settings can only be made for the entire trunk via the  
specified port-channel.  
Dynamically Creating a Port Channel –  
Ports assigned to a common port channel must meet the following criteria:  
• Ports must have the same LACP system priority.  
• Ports must have the same port admin key (Ethernet Interface).  
• If the port channel admin key (lacp admin key - Port Channel) is not set when  
a channel group is formed (i.e., it has the null value of 0), this key is set to the  
same value as the port admin key (lacp admin key - Ethernet Interface) used  
by the interfaces that joined the group.  
• However, if the port channel admin key is set, then the port admin key must  
be set to the same value for a port to be allowed to join a channel group.  
• If a link goes down, LACP port priority is used to select the backup link.  
channel-group  
This command adds a port to a trunk. Use the no form to remove a port from a trunk.  
Syntax  
channel-group channel-id  
no channel-group  
channel-id - Trunk index (Range: 1-4)  
Default Setting  
The current port will be added to this trunk.  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)  
4-147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
Command Usage  
• When configuring static trunks, the switches must comply with the Cisco  
EtherChannel standard.  
• Use no channel-group to remove a port group from a trunk.  
• Use no interfaces port-channel to remove a trunk from the switch.  
Example  
The following example creates trunk 1 and then adds port 11:  
Console(config)#interface port-channel 1  
Console(config-if)#exit  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/11  
Console(config-if)#channel-group 1  
Console(config-if)#  
lacp  
This command enables 802.3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) for the  
current interface. Use the no form to disable it.  
Syntax  
[no] lacp  
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)  
Command Usage  
• The ports on both ends of an LACP trunk must be configured for full duplex,  
either by forced mode or auto-negotiation.  
• A trunk formed with another switch using LACP will automatically be assigned  
the next available port-channel ID.  
• If the target switch has also enabled LACP on the connected ports, the trunk  
will be activated automatically.  
• If more than eight ports attached to the same target switch have LACP  
enabled, the additional ports will be placed in standby mode, and will only be  
enabled if one of the active links fails.  
4-148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Link Aggregation Commands  
4
Example  
The following shows LACP enabled on ports 11-13. Because LACP has also been  
enabled on the ports at the other end of the links, the show interfaces status  
port-channel 1 command shows that Trunk 1 has been established.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/11  
Console(config-if)#lacp  
Console(config-if)#exit  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/12  
Console(config-if)#lacp  
Console(config-if)#exit  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/13  
Console(config-if)#lacp  
Console(config-if)#exit  
Console(config)#exit  
Console#show interfaces status port-channel 1  
Information of Trunk 1  
Basic information:  
Port type:  
100TX  
Mac address:  
Configuration:  
Name:  
00-00-e8-00-00-0b  
Port admin:  
Up  
Speed-duplex:  
Capabilities:  
Flow control status:  
Port security:  
Max MAC count:  
Current status:  
Created by:  
Auto  
10half, 10full, 100half, 100full  
Disabled  
Disabled  
0
LACP  
Up  
Link status:  
Operation speed-duplex: 100full  
Flow control type: None  
Member Ports: Eth1/11, Eth1/12, Eth1/13,  
Console#  
lacp system-priority  
This command configures a port's LACP system priority. Use the no form to restore  
the default setting.  
Syntax  
lacp {actor | partner} system-priority priority  
no lacp {actor | partner} system-priority  
actor - The local side an aggregate link.  
partner - The remote side of an aggregate link.  
priority - This priority is used to determine link aggregation group (LAG)  
membership, and to identify this device to other switches during LAG  
negotiations. (Range: 0-65535)  
Default Setting  
32768  
4-149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)  
Command Usage  
• Port must be configured with the same system priority to join the same LAG.  
• System priority is combined with the switch’s MAC address to form the LAG  
identifier. This identifier is used to indicate a specific LAG during LACP  
negotiations with other systems.  
• Once the remote side of a link has been established, LACP operational  
settings are already in use on that side. Configuring LACP settings for the  
partner only applies to its administrative state, not its operational state, and  
will only take effect the next time an aggregate link is established with the  
partner.  
Example  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5  
Console(config-if)#lacp actor system-priority 3  
Console(config-if)#  
lacp admin-key (Ethernet Interface)  
This command configures a port's LACP administration key. Use the no form to  
restore the default setting.  
Syntax  
lacp {actor | partner} admin-key key  
[no] lacp {actor | partner} admin-key  
actor - The local side an aggregate link.  
partner - The remote side of an aggregate link.  
key - The port admin key must be set to the same value for ports that belong  
to the same link aggregation group (LAG). (Range: 0-65535)  
Default Setting  
0
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)  
Command Usage  
• Ports are only allowed to join the same LAG if (1) the LACP system priority  
matches, (2) the LACP port admin key matches, and (3) the LACP port  
channel key matches (if configured).  
• If the port channel admin key (lacp admin key - Port Channel) is not set when  
a channel group is formed (i.e., it has the null value of 0), this key is set to the  
same value as the port admin key (lacp admin key - Ethernet Interface) used  
by the interfaces that joined the group.  
4-150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Link Aggregation Commands  
4
• Once the remote side of a link has been established, LACP operational  
settings are already in use on that side. Configuring LACP settings for the  
partner only applies to its administrative state, not its operational state, and  
will only take effect the next time an aggregate link is established with the  
partner.  
Example  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5  
Console(config-if)#lacp actor admin-key 120  
Console(config-if)#  
lacp admin-key (Port Channel)  
This command configures a port channel's LACP administration key string. Use the  
no form to restore the default setting.  
Syntax  
lacp {actor | partner} admin-key key  
[no] lacp {actor | partner} admin-key  
key - The port channel admin key is used to identify a specific link  
aggregation group (LAG) during local LACP setup on this switch.  
(Range: 0-65535)  
Default Setting  
0
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
• Ports are only allowed to join the same LAG if (1) the LACP system priority  
matches, (2) the LACP port admin key matches, and (3) the LACP port  
channel key matches (if configured).  
• If the port channel admin key (lacp admin key - Port Channel) is not set when  
a channel group is formed (i.e., it has the null value of 0), this key is set to the  
same value as the port admin key (lacp admin key - Ethernet Interface) used  
by the interfaces that joined the group. Note that when the LAG is no longer  
used, the port channel admin key is reset to 0.  
Example  
Console(config)#interface port-channel 1  
Console(config-if)#lacp actor admin-key 3  
Console(config-if)#  
4-151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
lacp port-priority  
This command configures LACP port priority. Use the no form to restore the default  
setting.  
Syntax  
lacp {actor | partner} port-priority priority  
no lacp {actor | partner} port-priority  
actor - The local side an aggregate link.  
partner - The remote side of an aggregate link.  
priority - LACP port priority is used to select a backup link. (Range: 0-65535)  
Default Setting  
32768  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)  
Command Usage  
• Setting a lower value indicates a higher effective priority.  
• If an active port link goes down, the backup port with the highest priority is  
selected to replace the downed link. However, if two or more ports have the  
same LACP port priority, the port with the lowest physical port number will be  
selected as the backup port.  
• Once the remote side of a link has been established, LACP operational  
settings are already in use on that side. Configuring LACP settings for the  
partner only applies to its administrative state, not its operational state, and  
will only take effect the next time an aggregate link is established with the  
partner.  
Example  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5  
Console(config-if)#lacp actor port-priority 128  
show lacp  
This command displays LACP information.  
Syntax  
show lacp [port-channel] {counters | internal | neighbors | sysid}  
port-channel - Local identifier for a link aggregation group. (Range: 1-4)  
counters - Statistics for LACP protocol messages.  
internal - Configuration settings and operational state for local side.  
• neighbors - Configuration settings and operational state for remote side.  
sysid - Summary of system priority and MAC address for all channel groups.  
4-152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Link Aggregation Commands  
4
Default Setting  
Port Channel: all  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show lacp 1 counters  
Channel group : 1  
-------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Eth 1/ 1  
-------------------------------------------------------------------------  
LACPDUs Sent : 21  
LACPDUs Received : 21  
Marker Sent : 0  
Marker Received : 0  
LACPDUs Unknown Pkts : 0  
LACPDUs Illegal Pkts : 0  
.
.
.
Table 4-50 show lacp counters - display description  
Field  
Description  
LACPDUs Sent  
LACPDUs Received  
Marker Sent  
Number of valid LACPDUs transmitted from this channel group.  
Number of valid LACPDUs received on this channel group.  
Number of valid Marker PDUs transmitted from this channel group.  
Number of valid Marker PDUs received by this channel group.  
Marker Received  
LACPDUs Unknown Pkts Number of frames received that either (1) Carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet  
Type value, but contain an unknown PDU, or (2) are addressed to the Slow  
Protocols group MAC Address, but do not carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet  
Type.  
LACPDUs Illegal Pkts  
Number of frames that carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type value, but contain  
a badly formed PDU or an illegal value of Protocol Subtype.  
4-153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command Line Interface  
4
Console#show lacp 1 internal  
Port Channel : 1  
-------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Oper Key : 4  
Admin Key : 0  
Eth 1/1  
-------------------------------------------------------------------------  
LACPDUs Internal : 30 sec  
LACP System Priority : 32768  
LACP Port Priority : 32768  
Admin Key : 4  
Oper Key : 4  
Admin State : defaulted, aggregation, long timeout, LACP-activity  
Oper State : distributing, collecting, synchronization, aggregation,  
long timeout, LACP-activity  
.
.
.
Table 4-51 show lacp internal - display description  
Field  
Description  
Oper Key  
Current operational value of the key for the aggregation port.  
Current administrative value of the key for the aggregation port.  
Number of seconds before invalidating received LACPDU information.  
Admin Key  
LACPDUs Internal  
LACP System Priority LACP system priority assigned to this port channel.  
LACP Port Priority  
LACP port priority assigned to this interface within the channel group.  
Admin State,  
Oper State  
Administrative or operational values of the actor’s state parameters:  
• Expired – The actor’s receive machine is in the expired state;  
• Defaulted – The actor’s receive machine is using defaulted operational partner  
information, administratively configured for the partner.  
• Distributing – If false, distribution of outgoing frames on this link is disabled; i.e.,  
distribution is currently disabled and is not expected to be enabled in the absence  
of administrative changes or changes in received protocol information.  
• Collecting – Collection of incoming frames on this link is enabled; i.e., collection is  
currently enabled and is not expected to be disabled in the absence of  
administrative changes or changes in received protocol information.  
• Synchronization – The System considers this link to be IN_SYNC; i.e., it has been  
allocated to the correct Link Aggregation Group, the group has been associated  
with a compatible Aggregator, and the identity of the Link Aggregation Group is  
consistent with the System ID and operational Key information transmitted.  
• Aggregation – The system considers this link to be aggregatable; i.e., a potential  
candidate for aggregation.  
• Long timeout – Periodic transmission of LACPDUs uses a slow transmission rate.  
• LACP-Activity – Activity control value with regard to this link. (0: Passive; 1: Active)  
4-154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Link Aggregation Commands  
4
Console#show lacp 1 neighbors  
Port channel 1 neighbors  
-------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Eth 1/1  
-------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Partner Admin System ID : 32768, 00-00-00-00-00-00  
Partner Oper System ID : 32768, 00-00-00-00-00-01  
Partner Admin Port Number : 1  
Partner Oper Port Number : 1  
Port Admin Priority : 32768  
Port Oper Priority : 32768  
Admin Key : 0  
Oper Key : 4  
Admin State : defaulted, distributing, collecting, synchronization,  
long timeout,  
Oper State : distributing, collecting, synchronization, aggregation,  
long timeout, LACP-activity  
.
.
.
Table 4-52 show lacp neighbors - display description  
Field  
Description  
Partner Admin System ID LAG partner’s system ID assigned by the user.  
Partner Oper System ID  
LAG partner’s system ID assigned by the LACP protocol.  
Partner Admin  
Port Number  
Current administrative value of the port number for the protocol Partner.  
Partner Oper  
Port Number  
Operational port number assigned to this aggregation port by the port’s protocol  
partner.  
Port Admin Priority  
Port Oper Priority  
Admin Key  
Current administrative value of the port priority for the protocol partner.  
Priority value assigned to this aggregation port by the partner.  
Current administrative value of the Key for the protocol partner.  
Current operational value of the Key for the protocol partner.  
Oper Key  
Admin State  
Oper State  
Administrative values of the partner’s state parameters. (See preceding table.)  
Operational values of the partner’s state parameters. (See preceding table.)  
4-155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command Line Interface  
4
Console#show lacp sysid  
Port Channel System Priority  
-------------------------------------------------------------------------  
System MAC Address  
1
2
3
4
32768  
32768  
32768  
32768  
00-30-F1-8F-2C-A7  
00-30-F1-8F-2C-A7  
00-30-F1-8F-2C-A7  
00-30-F1-8F-2C-A7  
Console#  
Table 4-53 show lacp sysid - display description  
Description  
Field  
Channel group  
A link aggregation group configured on this switch.  
LACP system priority for this channel group.  
*
System Priority  
*
System MAC address.  
System MAC Address  
* The LACP system priority and system MAC address are concatenated to form the LAG system ID.  
Address Table Commands  
These commands are used to configure the address table for filtering specified  
addresses, displaying current entries, clearing the table, or setting the aging time.  
Table 4-54 Address Table Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode  
Page  
mac-address-table static Maps a static address to a port in a VLAN  
GC  
clear mac-address-table Removes any learned entries from the forwarding database PE  
dynamic  
show mac-address-table Displays entries in the bridge-forwarding database  
PE  
mac-address-table  
aging-time  
Sets the aging time of the address table  
GC  
show mac-address-table Shows the aging time for the address table  
aging-time  
PE  
4-156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Address Table Commands  
4
mac-address-table static  
This command maps a static address to a destination port in a VLAN. Use the no  
form to remove an address.  
Syntax  
mac-address-table static mac-address interface interface  
vlan vlan-id [action]  
no mac-address-table static mac-address vlan vlan-id  
mac-address - MAC address.  
interface  
ethernet unit/port  
- unit - This is unit 1.  
- port - Port number. (Range: 1-26/52)  
port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)  
vlan-id - VLAN ID (Range: 1-4094)  
action -  
- delete-on-reset - Assignment lasts until the switch is reset.  
- permanent - Assignment is permanent.  
Default Setting  
No static addresses are defined. The default mode is permanent.  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
The static address for a host device can be assigned to a specific port within  
a specific VLAN. Use this command to add static addresses to the MAC  
Address Table. Static addresses have the following characteristics:  
• Static addresses will not be removed from the address table when a given  
interface link is down.  
• Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved.  
When a static address is seen on another interface, the address will be  
ignored and will not be written to the address table.  
• A static address cannot be learned on another port until the address is  
removed with the no form of this command.  
Example  
Console(config)#mac-address-table static 00-e0-29-94-34-de interface  
ethernet 1/1 vlan 1 delete-on-reset  
Console(config)#  
4-157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
clear mac-address-table dynamic  
This command removes any learned entries from the forwarding database and  
clears the transmit and receive counts for any static or system configured entries.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#clear mac-address-table dynamic  
Console#  
show mac-address-table  
This command shows classes of entries in the bridge-forwarding database.  
Syntax  
show mac-address-table [address mac-address [mask]] [interface interface]  
[vlan vlan-id] [sort {address | vlan | interface}]  
mac-address - MAC address.  
mask - Bits to match in the address.  
interface  
ethernet unit/port  
- unit - This is unit 1.  
- port - Port number. (Range: 1-26/52)  
port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)  
vlan-id - VLAN ID (Range: 1-4094)  
sort - Sort by address, vlan or interface.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
• The MAC Address Table contains the MAC addresses associated with each  
interface. Note that the Type field may include the following types:  
- Learned - Dynamic address entries  
- Permanent - Static entry  
- Delete-on-reset - Static entry to be deleted when system is reset  
• The mask should be hexadecimal numbers (representing an equivalent bit  
mask) in the form xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx that is applied to the specified MAC  
address. Enter hexadecimal numbers, where an equivalent binary bit “0”  
4-158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Address Table Commands  
4
means to match a bit and “1” means to ignore a bit. For example, a mask of  
00-00-00-00-00-00 means an exact match, and a mask of  
FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF means “any.”  
• The maximum number of address entries is 8191.  
Example  
Console#show mac-address-table  
Interface Mac Address  
Vlan Type  
--------- ----------------- ---- -----------------  
Eth 1/1 00-e0-29-94-34-de  
Trunk 2 00-E0-29-8F-AA-1B  
1 Delete-on-reset  
1 Learned  
Console#  
mac-address-table aging-time  
This command sets the aging time for entries in the address table. Use the no form  
to restore the default aging time.  
Syntax  
mac-address-table aging-time seconds  
no mac-address-table aging-time  
seconds - Aging time. (Range: 10-30000 seconds; 0 to disable aging)  
Default Setting  
300 seconds  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
The aging time is used to age out dynamically learned forwarding information.  
Example  
Console(config)#mac-address-table aging-time 100  
Console(config)#  
show mac-address-table aging-time  
This command shows the aging time for entries in the address table.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show mac-address-table aging-time  
Aging time: 100 sec.  
4-159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
Spanning Tree Commands  
This section includes commands that configure the Spanning Tree Algorithm (STA)  
globally for the switch, and commands that configure STA for the selected interface.  
Table 4-55 Spanning Tree Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode  
GC  
GC  
GC  
GC  
GC  
GC  
GC  
Page  
spanning-tree  
spanning-tree mode  
Enables the spanning tree protocol  
Configures STP, RSTP or MSTP mode  
4-163  
spanning-tree forward-time Configures the spanning tree bridge forward time  
spanning-tree hello-time  
spanning-tree max-age  
spanning-tree priority  
Configures the spanning tree bridge hello time  
Configures the spanning tree bridge maximum age  
Configures the spanning tree bridge priority  
Configures the path cost method for RSTP/MSTP  
spanning-tree  
path-cost method  
spanning-tree  
Configures the transmission limit for RSTP/MSTP  
Changes to MSTP configuration mode  
GC  
GC  
transmission-limit  
spanning-tree  
mst-configuration  
mst vlan  
mst priority  
name  
Adds VLANs to a spanning tree instance  
MST  
MST  
MST  
Configures the priority of a spanning tree instance  
Configures the name for the multiple spanning tree  
revision  
Configures the revision number for the multiple spanning MST  
tree  
max-hops  
Configures the maximum number of hops allowed in the MST  
region before a BPDU is discarded  
spanning-tree  
spanning-disabled  
Disables spanning tree for an interface  
IC  
spanning-tree cost  
Configures the spanning tree path cost of an interface  
Configures the spanning tree priority of an interface  
Enables fast forwarding for edge ports  
IC  
IC  
IC  
IC  
IC  
IC  
IC  
spanning-tree port-priority  
spanning-tree edge-port  
spanning-tree portfast  
spanning-tree link-type  
spanning-tree mst cost  
Sets an interface to fast forwarding  
Configures the link type for RSTP/MSTP  
Configures the path cost of an instance in the MST  
Configures the priority of an instance in the MST  
spanning-tree mst  
port-priority  
spanning-tree  
Re-checks the appropriate BPDU format  
PE  
PE  
protocol-migration  
show spanning-tree  
Shows spanning tree configuration for the common  
spanning tree (i.e., overall bridge), a selected interface, or  
an instance within the multiple spanning tree  
show spanning-tree mst  
configuration  
Shows the multiple spanning tree configuration  
PE  
4-160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Spanning Tree Commands  
4
spanning-tree  
This command enables the Spanning Tree Algorithm globally for the switch. Use the  
no form to disable it.  
Syntax  
[no] spanning-tree  
Default Setting  
Spanning tree is enabled.  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
The Spanning Tree Algorithm (STA) can be used to detect and disable  
network loops, and to provide backup links between switches, bridges or  
routers. This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices (that is,  
an STA-compliant switch, bridge or router) in your network to ensure that only  
one route exists between any two stations on the network, and provide backup  
links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down.  
Example  
This example shows how to enable the Spanning Tree Algorithm for the switch:  
Console(config)#spanning-tree  
Console(config)#  
spanning-tree mode  
This command selects the spanning tree mode for this switch. Use the no form to  
restore the default.  
Syntax  
spanning-tree mode {stp | rstp | mstp}  
no spanning-tree mode  
stp - Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1D)  
rstp - Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1w)  
mstp - Multiple Spanning Tree (IEEE 802.1s)  
Default Setting  
rstp  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• Spanning Tree Protocol  
Uses RSTP for the internal state machine, but sends only 802.1D BPDUs.  
4-161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
Command Line Interface  
4
- This creates one spanning tree instance for the entire network. If multiple  
VLANs are implemented on a network, the path between specific VLAN  
members may be inadvertently disabled to prevent network loops, thus  
isolating group members. When operating multiple VLANs, we recommend  
selecting the MSTP option.  
• Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol  
RSTP supports connections to either STP or RSTP nodes by monitoring  
the incoming protocol messages and dynamically adjusting the type of  
protocol messages the RSTP node transmits, as described below:  
- STP Mode – If the switch receives an 802.1D BPDU after a port’s migration  
delay timer expires, the switch assumes it is connected to an 802.1D bridge  
and starts using only 802.1D BPDUs.  
- RSTP Mode – If RSTP is using 802.1D BPDUs on a port and receives an  
RSTP BPDU after the migration delay expires, RSTP restarts the migration  
delay timer and begins using RSTP BPDUs on that port.  
• Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol  
- To allow multiple spanning trees to operate over the network, you must  
configure a related set of bridges with the same MSTP configuration,  
allowing them to participate in a specific set of spanning tree instances.  
- A spanning tree instance can exist only on bridges that have compatible  
VLAN instance assignments.  
- Be careful when switching between spanning tree modes. Changing modes  
stops all spanning-tree instances for the previous mode and restarts the  
system in the new mode, temporarily disrupting user traffic.  
Example  
The following example configures the switch to use Rapid Spanning Tree:  
Console(config)#spanning-tree mode rstp  
Console(config)#  
spanning-tree forward-time  
This command configures the spanning tree bridge forward time globally for this  
switch. Use the no form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
spanning-tree forward-time seconds  
no spanning-tree forward-time  
seconds - Time in seconds. (Range: 4 - 30 seconds)  
The minimum value is the higher of 4 or [(max-age / 2) + 1].  
Default Setting  
15 seconds  
Command Mode  
4-162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Spanning Tree Commands  
4
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
This command sets the maximum time (in seconds) the root device will wait  
before changing states (i.e., discarding to learning to forwarding). This delay is  
required because every device must receive information about topology  
changes before it starts to forward frames. In addition, each port needs time to  
listen for conflicting information that would make it return to the discarding  
state; otherwise, temporary data loops might result.  
Example  
Console(config)#spanning-tree forward-time 20  
Console(config)#  
spanning-tree hello-time  
This command configures the spanning tree bridge hello time globally for this switch.  
Use the no form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
spanning-tree hello-time time  
no spanning-tree hello-time  
time - Time in seconds. (Range: 1-10 seconds).  
The maximum value is the lower of 10 or [(max-age / 2) -1].  
Default Setting  
2 seconds  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
This command sets the time interval (in seconds) at which the root device  
transmits a configuration message.  
Example  
Console(config)#spanning-tree hello-time 5  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
spanning-tree forward-time (4-162)  
spanning-tree max-age (4-163)  
4-163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
spanning-tree max-age  
This command configures the spanning tree bridge maximum age globally for this  
switch. Use the no form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
spanning-tree max-age seconds  
no spanning-tree max-age  
seconds - Time in seconds. (Range: 6-40 seconds)  
The minimum value is the higher of 6 or [2 x (hello-time + 1)].  
The maximum value is the lower of 40 or [2 x (forward-time - 1)].  
Default Setting  
20 seconds  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
This command sets the maximum time (in seconds) a device can wait without  
receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure. All device  
ports (except for designated ports) should receive configuration messages at  
regular intervals. Any port that ages out STA information (provided in the last  
configuration message) becomes the designated port for the attached LAN. If  
it is a root port, a new root port is selected from among the device ports  
attached to the network.  
Example  
Console(config)#spanning-tree max-age 40  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
spanning-tree forward-time (4-162)  
spanning-tree hello-time (4-163)  
spanning-tree priority  
This command configures the spanning tree priority globally for this switch. Use the  
no form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
spanning-tree priority priority  
no spanning-tree priority  
priority - Priority of the bridge. (Range – 0-61440, in steps of 4096;  
Options: 0, 4096, 8192, 12288, 16384, 20480, 24576, 28672, 32768,  
36864, 40960, 45056, 49152, 53248, 57344, 61440)  
Default Setting  
32768  
4-164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Spanning Tree Commands  
4
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device, root port, and designated  
port. The device with the highest priority (i.e., lower numeric value) becomes  
the STA root device. However, if all devices have the same priority, the device  
with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device.  
Example  
Console(config)#spanning-tree priority 40000  
Console(config)#  
spanning-tree pathcost method  
This command configures the path cost method used for Rapid Spanning Tree and  
Multiple Spanning Tree. Use the no form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
spanning-tree pathcost method {long | short}  
no spanning-tree pathcost method  
long - Specifies 32-bit based values that range from 1-200,000,000.  
This method is based on the IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol.  
short - Specifies 16-bit based values that range from 1-65535.  
This method is based on the IEEE 802.1 Spanning Tree Protocol.  
Default Setting  
Long method  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
The path cost method is used to determine the best path between devices.  
Therefore, lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media,  
and higher values assigned to ports with slower media. Note that path cost  
(page 4-170) takes precedence over port priority (page 4-171).  
Example  
Console(config)#spanning-tree pathcost method long  
Console(config)#  
4-165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
spanning-tree transmission-limit  
This command configures the minimum interval between the transmission of  
consecutive RSTP/MSTP BPDUs. Use the no form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
spanning-tree transmission-limit count  
no spanning-tree transmission-limit  
count - The transmission limit in seconds. (Range: 1-10)  
Default Setting  
3
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
This command limits the maximum transmission rate for BPDUs.  
Example  
Console(config)#spanning-tree transmission-limit 4  
Console(config)#  
spanning-tree mst-configuration  
This command changes to Multiple Spanning Tree (MST) configuration mode.  
Default Setting  
• No VLANs are mapped to any MST instance.  
• The region name is set the switch’s MAC address.  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#spanning-tree mst-configuration  
Console(config-mstp)#  
Related Commands  
4-166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Spanning Tree Commands  
4
mst vlan  
This command adds VLANs to a spanning tree instance. Use the no form to remove  
the specified VLANs. Using the no form without any VLAN parameters to remove all  
VLANs.  
Syntax  
[no] mst instance_id vlan vlan-range  
instance_id - Instance identifier of the spanning tree. (Range: 0-4094)  
vlan-range - Range of VLANs. (Range: 1-4093)  
Default Setting  
none  
Command Mode  
MST Configuration  
Command Usage  
• Use this command to group VLANs into spanning tree instances. MSTP  
generates a unique spanning tree for each instance. This provides multiple  
pathways across the network, thereby balancing the traffic load, preventing  
wide-scale disruption when a bridge node in a single instance fails, and  
allowing for faster convergence of a new topology for the failed instance.  
• By default all VLANs are assigned to the Internal Spanning Tree (MSTI 0) that  
connects all bridges and LANs within the MST region. This switch supports up  
to 33 instances. You should try to group VLANs which cover the same general  
area of your network. However, remember that you must configure all bridges  
within the same MSTI Region (page 4-168) with the same set of instances,  
and the same instance (on each bridge) with the same set of VLANs. Also,  
note that RSTP treats each MSTI region as a single node, connecting all  
regions to the Common Spanning Tree.  
Example  
Console(config-mstp)#mst 1 vlan 2-5  
Console(config-mstp)#  
4-167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
mst priority  
This command configures the priority of a spanning tree instance. Use the no form  
to restore the default.  
Syntax  
mst instance_id priority priority  
no mst instance_id priority  
instance_id - Instance identifier of the spanning tree. (Range: 0-4094)  
priority - Priority of the a spanning tree instance.  
(Range – 0-61440, in steps of 4096; Options: 0, 4096, 8192, 12288, 16384,  
20480, 24576, 28672, 32768, 36864, 40960, 45056, 49152, 53248, 57344,  
61440)  
Default Setting  
32768  
Command Mode  
MST Configuration  
Command Usage  
• MST priority is used in selecting the root bridge and alternate bridge of the  
specified instance. The device with the highest priority (i.e., lowest numerical  
value) becomes the MSTI root device. However, if all devices have the same  
priority, the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root  
device.  
• You can set this switch to act as the MSTI root device by specifying a priority  
of 0, or as the MSTI alternate device by specifying a priority of 16384.  
Example  
Console(config-mstp)#mst 1 priority 16  
Console(config-mstp)#  
name  
This command configures the name for the multiple spanning tree region in which  
this switch is located. Use the no form to clear the name.  
Syntax  
name name  
name - Name of the spanning tree.  
Default Setting  
Switch’s MAC address  
Command Mode  
MST Configuration  
Command Usage  
4-168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Spanning Tree Commands  
4
The MST region name and revision number (page 4-169) are used to  
designate a unique MST region. A bridge (i.e., spanning-tree compliant device  
such as this switch) can only belong to one MST region. And all bridges in the  
same region must be configured with the same MST instances.  
Example  
Console(config-mstp)#name R&D  
Console(config-mstp)#  
Related Commands  
revision  
This command configures the revision number for this multiple spanning tree  
configuration of this switch. Use the no form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
revision number  
number - Revision number of the spanning tree. (Range: 0-65535)  
Default Setting  
0
Command Mode  
MST Configuration  
Command Usage  
The MST region name (page 4-168) and revision number are used to  
designate a unique MST region. A bridge (i.e., spanning-tree compliant device  
such as this switch) can only belong to one MST region. And all bridges in the  
same region must be configured with the same MST instances.  
Example  
Console(config-mstp)#revision 1  
Console(config-mstp)#  
Related Commands  
max-hops  
This command configures the maximum number of hops in the region before a  
BPDU is discarded. Use the no form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
max-hops hop-number  
hop-number - Maximum hop number for multiple spanning tree.  
(Range: 1-40)  
4-169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
Default Setting  
20  
Command Mode  
MST Configuration  
Command Usage  
An MSTI region is treated as a single node by the STP and RSTP protocols.  
Therefore, the message age for BPDUs inside an MSTI region is never  
changed. However, each spanning tree instance within a region, and the  
internal spanning tree (IST) that connects these instances use a hop count to  
specify the maximum number of bridges that will propagate a BPDU. Each  
bridge decrements the hop count by one before passing on the BPDU. When  
the hop count reaches zero, the message is dropped.  
Example  
Console(config-mstp)#max-hops 30  
Console(config-mstp)#  
spanning-tree spanning-disabled  
This command disables the spanning tree algorithm for the specified interface. Use  
the no form to reenable the spanning tree algorithm for the specified interface.  
Syntax  
[no] spanning-tree spanning-disabled  
Default Setting  
Enabled  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Example  
This example disables the spanning tree algorithm for port 5.  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5  
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree spanning-disabled  
Console(config-if)#  
spanning-tree cost  
This command configures the spanning tree path cost for the specified interface.  
Use the no form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
spanning-tree cost cost  
no spanning-tree cost  
cost - The path cost for the port. (Range: 0 for auto-configuration, 1-65535  
for short path cost method, 1-200,000,000 for long path cost method)  
4-170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Spanning Tree Commands  
4
The recommended range is:  
•Ethernet: 200,000-20,000,000  
•Fast Ethernet: 20,000-2,000,000  
•Gigabit Ethernet: 2,000-200,000  
Default Setting  
By default, the system automatically detects the speed and duplex mode used  
on each port, and configures the path cost according to the values shown  
below. Path cost “0” is used to indicate auto-configuration mode. When the  
short path cost method is selected and the default path cost recommended by  
the IEEE 8021w standard exceeds 65,535, the default is set to 65,535.  
• Ethernet – half duplex: 2,000,000; full duplex: 1,000,000; trunk: 500,000  
• Fast Ethernet – half duplex: 200,000; full duplex: 100,000; trunk: 50,000  
• Gigabit Ethernet – full duplex: 10,000; trunk: 5,000  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
• This command is used by the Spanning Tree Algorithm to determine the best  
path between devices. Therefore, lower values should be assigned to ports  
attached to faster media, and higher values assigned to ports with slower  
media.  
• Path cost takes precedence over port priority.  
• When the spanning-tree pathcost method (page 4-165) is set to short, the  
maximum value for path cost is 65,535.  
Example  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5  
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree cost 50  
Console(config-if)#  
spanning-tree port-priority  
This command configures the priority for the specified interface. Use the no form to  
restore the default.  
Syntax  
spanning-tree port-priority priority  
no spanning-tree port-priority  
priority - The priority for a port. (Range: 0-240, in steps of 16)  
Default Setting  
128  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
4-171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
Command Usage  
• This command defines the priority for the use of a port in the Spanning Tree  
Algorithm. If the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same, the port with  
the highest priority (that is, lowest value) will be configured as an active link in  
the spanning tree.  
• Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority, the port with lowest  
numeric identifier will be enabled.  
Example  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5  
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree port-priority 0  
Related Commands  
spanning-tree edge-port  
This command specifies an interface as an edge port. Use the no form to restore the  
default.  
Syntax  
[no] spanning-tree edge-port  
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
• You can enable this option if an interface is attached to a LAN segment that  
is at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node. Since end nodes cannot  
cause forwarding loops, they can pass directly through to the spanning tree  
forwarding state. Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker convergence for  
devices such as workstations or servers, retains the current forwarding  
database to reduce the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild address  
tables during reconfiguration events, does not cause the spanning tree to  
initiate reconfiguration when the interface changes state, and also overcomes  
other STA-related timeout problems. However, remember that Edge Port  
should only be enabled for ports connected to an end-node device.  
• This command has the same effect as the spanning-tree portfast.  
Example  
Console(config)#interface ethernet ethernet 1/5  
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree edge-port  
Console(config-if)#  
Related Commands  
4-172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Spanning Tree Commands  
4
spanning-tree portfast  
This command sets an interface to fast forwarding. Use the no form to disable fast  
forwarding.  
Syntax  
[no] spanning-tree portfast  
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
• This command is used to enable/disable the fast spanning-tree mode for the  
selected port. In this mode, ports skip the Discarding and Learning states, and  
proceed straight to Forwarding.  
• Since end-nodes cannot cause forwarding loops, they can be passed through  
the spanning tree state changes more quickly than allowed by standard  
convergence time. Fast forwarding can achieve quicker convergence for  
end-node workstations and servers, and also overcome other STA related  
timeout problems. (Remember that fast forwarding should only be enabled for  
ports connected to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or for  
an end-node device.)  
• This command is the same as spanning-tree edge-port, and is only included  
for backward compatibility with earlier products. Note that this command may  
be removed for future software versions.  
Example  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5  
Console(config-if)#bridge-group 1 portfast  
Console(config-if)#  
Related Commands  
spanning-tree link-type  
This command configures the link type for Rapid Spanning Tree and Multiple  
Spanning Tree. Use the no form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
spanning-tree link-type {auto | point-to-point | shared}  
no spanning-tree link-type  
auto - Automatically derived from the duplex mode setting.  
point-to-point - Point-to-point link.  
shared - Shared medium.  
4-173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
Default Setting  
auto  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
• Specify a point-to-point link if the interface can only be connected to exactly  
one other bridge, or a shared link if it can be connected to two or more bridges.  
• When automatic detection is selected, the switch derives the link type from the  
duplex mode. A full-duplex interface is considered a point-to-point link, while  
a half-duplex interface is assumed to be on a shared link.  
• RSTP only works on point-to-point links between two bridges. If you designate  
a port as a shared link, RSTP is forbidden. Since MSTP is an extension of  
RSTP, this same restriction applies.  
Example  
Console(config)#interface ethernet ethernet 1/5  
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree link-type point-to-point  
spanning-tree mst cost  
This command configures the path cost on a spanning instance in the Multiple  
Spanning Tree. Use the no form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
spanning-tree mst instance_id cost cost  
no spanning-tree mst instance_id cost  
instance_id - Instance identifier of the spanning tree.  
(Range: 0-4094, no leading zeroes)  
cost - Path cost for an interface. (Range: 1-200,000,000)  
The recommended range is -  
• Ethernet: 200,000-20,000,000  
• Fast Ethernet: 20,000-2,000,000  
• Gigabit Ethernet: 2,000-200,000  
Default Setting  
By default, the system automatically detects the speed and duplex mode used  
on each port, and configures the path cost according to the values shown  
below. Path cost “0” is used to indicate auto-configuration mode. When the  
short path cost method is selected and the default path cost recommended by  
the IEEE 8021w standard exceeds 65,535, the default is set to 65,535.  
• Ethernet – half duplex: 2,000,000; full duplex: 1,000,000; trunk: 500,000  
• Fast Ethernet – half duplex: 200,000; full duplex: 100,000; trunk: 50,000  
• Gigabit Ethernet – full duplex: 10,000; trunk: 5,000  
4-174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Spanning Tree Commands  
4
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
• Each spanning-tree instance is associated with a unique set of VLAN IDs.  
• This command is used by the multiple spanning-tree algorithm to determine  
the best path between devices. Therefore, lower values should be assigned  
to interfaces attached to faster media, and higher values assigned to  
interfaces with slower media.  
• Use the no spanning-tree mst cost command to specify auto-configuration  
mode.  
• Path cost takes precedence over interface priority.  
Example  
Console(config)#interface ethernet ethernet 1/5  
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree mst 1 cost 50  
Console(config-if)#  
Related Commands  
spanning-tree mst port-priority  
This command configures the interface priority on a spanning instance in the  
Multiple Spanning Tree. Use the no form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
spanning-tree mst instance_id port-priority priority  
no spanning-tree mst instance_id port-priority  
instance_id - Instance identifier of the spanning tree.  
(Range: 0-4094, no leading zeroes)  
priority - Priority for an interface. (Range: 0-240 in steps of 16)  
Default Setting  
128  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
• This command defines the priority for the use of an interface in the multiple  
spanning-tree. If the path cost for all interfaces on a switch are the same, the  
interface with the highest priority (that is, lowest value) will be configured as  
an active link in the spanning tree.  
• Where more than one interface is assigned the highest priority, the interface  
with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled.  
4-175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
Example  
Console(config)#interface ethernet ethernet 1/5  
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree mst 1 port-priority 0  
Console(config-if)#  
Related Commands  
spanning-tree protocol-migration  
This command re-checks the appropriate BPDU format to send on the selected  
interface.  
Syntax  
spanning-tree protocol-migration interface  
interface  
ethernet unit/port  
- unit - Stack unit. (Range: Always 1)  
- port - Port number. (Range: 1-24/48)  
port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-32)  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
If at any time the switch detects STP BPDUs, including Configuration or  
Topology Change Notification BPDUs, it will automatically set the selected  
interface to forced STP-compatible mode. However, you can also use the  
spanning-tree protocol-migration command at any time to manually  
re-check the appropriate BPDU format to send on the selected interfaces (i.e.,  
RSTP or STP-compatible).  
Example  
Console#spanning-tree protocol-migration eth 1/5  
Console#  
show spanning-tree  
This command shows the configuration for the common spanning tree (CST) or for  
an instance within the multiple spanning tree (MST).  
Syntax  
show spanning-tree [interface | mst instance_id]  
interface  
ethernet unit/port  
- unit - Stack unit. (Range: Always 1)  
- port - Port number. (Range: 1-24/48)  
4-176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Spanning Tree Commands  
4
port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-32)  
instance_id - Instance identifier of the multiple spanning tree.  
(Range: 0-4094, no leading zeroes)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
• Use the show spanning-tree command with no parameters to display the  
spanning tree configuration for the switch for the Common Spanning Tree  
(CST) and for every interface in the tree.  
• Use the show spanning-tree interface command to display the spanning tree  
configuration for an interface within the Common Spanning Tree (CST).  
• Use the show spanning-tree mst instance_id command to display the  
spanning tree configuration for an instance within the Multiple Spanning Tree  
(MST).  
• For a description of the items displayed under “Spanning-tree information,”  
items displayed for specific interfaces, see “Displaying Interface Settings” on  
Example  
Console#show spanning-tree  
Spanning-tree information  
---------------------------------------------------------------  
Spanning tree mode:  
Spanning tree enable/disable:  
Instance:  
MSTP  
enable  
0
Vlans configuration:  
Priority:  
1-4093  
32768  
Bridge Hello Time (sec.):  
Bridge Max Age (sec.):  
Bridge Forward Delay (sec.):  
Root Hello Time (sec.):  
Root Max Age (sec.):  
Root Forward Delay (sec.):  
Max hops:  
2
20  
15  
2
20  
15  
20  
Remaining hops:  
20  
Designated Root:  
32768.0.0000ABCD0000  
Current root port:  
Current root cost:  
Number of topology changes:  
1
10000  
1
Last topology changes time (sec.): 22  
Transmission limit:  
Path Cost Method:  
3
long  
4-177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command Line Interface  
4
---------------------------------------------------------------  
Eth 1/ 1 information  
---------------------------------------------------------------  
Admin status:  
Role:  
enable  
root  
State:  
forwarding  
External admin path cost: 10000  
Internal admin cost: 10000  
External oper path cost: 10000  
Internal oper path cost: 10000  
Priority:  
128  
Designated cost:  
Designated port:  
Designated root:  
Designated bridge:  
Fast forwarding:  
Forward transitions:  
Admin edge port:  
Oper edge port:  
Admin Link type:  
Oper Link type:  
Spanning Tree Status:  
200000  
128.24  
32768.0.0000ABCD0000  
32768.0.0030F1552000  
disable  
1
enable  
disable  
auto  
point-to-point  
enable  
.
.
.
show spanning-tree mst configuration  
This command shows the configuration of the multiple spanning tree.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show spanning-tree mst configuration  
Mstp Configuration Information  
--------------------------------------------------------------  
Configuration name: R&D  
Revision level:0  
Instance Vlans  
--------------------------------------------------------------  
1
2
Console#  
4-178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
VLAN Commands  
4
VLAN Commands  
A VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network, but  
communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment. This section  
describes commands used to create VLAN groups, add port members, specify how  
VLAN tagging is used, and enable automatic VLAN registration for the selected  
interface.  
Table 4-56 VLANs  
Command Groups  
Function  
Page  
Editing VLAN Groups  
Sets up VLAN groups, including name, VID and state  
Configuring VLAN  
Interfaces  
Configures VLAN interface parameters, including ingress and egress 4-181  
tagging mode, ingress filtering, PVID, and GVRP  
Displaying VLAN  
Information  
Displays VLAN groups, status, port members, and MAC addresses  
Configuring Private VLANs Configures private VLANs, including uplink and downlink ports  
Editing VLAN Groups  
Table 4-57 Editing VLAN Groups  
Command  
Function  
Mode  
Page  
vlan database  
Enters VLAN database mode to add, change, and delete GC  
VLANs  
vlan  
Configures a VLAN, including VID, name and state  
VC  
vlan database  
This command enters VLAN database mode. All commands in this mode will take  
effect immediately.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• Use the VLAN database command mode to add, change, and delete VLANs.  
After finishing configuration changes, you can display the VLAN settings by  
entering the show vlan command.  
• Use the interface vlan command mode to define the port membership mode  
and add or remove ports from a VLAN. The results of these commands are  
written to the running-configuration file, and you can display this file by  
entering the show running-config command.  
4-179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Command Line Interface  
4
Example  
Console(config)#vlan database  
Console(config-vlan)#  
Related Commands  
vlan  
This command configures a VLAN. Use the no form to restore the default settings or  
delete a VLAN.  
Syntax  
vlan vlan-id [name vlan-name] media ethernet [state {active | suspend}]  
no vlan vlan-id [name | state]  
vlan-id - ID of configured VLAN. (Range: 1-4094, no leading zeroes)  
name - Keyword to be followed by the VLAN name.  
- vlan-name - ASCII string from 1 to 32 characters.  
media ethernet - Ethernet media type.  
state - Keyword to be followed by the VLAN state.  
- active - VLAN is operational.  
- suspend - VLAN is suspended. Suspended VLANs do not pass packets.  
Default Setting  
By default only VLAN 1 exists and is active.  
Command Mode  
VLAN Database Configuration  
Command Usage  
no vlan vlan-id deletes the VLAN.  
no vlan vlan-id name removes the VLAN name.  
no vlan vlan-id state returns the VLAN to the default state (i.e., active).  
• You can configure up to 255 VLANs on the switch.  
Example  
The following example adds a VLAN, using VLAN ID 105 and name RD5. The VLAN  
is activated by default.  
Console(config)#vlan database  
Console(config-vlan)#vlan 105 name RD5 media ethernet  
Console(config-vlan)#  
Related Commands  
4-180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
VLAN Commands  
4
Configuring VLAN Interfaces  
Table 4-58 Configuring VLAN Interfaces  
Function  
Command  
Mode  
Page  
interface vlan  
switchport mode  
Enters interface configuration mode for a specified VLAN IC  
Configures VLAN membership mode for an interface  
Configures frame types to be accepted by an interface  
IC  
IC  
switchport  
acceptable-frame-types  
switchport ingress-filtering Enables ingress filtering on an interface  
IC  
IC  
IC  
IC  
IC  
IC  
switchport native vlan  
switchport allowed vlan  
switchport gvrp  
Configures the PVID (native VLAN) of an interface  
Configures the VLANs associated with an interface  
Enables GVRP for an interface  
switchport forbidden vlan  
switchport priority default  
Configures forbidden VLANs for an interface  
Sets a port priority for incoming untagged frames  
interface vlan  
This command enters interface configuration mode for VLANs, which is used to  
configure VLAN parameters for a physical interface.  
Syntax  
interface vlan vlan-id  
vlan-id - ID of the configured VLAN. (Range: 1-4094, no leading zeroes)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
The following example shows how to set the interface configuration mode to  
VLAN 1, and then assign an IP address to the VLAN:  
Console(config)#interface vlan 1  
Console(config-if)#ip address 192.168.1.254 255.255.255.0  
Console(config-if)#  
Related Commands  
4-181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
switchport mode  
This command configures the VLAN membership mode for a port. Use the no form  
to restore the default.  
Syntax  
switchport mode {trunk | hybrid | private-vlan}  
no switchport mode  
trunk - Specifies a port as an end-point for a VLAN trunk. A trunk is a direct  
link between two switches, so the port transmits tagged frames that identify  
the source VLAN. Note that frames belonging to the port’s default VLAN  
(i.e., associated with the PVID) are also transmitted as tagged frames.  
hybrid - Specifies a hybrid VLAN interface. The port may transmit tagged  
or untagged frames.  
private-vlan - For an explanation of this command see “switchport mode  
Default Setting  
All ports are in hybrid mode with the PVID set to VLAN 1.  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Example  
The following shows how to set the configuration mode to port 1, and then set the  
switchport mode to hybrid:  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1  
Console(config-if)#switchport mode hybrid  
Console(config-if)#  
Related Commands  
switchport acceptable-frame-types  
This command configures the acceptable frame types for a port. Use the no form to  
restore the default.  
Syntax  
switchport acceptable-frame-types {all | tagged}  
no switchport acceptable-frame-types  
all - The port accepts all frames, tagged or untagged.  
tagged - The port only receives tagged frames.  
Default Setting  
All frame types  
4-182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
VLAN Commands  
4
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
When set to receive all frame types, any received frames that are untagged  
are assigned to the default VLAN.  
Example  
The following example shows how to restrict the traffic received on port 1 to tagged  
frames:  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1  
Console(config-if)#switchport acceptable-frame-types tagged  
Console(config-if)#  
Related Commands  
switchport ingress-filtering  
This command enables ingress filtering for an interface. Use the no form to restore  
the default.  
Syntax  
[no] switchport ingress-filtering  
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
• Ingress filtering only affects tagged frames.  
• If ingress filtering is disabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for  
which it is not a member, these frames will be flooded to all other ports (except  
for those VLANs explicitly forbidden on this port).  
• If ingress filtering is enabled and a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for  
which it is not a member, these frames will be discarded.  
• Ingress filtering does not affect VLAN independent BPDU frames, such as  
GVRP or STA. However, they do affect VLAN dependent BPDU frames, such  
as GMRP.  
4-183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
Example  
The following example shows how to set the interface to port 1 and then enable  
ingress filtering:  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1  
Console(config-if)#switchport ingress-filtering  
Console(config-if)#  
switchport native vlan  
This command configures the PVID (i.e., default VLAN ID) for a port. Use the no  
form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
switchport native vlan vlan-id  
no switchport native vlan  
vlan-id - Default VLAN ID for a port. (Range: 1-4094, no leading zeroes)  
Default Setting  
VLAN 1  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
• If an interface is not a member of VLAN 1 and you assign its PVID to this  
VLAN, the interface will automatically be added to VLAN 1 as an untagged  
member. For all other VLANs, an interface must first be configured as an  
untagged member before you can assign its PVID to that group.  
• If acceptable frame types is set to all or switchport mode is set to hybrid, the  
PVID will be inserted into all untagged frames entering the ingress port.  
Example  
The following example shows how to set the PVID for port 1 to VLAN 3:  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1  
Console(config-if)#switchport native vlan 3  
Console(config-if)#  
4-184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
VLAN Commands  
4
switchport allowed vlan  
This command configures VLAN groups on the selected interface. Use the no form  
to restore the default.  
Syntax  
switchport allowed vlan {add vlan-list [tagged | untagged] |  
remove vlan-list}  
no switchport allowed vlan  
add vlan-list - List of VLAN identifiers to add.  
remove vlan-list - List of VLAN identifiers to remove.  
vlan-list - Separate nonconsecutive VLAN identifiers with a comma and no  
spaces; use a hyphen to designate a range of IDs. Do not enter leading  
zeros. (Range: 1-4094).  
Default Setting  
All ports are assigned to VLAN 1 by default.  
The default frame type is untagged.  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
• A port, or a trunk with switchport mode set to hybrid, must be assigned to at  
least one VLAN as untagged.  
• If a trunk has switchport mode set to trunk (i.e., 1Q Trunk), then you can only  
assign an interface to VLAN groups as a tagged member.  
• Frames are always tagged within the switch. The tagged/untagged parameter  
used when adding a VLAN to an interface tells the switch whether to keep or  
remove the tag from a frame on egress.  
• If none of the intermediate network devices nor the host at the other end of the  
connection supports VLANs, the interface should be added to these VLANs  
as an untagged member. Otherwise, it is only necessary to add at most one  
VLAN as untagged, and this should correspond to the native VLAN for the  
interface.  
• If a VLAN on the forbidden list for an interface is manually added to that  
interface, the VLAN is automatically removed from the forbidden list for that  
interface.  
Example  
The following example shows how to add VLANs 1, 2, 5 and 6 to the allowed list as  
tagged VLANs for port 1:  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1  
Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan add 1,2,5,6 tagged  
Console(config-if)#  
4-185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
switchport forbidden vlan  
This command configures forbidden VLANs. Use the no form to remove the list of  
forbidden VLANs.  
Syntax  
switchport forbidden vlan {add vlan-list | remove vlan-list}  
no switchport forbidden vlan  
add vlan-list - List of VLAN identifiers to add.  
remove vlan-list - List of VLAN identifiers to remove.  
vlan-list - Separate nonconsecutive VLAN identifiers with a comma and no  
spaces; use a hyphen to designate a range of IDs. Do not enter leading  
zeros. (Range: 1-4094).  
Default Setting  
No VLANs are included in the forbidden list.  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
• This command prevents a VLAN from being automatically added to the  
specified interface via GVRP.  
• If a VLAN has been added to the set of allowed VLANs for an interface, then  
you cannot add it to the set of forbidden VLANs for that same interface.  
Example  
The following example shows how to prevent port 1 from being added to VLAN 3:  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1  
Console(config-if)#switchport forbidden vlan add 3  
Console(config-if)#  
Displaying VLAN Information  
Table 4-59 Show VLAN Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode  
Page  
show vlan  
Shows VLAN information  
NE, PE 4-187  
NE, PE 4-138  
NE, PE 4-140  
show interfaces status vlan Displays status for the specified VLAN interface  
show interfaces switchport Displays the administrative and operational status of an  
interface  
4-186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
VLAN Commands  
4
show vlan  
This command shows VLAN information.  
Syntax  
show vlan [id vlan-id | name vlan-name | private-vlan private-vlan-type]  
id - Keyword to be followed by the VLAN ID.  
- vlan-id - ID of the configured VLAN. (Range: 1-4094, no leading zeroes)  
name - Keyword to be followed by the VLAN name.  
- vlan-name - ASCII string from 1 to 32 characters.  
private-vlan - For an explanation of this command see “show vlan  
- private-vlan-type - Indicates the private vlan type. (Options: Community,  
Isolated, Primary)  
Default Setting  
Shows all VLANs.  
Command Mode  
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec  
Example  
The following example shows how to display information for VLAN 1:  
Console#show vlan id 1  
Vlan ID:  
Type:  
Name:  
1
Static  
DefaultVlan  
Active  
Status:  
Ports/Port channel: Eth1/ 1(S) Eth1/ 2(S) Eth1/ 3(S) Eth1/ 4(S) Eth1/ 5(S)  
Eth1/ 6(S) Eth1/ 7(S) Eth1/ 8(S) Eth1/ 9(S) Eth1/10(S)  
Eth1/11(S) Eth1/12(S) Eth1/13(S) Eth1/14(S) Eth1/15(S)  
Eth1/16(S) Eth1/17(S) Eth1/18(S) Eth1/19(S) Eth1/20(S)  
Eth1/21(S) Eth1/22(S) Eth1/23(S) Eth1/24(S) Eth1/25(S)  
Eth1/26(S) Eth1/27(S) Eth1/28(S) Eth1/29(S) Eth1/30(S)  
Eth1/31(S) Eth1/32(S) Eth1/33(S) Eth1/34(S) Eth1/35(S)  
Eth1/36(S) Eth1/37(S) Eth1/38(S) Eth1/39(S) Eth1/40(S)  
Eth1/41(S) Eth1/42(S) Eth1/43(S) Eth1/44(S) Eth1/45(S)  
Eth1/46(S) Eth1/47(S) Eth1/48(S) Eth1/49(S) Eth1/50(S)  
Eth1/51(S) Eth1/52(S)  
Console#  
4-187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
Configuring Private VLANs  
Private VLANs provide port-based security and isolation between ports within  
the assigned VLAN. This switch supports two types of private VLANs: primary/  
secondary associated groups, and stand-alone isolated VLANs. A primary VLAN  
contains promiscuous ports that can communicate with all other ports in the private  
VLAN group, while a secondary (or community) VLAN contains community ports  
that can only communicate with other hosts within the secondary VLAN and with any  
of the promiscuous ports in the associated primary VLAN. Isolated VLANs, on the  
other hand, consist a single stand-alone VLAN that contains one promiscuous port  
and one or more isolated (or host) ports. In all cases, the promiscuous ports are  
designed to provide open access to an external network such as the Internet, while  
the community or isolated ports provide restricted access to local users.  
Multiple primary VLANs can be configured on this switch, and multiple community  
VLANs can be associated with each primary VLAN. One or more isolated VLANs  
can also be configured. (Note that private VLANs and normal VLANs can exist  
simultaneously within the same switch.)  
This section describes commands used to configure private VLANs.  
Table 4-60 Private VLAN Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode  
Page  
Edit Private VLAN Groups  
private-vlan  
Adds or deletes primary and secondary VLANs  
Associates a secondary VLAN with a primary VLAN  
VC  
VC  
private-vlan association  
Configure Private VLAN Interfaces  
switchport mode  
private-vlan  
Sets an interface to host mode or promiscuous mode  
IC  
IC  
IC  
IC  
switchport private-vlan  
host-association  
Associates an interface with a secondary VLAN  
Associates an interface with an isolated VLAN  
Maps an interface to a primary VLAN  
switchport private-vlan  
isolated  
switchport private-vlan  
mapping  
Display Private VLAN Information  
show vlan private-vlan  
Shows private VLAN information  
NE,  
PE  
To configure primary/secondary associated groups, follow these steps:  
1. Use the private-vlan command to designate one or more community VLANs  
and the primary VLAN that will channel traffic outside of the community groups.  
2. Use the private-vlan association command to map the community VLAN(s) to  
the primary VLAN.  
4-188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
VLAN Commands  
4
3. Use the switchport mode private-vlan command to configure ports as  
promiscuous (i.e., having access to all ports in the primary VLAN) or host (i.e.,  
community port).  
4. Use the switchport private-vlan host-association command to assign a port  
to a secondary VLAN.  
5. Use the switchport private-vlan mapping command to assign a port to a  
primary VLAN.  
6. Use the show vlan private-vlan command to verify your configuration settings.  
To configure isolated VLANs, follow these steps:  
1. Use the private-vlan command to designate an isolated VLAN that will contain  
a single promiscuous port and one or more isolated ports.  
2. Use the switchport mode private-vlan command to configure one port as  
promiscuous (i.e., having access to all ports in the isolated VLAN) one or more  
ports as host (i.e., isolated port).  
3. Use the switchport private-vlan isolated command to assign a port to an  
isolated VLAN.  
4. Use the show vlan private-vlan command to verify your configuration settings.  
private-vlan  
Use this command to create a primary, community, or isolated private VLAN. Use  
the no form to remove the specified private VLAN.  
Syntax  
private-vlan vlan-id {community | primary | isolated}  
no private-vlan vlan-id  
vlan-id - ID of private VLAN. (Range: 1-4094, no leading zeroes).  
community - A VLAN in which traffic is restricted to host members in the  
same VLAN and to promiscuous ports in the associate primary VLAN.  
primary - A VLAN which can contain one or more community VLANs, and  
serves to channel traffic between community VLANs and other locations.  
isolated – Specifies an isolated VLAN. Ports assigned to an isolated VLAN  
can only communicate with the promiscuous port within their own VLAN.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
VLAN Configuration  
Command Usage  
• Private VLANs are used to restrict traffic to ports within the same community  
or isolated VLAN, and channel traffic passing outside the community through  
promiscuous ports. When using community VLANs, they must be mapped to  
4-189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
an associated “primary” VLAN that contains promiscuous ports. When using  
an isolated VLAN, it must be configured to contain a single promiscuous port.  
• Port membership for private VLANs is static. Once a port has been assigned  
to a private VLAN, it cannot be dynamically moved to another VLAN via GVRP.  
• Private VLAN ports cannot be set to trunked mode. (See “switchport mode” on  
page 4-182.)  
Example  
Console(config)#vlan database  
Console(config-vlan)#private-vlan 2 primary  
Console(config-vlan)#private-vlan 3 community  
Console(config)#  
private vlan association  
Use this command to associate a primary VLAN with a secondary (i.e., community)  
VLAN. Use the no form to remove all associations for the specified primary VLAN.  
Syntax  
private-vlan primary-vlan-id association {secondary-vlan-id |  
add secondary-vlan-id | remove secondary-vlan-id}  
no private-vlan primary-vlan-id association  
primary-vlan-id - ID of primary VLAN.  
(Range: 1-4094, no leading zeroes).  
secondary-vlan-id - ID of secondary (i.e, community) VLAN.  
(Range: 1-4094, no leading zeroes).  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
VLAN Configuration  
Command Usage  
Secondary VLANs provide security for group members. The associated  
primary VLAN provides a common interface for access to other network  
resources within the primary VLAN (e.g., servers configured with promiscuous  
ports) and to resources outside of the primary VLAN (via promiscuous ports).  
Example  
Console(config-vlan)#private-vlan 2 association 3  
Console(config)#  
4-190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
VLAN Commands  
4
switchport mode private-vlan  
Use this command to set the private VLAN mode for an interface. Use the no form to  
restore the default setting.  
Syntax  
switchport mode private-vlan {host | promiscuous}  
no switchport mode private-vlan  
host – This port type can subsequently be assigned to a community or  
isolated VLAN.  
promiscuous – This port type can communicate with all other promiscuous  
ports in the same primary VLAN, as well as with all the ports in the  
associated secondary VLANs.  
Default Setting  
Normal VLAN  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
• To assign a promiscuous port to a primary VLAN, use the switchport  
private-vlan mapping command. To assign a host port to a community  
VLAN, use the private-vlan host association command.  
• To assign a promiscuous port or host port to an isolated VLAN, use the  
switchport private-vlan isolated command.  
Example  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2  
Console(config-if)#switchport mode private-vlan promiscuous  
Console(config-if)#exit  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3  
Console(config-if)#switchport mode private-vlan host  
Console(config-if)#  
switchport private-vlan host-association  
Use this command to associate an interface with a secondary VLAN. Use the no  
form to remove this association.  
Syntax  
switchport private-vlan host-association secondary-vlan-id  
no switchport private-vlan host-association  
secondary-vlan-id - ID of secondary VLAN. (Range: 2-4094).  
Default Setting  
None  
4-191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
All ports assigned to a secondary (i.e., community) VLAN can pass traffic  
between group members, but must communicate with resources outside of the  
group via promiscuous ports in the associated primary VLAN.  
Example  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3  
Console(config-if)#switchport private-vlan host-association 3  
Console(config-if)#  
switchport private-vlan isolated  
Use this command to assign an interface to an isolated VLAN. Use the no form to  
remove this assignment.  
Syntax  
switchport private-vlan isolated isolated-vlan-id  
no switchport private-vlan isolated  
isolated-vlan-id - ID of isolated VLAN. (Range: 1-4094).  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
Host ports assigned to a isolated VLAN cannot pass traffic between group  
members, and must communicate with resources outside of the group via a  
promiscuous port.  
Example  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3  
Console(config-if)#switchport private-vlan isolated 3  
Console(config-if)#  
4-192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VLAN Commands  
4
switchport private-vlan mapping  
Use this command to map an interface to a primary VLAN. Use the no form to  
remove this mapping.  
Syntax  
switchport private-vlan mapping primary-vlan-id  
no switchport private-vlan mapping  
primary-vlan-id – ID of primary VLAN. (Range: 1-4094, no leading zeroes).  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
Promiscuous ports assigned to a primary VLAN can communicate with any  
other promiscuous ports in the same VLAN, and with the group members  
within any associated secondary VLANs.  
Example  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2  
Console(config-if)#switchport private-vlan mapping 2  
Console(config-if)#  
show vlan private-vlan  
Use this command to show the private VLAN configuration settings on this switch.  
Syntax  
show vlan private-vlan [community | isolated | primary]  
community – Displays all community VLANs, along with their associated  
primary VLAN and assigned host interfaces.  
isolated – Displays an isolated VLAN, along with the assigned  
promiscuous interface and host interfaces. The Primary and Secondary  
fields both display the isolated VLAN ID.  
primary – Displays all primary VLANs, along with any assigned  
promiscuous interfaces.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Executive  
4-193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
Example  
Console#show vlan private-vlan  
Primary Secondary Type  
-------- ----------- ---------- ------------------------------  
Interfaces  
5
primary  
Eth1/ 3  
5
0
6
8
community  
isolated  
Eth1/ 4 Eth1/ 5  
Console#  
GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands  
GARP VLAN Registration Protocol defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN  
information in order to automatically register VLAN members on interfaces across  
the network. This section describes how to enable GVRP for individual interfaces  
and globally for the switch, as well as how to display default configuration settings  
for the Bridge Extension MIB.  
Table 4-61 GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode  
GC  
PE  
Page  
bridge-ext gvrp  
show bridge-ext  
switchport gvrp  
switchport forbidden vlan  
show gvrp configuration  
garp timer  
Enables GVRP globally for the switch  
Shows the global bridge extension configuration  
Enables GVRP for an interface  
IC  
Configures forbidden VLANs for an interface  
IC  
Displays GVRP configuration for the selected interface NE, PE 4-196  
Sets the GARP timer for the selected function  
Shows the GARP timer for the selected function  
IC  
show garp timer  
NE, PE 4-197  
bridge-ext gvrp  
This command enables GVRP globally for the switch. Use the no form to disable it.  
Syntax  
[no] bridge-ext gvrp  
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
GVRP defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to  
register VLAN members on ports across the network. This function should be  
enabled to permit automatic VLAN registration, and to support VLANs which  
extend beyond the local switch.  
4-194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands  
4
Example  
Console(config)#bridge-ext gvrp  
Console(config)#  
show bridge-ext  
This command shows the configuration for bridge extension commands.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
the displayed items.  
Example  
Console#show bridge-ext  
Max support vlan numbers:  
Max support vlan ID:  
255  
4094  
Extended multicast filtering services: No  
Static entry individual port:  
VLAN learning:  
Yes  
IVL  
Configurable PVID tagging:  
Local VLAN capable:  
Traffic classes:  
Global GVRP status:  
GMRP:  
Yes  
No  
Enabled  
Enabled  
Disabled  
Console#  
switchport gvrp  
This command enables GVRP for a port. Use the no form to disable it.  
Syntax  
[no] switchport gvrp  
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Example  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/6  
Console(config-if)#switchport gvrp  
Console(config-if)#  
4-195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Command Line Interface  
4
show gvrp configuration  
This command shows if GVRP is enabled.  
Syntax  
show gvrp configuration [interface]  
interface  
ethernet unit/port  
- unit - This is unit 1.  
- port - Port number. (Range: 1-26/52)  
port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)  
Default Setting  
Shows both global and interface-specific configuration.  
Command Mode  
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show gvrp configuration ethernet 1/6  
Eth 1/ 6:  
GVRP configuration: Enabled  
Console#  
garp timer  
This command sets the values for the join, leave and leaveall timers. Use the no  
form to restore the timers’ default values.  
Syntax  
garp timer {join | leave | leaveall} timer_value  
no garp timer {join | leave | leaveall}  
• {join | leave | leaveall} - Which timer to set.  
timer_value - Value of timer.  
Ranges:  
join: 20-1000 centiseconds  
leave: 60-3000 centiseconds  
leaveall: 500-18000 centiseconds  
Default Setting  
• join: 20 centiseconds  
• leave: 60 centiseconds  
• leaveall: 1000 centiseconds  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
4-196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands  
4
Command Usage  
• Group Address Registration Protocol is used by GVRP and GMRP to register  
or deregister client attributes for client services within a bridged LAN. The  
default values for the GARP timers are independent of the media access  
method or data rate. These values should not be changed unless you are  
experiencing difficulties with GMRP or GVRP registration/deregistration.  
• Timer values are applied to GVRP for all the ports on all VLANs.  
• Timer values must meet the following restrictions:  
- leave >= (2 x join)  
- leaveall > leave  
Note: Set GVRP timers on all Layer 2 devices connected in the same network to  
the same values. Otherwise, GVRP may not operate successfully.  
Example  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1  
Console(config-if)#garp timer join 100  
Console(config-if)#  
Related Commands  
show garp timer  
This command shows the GARP timers for the selected interface.  
Syntax  
show garp timer [interface]  
interface  
ethernet unit/port  
- unit - This is unit 1.  
- port - Port number. (Range: 1-26/52)  
port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)  
Default Setting  
Shows all GARP timers.  
Command Mode  
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show garp timer ethernet 1/1  
Eth 1/ 1 GARP timer status:  
Join timer:  
Leave timer:  
100 centiseconds  
60 centiseconds  
Leaveall timer: 1000 centiseconds  
Console#  
4-197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command Line Interface  
4
Related Commands  
Priority Commands  
The commands described in this section allow you to specify which data packets  
have greater precedence when traffic is buffered in the switch due to congestion.  
This switch supports CoS with four priority queues for each port. Data packets in a  
port’s high-priority queue will be transmitted before those in the lower-priority  
queues. You can set the default priority for each interface, the relative weight of each  
queue, and the mapping of frame priority tags to the switch’s priority queues.  
Table 4-62 Priority Commands  
Command Groups  
Function  
Page  
Priority (Layer 2)  
Configures default priority for untagged frames, sets queue weights,  
and maps class of service tags to hardware queues  
Priority (Layer 3 and 4)  
Maps TCP ports, IP precedence tags, or IP DSCP tags to class of  
service values  
Priority Commands (Layer 2)  
Table 4-63 Priority Commands (Layer 2)  
Function  
Command  
Mode  
Page  
queue mode  
Sets the queue mode to strict priority or Weighted  
Round-Robin (WRR)  
GC  
switchport priority default Sets a port priority for incoming untagged frames  
IC  
queue bandwidth  
Assigns round-robin weights to the priority queues  
Assigns class-of-service values to the priority queues  
Shows the current queue mode  
GC  
IC  
queue cos map  
show queue mode  
show queue bandwidth  
show queue cos-map  
PE  
Shows round-robin weights assigned to the priority queues PE  
Shows the class-of-service map  
PE  
PE  
showinterfacesswitchport Displays the administrative and operational status of an  
interface  
4-198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Priority Commands  
4
queue mode  
This command sets the queue mode to strict priority or Weighted Round-Robin  
(WRR) for the class of service (CoS) priority queues. Use the no form to restore the  
default value.  
Syntax  
queue mode {strict | wrr}  
no queue mode  
strict - Services the egress queues in sequential order, transmitting all  
traffic in the higher priority queues before servicing lower priority queues.  
wrr - Weighted Round-Robin shares bandwidth at the egress ports by using  
scheduling weights 1, 2, 4, 6 for queues 0 - 3 respectively.  
Default Setting  
Weighted Round Robin  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
You can set the switch to service the queues based on a strict rule that  
requires all traffic in a higher priority queue to be processed before lower  
priority queues are serviced, or use Weighted Round-Robin (WRR) queuing  
that specifies a relative weight of each queue. WRR uses a predefined relative  
weight for each queue that determines the percentage of service time the  
switch services each queue before moving on to the next queue. This  
prevents the head-of-line blocking that can occur with strict priority queuing.  
Example  
The following example sets the queue mode to strict priority service mode:  
Console(config)#queue mode strict  
Console(config)#  
switchport priority default  
This command sets a priority for incoming untagged frames. Use the no form to  
restore the default value.  
Syntax  
switchport priority default default-priority-id  
no switchport priority default  
default-priority-id - The priority number for untagged ingress traffic.  
The priority is a number from 0 to 7. Seven is the highest priority.  
4-199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Command Line Interface  
4
Default Setting  
The priority is not set, and the default value for untagged frames received on  
the interface is zero.  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
• The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port, IP Precedence or IP DSCP,  
and default switchport priority.  
• The default priority applies for an untagged frame received on a port set to  
accept all frame types (i.e, receives both untagged and tagged frames). This  
priority does not apply to IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tagged frames. If the incoming  
frame is an IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tagged frame, the IEEE 802.1p User Priority  
bits will be used.  
• This switch provides eight priority queues for each port. It is configured to use  
Weighted Round Robin, which can be viewed with the show queue  
bandwidth command. Inbound frames that do not have VLAN tags are  
tagged with the input port’s default ingress user priority, and then placed in the  
appropriate priority queue at the output port. The default priority for all ingress  
ports is zero. Therefore, any inbound frames that do not have priority tags will  
be placed in queue 0 of the output port. (Note that if the output port is an  
untagged member of the associated VLAN, these frames are stripped of all  
VLAN tags prior to transmission.)  
Example  
The following example shows how to set a default priority on port 3 to 5:  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3  
Console(config-if)#switchport priority default 5  
queue bandwidth  
This command assigns weighted round-robin (WRR) weights to the four class of  
service (CoS) priority queues. Use the no form to restore the default weights.  
Syntax  
queue bandwidth weight1...weight4  
no queue bandwidth  
weight1...weight4 - The ratio of weights for queues 0-3 determines the  
weights used by the WRR scheduler. However, note that Queue 0 is fixed  
at a weight of 1, and cannot be configured. (Range: 1-31)  
Default Setting  
Weights 1, 2, 4, 6 are assigned to queues 0-3 respectively.  
Queue 0 is non-configurable.  
4-200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Priority Commands  
4
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
WRR controls bandwidth sharing at the egress port by defining scheduling  
weights.  
Example  
This example shows how to assign WRR weights to priority queues 1 - 3:  
Console(config)#queue bandwidth 6 9 12  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
queue cos-map  
This command assigns class of service (CoS) values to the priority queues (i.e.,  
hardware output queues 0 - 3). Use the no form set the CoS map to the default  
values.  
Syntax  
queue cos-map queue_id [cos1 ... cosn]  
no queue cos-map  
queue_id - The ID of the priority queue.  
Ranges are 0 to 3, where 3 is the highest priority queue.  
cos1 .. cosn - The CoS values that are mapped to the queue ID. It is a  
space-separated list of numbers. The CoS value is a number from 0 to 7,  
where 7 is the highest priority.  
Default Setting  
This switch supports Class of Service by using four priority queues, with  
Weighted Round Robin queuing for each port. Eight separate traffic classes  
are defined in IEEE 802.1p. The default priority levels are assigned according  
to recommendations in the IEEE 802.1p standard as shown below.  
Table 4-64 Default CoS Priority Levels  
Queue  
0
1
2
3
Priority  
1, 2  
0, 3  
4, 5  
6, 7  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
4-201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
Command Usage  
• CoS values assigned at the ingress port are also used at the egress port.  
• This command sets the CoS priority for all interfaces.  
Example  
The following example shows how to map CoS values 0, 1 and 2 to egress queue 0,  
value 3 to egress queue 1, values 4 and 5 to egress queue 2, and values 6 and 7 to  
egress queue 3:  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1  
Console(config-if)#queue cos-map 0 0 1 2  
Console(config-if)#queue cos-map 1 3  
Console(config-if)#queue cos-map 2 4 5  
Console(config-if)#queue cos-map 3 6 7  
Console(config-if)#end  
Console#show queue cos-map ethernet 1/1  
Information of Eth 1/1  
CoS Value  
: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7  
Priority Queue: 0 0 0 1 2 2 3 3  
Console#  
Related Commands  
show queue mode  
This command shows the current queue mode.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show queue mode  
Queue mode: wrr  
Console#  
show queue bandwidth  
This command displays the weighted round-robin (WRR) bandwidth allocation for  
the four priority queues.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
4-202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Priority Commands  
4
Example  
Console#show queue bandwidth  
Queue ID Weight  
-------- ------  
0
1
2
3
1
2
4
6
Console#  
show queue cos-map  
This command shows the class of service priority map.  
Syntax  
show queue cos-map [interface]  
interface  
ethernet unit/port  
- unit - This is unit 1.  
- port - Port number. (Range: 1-26/52)  
port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show queue cos-map ethernet 1/1  
Information of Eth 1/1  
CoS Value  
: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7  
Priority Queue: 0 0 0 1 2 2 3 3  
Console#  
4-203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
Priority Commands (Layer 3 and 4)  
Table 4-65 Priority Commands (Layer 3 and 4)  
Function  
Command  
Mode  
GC  
IC  
Page  
map ip port  
Enables TCP class of service mapping  
map ip port  
Maps TCP socket to a class of service  
map ip precedence  
map ip precedence  
map ip dscp  
Enables IP precedence class of service mapping  
Maps IP precedence value to a class of service  
Enables IP DSCP class of service mapping  
Maps IP DSCP value to a class of service  
GC  
IC  
GC  
IC  
map ip dscp  
map access-list ip  
Sets the CoS value and corresponding output queue for  
packets matching an ACL rule  
IC  
map access-list mac  
Sets the CoS value and corresponding output queue for  
packets matching an ACL rule  
IC  
show map ip port  
Shows the IP port map  
PE  
PE  
PE  
show map ip precedence Shows the IP precedence map  
show map ip dscp Shows the IP DSCP map  
show map access-list ip Shows CoS value mapped to an access list for an interface PE  
show map access-list mac Shows CoS value mapped to an access list for an interface PE  
map ip port (Global Configuration)  
This command enables IP port mapping (i.e., class of service mapping for TCP/UDP  
sockets). Use the no form to disable IP port mapping.  
Syntax  
[no] map ip port  
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port, IP Precedence or IP DSCP,  
and default switchport priority.  
Example  
The following example shows how to enable TCP/UDP port mapping globally:  
Console(config)#map ip port  
Console(config)#  
4-204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Priority Commands  
4
map ip port (Interface Configuration)  
This command set IP port priority (i.e., TCP/UDP port priority). Use the no form to  
remove a specific setting.  
Syntax  
map ip port port number cos cos-value  
no map ip port port-number  
port-number - 16-bit TCP/UDP port number.(Range 1-65535)  
cos-value - Class-of-Service value. (Range: 0-7)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
• The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port, IP Precedence or IP DSCP,  
and default switchport priority.  
• This command sets the IP port priority for all interfaces.  
Example  
The following example shows how to map HTTP traffic to CoS value 0:  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5  
Console(config-if)#map ip port 80 cos 0  
Console(config-if)#  
map ip precedence (Global Configuration)  
This command enables IP precedence mapping (i.e., IP Type of Service). Use the  
no form to disable IP precedence mapping.  
Syntax  
[no] map ip precedence  
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port, IP Precedence or IP DSCP,  
and default switchport priority.  
• IP Precedence and IP DSCP cannot both be enabled. Enabling one of these  
priority types will automatically disable the other type.  
4-205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
Example  
The following example shows how to enable IP precedence mapping globally:  
Console(config)#map ip precedence  
Console(config)#  
map ip precedence (Interface Configuration)  
This command sets IP precedence priority (i.e., IP Type of Service priority). Use the  
no form to restore the default table.  
Syntax  
map ip precedence ip-precedence-value cos cos-value  
no map ip precedence  
precedence-value - 3-bit precedence value. (Range: 0-7)  
cos-value - Class-of-Service value (Range: 0-7)  
Default Setting  
The list below shows the default priority mapping.  
Table 4-66 Mapping IP Precedence Values  
IP Precedence Value  
CoS Value  
0
0
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
• The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port, IP Precedence or IP DSCP,  
and default switchport priority.  
• IP Precedence values are mapped to default Class of Service values on a  
one-to-one basis according to recommendations in the IEEE 802.1p standard,  
and then subsequently mapped to the eight hardware priority queues.  
• This command sets the IP Precedence for all interfaces.  
Example  
The following example shows how to map IP precedence value 1 to CoS value 0:  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5  
Console(config-if)#map ip precedence 1 cos 0  
Console(config-if)#  
4-206  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Priority Commands  
4
map ip dscp (Global Configuration)  
This command enables IP DSCP mapping (i.e., Differentiated Services Code Point  
mapping). Use the no form to disable IP DSCP mapping.  
Syntax  
[no] map ip dscp  
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port, IP Precedence or IP DSCP,  
and default switchport priority.  
• IP Precedence and IP DSCP cannot both be enabled. Enabling one of these  
priority types will automatically disable the other type.  
Example  
The following example shows how to enable IP DSCP mapping globally:  
Console(config)#map ip dscp  
Console(config)#  
map ip dscp (Interface Configuration)  
This command sets IP DSCP priority (i.e., Differentiated Services Code Point  
priority). Use the no form to restore the default table.  
Syntax  
map ip dscp dscp-value cos cos-value  
no map ip dscp  
dscp-value - 8-bit DSCP value. (Range: 0-63)  
cos-value - Class-of-Service value (Range: 0-7)  
4-207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Command Line Interface  
4
Default Setting  
The DSCP default values are defined in the following table. Note that all the  
DSCP values that are not specified are mapped to CoS value 0.  
Table 4-67 IP DSCP to CoS Vales  
IP DSCP Value  
CoS Value  
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10, 12, 14, 16  
18, 20, 22, 24  
26, 28, 30, 32, 34, 36  
38, 40, 42  
48  
46, 56  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
• The precedence for priority mapping is IP Port, IP Precedence or IP DSCP,  
and default switchport priority.  
• DSCP priority values are mapped to default Class of Service values according  
to recommendations in the IEEE 802.1p standard, and then subsequently  
mapped to the four hardware priority queues.  
• This command sets the IP DSCP priority for all interfaces.  
Example  
The following example shows how to map IP DSCP value 1 to CoS value 0:  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5  
Console(config-if)#map ip dscp 1 cos 0  
Console(config-if)#  
show map ip port  
Use this command to show the IP port priority map.  
Syntax  
show map ip port [interface]  
interface  
ethernet unit/port  
- unit - This is unit 1.  
- port - Port number. (Range: 1-26/52)  
port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)  
4-208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Priority Commands  
4
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
The following shows that HTTP traffic has been mapped to CoS value 0:  
Console#show map ip port  
TCP port mapping status: disabled  
Port  
--------- -------- ---  
Eth 1/ 5 80  
Console#  
Port no. COS  
0
Related Commands  
show map ip precedence  
This command shows the IP precedence priority map.  
Syntax  
show map ip precedence [interface]  
interface  
ethernet unit/port  
- unit - This is unit 1.  
- port - Port number. (Range: 1-26/52)  
port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
4-209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
Example  
Console#show map ip precedence ethernet 1/5  
Precedence mapping status: disabled  
Port  
Precedence COS  
--------- ---------- ---  
Eth 1/ 5  
Eth 1/ 5  
Eth 1/ 5  
Eth 1/ 5  
Eth 1/ 5  
Eth 1/ 5  
Eth 1/ 5  
Eth 1/ 5  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Console#  
Related Commands  
show map ip dscp  
This command shows the IP DSCP priority map.  
Syntax  
show map ip dscp [interface]  
interface  
ethernet unit/port  
- unit - This is unit 1.  
- port - Port number. (Range: 1-26/52)  
port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
4-210  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Multicast Filtering Commands  
4
Example  
Console#show map ip dscp ethernet 1/1  
DSCP mapping status: disabled  
Port  
DSCP COS  
--------- ---- ---  
Eth 1/ 1  
Eth 1/ 1  
Eth 1/ 1  
Eth 1/ 1  
0
1
2
3
0
0
0
0
.
.
.
Eth 1/ 1  
Eth 1/ 1  
Eth 1/ 1  
61  
62  
63  
0
0
0
Console#  
Related Commands  
Multicast Filtering Commands  
This switch uses IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) to query for any  
attached hosts that want to receive a specific multicast service. It identifies the ports  
containing hosts requesting a service and sends data out to those ports only. It then  
propagates the service request up to any neighboring multicast switch/router to  
ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service.  
Table 4-68 Multicast Filtering Commands  
Command Groups  
Function  
Page  
IGMP Snooping  
Configures multicast groups via IGMP snooping or static assignment, 4-211  
sets the IGMP version, displays current snooping and query settings,  
and displays the multicast service and group members  
IGMP Query  
Configures IGMP query parameters for multicast filtering at Layer 2 4-216  
Static Multicast Routing  
Configures static multicast router ports  
IGMP Filtering and  
Throttling  
Configures IGMP filtering and throttling controls  
Multicast VLAN Registration Configures a single network-wide multicast VLAN shared by hosts  
residing in other standard or private VLAN groups, preserving  
security and data isolation for normal traffic  
IGMP Snooping Commands  
Table 4-69 IGMP Snooping Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode  
GC  
Page  
ip igmp snooping  
Enables IGMP snooping  
ip igmp snooping vlan static Adds an interface as a member of a multicast group  
GC  
4-211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Command Line Interface  
4
Table 4-69 IGMP Snooping Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode  
GC  
Page  
ip igmp snooping version  
Configures the IGMP version for snooping  
ip igmp snooping  
immediate-leave  
Enables IGMP immediate leave for a VLAN interface  
IC  
show ip igmp snooping  
Shows the IGMP snooping and query configuration  
Shows the IGMP snooping MAC multicast list  
PE  
PE  
show mac-address-table  
multicast  
ip igmp snooping  
This command enables IGMP snooping on this switch. Use the no form to disable it.  
Syntax  
[no] ip igmp snooping  
Default Setting  
Enabled  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
The following example enables IGMP snooping.  
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping  
Console(config)#  
ip igmp snooping vlan static  
This command adds a port to a multicast group. Use the no form to remove the port.  
Syntax  
[no] ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id static ip-address interface  
vlan-id - VLAN ID (Range: 1-4094)  
ip-address - IP address for multicast group  
interface  
ethernet unit/port  
- unit - This is unit 1.  
- port - Port number. (Range: 1-26/52)  
port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)  
Default Setting  
None  
4-212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Multicast Filtering Commands  
4
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
The following shows how to statically configure a multicast group on a port:  
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping vlan 1 static 224.0.0.12 ethernet 1/5  
Console(config)#  
ip igmp snooping version  
This command configures the IGMP snooping version. Use the no form to restore  
the default.  
Syntax  
ip igmp snooping version {1 | 2}  
no ip igmp snooping version  
1 - IGMP Version 1  
2 - IGMP Version 2  
Default Setting  
IGMP Version 2  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• All systems on the subnet must support the same version. If there are legacy  
devices in your network that only support Version 1, you will also have to  
configure this switch to use Version 1.  
• Some commands are only enabled for IGMPv2, including ip igmp  
query-max-response-time and ip igmp query-timeout.  
Example  
The following configures the switch to use IGMP Version 1:  
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping version 1  
Console(config)#  
ip igmp snooping immediate-leave  
This command enables IGMP immediate leave for specific VLAN. Use the no form  
to disable the feature for a VLAN.  
Syntax  
[no] ip igmp snooping immediate-leave  
4-213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (VLAN)  
Command Usage  
The IGMP snooping immediate-leave feature enables a Layer 2 LAN interface  
to be removed from the multicast forwarding table without first sending an  
IGMP group-specific query to the interface. Upon receiving a group-specific  
IGMPv2 leave message, the switch immediately removes the interface from  
the Layer 2 forwarding table entry for that multicast group, unless a multicast  
router was learned on the port.  
Example  
Console(config)#interface vlan 1  
Console(config-if)#ip igmp snooping immediate-leave  
Console(config-if)#  
show ip igmp snooping  
This command shows the IGMP snooping configuration.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
description of the displayed items.  
Example  
The following shows the current IGMP snooping configuration:  
Console#show ip igmp snooping  
Service status:  
Querier status:  
Query count:  
Enabled  
Enabled  
2
Query interval:  
125 sec  
Query max response time: 10 sec  
Router port expire time: 300 sec  
IGMP snooping version:  
Console#  
Version 2  
show mac-address-table multicast  
This command shows known multicast addresses.  
4-214  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Multicast Filtering Commands  
4
Syntax  
show mac-address-table multicast [vlan vlan-id] [user | igmp-snooping]  
vlan-id - VLAN ID (1 to 4094)  
user - Display only the user-configured multicast entries.  
igmp-snooping - Display only entries learned through IGMP snooping.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
Member types displayed include IGMP or USER, depending on selected  
options.  
Example  
The following shows the multicast entries learned through IGMP snooping for  
VLAN 1:  
Console#show mac-address-table multicast vlan 1 igmp-snooping  
VLAN M'cast IP addr. Member ports Type  
---- --------------- ------------ -------  
1
224.1.2.3  
Eth1/11  
IGMP  
Console#  
4-215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Line Interface  
4
IGMP Query Commands (Layer 2)  
Table 4-70 IGMP Query Commands (Layer 2)  
Function  
Allows this device to act as the querier for IGMP snooping GC  
Command  
Mode  
Page  
ip igmp snooping querier  
ip igmp snooping  
query-count  
Configures the query count  
Configures the query interval  
Configures the report delay  
Configures the query timeout  
GC  
GC  
GC  
GC  
ip igmp snooping  
query-interval  
ip igmp snooping  
query-max-response-time  
ip igmp snooping  
router-port-expire-time  
ip igmp snooping querier  
This command enables the switch as an IGMP querier. Use the no form to disable it.  
Syntax  
[no] ip igmp snooping querier  
Default Setting  
Enabled  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
If enabled, the switch will serve as querier if elected. The querier is  
responsible for asking hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic.  
Example  
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping querier  
Console(config)#  
ip igmp snooping query-count  
This command configures the query count. Use the no form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
ip igmp snooping query-count count  
no ip igmp snooping query-count  
count - The maximum number of queries issued for which there has been  
no response before the switch takes action to drop a client from the  
multicast group. (Range: 2-10)  
4-216  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Multicast Filtering Commands  
4
Default Setting  
2 times  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
The query count defines how long the querier waits for a response from a  
multicast client before taking action. If a querier has sent a number of queries  
defined by this command, but a client has not responded, a countdown timer  
is started using the time defined by ip igmp snooping query-max-  
response-time. If the countdown finishes, and the client still has not  
responded, then that client is considered to have left the multicast group.  
Example  
The following shows how to configure the query count to 10:  
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping query-count 10  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
ip igmp snooping query-interval  
This command configures the query interval. Use the no form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
ip igmp snooping query-interval seconds  
no ip igmp snooping query-interval  
seconds - The frequency at which the switch sends IGMP host-query  
messages. (Range: 60-125)  
Default Setting  
125 seconds  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
The following shows how to configure the query interval to 100 seconds:  
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping query-interval 100  
Console(config)#  
4-217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
ip igmp snooping query-max-response-time  
This command configures the query report delay. Use the no form to restore the  
default.  
Syntax  
ip igmp snooping query-max-response-time seconds  
no ip igmp snooping query-max-response-time  
seconds - The report delay advertised in IGMP queries. (Range: 5-25)  
Default Setting  
10 seconds  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• The switch must be using IGMPv2 for this command to take effect.  
• This command defines the time after a query, during which a response is  
expected from a multicast client. If a querier has sent a number of queries  
defined by the ip igmp snooping query-count, but a client has not  
responded, a countdown timer is started using an initial value set by this  
command. If the countdown finishes, and the client still has not responded,  
then that client is considered to have left the multicast group.  
Example  
The following shows how to configure the maximum response time to 20 seconds:  
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping query-max-response-time 20  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
ip igmp snooping router-port-expire-time  
This command configures the query timeout. Use the no form to restore the default.  
Syntax  
ip igmp snooping router-port-expire-time seconds  
no ip igmp snooping router-port-expire-time  
seconds - The time the switch waits after the previous querier stops before  
it considers the router port (i.e., the interface which had been receiving  
query packets) to have expired.  
(Range: 300-500)  
4-218  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Multicast Filtering Commands  
4
Default Setting  
300 seconds  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
The switch must use IGMPv2 for this command to take effect.  
Example  
The following shows how to configure the default timeout to 300 seconds:  
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping router-port-expire-time 300  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
Static Multicast Routing Commands  
Table 4-71 Static Multicast Routing Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode  
Page  
ip igmp snooping vlan  
mrouter  
Adds a multicast router port  
GC  
show ip igmp snooping  
mrouter  
Shows multicast router ports  
PE  
ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter  
This command statically configures a multicast router port. Use the no form to  
remove the configuration.  
Syntax  
[no] ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id mrouter interface  
vlan-id - VLAN ID (Range: 1-4094)  
interface  
ethernet unit/port  
- unit - This is unit 1.  
- port - Port number. (Range: 1-26/52)  
port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)  
Default Setting  
No static multicast router ports are configured.  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
4-219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Command Line Interface  
4
Command Usage  
Depending on your network connections, IGMP snooping may not always be  
able to locate the IGMP querier. Therefore, if the IGMP querier is a known  
multicast router/switch connected over the network to an interface (port or  
trunk) on your router, you can manually configure that interface to join all the  
current multicast groups.  
Example  
The following shows how to configure port 11 as a multicast router port within VLAN 1:  
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping vlan 1 mrouter ethernet 1/11  
Console(config)#  
show ip igmp snooping mrouter  
This command displays information on statically configured and dynamically learned  
multicast router ports.  
Syntax  
show ip igmp snooping mrouter [vlan vlan-id]  
vlan-id - VLAN ID (Range: 1-4094)  
Default Setting  
Displays multicast router ports for all configured VLANs.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
Multicast router port types displayed include Static.  
Example  
The following shows that port 11 in VLAN 1 is attached to a multicast router:  
Console#show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1  
VLAN M'cast Router Ports Type  
---- ------------------- -------  
1
2
Eth 1/11 Static  
Eth 1/12 Static  
Console#  
4-220  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Multicast Filtering Commands  
4
IGMP Filtering and Throttling Commands  
In certain switch applications, the administrator may want to control the multicast  
services that are available to end users. For example, an IP/TV service based on a  
specific subscription plan. The IGMP filtering feature fulfills this requirement by  
restricting access to specified multicast services on a switch port and IGMP  
throttling limits the number of simultaneous multicast groups a port can join.  
Table 4-72 IGMP Filtering and Throttling Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode  
GC  
Page  
ip igmp filter  
ip igmp profile  
Enables IGMP filtering and throttling on the switch  
Sets a profile number and enters IGMP filter profile  
configuration mode  
GC  
permit, deny  
range  
Sets a profile access mode to permit or deny  
IPC  
Specifies one or a range of multicast addresses for a profile IPC  
ip igmp filter  
ip igmp max-groups  
Assigns an IGMP filter profile to an interface  
IC  
Specifies an IGMP throttling number for an interface  
IC  
ip igmp max-groups action Sets the IGMP throttling action for an interface  
IC  
show ip igmp filter  
Displays the IGMP filtering status  
PE  
PE  
PE  
show ip igmp profile  
Displays IGMP profiles and settings  
show ip igmp throttle  
interface  
Displays the IGMP throttling setting for interfaces  
ip igmp filter (Global Configuration)  
This command globally enables IGMP filtering and throttling on the switch. Use the  
no form to disable the feature.  
Syntax  
[no] ip igmp filter  
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• IGMP filtering enables you to assign a profile to a switch port that specifies  
multcast groups that are permitted or denied on the port. An IGMP filter profile  
can contain one or more, or a range of multicast addresses, but only one  
profile can be assigned to a port. When enabled, IGMP join reports received  
on the port are checked against the filter profile. If a requested multicast group  
is permitted, the IGMP join report is forwarded as normal. If a requested  
multicast group is denied, the IGMP join report is dropped.  
4-221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Command Line Interface  
4
• IGMP filtering and throttling only applies to dynamically learned multicast  
groups, it does not apply to statically configured groups.  
• The IGMP filtering feature operates in the same manner when MVR is used  
to forward the multicast traffic.  
Example  
Console(config)#ip igmp filter  
Console(config)#  
ip igmp profile  
This command creates an IGMP filter profile number and enters IGMP profile  
configuration mode. Use the no form to delete a profile number.  
Syntax  
[no] ip igmp profile profile-number  
profile-number - An IGMP filter profile number. (Range: 1-4294967295)  
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
A profile defines the multicast groups that a subscriber is permitted or denied  
to join. The same profile can be applied to many interfaces, but only one  
profile can be assigned to one interface. Each profile has only one access  
mode; either permit or deny.  
Example  
Console(config)#ip igmp profile 19  
Console(config-igmp-profile)#  
permit, deny  
This command sets the access mode for an IGMP filter profile. Use the no form to  
delete a profile number.  
Syntax  
{permit | deny}  
Default Setting  
Deny  
Command Mode  
IGMP Profile Configuration  
4-222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Multicast Filtering Commands  
4
Command Usage  
• Each profile has only one access mode; either permit or deny.  
• When the access mode is set to permit, IGMP join reports are processed  
when a multicast group falls within the controlled range. When the access  
mode is set to deny, IGMP join reports are only processed when a multicast  
group is not in the controlled range.  
Example  
Console(config)#ip igmp profile 19  
Console(config-igmp-profile)#permit  
Console(config-igmp-profile)#  
range  
This command specifies multicast group addresses for a profile. Use the no form to  
delete addresses from a profile.  
Syntax  
[no] range low-ip-address [high-ip-address]  
low-ip-address - A valid IP address of a multicast group or start of a group  
range.  
high-ip-address - A valid IP address for the end of a multicast group range.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
IGMP Profile Configuration  
Command Usage  
Enter this command multiple times to specify more than one multicast address  
or address range for a profile.  
Example  
Console(config)#ip igmp profile 19  
Console(config-igmp-profile)#range 239.1.1.1  
Console(config-igmp-profile)#range 239.2.3.1 239.2.3.100  
ip igmp filter (Interface Configuration)  
This command assigns an IGMP filtering profile to an interface on the switch. Use  
the no form to remove a profile from an interface.  
Syntax  
[no] ip igmp filter profile-number  
profile-number - An IGMP filter profile number. (Range: 1-4294967295)  
4-223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration  
Command Usage  
• The IGMP filtering profile must first be created with the ip igmp profile  
command before being able to assign it to an interface.  
• Only one profile can be assigned to an interface.  
• A profile can be assigned to a trunk interface. When ports are configured as  
trunk members, the trunk uses the filtering profile assigned to the first port  
member in the trunk.  
Example  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1  
Console(config-if)#ip igmp filter 19  
Console(config-if)#  
ip igmp max-groups  
This command sets the IGMP throttling number for an interface on the switch. Use  
the no form to restore the default setting.  
Syntax  
ip igmp max-groups number  
no ip igmp max-groups  
number - The maximum number of multicast groups an interface can join  
at the same time. (Range: 0-64)  
Default Setting  
64  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration  
Command Usage  
• IGMP throttling sets a maximum number of multicast groups that a port can  
join at the same time. When the maximum number of groups is reached on a  
port, the switch can take one of two actions; either “deny” or “replace.” If the  
action is set to deny, any new IGMP join reports will be dropped. If the action  
is set to replace, the switch randomly removes an existing group and replaces  
it with the new multicast group.  
• IGMP throttling can also be set on a trunk interface. When ports are  
configured as trunk members, the trunk uses the throttling settings of the first  
port member in the trunk.  
4-224  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Multicast Filtering Commands  
4
Example  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1  
Console(config-if)#ip igmp max-groups 10  
Console(config-if)#  
ip igmp max-groups action  
This command sets the IGMP throttling action for an interface on the switch.  
Syntax  
ip igmp max-groups action <replace | deny>  
replace - The new multicast group replaces an existing group.  
deny - The new multicast group join report is dropped.  
Default Setting  
Deny  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration  
Command Usage  
When the maximum number of groups is reached on a port, the switch can  
take one of two actions; either “deny” or “replace.” If the action is set to deny,  
any new IGMP join reports will be dropped. If the action is set to replace, the  
switch randomly removes an existing group and replaces it with the new  
multicast group.  
Example  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1  
Console(config-if)#ip igmp max-groups action replace  
Console(config-if)#  
show ip igmp filter  
This command displays the global and interface settings for IGMP filtering.  
Syntax  
show ip igmp filter [interface]  
interface  
ethernet unit/port  
- unit - This is unit 1.  
- port - Port number. (Range: 1-26/52)  
port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)  
Default Setting  
None  
4-225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show ip igmp filter  
IGMP filter enable  
Console#show ip igmp filter interface ethernet 1/1  
Information of Eth 1/1  
IGMP Profile 19  
deny  
range 239.1.1.1 239.1.1.1  
range 239.2.3.1 239.2.3.100  
Console#  
show ip igmp profile  
This command displays IGMP filtering profiles created on the switch.  
Syntax  
show ip igmp profile [profile-number]  
profile-number - An existing IGMP filter profile number.  
(Range: 1-4294967295)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show ip igmp profile  
IGMP Profile 19  
IGMP Profile 50  
Console#show ip igmp profile 19  
IGMP Profile 19  
deny  
range 239.1.1.1 239.1.1.1  
range 239.2.3.1 239.2.3.100  
Console#  
show ip igmp throttle interface  
This command displays the interface settings for IGMP throttling.  
Syntax  
show ip igmp throttle interface [interface]  
interface  
ethernet unit/port  
- unit - This is unit 1.  
- port - Port number. (Range: 1-26/52)  
4-226  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Multicast Filtering Commands  
4
port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-4)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
Using this command without specifying an interface displays all interfaces.  
Example  
Console#show ip igmp throttle interface ethernet 1/1  
Information of Eth 1/1  
status : TRUE  
action : deny  
max multicast groups : 32  
current multicast groups : 0  
Console#  
Multicast VLAN Registration Commands  
This section describes commands used to configure Multicast VLAN Registration  
(MVR). A single network-wide VLAN can be used to transmit multicast traffic (such  
as television channels) across a service provider’s network. Any multicast traffic  
entering an MVR VLAN is sent to all subscribers. This can significantly reduce to  
processing overhead required to dynamically monitor and establish the distribution  
tree for a normal multicast VLAN. Also note that MVR maintains the user isolation  
and data security provided by VLAN segregation by passing only multicast traffic  
into other VLANs to which the subscribers belong.  
Table 4-73 Multicast VLAN Registration Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode Page  
mvr  
Globally enables MVR, statically configures MVR group  
address(es), or specifies the MVR VLAN identifier  
mvr  
Configures an interface as an MVR receiver or source port, IC  
enables immediate leave capability, or configures an  
interface as a static member of the MVR VLAN  
show mvr  
Shows information about the global MVR configuration  
settings, the interfaces attached to the MVR VLAN, or the  
multicast groups assigned to the MVR VLAN  
PE  
4-227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
mvr (Global Configuration)  
This command enables Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) globally on the switch,  
statically configures MVR multicast group IP address(es) using the group keyword,  
or specifies the MVR VLAN identifier using the vlan keyword. Use the no form of  
this command without any keywords to globally disable MVR. Use the no form with  
the group keyword to remove a specific address or range of addresses. Or use the  
no form with the vlan keyword restore the default MVR VLAN.  
Syntax  
[no] mvr [group ip-address [count] | vlan vlan-id]  
ip-address - IP address for an MVR multicast group.  
(Range: 224.0.1.0 - 239.255.255.255)  
count - The number of contiguous MVR group addresses. (Range: 1-255)  
vlan-id - MVR VLAN ID (Range: 1-4094)  
Default Setting  
• MVR is disabled.  
• No MVR group address is defined.  
• The default number of contiguous addresses is 0.  
• MVR VLAN ID is 1.  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• Use the mvr group command to statically configure all multicast group  
addresses that will join the MVR VLAN. Any multicast data associated an  
MVR group is sent from all source ports, and to all receiver ports that have  
registered to receive data from that multicast group.  
• The IP address range from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255 is used for multicast  
streams. MVR group addresses cannot fall within the reserved IP multicast  
address range of 224.0.0.x.  
• IGMP snooping must be enabled to a allow a subscriber to dynamically join or  
leave an MVR group (see ip igmp snooping on page 4-212). Note that only  
IGMP version 2 or 3 hosts can issue multicast join or leave messages.  
Example  
The following example enables MVR globally, and configures a range of MVR group  
addresses:  
Console(config)#mvr  
Console(config)#mvr group 228.1.23.1 10  
Console(config)#  
4-228  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Multicast Filtering Commands  
4
mvr (Interface Configuration)  
This command configures an interface as an MVR receiver or source port using the  
type keyword, enables immediate leave capability using the immediate keyword, or  
configures an interface as a static member of the MVR VLAN using the group  
keyword. Use the no form to restore the default settings.  
Syntax  
[no] mvr {type {receiver | source} | immediate | group ip-address}  
receiver - Configures the interface as a subscriber port that can receive  
multicast data.  
source - Configure the interface as an uplink port that can send and receive  
multicast data for the configured multicast groups.  
immediate - Configures the switch to immediately remove an interface from  
a multicast stream as soon as it receives a leave message for that group.  
ip-address - Statically configures an interface to receive multicast traffic  
from the IP address specified for an MVR multicast group.  
(Range: 224.0.1.0 - 239.255.255.255)  
Default Setting  
• The port type is not defined.  
• Immediate leave is disabled.  
• No receiver port is a member of any configured multicast group.  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)  
Command Usage  
• A port which is not configured as an MVR receiver or source port can use  
IGMP snooping to join or leave multicast groups using the standard rules for  
multicast filtering.  
• MVR receiver ports cannot be members of a trunk. Receiver ports can belong  
to different VLANs, but should not be configured as a member of the MVR  
VLAN. IGMP snooping can be used to allow a receiver port to dynamically join  
or leave multicast groups within the MVR VLAN. Multicast groups can also be  
statically assigned to a receiver port using the group keyword.  
• One or more interfaces may be configured as MVR source ports. A source  
port is able to both receive and send data for multicast groups which it has  
joined through IGMP snooping or which have been statically assigned using  
the group keyword.  
• The IP address range from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255 is used for multicast  
streams. MVR group addresses cannot fall within the reserved IP multicast  
address range of 224.0.0.x.  
• Immediate leave applies only to receiver ports. When enabled, the receiver  
port is immediately removed from the multicast group identified in the leave  
message. When immediate leave is disabled, the switch follows the standard  
rules by sending a group-specific query to the receiver port and waiting for a  
4-229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
response to determine if there are any remaining subscribers for that multicast  
group before removing the port from the group list.  
• Using immediate leave can speed up leave latency, but should only be  
enabled on a port attached to one multicast subscriber to avoid disrupting  
services to other group members attached to the same interface.  
• Immediate leave does not apply to multicast groups which have been  
statically assigned to a port.  
• IGMP snooping must be enabled to a allow a subscriber to dynamically join or  
leave an MVR group (see ip igmp snooping on page 4-212). Note that only  
IGMP version 2 or 3 hosts can issue multicast join or leave messages.  
Example  
The following configures one source port and several receiver ports on the switch,  
enables immediate leave on one of the receiver ports, and statically assigns a  
multicast group to another receiver port:  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5  
Console(config-if)#mvr type source  
Console(config-if)#exit  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/6  
Console(config-if)#mvr type receiver  
Console(config-if)#mvr immediate  
Console(config-if)#exit  
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/7  
Console(config-if)#mvr type receiver  
Console(config-if)#mvr group 225.0.0.5  
Console(config-if)#  
show mvr  
This command shows information about the global MVR configuration settings when  
entered without any keywords, the interfaces attached to the MVR VLAN using the  
interface keyword, or the multicast groups assigned to the MVR VLAN using the  
members keyword.  
Syntax  
show mvr [interface [interface] | members [ip-address]]  
interface  
ethernet unit/port  
- unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1)  
- port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)  
port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-12)  
ip-address - IP address for an MVR multicast group.  
(Range: 224.0.1.0 - 239.255.255.255)  
Default Setting  
Displays global configuration settings for MVR when no keywords are used.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
4-230  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Multicast Filtering Commands  
4
Command Usage  
Enter this command without any keywords to display the global settings for  
MVR. Use the interface keyword to display information about interfaces  
attached to the MVR VLAN. Or use the members keyword to display  
information about multicast groups assigned to the MVR VLAN.  
Example  
The following shows the global MVR settings:  
Console#show mvr  
MVR Status:enable  
MVR running status:TRUE  
MVR multicast vlan:1  
MVR Max Multicast Groups:255  
MVR Current multicast groups:10  
Console#  
Table 4-74 show mvr - display description  
Description  
Shows if MVR is globally enabled on the switch.  
Field  
MVR Status  
MVR running status  
Indicates whether or not all necessary conditions in the MVR environment  
are satisfied.  
MVR multicast vlan  
Shows the VLAN used to transport all MVR multicast traffic.  
MVR Max Multicast Groups  
Shows the maximum number of multicast groups which can assigned to the  
MVR VLAN.  
MVR Current multicast groups Shows the number of multicast groups currently assigned to the MVR VLAN.  
The following displays information about the interfaces attached to the MVR VLAN:  
Console#show mvr interface  
Port  
Type  
Status  
-------------  
ACTIVE/UP  
Immediate Leave  
---------------  
Disable  
Disable  
Disable  
------- --------  
eth1/1 SOURCE  
eth1/2 RECEIVER  
eth1/5 RECEIVER  
eth1/6 RECEIVER  
eth1/7 RECEIVER  
Console#  
ACTIVE/UP  
INACTIVE/DOWN  
INACTIVE/DOWN  
INACTIVE/DOWN  
Disable  
Disable  
Table 4-75 show mvr interface - display description  
Description  
Field  
Port  
Shows interfaces attached to the MVR.  
Shows the MVR port type.  
Type  
Status  
Shows the MVR status and interface status. MVR status for source ports is  
“ACTIVE” if MVR is globally enabled on the switch. MVR status for receiver  
ports is “ACTIVE” only if there are subscribers receiving multicast traffic from  
one of the MVR groups, or a multicast group has been statically assigned to  
an interface.  
Immediate Leave  
Shows if immediate leave is enabled or disabled.  
4-231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
The following shows information about the interfaces associated with multicast  
groups assigned to the MVR VLAN:  
Console#show mvr members  
MVR Group IP  
Status  
Members  
---------------- -------- -------  
225.0.0.1  
225.0.0.2  
225.0.0.3  
225.0.0.4  
225.0.0.5  
225.0.0.6  
225.0.0.7  
225.0.0.8  
225.0.0.9  
225.0.0.10  
Console#  
ACTIVE  
eth1/1(d), eth1/2(s)  
INACTIVE None  
INACTIVE None  
INACTIVE None  
INACTIVE None  
INACTIVE None  
INACTIVE None  
INACTIVE None  
INACTIVE None  
INACTIVE None  
Table 4-76 show mvr members - display description  
Field  
Description  
MVR Group IP Multicast groups assigned to the MVR VLAN.  
Status  
Shows whether or not the there are active subscribers for this multicast group. Note that  
this field will also display “INACTIVE” if MVR is globally disabled.  
Members  
Shows the interfaces with subscribers for multicast services provided through the MVR  
VLAN. Also shows if an interface has dynamically joined a multicast group (d), or if a  
multicast group has been statically bound to the interface (s).  
Domain Name Service Commands  
These commands are used to configure Domain Naming System (DNS) services.  
You can manually configure entries in the DNS domain name to IP address mapping  
table, configure default domain names, or specify one or more name servers to use  
for domain name to address translation.  
Note that domain name services will not be enabled until at least one name server is  
specified with the ip name-server command and domain lookup is enabled with the  
Table 4-77 DNS Commands  
Command  
ip host  
Function  
Mode Page  
Creates a static host name-to-address mapping  
Deletes entries from the host name-to-address table  
Defines a default domain name for incomplete host names  
GC  
PE  
GC  
clear host  
ip domain-name  
ip domain-list  
ip name-server  
Defines a list of default domain names for incomplete host names GC  
Specifies the address of one or more name servers to use for host GC  
name-to-address translation  
ip domain-lookup  
show hosts  
Enables DNS-based host name-to-address translation  
Displays the static host name-to-address mapping table  
GC  
PE  
4-232  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Domain Name Service Commands  
4
Table 4-77 DNS Commands (Continued)  
Function  
Displays the configuration for DNS services  
Command  
Mode Page  
show dns  
PE  
PE  
PE  
show dns cache  
clear dns cache  
Displays entries in the DNS cache  
Clears all entries from the DNS cache  
ip host  
This command creates a static entry in the DNS table that maps a host name to an  
IP address. Use the no form to remove an entry.  
Syntax  
[no] ip host name address1 [address2 address8]  
• name - Name of the host. (Range: 1-64 characters)  
address1 - Corresponding IP address.  
address2 address8 - Additional corresponding IP addresses.  
Default Setting  
No static entries  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
Servers or other network devices may support one or more connections via  
multiple IP addresses. If more than one IP address is associated with a host  
name using this command, a DNS client can try each address in succession,  
until it establishes a connection with the target device.  
Example  
This example maps two address to a host name.  
Console(config)#ip host rd5 192.168.1.55 10.1.0.55  
Console(config)#end  
Console#show hosts  
Hostname  
rd5  
Inet address  
10.1.0.55 192.168.1.55  
Alias  
Console#  
clear host  
This command deletes entries from the DNS table.  
Syntax  
clear host {name | *}  
• name - Name of the host. (Range: 1-64 characters)  
4-233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
* - Removes all entries.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
This example clears all static entries from the DNS table.  
Console(config)#clear host *  
Console(config)#  
ip domain-name  
This command defines the default domain name appended to incomplete host  
names (i.e., host names passed from a client that are not formatted with dotted  
notation). Use the no form to remove the current domain name.  
Syntax  
ip domain-name name  
no ip domain-name  
name - Name of the host. Do not include the initial dot that separates the  
host name from the domain name. (Range: 1-64 characters)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Example  
Console(config)#ip domain-name sample.com  
Console(config)#end  
Console#show dns  
Domain Lookup Status:  
DNS disabled  
Default Domain Name:  
.sample.com  
Domain Name List:  
Name Server List:  
Console#  
Related Commands  
4-234  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Domain Name Service Commands  
4
ip domain-list  
This command defines a list of domain names that can be appended to incomplete  
host names (i.e., host names passed from a client that are not formatted with dotted  
notation). Use the no form to remove a name from this list.  
Syntax  
[no] ip domain-list name  
name - Name of the host. Do not include the initial dot that separates the  
host name from the domain name. (Range: 1-64 characters)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• Domain names are added to the end of the list one at a time.  
• When an incomplete host name is received by the DNS service on this switch,  
it will work through the domain list, appending each domain name in the list to  
the host name, and checking with the specified name servers for a match.  
• If there is no domain list, the domain name specified with the ip domain-name  
command is used. If there is a domain list, the default domain name is not used.  
Example  
This example adds two domain names to the current list and then displays the list.  
Console(config)#ip domain-list sample.com.jp  
Console(config)#ip domain-list sample.com.uk  
Console(config)#end  
Console#show dns  
Domain Lookup Status:  
DNS disabled  
Default Domain Name:  
.sample.com  
Domain Name List:  
.sample.com.jp  
.sample.com.uk  
Name Server List:  
Console#  
Related Commands  
4-235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
ip name-server  
This command specifies the address of one or more domain name servers to use for  
name-to-address resolution. Use the no form to remove a name server from this list.  
Syntax  
[no] ip name-server server-address1 [server-address2 server-address6]  
server-address1 - IP address of domain-name server.  
server-address2 server-address6 - IP address of additional  
domain-name servers.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
The listed name servers are queried in the specified sequence until a  
response is received, or the end of the list is reached with no response.  
Example  
This example adds two domain-name servers to the list and then displays the list.  
Console(config)#ip domain-server 192.168.1.55 10.1.0.55  
Console(config)#end  
Console#show dns  
Domain Lookup Status:  
DNS disabled  
Default Domain Name:  
.sample.com  
Domain Name List:  
.sample.com.jp  
.sample.com.uk  
Name Server List:  
192.168.1.55  
10.1.0.55  
Console#  
Related Commands  
ip domain-lookup  
This command enables DNS host name-to-address translation. Use the no form to  
disable DNS.  
Syntax  
[no] ip domain-lookup  
4-236  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Domain Name Service Commands  
4
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• At least one name server must be specified before you can enable DNS.  
• If all name servers are deleted, DNS will automatically be disabled.  
Example  
This example enables DNS and then displays the configuration.  
Console(config)#ip domain-lookup  
Console(config)#end  
Console#show dns  
Domain Lookup Status:  
DNS enabled  
Default Domain Name:  
.sample.com  
Domain Name List:  
.sample.com.jp  
.sample.com.uk  
Name Server List:  
192.168.1.55  
10.1.0.55  
Related Commands  
show hosts  
This command displays the static host name-to-address mapping table.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Note that a host name will be displayed as an alias if it is mapped to the same  
address(es) as a previously configured entry.  
Console#show hosts  
Hostname  
rd5  
Inet address  
10.1.0.55 192.168.1.55  
Alias  
1.rd6  
Console#  
4-237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command Line Interface  
4
show dns  
This command displays the configuration of the DNS service.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show dns  
Domain Lookup Status:  
DNS enabled  
Default Domain Name:  
sample.com  
Domain Name List:  
sample.com.jp  
sample.com.uk  
Name Server List:  
192.168.1.55  
10.1.0.55  
Console#  
show dns cache  
This command displays entries in the DNS cache.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show dns cache  
NO  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
FLAG  
TYPE  
IP  
TTL  
298  
298  
298  
298  
298  
298  
298  
DOMAIN  
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
CNAME  
CNAME  
CNAME  
CNAME  
CNAME  
CNAME  
ALIAS  
66.218.71.84  
66.218.71.83  
66.218.71.81  
66.218.71.80  
66.218.71.89  
66.218.71.86  
POINTER TO:7  
www.yahoo.akadns.net  
www.yahoo.akadns.net  
www.yahoo.akadns.net  
www.yahoo.akadns.net  
www.yahoo.akadns.net  
www.yahoo.akadns.net  
www.yahoo.com  
Console#  
Table 4-78 show dns cache - display description  
Description  
Field  
NO  
The entry number for each resource record.  
The flag is always “4” indicating a cache entry and therefore unreliable.  
FLAG  
TYPE  
This field includes CNAME which specifies the canonical or primary name for the  
owner, and ALIAS which specifies multiple domain names which are mapped to  
the same IP address as an existing entry.  
IP  
The IP address associated with this record.  
The time to live reported by the name server.  
The domain name associated with this record.  
TTL  
DOMAIN  
4-238  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Domain Name Service Commands  
4
clear dns cache  
This command clears all entries in the DNS cache.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#clear dns cache  
Console#show dns cache  
NO  
FLAG  
TYPE  
IP  
TTL  
DOMAIN  
Console#  
4-239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command Line Interface  
4
DHCP Commands  
These commands are used to configure Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol  
(DHCP) relay and Option 82 functions. The switch can be configured to relay DHCP  
client configuration requests to a DHCP server on another network and include  
information about the switch and its DHCP clients.  
Table 4-79 DHCP Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode Page  
ip dhcp relay information Enables or disables DHCP Option 82 information relay  
option  
GC  
ip dhcp relay information Sets the information option policy for DHCP client packets that GC  
policy  
include Option 82 information  
ip dhcp relay server  
Specifies the IP addresses of DHCP servers to be used by the GC  
switch’s DHCP relay agent  
show ip dhcp-relay  
Displays the current DHCP relay configuration  
PE  
ip dhcp relay information option  
This command enables the DHCP Option 82 information relay for the switch. Use  
the no form to disable this function.  
Syntax  
[no] ip dhcp relay information option  
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• DHCP provides a relay mechanism for sending information about the switch  
and its DHCP clients to the DHCP server. Known as DHCP Option 82, it  
allows compatible DHCP servers to use the information when assigning IP  
addresses, or to set other services or policies for clients.  
• When the DHCP relay Option 82 is enabled, clients can be identified by the  
VLAN and switch port to which they are connected rather than just their MAC  
address. DHCP client-server exchange messages are then forwarded directly  
between the server and client without having to flood them to the entire VLAN.  
Example  
This example enables the DHCP relay Option 82.  
Console(config)#ip dhcp relay information option  
Console(config)#  
4-240  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
DHCP Commands  
4
ip dhcp relay information policy  
This command sets the DHCP snooping information option policy for DHCP client  
packets that include Option 82 information.  
Syntax  
ip dhcp relay information policy <drop | keep | replace>  
drop - Discards the client’s DHCP information and then floods the packet  
to the VLAN.  
keep - Retains the client’s DHCP information  
replace - Overwrites the DHCP client packet information with the switch’s  
relay information.  
Default Setting  
Replace  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
When the switch receives DHCP packets from clients that already include  
DHCP Option 82 information, the switch can be configured to set the action  
policy for these packets. Either the switch can discard the Option 82  
information, keep the existing information, or replace it with the switch’s relay  
information.  
Example  
Console(config)#ip dhcp relay information policy drop  
Console(config)#  
ip dhcp relay server  
This command specifies the addresses of DHCP servers to be used by the switch’s  
DHCP relay agent. Use the no form to clear all addresses.  
Syntax  
ip dhcp relay server address1 [address2 [address3 ...]]  
no ip dhcp relay server  
address - IP address of a DHCP server. (Range: 1-5 addresses)  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (VLAN)  
4-241  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Command Line Interface  
4
Usage Guidelines  
You must specify the IP address for at least one DHCP server. Otherwise, the  
switch’s DHCP relay agent will not operate and all DHCP request and reply  
packets will be flooded to the entire VLAN.  
Example  
Console(config)#ip dhcp relay server 192.168.1.9 192.168.1.54  
Console(config)#  
show ip dhcp-relay  
This command shows the current DHCP relay agent configuration.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show ip dhcp-relay  
Status of DHCP relay option82:  
Insertion of option82 is Enabled.  
DHCP option policy :replace.  
DHCP relay-server address 192.168.1.9 192.168.1.54 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0  
0.0.0.0  
Console#  
4-242  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
IP Interface Commands  
4
IP Interface Commands  
An IP addresses may be used for management access to the switch over your  
network. The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default. You can  
manually configure a specific IP address, or direct the device to obtain an address  
from a BOOTP or DHCP server when it is powered on. You may also need to a  
establish a default gateway between this device and management stations or other  
devices that exist on another network segment.  
Table 4-80 IP Interface Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode Page  
ip address  
Sets the IP address for the current interface  
IC  
ip default-gateway  
Defines the default gateway through which this switch can reach GC  
other subnetworks  
ip dhcp restart  
Submits a BOOTP or DHCP client request  
PE  
ip dhcp relay information Enables or disables DHCP Option 82 information relay  
option  
GC  
ip dhcp relay information Sets the information option policy for DHCP client packets that GC  
policy  
include Option 82 information  
ip dhcp relay server  
Specifies the IP addresses of DHCP servers to be used by the  
switch’s DHCP relay agent  
show ip interface  
show ip redirects  
ping  
Displays the IP settings for this device  
PE  
PE  
Displays the default gateway configured for this device  
Sends ICMP echo request packets to another node on the  
network  
NE,  
PE  
ip address  
This command sets the IP address for the currently selected VLAN interface. Use  
the no form to restore the default IP address.  
Syntax  
ip address {ip-address netmask | bootp | dhcp}  
no ip address  
ip-address - IP address  
netmask - Network mask for the associated IP subnet. This mask identifies  
the host address bits used for routing to specific subnets.  
bootp - Obtains IP address from BOOTP.  
dhcp - Obtains IP address from DHCP.  
Default Setting  
DHCP  
Command Mode  
Interface Configuration (VLAN)  
4-243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Command Line Interface  
4
Command Usage  
• You must assign an IP address to this device to gain management access  
over the network. You can manually configure a specific IP address, or direct  
the device to obtain an address from a BOOTP or DHCP server. Valid IP  
addresses consist of four numbers, 0 to 255, separated by periods. Anything  
outside this format will not be accepted by the configuration program.  
• If you select the bootp or dhcp option, IP is enabled but will not function until  
a BOOTP or DHCP reply has been received. Requests will be broadcast  
periodically by this device in an effort to learn its IP address. (BOOTP and  
DHCP values can include the IP address, default gateway, and subnet mask).  
• You can start broadcasting BOOTP or DHCP requests by entering an ip dhcp  
restart command, or by rebooting the switch.  
Note: Only one VLAN interface can be assigned an IP address (the default is  
VLAN 1). This defines the management VLAN, the only VLAN through  
which you can gain management access to the switch. If you assign an IP  
address to any other VLAN, the new IP address overrides the original IP  
address and this becomes the new management VLAN.  
Example  
In the following example, the device is assigned an address in VLAN 1.  
Console(config)#interface vlan 1  
Console(config-if)#ip address 192.168.1.5 255.255.255.0  
Console(config-if)#  
Related Commands  
ip default-gateway  
This command establishes a static route between this switch and devices that exist  
on another network segment. Use the no form to remove the static route.  
Syntax  
ip default-gateway gateway  
no ip default-gateway  
gateway - IP address of the default gateway  
Default Setting  
No static route is established.  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
A gateway must be defined if the management station is located in a different  
IP segment.  
4-244  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
IP Interface Commands  
4
Example  
The following example defines a default gateway for this device:  
Console(config)#ip default-gateway 10.1.1.254  
Console(config)#  
Related Commands  
ip dhcp restart  
This command submits a BOOTP or DHCP client request.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
• This command issues a BOOTP or DHCP client request for any IP interface  
that has been set to BOOTP or DHCP mode via the ip address command.  
• DHCP requires the server to reassign the client’s last address if available.  
• If the BOOTP or DHCP server has been moved to a different domain, the  
network portion of the address provided to the client will be based on this new  
domain.  
Example  
In the following example, the device is reassigned the same address.  
Console(config)#interface vlan 1  
Console(config-if)#ip address dhcp  
Console(config-if)#end  
Console#ip dhcp restart  
Console#show ip interface  
IP address and netmask: 192.168.1.54 255.255.255.0 on VLAN 1,  
and address mode: DHCP.  
Console#  
Related Commands  
show ip interface  
This command displays the settings of an IP interface.  
Default Setting  
All interfaces  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
4-245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Command Line Interface  
4
Example  
Console#show ip interface  
IP address and netmask: 192.168.1.54 255.255.255.0 on VLAN 1,  
and address mode:  
Console#  
User specified.  
Related Commands  
show ip redirects  
This command shows the default gateway configured for this device.  
Default Setting  
None  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show ip redirects  
IP default gateway 10.1.0.254  
Console#  
Related Commands  
ping  
This command sends ICMP echo request packets to another node on the network.  
Syntax  
ping host [size size] [count count]  
host - IP address or IP alias of the host.  
size - Number of bytes in a packet. (Range: 32-512, default: 32)  
The actual packet size will be eight bytes larger than the size specified  
because the switch adds header information.  
count - Number of packets to send. (Range: 1-16, default: 5)  
Default Setting  
This command has no default for the host.  
Command Mode  
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
• Use the ping command to see if another site on the network can be reached.  
• Following are some results of the ping command:  
4-246  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IP Interface Commands  
4
- Normal response - The normal response occurs in one to ten seconds,  
depending on network traffic.  
- Destination does not respond - If the host does not respond, a “timeout”  
appears in ten seconds.  
- Destination unreachable - The gateway for this destination indicates that  
the destination is unreachable.  
- Network or host unreachable - The gateway found no corresponding entry  
in the route table.  
• Press <Esc> to stop pinging.  
Example  
Console#ping 10.1.0.9  
Type ESC to abort.  
PING to 10.1.0.9, by 5 32-byte payload ICMP packets, timeout is 5 seconds  
response time: 10 ms  
response time: 10 ms  
response time: 10 ms  
response time: 10 ms  
response time: 10 ms  
Ping statistics for 10.1.0.9:  
5 packets transmitted, 5 packets received (100%), 0 packets lost (0%)  
Approximate round trip times:  
Minimum = 10 ms, Maximum = 20 ms, Average = 10 ms  
Console#  
Related Commands  
4-247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Line Interface  
4
Switch Cluster Commands  
Switch Clustering is a method of grouping switches together to enable centralized  
management through a single unit. A switch cluster has a “Commander” unit that is  
used to manage all other “Member” switches in the cluster. The management station  
uses Telnet to communicate directly with the Commander throught its IP address,  
and the Commander manages Member switches using cluster “internal” IP  
addresses. There can be up to 36 Member switches in one cluster. Cluster switches  
are limited to within a single IP subnet.  
Table 4-81 Switch Cluster Commands  
Command  
Function  
Mode Page  
cluster  
Configures clustering on the switch  
Configures the switch as a cluster Commander  
Sets the cluster IP address pool for Members  
Sets Candidate switches as cluster members  
Provides configuration access to Member switches  
Displays the switch clustering status  
GC  
GC  
GC  
GC  
GC  
PE  
PE  
PE  
cluster commander  
cluster ip-pool  
cluster member  
rcommand  
show cluster  
show cluster members Displays current cluster Members  
show cluster candidates Displays current cluster Candidates in the network  
cluster  
This command enables clustering on the switch. Use the no form to disable  
clustering.  
Syntax  
[no] cluster  
Default Setting  
Enabled  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• To create a switch cluster, first be sure that clustering is enabled on the switch  
(the default is enabled), then set the switch as a Cluster Commander. Set a  
Cluster IP Pool that does not conflict with any other IP subnets in the network.  
Cluster IP addresses are assigned to switches when they become Members  
and are used for communication between Member switches and the  
Commander.  
• Switch clusters are limited to a single IP subnet (Layer 2 domain).  
A switch can only be a Member of one cluster.  
Configured switch clusters are maintained across power resets and network  
changes.  
4-248  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Switch Cluster Commands  
4
Example  
Console(config)#cluster  
Console(config)#  
cluster commander  
This command enables the switch as a cluster Commander. Use the no form to  
disable the switch as cluster Commander.  
Syntax  
[no] cluster commander  
Default Setting  
Disabled  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• Once a switch has been configured to be a cluster Commander, it  
automatically discovers other cluster-enabled switches in the network. These  
“Candidate” switches only become cluster Members when manually selected  
by the administrator through the management station.  
Cluster Member switches can be managed through only using a Telnet connection  
to the Commander. From the Commander CLI prompt, use the rcommand id  
command (see page 4-250) to connect to the Member switch.  
Example  
Console(config)#cluster commander  
Console(config)#  
cluster ip-pool  
This command sets the cluster IP address pool. Use the no form to reset to the  
default address.  
Syntax  
cluster ip-pool <ip-address>  
no cluster ip-pool  
ip-address - The base IP address for IP addresses assigned to cluster  
Members. The IP address must start 10.x.x.x.  
Default Setting  
10.254.254.1  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
4-249  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Command Line Interface  
4
Command Usage  
• An “internal” IP address pool is used to assign IP addresses to Member  
switches in the cluster. Internal cluster IP addresses are in the form  
10.x.x.member-ID. Only the base IP address of the pool needs to be set since  
Member IDs can only be between 1 and 36.  
Set a Cluster IP Pool that does not conflict with addresses in the network IP  
subnet. Cluster IP addresses are assigned to switches when they become  
Members and are used for communication between Member switches and the  
Commander.  
You cannot change the cluster IP pool when the switch is currently in Commander  
mode. Commander mode must first be disabled.  
Example  
Console(config)#cluster ip-pool 10.2.3.4  
Console(config)#  
cluster member  
This command configures a Candidate switch as a cluster Member. Use the no form  
to remove a Member switch from the cluster.  
Syntax  
cluster member mac-address <mac-address> id <member-id>  
no cluster member id <member-id>  
mac-address - The MAC address of the Candidate switch.  
member-id - The ID number to assign to the Member switch.  
(Range: 1-36)  
Default Setting  
No Members  
Command Mode  
Global Configuration  
Command Usage  
• The maximum number of cluster Members is 36.  
The maximum number of switch Candidates is 100.  
Example  
Console(config)#cluster member mac-address 00-12-34-56-78-9a id 5  
Console(config)#  
rcommand  
This command provides access to a cluster Member CLI for configuration.  
Syntax  
rcommand id <member-id>  
member-id - The ID number of the Member switch. (Range: 1-36)  
4-250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Switch Cluster Commands  
4
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Command Usage  
• This command only operates through a Telnet connection to the Commander  
switch. Managing cluster Members using the local console CLI on the  
Commander is not supported.  
There is no need to enter the username and password for access to the  
Member switch CLI.  
Example  
Vty-0#rcommand id 1  
CLI session with the 24/48 L2/L4 GE Switch is opened.  
To end the CLI session, enter [Exit].  
Vty-0#  
show cluster  
This command shows the switch clustering configuration.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show cluster  
Role:  
Interval heartbeat:  
commander  
30  
Heartbeat loss count: 3  
Number of Members:  
1
Number of Candidates: 2  
Console#  
show cluster members  
This command shows the current switch cluster members.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show cluster members  
Cluster Members:  
ID:  
1
Role:  
Active member  
IP Address: 10.254.254.2  
MAC Address: 00-12-cf-23-49-c0  
Description: 24/48 L2/L4 IPV4/IPV6 GE Switch  
Console#  
4-251  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command Line Interface  
4
show cluster candidates  
This command shows the discovered Candidate switches in the network.  
Command Mode  
Privileged Exec  
Example  
Console#show cluster candidates  
Cluster Candidates:  
Role  
Mac  
Description  
--------------- ----------------- -----------------------------------------  
ACTIVE MEMBER  
CANDIDATE  
00-12-cf-23-49-c0 24/48 L2/L4 IPV4/IPV6 GE Switch  
00-12-cf-0b-47-a0 24/48 L2/L4 IPV4/IPV6 GE Switch  
Console#  
4-252  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix A: Software Specifications  
Software Features  
Authentication  
Local, RADIUS, TACACS, Port (802.1X), HTTPS, SSH, Port Security  
Access Control Lists  
IP, MAC (up to 88 lists)  
DHCP Client  
Port Configuration  
100BASE-TX: 10/100 Mbps, half/full duplex  
1000BASE-T: 10/100 Mbps at half/full duplex, 1000 Mbps at full duplex  
Flow Control  
Full Duplex: IEEE 802.3-2002  
Half Duplex: Back pressure  
Broadcast Storm Control  
Traffic throttled above a critical threshold  
Port Mirroring  
One source port, one destination port  
Rate Limits  
Input Limit  
Output limit  
Range (configured per port)  
Port Trunking  
Static trunks (Cisco EtherChannel compliant)  
Dynamic trunks (Link Aggregation Control Protocol)  
Spanning Tree Algorithm  
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP, IEEE 802.1D)  
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP, IEEE 802.1w)  
VLAN Support  
Up to 255 groups; port-based or tagged (802.1Q),  
GVRP for automatic VLAN learning, private VLANs  
Class of Service  
Supports four levels of priority and Weighted Round Robin Queueing  
(which can be configured by VLAN tag or port),  
Layer 3/4 priority mapping: IP Port, IP Precedence, IP DSCP  
Multicast Filtering  
IGMP Snooping (Layer 2)  
A-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Software Specifications  
A
Additional Features  
BOOTP client  
SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol)  
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol)  
RMON (Remote Monitoring, groups 1,2,3,9)  
SMTP Email Alerts  
Management Features  
In-Band Management  
Telnet, Web-based HTTP or HTTPS, SNMP manager, or Secure Shell  
Out-of-Band Management  
RS-232 DB-9 console port  
Software Loading  
TFTP in-band or XModem out-of-band  
SNMP  
Management access via MIB database  
Trap management to specified hosts  
RMON  
Groups 1, 2, 3, 9 (Statistics, History, Alarm, Event)  
Standards  
IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Protocol and traffic priorities  
IEEE 802.1p Priority tags  
IEEE 802.1Q VLAN  
IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol  
IEEE 802.1X Port Authentication  
IEEE 802.3-2002  
Ethernet, Fast Ethernet, Gigabit Ethernet  
Full-duplex flow control  
Link Aggregation Control Protocol  
IEEE 802.3ac VLAN tagging  
DHCP Client (RFC 1541)  
HTTPS  
IGMP (RFC 1112)  
IGMPv2 (RFC 2236)  
RADIUS+ (RFC 2618)  
RMON (RFC 1757 groups 1,2,3,9)  
SNMP (RFC 1157)  
SNMPv2 (RFC 2571)  
SNTP (RFC 2030)  
SSH (Version 2.0)  
TFTP (RFC 1350)  
A-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Management Information Bases  
A
Management Information Bases  
Bridge MIB (RFC 1493)  
Entity MIB (RFC 2737)  
Ether-like MIB (RFC 2665)  
Extended Bridge MIB (RFC 2674)  
Extensible SNMP Agents MIB (RFC 2742)  
Forwarding Table MIB (RFC 2096)  
IGMP MIB (RFC 2933)  
Interface Group MIB (RFC 2233)  
Interfaces Evolution MIB (RFC 2863)  
IP Multicasting related MIBs  
MAU MIB (RFC 2668)  
MIB II (RFC 1213)  
Port Access Entity MIB (IEEE 802.1X)  
Port Access Entity Equipment MIB  
Private MIB  
RADIUS Authentication Client MIB (RFC 2621)  
RMON MIB (RFC 2819)  
RMON II Probe Configuration Group (RFC 2021, partial implementation)  
SNMP Community MIB (RFC 2576)  
SNMPv2 IP MIB (RFC 2011)  
TACACS+ Authentication Client MIB  
TCP MIB (RFC 2013)  
Trap (RFC 1215)  
UDP MIB (RFC 2012)  
A-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Software Specifications  
A
A-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B: Troubleshooting  
Problems Accessing the Management Interface  
Table B-1 Troubleshooting Chart  
Symptom  
Action  
CannotconnectusingTelnet,  
web browser, or SNMP  
software  
Be sure the switch is powered up.  
Check network cabling between the management station and the switch.  
Check that you have a valid network connection to the switch and that the  
port you are using has not been disabled.  
Be sure you have configured the VLAN interface through which the  
management station is connected with a valid IP address, subnet mask  
and default gateway.  
Be sure the management station has an IP address in the same subnet as  
the switch’s IP interface to which it is connected.  
If you are trying to connect to the switch via the IP address for a tagged  
VLAN group, your management station, and the ports connecting  
intermediate switches in the network, must be configured with the  
appropriate tag.  
If you cannot connect using Telnet, you may have exceeded the maximum  
number of concurrent Telnet/SSH sessions permitted. Try connecting  
again at a later time.  
Cannot connect using  
Secure Shell  
If you cannot connect using SSH, you may have exceeded the maximum  
number of concurrent Telnet/SSH sessions permitted. Try connecting  
again at a later time.  
Be sure the control parameters for the SSH server are properly configured  
on the switch, and that the SSH client software is properly configured on  
the management station.  
Be sure you have generated a public key on the switch, and exported this  
key to the SSH client.  
Be sure you have set up an account on the switch for each SSH user,  
including user name, authentication level, and password.  
Be sure you have imported the client’s public key to the switch (if public  
key authentication is used).  
Cannot access the on-board  
configuration program via a  
serial port connection  
Be sure you have set the terminal emulator program to VT100 compatible,  
8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity, and 9600 bps.  
Check that the null-modem serial cable conforms to the pin-out  
connections provided in the Installation Guide.  
Forgot or lost the password  
Contact your local distributor.  
B-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Troubleshooting  
B
Using System Logs  
If a fault does occur, refer to the Installation Guide to ensure that the problem you  
encountered is actually caused by the switch. If the problem appears to be caused  
by the switch, follow these steps:  
1. Enable logging.  
2. Set the error messages reported to include all categories.  
3. Designate the SNMP host that is to receive the error messages.  
4. Repeat the sequence of commands or other actions that lead up to the error.  
5. Make a list of the commands or circumstances that led to the fault. Also make a  
list of any error messages displayed.  
6. Contact your distributor’s service engineer.  
For example:  
Console(config)#logging on  
Console(config)#logging history flash 7  
Console(config)#snmp-server host 192.168.1.23  
.
.
.
B-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Glossary  
Access Control List (ACL)  
ACLs can limit network traffic and restrict access to certain users or devices by  
checking each packet for certain IP or MAC (i.e., Layer 2) information.  
Boot Protocol (BOOTP)  
BOOTP is used to provide bootup information for network devices, including IP  
address information, the address of the TFTP server that contains the devices  
system files, and the name of the boot file.  
Class of Service (CoS)  
CoS is supported by prioritizing packets based on the required level of service, and  
then placing them in the appropriate output queue. Data is transmitted from the  
queues using weighted round-robin service to enforce priority service and prevent  
blockage of lower-level queues. Priority may be set according to the port default, the  
packet’s priority bit (in the VLAN tag), TCP/UDP port number, IP Precedence bit, or  
DSCP priority bit.  
Differentiated Services Code Point Service (DSCP)  
DSCP uses a six-bit tag to provide for up to 64 different forwarding behaviors. Based  
on network policies, different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of  
forwarding. The DSCP bits are mapped to the Class of Service categories, and then  
into the output queues.  
Domain Name Service (DNS)  
A system used for translating host names for network nodes into IP addresses.  
Dynamic Host Control Protocol (DHCP)  
Provides a framework for passing configuration information to hosts on a TCP/IP  
network. DHCP is based on the Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP), adding the capability  
of automatic allocation of reusable network addresses and additional configuration  
options.  
Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN (EAPOL)  
EAPOL is a client authentication protocol used by this switch to verify the network  
access rights for any device that is plugged into the switch. A user name and  
password is requested by the switch, and then passed to an authentication server  
(e.g., RADIUS) for verification. EAPOL is implemented as part of the IEEE 802.1X  
Port Authentication standard.  
Glossary-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Glossary  
GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP)  
Defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to register  
necessary VLAN members on ports along the Spanning Tree so that VLANs defined  
in each switch can work automatically over a Spanning Tree network.  
Generic Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP)  
GARP is a protocol that can be used by endstations and switches to register and  
propagate multicast group membership information in a switched environment so  
that multicast data frames are propagated only to those parts of a switched LAN  
containing registered endstations. Formerly called Group Address Registration  
Protocol.  
Generic Multicast Registration Protocol (GMRP)  
GMRP allows network devices to register end stations with multicast groups. GMRP  
requires that any participating network devices or end stations comply with the IEEE  
802.1p standard.  
Group Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP)  
See Generic Attribute Registration Protocol.  
IEEE 802.1D  
Specifies a general method for the operation of MAC bridges, including the  
Spanning Tree Protocol.  
IEEE 802.1Q  
VLAN Tagging—Defines Ethernet frame tags which carry VLAN information. It  
allows switches to assign endstations to different virtual LANs, and defines a  
standard way for VLANs to communicate across switched networks.  
IEEE 802.1p  
An IEEE standard for providing quality of service (QoS) in Ethernet networks. The  
standard uses packet tags that define up to eight traffic classes and allows switches  
to transmit packets based on the tagged priority value.  
IEEE 802.1X  
Port Authentication controls access to the switch ports by requiring users to first  
enter a user ID and password for authentication.  
IEEE 802.3ac  
Defines frame extensions for VLAN tagging.  
IEEE 802.3x  
Defines Ethernet frame start/stop requests and timers used for flow control on  
full-duplex links.  
Glossary-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
IGMP Snooping  
Listening to IGMP Query and IGMP Report packets transferred between IP Multicast  
Routers and IP Multicast host groups to identify IP Multicast group members.  
IGMP Query  
On each subnetwork, one IGMP-capable device will act as the querier — that is, the  
device that asks all hosts to report on the IP multicast groups they wish to join or to  
which they already belong. The elected querier will be the device with the lowest IP  
address in the subnetwork.  
Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP)  
A protocol through which hosts can register with their local router for multicast  
services. If there is more than one multicast switch/router on a given subnetwork,  
one of the devices is made the “querier” and assumes responsibility for keeping  
track of group membership.  
In-Band Management  
Management of the network from a station attached directly to the network.  
IP Multicast Filtering  
A process whereby this switch can pass multicast traffic along to participating hosts.  
IP Precedence  
The Type of Service (ToS) octet in the IPv4 header includes three precedence bits  
defining eight different priority levels ranging from highest priority for network control  
packets to lowest priority for routine traffic. The eight values are mapped one-to-one  
to the Class of Service categories by default, but may be configured differently to  
suit the requirements for specific network applications.  
Layer 2  
Data Link layer in the ISO 7-Layer Data Communications Protocol. This is related  
directly to the hardware interface for network devices and passes on traffic based on  
MAC addresses.  
Link Aggregation  
See Port Trunk.  
Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)  
Allows ports to automatically negotiate a trunked link with LACP-configured ports on  
another device.  
Management Information Base (MIB)  
An acronym for Management Information Base. It is a set of database objects that  
contains information about a specific device.  
Glossary-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm  
An algorithm that is used to create digital signatures. It is intended for use with 32 bit  
machines and is safer than the MD4 algorithm, which has been broken. MD5 is a  
one-way hash function, meaning that it takes a message and converts it into a fixed  
string of digits, also called a message digest.  
Multicast Switching  
A process whereby the switch filters incoming multicast frames for services for  
which no attached host has registered, or forwards them to all ports contained within  
the designated multicast VLAN group.  
Network Time Protocol (NTP)  
NTP provides the mechanisms to synchronize time across the network. The time  
servers operate in a hierarchical-master-slave configuration in order to synchronize  
local clocks within the subnet and to national time standards via wire or radio.  
Out-of-Band Management  
Management of the network from a station not attached to the network.  
Port Authentication  
See IEEE 802.1X.  
Port Mirroring  
A method whereby data on a target port is mirrored to a monitor port for  
troubleshooting with a logic analyzer or RMON probe. This allows data on the target  
port to be studied unobstructively.  
Port Trunk  
Defines a network link aggregation and trunking method which specifies how to  
create a single high-speed logical link that combines several lower-speed physical  
links.  
Private VLANs  
Private VLANs provide port-based security and isolation between ports within the  
assigned VLAN. Data traffic on downlink ports can only be forwarded to, and from,  
uplink ports.  
Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service (RADIUS)  
RADIUS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central  
server to control access to RADIUS-compliant devices on the network.  
Glossary-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
Remote Monitoring (RMON)  
RMON provides comprehensive network monitoring capabilities. It eliminates the  
polling required in standard SNMP, and can set alarms on a variety of traffic  
conditions, including specific error types.  
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)  
RSTP reduces the convergence time for network topology changes to about 10% of  
that required by the older IEEE 802.1D STP standard.  
Secure Shell (SSH)  
A secure replacement for remote access functions, including Telnet. SSH can  
authenticate users with a cryptographic key, and encrypt data connections between  
management clients and the switch.  
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)  
The application protocol in the Internet suite of protocols which offers network  
management services.  
Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP)  
SNTP allows a device to set its internal clock based on periodic updates from a  
Network Time Protocol (NTP) server. Updates can be requested from a specific NTP  
server, or can be received via broadcasts sent by NTP servers.  
Spanning Tree Algorithm (STA)  
A technology that checks your network for any loops. A loop can often occur in  
complicated or backup linked network systems. Spanning Tree detects and directs  
data along the shortest available path, maximizing the performance and efficiency of  
the network.  
Telnet  
Defines a remote communication facility for interfacing to a terminal device over  
TCP/IP.  
Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus (TACACS+)  
TACACS+ is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central  
server to control access to TACACS-compliant devices on the network.  
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)  
Protocol suite that includes TCP as the primary transport protocol, and IP as the  
network layer protocol.  
Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP)  
A TCP/IP protocol commonly used for software downloads.  
Glossary-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
User Datagram Protocol (UDP)  
UDP provides a datagram mode for packet-switched communications. It uses IP as  
the underlying transport mechanism to provide access to IP-like services. UDP  
packets are delivered just like IP packets – connection-less datagrams that may be  
discarded before reaching their targets. UDP is useful when TCP would be too  
complex, too slow, or just unnecessary.  
Virtual LAN (VLAN)  
A Virtual LAN is a collection of network nodes that share the same collision domain  
regardless of their physical location or connection point in the network. A VLAN  
serves as a logical workgroup with no physical barriers, and allows users to share  
information and resources as though located on the same LAN.  
XModem  
A protocol used to transfer files between devices. Data is grouped in 128-byte  
blocks and error-corrected.  
Glossary-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Numerics  
802.1X, port authentication 3-68  
D
default gateway, configuration 3-14,  
default priority, ingress port 3-158,  
default settings, system 1-5  
A
acceptable frame type 3-150, 4-182  
ACL  
client 3-14, 4-233  
Standard IP 3-83, 4-102, 4-103,  
dynamic configuration 2-5  
DHCP Relay Option 82 3-17  
DHCP snooping  
global configuration 4-249, 4-250  
verifying MAC addresses 4-241,  
address table 3-114, 4-156  
aging time 3-117, 4-159  
DSCP  
DNS  
B
default domain name 3-189, 4-234  
displaying the cache 3-193  
domain name list 3-189, 4-233  
enabling lookup 3-189, 4-237  
name server list 3-189, 4-236  
static entries 3-192  
downloading software 3-20, 4-70  
DSCP  
mapping priorities 3-166, 3-169,  
dynamic addresses, displaying 3-115,  
BOOTP 3-16, 4-244  
broadcast storm, threshold 3-105,  
C
CLI, showing commands 4-4  
community ports 3-152, 4-188  
community string 2-6, 3-40, 4-118  
community VLANs 3-154, 4-189  
configuration settings, saving or  
restoring 2-8, 3-22, 4-70  
See DHCP  
console port, required connections 2-2  
CoS  
configuring 3-158, 4-198  
IP precedence 3-165, 4-204, 4-205  
layer 3/4 priorities 3-164, 4-204  
queue mapping 3-160, 4-201  
queue mode 3-162, 4-199  
traffic class weights 3-163, 4-200  
E
edge port, STA 3-129, 3-131, 4-172  
event logging 4-44  
F
firmware  
displaying version 3-11, 4-68  
upgrading 3-20, 4-70  
Index-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Index  
link type, STA 3-129, 3-131, 4-173  
logging  
syslog traps 4-47  
to syslog servers 4-46  
log-in, Web interface 3-2  
logon authentication 3-54, 4-76  
RADIUS client 4-78  
G
GVRP  
gateway, default 3-14, 4-245  
GVRP  
global setting 4-194  
interface configuration 3-150, 4-195  
GVRP, global setting 3-142  
RADIUS server 4-78  
TACACS+ client 3-56, 4-81  
TACACS+ server 3-56, 4-81  
logon authentication, sequence 3-57,  
H
hardware version, displaying 3-11,  
HTTPS 3-59, 4-32  
HTTPS, secure server 3-59, 4-32  
M
main menu 3-4  
Management Information Bases  
(MIBs) A-3  
I
mirror port, configuring 3-106, 4-142  
IEEE 802.1D 3-117, 4-162  
IEEE 802.1s 4-162  
global settings 3-132, 4-160  
interface settings 3-130, 4-161  
multicast filtering 3-170, 3-183, 3-194,  
multicast groups 3-176, 4-215  
displaying 4-215  
IEEE 802.1w 3-117, 4-162  
IEEE 802.1X 3-68, 4-85  
IGMP  
groups, displaying 3-176, 4-215  
Layer 2 3-171, 4-212  
multicast services  
configuring 3-177, 3-184, 3-185,  
displaying 3-176, 4-215  
multicast, filtering and throttling 4-221  
multicast, static router port 3-175,  
query, Layer 2 3-171, 4-216  
snooping, configuring 3-171, 4-212  
ingress filtering 3-150, 4-183  
IP address  
BOOTP/DHCP 3-16, 4-244, 4-246  
DHCP Option 82 3-17  
IP precedence  
MVR  
setting interface type 4-229  
setting multicast groups 4-228  
specifying a VLAN 4-228  
using immediate leave 4-229  
mapping priorities 3-165, 4-206  
isolated ports 3-152, 4-188  
J
O
jumbo frame 4-69  
Option 82, DHCP 3-17  
L
P
LACP  
password, line 4-13, 4-14  
passwords 2-4  
administrator setting 3-54, 4-27  
local parameters 4-152  
partner parameters 4-152  
protocol message statistics 4-152  
Index-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
path cost 3-120, 3-128  
port authentication 3-68  
port priority  
configuring 3-158, 4-198  
default ingress 3-158, 4-199  
port security, configuring 3-66, 4-84  
port, statistics 3-109, 4-139  
ports  
autonegotiation 3-92, 4-133  
broadcast storm threshold 3-105,  
S
secure shell 3-61, 4-35  
Secure Shell configuration 3-61, 4-38  
serial port  
configuring 4-11  
See SNMP  
SNMP 3-38  
community string 3-40, 4-118  
enabling traps 3-41, 4-122  
filtering IP addresses 3-80  
trap manager 3-41, 4-120  
software  
displaying version 3-11, 4-68  
downloading 3-20, 4-70  
specifications, software A-1  
SSH, configuring 3-61, 4-38  
global settings, configuring 3-123,  
capabilities 3-92, 4-134  
duplex mode 3-91, 4-132  
flow control 3-92, 4-135  
speed 3-91, 4-132  
ports, configuring 3-89, 4-131  
ports, mirroring 3-106, 4-142  
primary VLAN 3-153  
priority, default port ingress 3-158,  
global settings, displaying 3-119,  
private VLANs, configuring 3-152,  
interface settings 3-127, 3-136,  
path cost 3-120, 3-128, 4-170  
path cost method 3-124, 4-165  
port priority 3-129, 4-171  
protocol migration 3-132, 4-176  
transmission limit 3-124, 4-166  
standards, IEEE A-2  
problems, troubleshooting B-1  
promiscuous ports 3-152, 4-188  
protocol migration 3-132, 4-176  
PVLAN  
association 3-154  
community ports 3-152, 4-188  
interface configuration 3-156  
isolated ports 3-152, 4-188  
primary VLAN 3-153  
startup files  
creating 3-23, 4-70  
promiscuous ports 3-152, 4-188  
displaying 3-20, 4-63  
setting 3-20, 4-75  
static addresses, setting 3-114, 4-157  
statistics  
Q
queue weights 3-163, 4-200  
R
RADIUS, logon authentication 4-78  
rate limits, setting 3-107, 4-144  
remote logging 4-47  
restarting the system 3-34, 4-23  
STP Also see STA  
system clock, setting 3-35, 4-54  
System Logs 3-28  
system software, downloading from  
global configuration 3-119, 4-162  
Index-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
T
description 3-139, 3-158  
displaying basic information 3-142,  
displaying port members 3-143,  
egress mode 3-151, 4-182  
interface configuration 3-150,  
TACACS+, logon authentication 3-56,  
time, setting 3-35, 4-54  
traffic class weights 3-163, 4-200  
trap manager 2-7, 3-41, 4-120  
troubleshooting B-1  
trunk  
configuration 3-93, 4-146  
static 3-94, 4-147  
private 3-152, 4-188  
W
U
Web interface  
upgrading software 3-20, 4-70  
user password 3-54, 4-27, 4-28  
access requirements 3-1  
configuration buttons 3-3  
home page 3-2  
menu list 3-4  
panel display 3-3  
V
adding static members 3-147,  
Index-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ES3526XA  
ES3552XA  
E122006-CS-R02D  
149100005500H  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Acer Laptop 1670 Series User Manual
Acer Personal Computer M5802G User Manual
ADT Security Services Home Security System SCW9045 433 User Manual
Agilent Technologies Saw 16193A User Manual
Agri Fab Lawn Aerator 45 0365 User Manual
Alcatel Lucent Network Router 7750 SR OS User Manual
AO Smith Water Heater HWB 399 User Manual
Atlona Stereo Receiver Rev 20 User Manual
ATN Binoculars ATN PS14 User Manual
GR GA 13 986 127GHK 13 986 133G GR GA 13 986 133GHK User Manual